A Me Pree Be an Re ““ὠωσκ σι μα ιπυσχοΣ πολ δ ον phe) Le ari hy ὃ μ᾿ ΠΥ WF i ak Sl γ᾽ Ἢ δ €x A - " Nie ΝΣ = ᾿ “ x a Fi Ν ἷ γι A AY ᾿ an Lin, ᾿ Ϊ a ἘΝ 9 ΟΥ̓ ‘ 4 ΤᾺ i ! Ta aL ; ae Γ ἡ i, 9 Ἅ pitti ; ἢ : + Le i Day J Ι ca ‘ ἊΝ \ νὴ = ~ ΠῚ d ¢ .“ ” q a Ἃ ᾿ Ῥ} ᾿ & ὝἪ om ) a ὶ Φ : d WS a, i | “τ κα HEBRAISMS IN THE GREEK TESTAMENT. Cambridge: PRINTED BY 6. J. CLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. HEBRAISMS IN THE GREEK TESTAMENT. EXHIBITED AND ILLUSTRATED BY NOTES AND EXTRACTS FROM THE SACRED TEXT, WITH SPECIMENS OF (1) THE INFLUENCE OF THE SEPTUAGINT ON ITS CHARACTER AND CONSTRUCTION ; (2) THE DEVIATIONS IN IT FROM PURE GREEK STYLE. ἜΣ WILLIAM HENRY ‘GUILLEMARD, D.D. SOMETIME FELLOW OF PEMBROKE COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, Cambridae : DEIGHTON, BELL AND CO. LONDON: GEORGE BELL AND SONS. 1879 ἫΝ ; el ae ‘ : = τὰ hee ἢ τῶν ἊἊ ΠΝ ee ht ΟΕ ΑΤΡΕ ΕΝ ὦ e's 5 Yai ‘ ) » ι ἂν - - ΄ γεν ἷ ¢ 5 Ἷν ᾿ ‘ 4 » ΓΕ! tre nA A208 ἢ ‘ . . \ 4 μ᾿. ᾧ te ¢s un - Ψ a » [Ὁ . eh) - δ Manian og ee he (ἡ ie “i Ais ‘ac i {3-3 ΜΆ {κά ϑύχονο. [ ΑΣΑ Ἂν. ὡς ᾿ Mas - - - ἂς Ss, ἂν ᾿ ‘ » ες ἢ ν = ‘ ᾿ = ω PREFACE. I HAVE given up my first intention of publishing an Edition of the Greek Testament: and have confined myself to Extracts from the Sacred Books, and Notes bearing on the points to which I desire to direct attention. I avoid thereby the very great and unnecessary expense of printing the whole Text merely as a vehicle for distinctive marks exhibiting the Hebraisms and Non-Classical peculiari- ties of style; and also the difficulty of selecting a Text, under the present uncertainty as to final recension. But I have preserved and re-issue the Gospel of S. Mat- . thew previously published by me, as a sample of my original design. I am thoroughly aware of the incomplete and fragmentary character of my little work. I earnestly disavow any claim to an exhaustive exhibition of all the Hebraisms, or all the de- viations from Classical phraseology contained in the Greek Testa- ment; of which I have gathered together and put forward only a few specimens, in the hope of stimulating others to fuller and more exact research. vi PREFACE. And I repeat what I said in my former Preface (which I subjoin herewith in explanation of my object and aim through- out, and for the perusal of which I venture to ask a few minutes), that I have thought of the perplexed and embarrassed Student, rather than of the accomplished Scholar, in most of what I have written; for which I beg the indulgent forbear- ance of more learned critics. My extracts (except on S. Matthew) are from the Textus Receptus. But I do not anticipate, generally, any discrepancy of such a character, as to prevent my book being used side by side with any of the more recent editions. The theory about Melchisedek (Heb. 7. 1, note) was suggested to me, nearly 40 years ago, by the late lamented Archdeacon Freeman; and formed the subject of one among many very interesting Essays on some obscure passages of Holy Writ, which he had prepared for the Press, but never published in his own name. I was not aware that it had ever been put forth by him, till I discovered it, this day, in an anonymous Article on Jeru- salem in the Christian Remembrancer of Oct. 1849, to which he refers in his Principles of Divine Service, Vol. 2, page 116, and in which his views are most lucidly and fully exhibited. I trust that the kind reception given to my S. Matthew by many eminent Scholars, Classical and Hebrew, and by several of the leading Critical Journals, in England; and in Germany by the learned Professor Schiirer (Theologische Literaturzeitung, Leipzig, 1 September, 1877), may be extended to the rest of the work. W. H. GUILLEMARD. CAMBRIDGE, Sept, 26, 1879, δ ; 4. ΕΝ a 4 5 Γ ᾿ a4 , = & ᾿« ᾽ » “ ‘ τ ΝΨ'. - ‘ THE Cambridge : PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. THE GREEK TESTAMENT, HEBRAISTIC EDITION. EXHIBITING AND ILLUSTRATING (1) THE HEBRAISMS IN THE SACRED TEXT, (2) THE INFLUENCE OF THE SEPTUAGINT ON ITS CHARACTER AND CONSTRUCTION, (3) THE DEVIATIONS IN IT FROM PURE GREEK STYLE; BY MEANS OF (2) NOTES CHIEFLY TREATING THEREON, (ὁ A SYSTEM OF DISTINCTIVE MARKS. BY MILLIAM HENRY GUILLEMARD, D.D. SOMETIME FELLOW OF PEMBROKE COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. CAMBRIDGE: DEIGHTON; BELL AND (Οἱ LONDON: GEORGE BELL AND SONS. 1875. a ws Garay” ἢ aa ow r Α ute & 4 i. κἀν = δον" δὲ a, 85. — νυν τ σι" At aa FS yA ᾿ 7 eee “ὁ a μιν; κύων, 4 + >) Ὰ ὯΝ big ae PREFACE. ‘Two distinct elements were combined in that marvellous dialect, the language of the New Testament ; which was destined to preserve for ever the fullest tidings of the Gospel. On the one side there was Hebrew conception, on the other Greek expression : the thoughts of the East were wedded to the words of the West. This was accomplished by the gradual translation of the Hebrew Scriptures into the Vernacular Greek. The Greek of the LXX, like the English of the A.V. or the German of Luther, naturally determined the Greek of the mass of the Jews,...had a commanding authority over the religious dialect.” B. Fo We “The language of the Septuagint is the mould in which the thoughts and expressions of the Apostles and Evangelists are cast. In it the peculiar idioms of the Hebrew are grafted on the stock of the Greek. Hence it is a treasury of illustration for the Greek Testament.” W.S. From the Articles on *‘ New Testament” and ‘‘ Septuagint” in Smith’s Dictionary of the Bible. IF we regard the Greek Testament from the religious point of view, as the medium of communication between God and the World, in its two marked divisions of Jew and Gentile, (or as S. Paul defines them “Jew and Greek”,) it is impossible to esti- mate fully or adequately its marvellous adaptation to the end for which it was designed in the divine economy ;—as a bond of union and basis of coherence between the two dispensations, past and future, the Mosaic and the Christian;—a golden chain let down from Heaven to link together those who were standing ἐπὶ τῇ συντελείᾳ τῶν αἰώνων, εἰς os τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήν- Tnoe:—a channel for conveying to mankind at large the mys- terious truths of the new Revelation. But under its merely human aspect—on the philological and etymological sides—as a specimen of language, a subject of word-study—it must be con- ceded that it contains incongruities and anomalies which per- plex and sometimes baffle the investigator. It is unlike any other Greek book, with one single exception, and absolutely vi PREFACE, unique in its peculiarities. Nor are these due, przncipally or most frequently, to variations from the old pure Attic style,—to corruptions of later dialects,—or to the natural influence of the Macedonian element, traceable in contemporary writers. They startle all the instincts of the Classical Scholar, and in many instances defy his attempts to classify or accourit for them satis- factorily. It will be granted, I hope, that any attempt—if a genuine and honest one—to grapple with them, is justifiable and allow- able; even though it proceed by a method not ordinary or generally recognised. My object is not so much to suggest improvements in the translation of the Sacred Text, as to enquire how the irregular- ities in its fabric and texture arose, and to what causes they may be assigned; to discuss, not so much its meaning, as the history of its construction. And I desire to do this in a reverent and cautious spirit; with freedom, but with the diffidence and moderation becoming such an enquiry. My endeavour will be— (1) To shew how in a work, professing to be Greek, such violations of the ordinary rules of the Greek language found admission, and whence they arose. (2) To elucidate the difficulties of the Text, thus traced to their probable origin, by illustrations drawn from the same source. . . Its Authors, we must remember always, first of all, were Orientals. Greek was still a foreign tongue to them and their countrymen, only lately introduced among them. And as Oriental ideas and processes of reasoning were essentially dis- tinct from Greek; so the vocabulary and modes of expression were all strange. They thought as men of the East, while they spoke or wrote in words borrowed from the West. But they were also ¥ews, scions of a race whose literature, so far as we know, was all connected with the Old Testament; which, with many of them, we may believe, was the only book they knew, certainly the one they knew best; and this, pro- bably, only in the Version of the LXX. Their acquaintance with written Greek was possibly confined to that; their religious phraseology, in Greek, obtained chiefly from that, as ours from our English Version. PREPACE. Vil We should expect then, @ friorz, that the authors of N.T. would have been influenced, in the terminology and style of their writings, by the Alexandrine Version: and that we should find reproduced in them the main characteristics of a work so familiar and so sacred. And we see that this was so, by unmis- takeable proofs; we find traces of it in almost every page. And therefore we may look upon the LXX., ot merely as @ store-house of illustration for the more difficult portions of N.T., but as the basis of its distinctive and peculiar phraseology —the fountain which has coloured its stream with most of the irregularities which confront the philologer. This is, of course, a view familiar to all thoughtful students of the Sacred Text: and recognised, in its widest and fullest extent, by the distinguished men whose words I have set at the head of this Preface. My hope is to produce reasons to justify it: to show the LX X. thread running through all the web; and to lead others to acknowledge it as the predominant cause of the introduction of most of what is so strange and remarkable. I take it for granted, according to all the received traditions, that the Alexandrine Version was the work of Jews: that it was a translation from Hebrew into Greek, by men who knew the former best, and were comparatively strangers to the latter. This is transparent on the face of it. Greek was clearly a foreign language to the Translators: a material to which they ‘were unaccustomed, and which they had scarcely learnt how to handle. We feel, as we read the book, that they were not men adequately educated or scientifically qualified for the task; that they were not masters of the new and wonderful instrument put into their hands. We have their work before us, with all its manifold and inevitable defects: its evident and irrefragable signs of the unskilful character of the process by which it was produced. We need not, we ought not, to shut our eyes to its true cha- racter and value as a Translation. Its very blemishes in that respect—its Oriental and Hebraic characteristics—were proba- bly the very causes, that made it so useful to those for whom it was intended, the Hellenized Jews of the dispersion: who, though they were losing their old language, had not lost their modes of thought or idiosyncrasies of expression. It suited them better, and was more easily understood by them, than a " Vill PREFACE. Version into genuine Greek would have been; preserving, as it did, Hebrew idioms under a Greek dress; literal reproductions of Hebrew phrases and turns of speech; the syntax—the gram- mar—the very prepositions—frequently, we may almost say generally, unaltered. 3 Was ever any Greek book that we possess composed under similar circumstances? Nay: are there extant any books written by Orientals in Greek, of the age when the Greeks were fresh in the East: i.e. the period of the compilation of the Alexandrine Version? Are the productions of contemporary Greek writers at all like it in their peculiarities and variations from the Clas- sical Standard ? Let us regard it with all befitting respect, as Zhe Venera- ble Version, that commanded the reverence, and shaped and moulded the religious phraseology, of God’s people scattered throughout the World; as the Book probably quoted by our Blessed Lord Himself: let us gratefully own and value its many uses in Sacred Criticism. I am myself pleading now for an extension and development of its use in one particular direction, in urging that it may be advantageously employed to elucidate the process of transmuting Hebrew thought and speech into Greek forms; and so to illustrate and account for many peculi- arities in the language and style of the Greck Testament. It is confessedly full of irregularities of construction—syntax —grammar—diction—idiom—due to an Hebrew origin alone. If we find the same in the Greek Testament, must we not assign them to the same cause, or to one or other of two causes closely connected with it? Either that the writers of the latter thought in Hebrew or some Hebraic dialect, and so ren- dered their thoughts at times, word for word, in Greek:—or else that their: ancestors had unconsciously constructed a dialect on that basis, reproducing Hebrew idioms and forms of speech in Greek guise and shape; which dialect they were themselves using ;—or that their language and ways of expression, espe- cially upon religious topics, were insensibly affected and coloured by their familiar acquaintance with the diction and style of the Book which they prized and loved beyond all others; most of which, we are told, they had learnt by heart, and could repeat from memory. And if S. Paul,—with all his wider acquaintance than the PREFACE. 1X other contributors to the Sacred Volume, with Greek men, Greek speech, Greek philosophy,—thinks, argues, reasons as a Few rather than a Greek :—if his logic and dialectics are Ovz- ental ;—Hebraic and not Hellenic :—should we not expect him to speak, to frame his utterances, under the same influence? Should we not anticipate, as in fact we find, that his fami- liarity with the LXX. would be shewn in His Epistles? How can we account for his writing, at one moment, passages of per- fectly grammatical Greek, and then suddenly introducing viola- tions of all ordinary Greek constructions, deviations from the customary modes of expression,—which: seem to master his pen, as it were, in the strangest way,—but on the ground of his being under the influence of some book which had filled his memory with its peculiar phrases and terms, and made it natural for him to copy and repeat them, when his subject-matter was Religion ? I propose to apply this method more widely than is usually done; to trace Oriental forms and idioms in the Greek dialect of the New Testament, and to illustrate them by parallel pas- sages in the Greek of the Septuagint, exhibiting similar pecu- liarities. We know that the /atter were due to the efforts of men,—if not wzlearned, yet with small scientific knowledge of the principles of language,—to clothe Hebrew ideas and words in a Greek dress: we may clearly, in all fairness and logical accuracy, refer the former to a corresponding effort, under dif- ferent circumstances. And it appears to be a more natural process, and more consistent with true principles of criticism, to do this, than to endeavour to account for what surprises us, by bringing forward doubtful parallelisms from obscure Greek authors, or by straining occasional solecisms or violations of grammar met with in writers of better repute, into a justification of unquestionable anomalies and irregularities of construction in the text of the Sacred Volume. It may be regarded probably as unscientific and unphilo- sophical ; but I venture to plead that the more scientific and philosophical method can scarcely be applied successfully to a dialect formed on so unscientific a basis, with such frequent interruptions and intermissions of grammatical precision. I think it probable,—nay, almost certain,—that this attempt may be looked upon as a departure from the principles of sound scho- larship,—an infringement of the recognised maxims of modern x PREFACE. criticism,—a return to old exploded methods ;—a backward movement altogether. It is, no doubt, in some sense, a return to old methods ; but such as I believe to be sound and safe, if employed with due discrimination: methods followed by the great critics of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, to whom we owe so much of our biblical knowledge; to some of whom we Englishmen owe our Authorized Version. I venture to think that it was their intimate familiarity, first with the Hebrew original, and next with the Alexandrine and the Vulgate, that enabled them, above all their other qualifica- tions for the task, to produce their wonderful translation. I doubt whether they could have done their work so well had they been better Greek and worse Hebrew scholars; if they had known more about the former, and less about the latter. They were so conversant with Hebrew idioms and constructions that they intuitively detected them and caught their meaning, in many a passage, which would have perplexed and baffled more advanced Greek scholars ; and transferred them easily to English, in which they found congenial and natural and ready expression. Since their day Greek criticism has advanced with strides so rapid as to leave Hebrew far behind; and we know what zeal and devotion the most accomplished Greek scholars have brought to the study of the New Testament. I do not, in the very slightest degree, gainsay or undervalue the results of their labours. But there are still, to say the least, some enigmas that Greek criticism has not yet solved, some difficulties that seem to be beyond its sphere and out of its province, due to the complex elements of the Sacred Text, its double character, as not simply Greek, but Hebrzeo-Greek. May I dare to say that it seems to me too fine a weapon, forged for Plato and Xeno- phon and Thucydides, for the great orators and dramatists, and sharpened expressly for dealing with a language the most per- fect the world has ever known? It is of a temper and polish unsuited to the unvarnished simplicity and natural artless flow of the narratives and epistles of Apostles and Evangelists. The dialect at their command was but a coarse material to work with, however admirably adapted, in the providence of God, for the majestic edifice they were inspired to construct out of it; and many of them were rough workmen, though divinely fitted for the task entrusted to them, ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοι καὶ ἰδιῶται. PREFACE. ΧΙ May we not sometimes have gone too far in the effort to prove that the material is the finest marble, and the chiselling that of the most refined and skilled artists; whereas g/anite,— cut sharp and strong, in lines of simple but imperishable beauty, by men faithful and true to the idea supernaturally impressed upon their minds, but uneducated in, and strangers to, the pro- cesses of artistic composition,—would be a worthier and more accurate description of their achievement ? I have long been wishing and hoping to see the different method for which I plead applied by other and more competent hands: and it is only because I see no indications of such an intention anywhere else, that I have resolved to put forth what I have myself observed and collected. I confess, candidly and unreservedly, that I have studied very little the works of other Commentators. From various causes,—chiefly from con- stant engagement in other pursuits and from physical inability to read much or long,—I have been unable to enter deeply into the labours of others. I have kept to my own line of investiga- tion and followed it by myself alone; simply because I seemed to have come upon a track not much traversed by other feet now-a-days, by pursuing which I hoped to contribute my little share to the great cause of Biblical Criticism. I have a sincere and very real sense of the incomplete and superficial character of much that I have advanced: I trust others, with stronger heads and more time, may go deeper into the substance. I am content to be a pioneer along a path which I cannot but think may lead hereafter to a clearer understanding of Holy Scripture. I have not touched, save occasionally, on doctrinal questions, as not falling within the scope of my plan; nor on separate points of minute and intricate criticism,—such as the use of the article——which I recognise as out of my depth; nor on the Recension of the Text, on which I frankly avow myself too ignorant to form an opinion. I have confined myself almost exclusively to the matters on which I seem to myself to have some little knowledge ; some faint hope of assisting others. I have taken the Text of Tischendorf, 1862. My main object being to shew that the Greek Text owes its distinguishing characteristics to three causes—(1) Orientalisms, (2) the influence of the LXX. or Alexandrine Version, (3) deteri- ΧΙ PREFACE. oration of style, due either to the Macedonian element in it, or to the “ serioris Greecismi innovationes,’—I have marked the most prominent examples of each as they occur, in order to arrest attention and secure careful examination: but when a particular phrase or idiom has been once thus pointed out, I have not usually noted it again, if recurring in the immediate context. I wish to say a few words in conclusion on the elementary character of much that I have said in this Preface and in my Notes throughout. I have made it so intentionally and from design. I am unfeignedly conscious of my very slight qualifica- tions for any wide or deep enquiry, and of the very little hope I can possibly have to win the ear of the learned. But I may per- haps do something to smooth the path of the Stwdent, and shew him the true nature of the obstacles which impede his progress, and clear a few stumblingblocks out of his way, or help him over them by a straightforward process, and so save him from the humiliation and moral injury of going round-about or avoid- ing or ignoring them altogether. I may be able to relieve him of some of the perplexities, which embarrassed me in the days of my first introduction to the Greek Testament. Many a man, fresh from ordinary Greek books, is bewildered and confused by the dialect there set before him. I have tried to distinguish and classify the difficulties which beset his path, and to assign them each to its separate source, that he may learn to discriminate between the changes, which the Macedonian Greek incurred by coming into the East and among Jews, and the variations from the old pure style which it brought with it, or gradually evolved and developed out of itself. Of course, without some knowledge of Hebrew, most of what I say will be unintelligible. But I hope to encourage those who have a fair acquaintance with the Sacred Tongue, to use it in a fresh direction, with the zest and spirit that always accompanies labour in a new field: and to stimulate others, who have as yet only mastered the ele- ments, to strive after that proficiency which will alone give them the key to this method of investigation. It is as an aid to such Students that I have adopted the system of marks in the Text, as more likely to attract notice and make an impression, than notes alone, detached from the Text, or isolated explanations in a Lexicon. PREFACE. ΧΙ My chief books of reference have been “ Schleusneri Lexicon in N.T.,” and “Tromm. Concordantie Grece in LX Α΄. Inter- pretes.” My attention was first turned to this line of enquiry by acci- dentally meeting with a copy of the former some thirty years ago, but his doctrinal opinions and want of critical exactness startled and repelled me, and I took no pains to procure the book or consult it again; though I pursued, at intervals, by my own personal investigation, the path he-had opened to me. More recent recourse to his pages has shewn me how much I have lost by neglecting his help in this particular, and how much time I have wasted in researches which his discoveries would have saved. I have found the greatest assistance from Trommius, though reliance cannot always be placed on his accuracy or his judg- ment. His plan and arrangement are admirable, but his evident deficiency in the critical faculty has lamentably marred the exe- cution of his design, and lessened the value of his elaborate performance. Quite lately (in Nov. 1874) I have become acquainted with the invaluable work of Grimm, “ Lericon Greco-Latinum in Libros N. ΤΙ He refers to Schleusner as one of his authorities; and would, no doubt, explicitly acknowledge his manifold ob- ligations to the acumen and research of one from whom he has evidently derived so much assistance in this portion of his work. “Grinfield’s Editio Hellenistica,’—a repertory of parallel passages from the V. A., corresponding to each verse of the N. T.,—I have not found so serviceable as I had hoped, from his having selected parallelisms of sense and meaning, rather than of verbal expression. W. H. GUILLEMARD. CAMBRIDGE, 1 March, 1875. ABBREVIATIONS AND INITIALS. M.= Matthew, Mk.= Mark, L.=Luke, J.=John. V.A.=Versio Alexandrina or Septuagint. N.T.=New (i.e. Greek) Testament. Tromm.=Trommii Concordantiz in LXX. Schl. =Schleusneri Lexicon in N.T. Grimm.=Grimmii Lexicon in N.T. E.H.=Grinfield’s Editio Hellenistica N.T. Br.=Bruder’s Concordance. Asterisks ** before and after a phrase, mark a Hebraism; either original or reflected from the V.A. Brackets enclose instances of later Greek usage, or of debased style. Uncial type indicates some word or phrase derived, directly and specially, from the V.A.—some peculiar use, originating apparently with its Compilers. i ‘ ἢ ; praia) sey) Ae geer } 5 ΠῚ VEGF eles 141} Ww χ ‘ ’ 2 * ΤΟ ΚΑΤΑ ΝΜ ΑΥΤΘΑΤΟΝ EYATTEAION. : CAP. ΒΙΒΛΟΣ γενέσεως ΙΗΣΟΥ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαβὶδ, υἱοῦ "ABpaau 1 ᾿Αβραὰμ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ισαάκ' ᾿Ισαὰκ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὲν Ἰακώβ. 2 Ἰακὼβ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ιούδαν καὶ τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ. ᾿Ιούδας 3 δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Φαρὲς καὶ τὸν Ζαρὰ ἐκ τῆς Θαμάρ' Φαρὲς δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Εσρώμ. ᾿Εσρὼμ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Αράμ' ᾿Αρὰμ δὲ 4 ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Αμιναδάβ. ᾿Αμιναδὰβ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ναασσών᾽ Ναασσὼν δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Σαλμών. Σαλμὼν δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Bock § ἐκ τῆς Ῥαχάβ' Boog δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿᾽Ωβὴδ ἐκ τῆς Ῥούθ. ᾿Ωβὴδ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ἰεσσαί: ᾿Ιεσσαὶ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Δαβὶδ τὸν βασι- 6 λέα. Δαβὶδ δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐγέννησε τὸν Σολομῶντα ἐκ τῆς τοῦ Οὐρίου. Σολομὼν δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ροβοάμ. Ῥοβοὰμ δὲ ἐγέννησε 7 τὸν ᾿Αβιά: ᾿Αβιὰ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ασά. ᾿Ασὰ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ὃ > , ? \ Ne eae x ? , Τωσαφάτ' ᾿Ιωσαφὰτ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ιωραμ. τὸν ᾿᾽Οζίαν: ’Ofias δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ιωάθαμ. ἐγέννησε ἐγέννησε 9 Ἰωρὰμ, δὲ Ἰωάθαμ δὲ τὸν Αχαζ’ "Αχαζ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Εἰζεκίαν. "Efexias δὲ A -“ a \ > , \ μ᾿ τὸν Μανασσῆ Μανασσῆς δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Αμών. ἐγέννησε ᾿Αμὼν δὲ ἐγέν- re σεν δε MS ͵ Nuss 38 ΤΑ \ | , \ \ vnoe τὸν “Iwolav' ᾿Ιωσίας δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ‘leyoviay καὶ τοὺς a Cal a \ \ Ἂν ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, *éri τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος." Mera δὲ τὴν lel / ‘ , μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος, ᾿Ιεχονίας ἐγέννησε τὸν Σαλαθιήλ. Σαλα- Cap. I. 2. The use of the article in this genealogy, always with object, never with subject, seems to be borrowed from simi- lar genealogies in VY. A.: e.g. that in Genesis v., where the same use is found -throughout the list: and in 1 Chron. pas- sim. In most of these instances the object has MS before it: and the article was probably introduced to express the sup- posed meaning of that particle. But this does not meet all the cases: e.g. Gen. v. 1 ω Te ἢ ἡμέρᾳ ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς τὸν ᾿Αδάμ is the translation of DIS DTN S72 OV. 12. μετοικεσία Βαβυλῶν. 5] ‘‘ the Baby- lonish emigration:” Hebrew genitive of qualification, equivalent to an adjective. S. Matthew uses, in all probability, a mode of expression familiar to the Jews of his day, by which the national pride was soothed, when he speaks of the captivity as a migration, I 10 II 12 2 MATTHEW, I. 13—II. 1. , a 13 Our δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ζοροβάβελ Ζοροβάβελ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Αβιούδ. ᾿Αβιοὺδ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ελιακείμ' ᾿Ελιακεὶμ δὲ ἐγέν- Ι4νησε τὸν ᾿Αζώρ. ᾿Αξὼρ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ζαδώκ' Ζαδὼκ δὲ ἐγέν- 15 vnoe τὸν ᾿Αχείμ. ᾿Αχεὶμ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ελιούδ' ᾿λιοὺδ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Eneafap. ’EXealap δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ματθάν Ματθὰν 16 δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ιακώβ. ᾿Ἰακὼβ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ιωσὴφ τὸν ἄνδρα Μαρίας, ἐξ ἧς ἐγεννήθη ΤΗΣΟΥΣ ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός. a . / 17 Πᾶσαι οὖν ai yeveai ἀπὸ ᾿Αβραὰμ ἕως Δαβὶδ γενεαὶ δεκατέσ- A - \ capes’ καὶ ἀπὸ Δαβὶδ ἕως *r75 μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος ἔ γενεαὶ δεκατέσσαρες" καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος ἕως τοῦ Χριστοῦ γενεαὶ δεκατέσσαρες. 18 ΤΟΥ͂ δὲ Χριστοῦ ἡ γέννησις οὕτως ἦν. μνηστευθείσης γὰρ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας τῷ ᾿Ιωσὴφ, πρὶν ἢ συνελθεῖν αὐτοὺς, Siva ᾽ Aor Ε Γ , G's 5 \ δὲ εὐ πικα 19 ἐὑρέθη ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχουσα ἐκ Ἰ]νεύματος ἁγίου. ᾿Ιωσὴφ δὲ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς, δίκαιος ὧν, καὶ [μὴ] θέλων αὐτὴν δειγματίσαι, ἐβουλήθη 20 λάθρα ἀπολῦσαι αὐτήν. ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐνθυμηθέντος, ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος Ξε. 8, / 7 al , 5 \ [δ \ \ Κυρίου κατ᾽ ὄναρ ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων, Ἰωσὴφ *vics* Δαβὶδ, μὴ al tal \ \ o ie a \ \ > Dy φοβηθῆς παραλαβεῖν Μαριὰμ τὴν γυναῖκά σου τὸ yap ἐν αὐτῇ ‘ Ἢ 5 , , > ee) , \ e\ \ , 21 γεννηθὲν ἐκ Ἱ]νεύματός ἐστιν dyiov. τέξεται dé viov, καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦν᾽ αὐτὸς γὰρ σώσει τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν 22 ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν. [Τοῦτο δὲ ὅλον γέγονεν, ἵνα πληρωθῇ] τὸ ῥηθὲν 23 ὑπὸ Κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, "dod, ἡ παρθένος ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει καὶ τέξεται υἱὸν, καὶ καλέσουσε τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 24’Eupavounr’ 6 ἐστι μεθερμηνευόμενον, μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν 6 Θεός. Διεγερθεὶς δὲ ὁ Ιωσὴφ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ Ἐν ον nse \ L \ a 9) pin \ ᾽ 25 ὃ ἄγγελος Κυρίου: καὶ παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ Ἐἐγινωσκεν αὐτὴν, ἕως οὗ ἔτεκεν υἱὸν, καὶ ἐκάλεσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ ἸΗΣΟΥ͂Ν. CAP. ? fa) , 3 \ ee , > Cie 2 TOT δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦ γεννηθέντος ἐν Βηθλεὲμ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας, *év ἡμέ- 20. υἱὸς] Nominative for vocative: set down to debased dialect. Instances very common, though not universal, in are no doubt to be found in classical V.A.: Threni il. 13, παρθένος θύγατερ authors of the like: but there they Σιών, Judges v. 12, ἀνάστα Βαρὰκ, vids are the exception, and may be allow- ᾿Αβινεέμ. Micah v. τ, καὶ σὺ, Βηθλεὲμ, ably assigned to inaccuracy. In the οἶκος ᾿δῴφραθά. Ps. Ixxii. 1, Ὃ Θεὸς, τὸ New Testament they occur so frequently κρίμα σοῦ τῷ βασίλει dos. Ps, Ixxxvii. 3, as to suggest a radical deterioration of ὉΠ WY ἡ πόλις τ. Θ. isan instance of Style. ὁ ’ tn evened Re a different construction, being the literal oF ee ἢ τα βθέν05] ‘asta orignal ea translation of the Hebrew definite article ἘΣ} : ae with noun, for vocative. See xi, 26, 25: A ΠΕ τ tener oe ia Mk. v. 8, 413 x. 473 Lk. viii. 54. dered in V.A. But ἐν ΡΙ rase occurs 22. This and similar violations of the alg a ere ness natural sequence of tenses, so common Cap. II. τ. 3, V.A. ἐν ἡ. or ἐν in New Testament, must, I think, be ταῖς 7.] passim, e.g. 2 Chr. ix. 20, and MATTHEW, II. 2—9. 3 ς ‘ , pats* “Hpwdou τοῦ βασιλέως, ἰδοὺ μάγοι ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν παρεγένοντο ᾽ « , ἴω ν a εἰς “lepocdd\upa λέγοντες, Ilod ἐστιν ὁ τεχθεὶς βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἴου- 2 , ” \ ᾽ A \ > , a a δαίων ; εἴδομεν γὰρ αὐτοῦ τὸν ἀστέρα ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ, καὶ [ἤλθομεν lol 2 fal ᾽ U προσκυνῆσαι) αὐτῷ. ᾿Ακούσας δὲ ‘Hpwdns ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐταράχθη, 3 \ a , Ι] a kai πᾶσα “Ἱεροσόλυμα μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, καὶ συναγαγὼν πάντας τοὺς 4 " a \ a A “᾿ a a ἀρχιερεῖς Kal γραμματεῖς *tod daov,* ἐπυνθάνετο παρ᾽ αὐτῶν, ποῦ c r QA “Ὁ « Ν = ? a ’ \ a ὁ Χριστὸς γεννᾶται. οἱ δὲ εἶπον αὐτῷ, “Ev Βηθλεὲμ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας. 5 [7 , οὕτως γὰρ γέγραπται διὰ τοῦ προφήτου, Kai σὺ Βηθλεὲμ γῇ ᾿Τούδα, 6 1 - > / 8 » A ε "ἢ "δ 4 > a \ 5 , οὐδαμῶς ἐλαχίστη εἶ ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν ᾿Ιούδα" ἐκ σοῦ yap ἐξελεύ- σεται ἡγούμενος, ὕστις ποιμανεῖ τὸν λαόν μου τὸν ᾿Ισραήλ. Τότε 7 Ἣ ὃ 10 / \ ie > 7 5 » - \ ρώδης λάθρα καλέσας τοὺς μάγους, ἠκρίβωσεν παρ᾽ αὐτῶν τὸν , n χρόνον [τοῦ φαινομένου ἀστέρος], καὶ πέμψας αὐτοὺς εἰς Βηθλεὲμ 8 3 , 2 Ud > - \ a , > \ \ εἶπεν, Πορευθέντες ἐξετάσατε ἀκριβῶς περὶ τοῦ παιδίου" ἐπὰν δὲ Οἱ9 ΝΥ , a , ἐ δὲ ἀκούσαντες τοῦ βασιλέως, ἐπορεύθησαν" καὶ ἰδοὺ ὁ ἀστὴρ, ὃν εἶδον “ 3 I Va er ’ x 3 \ , ’ a EUPNTE, ἀπαγγείλατε μοὶ, OTWMS KaYW ἐλθὼν προσκυνήσω AUT. xxvi. 5. Our English idiom is the same, very often of all intelligibility or sense: and the phrase is natural and familiar to us; but unnatural and incongruous in Greek, and betrays a foreign source. 2. Inote once for all this infringement of the ordinary rules of grammar, too fre- quent to be due to accident or incuria, as the result of the deterioration alluded toe 22, see iy, x. To explain it by supposing the omission of τοῦ before in- finitive seems far-fetched and unsatisfac- tory. 4 ὮΝΠ - ὁ λαὸς] ¢he people, i.e. Israel. 6. No quotation at all, strictly speak- ing. The Hebrew is (Micah y. 1) NAN ἜΡΕΞ nie Ty Any on? ma Ὁ ona? xy Ὁ BD ΠῊΠ) ya, ** And thou, Bethlehem Ephra- tah, insignificant to be among the families of Judah, out of thee shall come forth for me one to be aRuler inIsrael.” The V.A. renders it thus: καὶ σὺ, Βηθλεὲμ, οἶκος ᾿Εφραθὰ, ὀλιγοστὸς εἶ τοῦ εἶναι ἐν χιλιάσιν ᾿Ιούδα' ἐκ σοῦ μοι ἐξελεύσεται τοῦ εἶναι εἰς ἄρχοντα τοῦ Ἰσραήλ. I quote this not only to show the real words of the prophecy, and the variations from it in N.T. and V.A., but also to draw at- tention to the translation of nid by τοῦ εἶναι twice in the latter. An apt example of the practice almost universal, in that Version, of rendering with infinitive, after neuter or passive verbs, by rod with Greek infinitive ; to the loss 6... 2 SAMuXIxX, 21, ny? ‘ND ἦλθον τοῦ καταβῆναί με. Gen. xviii. 25, > noon py PY Nye ΠῚΠ ἼΔΗΣ nivyy yw. μηδαμῶς σὺ ποιήσεις ws τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο τοῦ ἀποκτεῖναι δίκαιον μετὰ ἀσεβοῦς. τ Chr. xi, 18, OMINWD TAIN ΝΟ) καὶ οὐκ ἠθέλησε τοῦ πιεῖν. The translators appear to have con- cluded that a Greek idiom, which was the appropriate interpretation of the Hebrew idiom under certain conditions, e.g. verse 13, was always to be employed as its equivalent: and so have introduced into their Version renderings which are otherwise inexplicable. And to this we owe, I venture to think, in great measure, the strange and startling instances of the τοῦ with infinitive, occasionally met with in the New Testament. The above passage illustrates likewise the use of εἶναι els as equivalent to 2 [ΡΠ in the sense of γίγνομαι, so constantly found both in V.A. and N.T., and so familiar to the writers, that in this case they have forced the phrase into the Greek, without the occurrence of the cor- responding form in the Hebrew. 7. ‘*The time of the star that ap- peared,” not ‘‘of the star at its appear- ing” or ‘‘of the appearing of the star: ” though we can scarcely doubt that the writer meant to convey that meaning, or that the words, according to the usage of the time and the dialect, may have expressed it. I—2 4 MATTHEW, II. 1o—IIL 2. > a 9 a a Soba Ψ 3 — , 5. at 29 ἢ ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ, προῆγεν αὐτοὺς, ἕως ἐλθὼν ἐστάθη ἐπάνω οὗ ἦν τὸ 7 » ΄ \ A > , ’ Ul \ LZ , 10 παιδίον. ἰδόντες δὲ τὸν ἀστέρα, ἐχάρησαν χαρὰν μεγάλην σφόδρα. \ > , > ‘ ea 4 53 Ν / \ ΄ a 11 Kat ἐλθόντες εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, εἶδον TO παιδίον μετὰ Μαρίας τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ, καὶ πεσόντες προσεκύνησαν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνοίξαντες \ a lel A τοὺς θησαυροὺς αὐτῶν, προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ δῶρα, χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον 12 καὶ σμύρναν. καὶ χρηματισθέντες κατ᾽ ὄναρ μὴ ἀνακάμψαι πρὸς ‘H ὃ ὃ ᾽ ΚΝ. δὃ lal ° , » 4 / , lal ρώδην, δι’ ἄλλης ὁδοῦ ἀνεχώρησαν εἰς THY χώραν αὐτῶν. > , Ν ἢ a 5 Ν wv / f ΕῚ 12 Αναχωρησάντων δὲ αὐτῶν, ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος Κυρίου φαίνεται Kat ὄναρ τῷ ᾿Ιωσὴφ λέγων, "EyepOeis παράλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν 2 ἢ “ \ rn > ” A. oF 9 a @ x ” μητέρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ φεῦγε eis Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ἴσθι ἐκεῖ ἕως ἂν εἴπω ὲ , Rost ae , . \ ἢ res , a σοι μέλλει yap Ἡρώδης ἕξητεῖν τὸ παιδίον, τοῦ ἀπολέσαι αὐτό. « \ > \ 2 A ὅ \ \ / Φ fal Ἁ 14 Ὁ δὲ ἐγερθεὶς παρέλαβεν τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ νυκτὸς, + a f > 7 A? 5 acd A a Ἥ "ὃ δ 15 καὶ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ἦν ἐκεῖ ἕως τῆς τελευτῆς Ηρώδου ἵνα πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου διὰ τοῦ ἡτου λέγοντο ηρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, 16 Ἐξ Αὐγύπτου ἐκάλεσα τὸν υἱόν pov. Τότε Ἡρώδης ἰδὼν ὅτι τ / id A A / 5 , / \ ’ "- ᾿ ἐνεπαίχθη ὑπὸ τῶν μάγων, ἐθυμώθη λίαν, καὶ ἀποστείλας ἀνεῖλεν πάντας τοὺς παῖδας τοὺς ἐν Βηθλεὲμ καὶ ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς ἑρίοις αὐτῆς, ἀπὸ διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω, κατὰ τὸν χρόνον ὃν ἠκρίβωσεν παρὰ τῶν , , ’ ͵ NCE \ Δ ΝΕ / “ , , 17 μάγων. τότε ἐπληρώθη τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ “Ἱερεμίου τοῦ προφήτου λέγον- 18 τος, Φωνὴ ἐν “Paya ἠκούσθη, θρῆνος καὶ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὀδυρμὸς πολὺς, ς \ , \ , eye \ ᾽ " a Ραχὴλ κλαίουσα τὰ τέκνα αὐτῆς" καὶ οὐκ ἤθελε παρακληθῆναι, ᾿ a , 1g ὅτι οὐκ εἰσί, Τελευτήσαντος δὲ τοῦ Ηρώδου, ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος Κυρίου ? v , a?) Ἁ » > / / » \ δ 20 κατ᾽ ὄναρ φαίνεται τῷ Ἰωσὴφ ἐν Αὐγύπτῳ λέγων, ’EyepOeis παρά- A lol > λαβε τὸ παιδίον Kai τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ πορεύου eis γῆν ᾿Ισραήλ" ἥν ες lal Ν \ fal / ¢ Ne. A 21 τεθνήκασιν yap οἱ ζητοῦντες THY ψυχὴν τοῦ παιδίου. ὁ δὲ ἐγερθεὶς , \ / \ 1! , 9 lal \ > n 2 Lad παρέλαβεν τὸ παιδίον καὶ THY μητέρα αὐτοῦ, Kal εἰσῆλθεν εἰς γὴν ᾿] A 22 ᾿ΙΙσραήλ. ἀκούσας δὲ ὅτι ᾿Αρχέλαος βασιλεύει ἐπὶ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας ἀντὶ “Ἡρώδου τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, ἐφοβήθη ἐκεῖ [ἀπελθεῖν] χρημα- Ν Ν > wv » / 53 \ ,ὔ lol / A 23 τισθεὶς δὲ κατ ὄναρ, ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὰ μέρη τῆς Τ} αλιλαίας, καὶ ἐλθὼν κατῴκησεν εἰς πόλιν λεγομένην Ναζξαρέτ' ὅπως [πληρωθῇ] \ lod lol - τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν, “Ὅτι Ναζωραῖος κληθήσεται. CAP. BR δὲ “ ες la | if , 7 ’ € 3 Ν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις παραγίνεται ᾿Ιωάννης ὁ βαπ- , fo Lal 2 τιστὴς, κηρύσσων ἐν TH ἐρήμῳ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας καὶ λέγων, Mera- 3 νοεῖτε' ἤγγικεν γὰρ *y βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ς of, a a [ὁ ῥηθεὶς] διὰ ‘Hoaiov τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, Φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν δὰ" / c , Ἂς egy / τ ’ / n \ / τῇ ἐρήμῳ, Erowwacate τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου" εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους Cap. III. 2. ἡ β. τ. ovp.] Not found mown ‘D, M. has οὐρανῶν, the other in V.A., may be inferred from Dan. ii. 42 ΛΕ ΤΣ Θεοῦ. and vii. 14. Grimm cites from Targums 3. mf pndels] ‘‘the person spoken of,” NIPNT xmis0, and from Rabbins unusual in masculine, MATTHEW, , Lal avuTou. Ill. 4—12. 5 @N \ a , 3 ‘ » , a ’ \ 5 αὐτὸς δὲ 6 ᾿Ιωάννης εἶχεν τὸ ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ [ἀπὸ τριχῶν] ’ \ , ὃ 7 Ν ‘ ’ A id a, 5 δὲ \ καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὑτοῦ ἡ δὲ τροφὴ 4 ἣν αὐτοῦ ἀκρίδες καὶ μέλι ἄγριον. ,’ “ Tore ἐξεπορεύετο πρὸς αὐτὸν ᾿Ιεροσόλυμα καὶ πᾶσα ἡ ᾿Ιουδαία 5 καὶ πᾶσα ἡ περίχωρος τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο ἐν τῷ 6 Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν. 7 Ἰδὼν δὲ πολλοὺς τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων ἐρχομένους φιν \ if be ’ al / 5 a , ς / ἐπὶ τὸ βάπτισμα εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Τεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν, τίς ὑπέδειξεν ¢ -“ a ? ‘ ma λλ , » a = ΕΟ , φφ \ % 8 ὑμῖν φυγεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς ; “ποιήσατε οὖν καρπὸν ἄξιον τῆς μετανοίας" ἔχομεν τὸν ᾿Αβραάμ: λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι δύναται ὁ Θεὸς ἐκ τῶν λίθων τούτων ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ ᾿Αβραά γεῖρ ῷ ᾿Αβραάμ. ν᾽ , \ Ἁ er tal , a ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται fal \ \ b] , . > fal , ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν, ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται. ‘ a ε “a * ? bd ὡς: 3, ᾿ μὲν βαπτίζω ὑμᾶς *év ὕδατι εἰς μετάνοιαν ἤδη δὲ καὶ ἡ -“ εὐ Ψ, \ πᾶν οὖν δένδρον μὴ ἐγὼ 6 Ν ᾿ / ὁ δὲ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος, ἰοχγρότερόο μου ἐστὶν, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς τὰ ὑποδήματα βαστάσαι: τ X «ς a“ / * 5 1 , «. / \ a αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει * év Ilveduate ἁγίῳ καὶ πυρί. ὃ \ U a \ ? a \ a οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ, καὶ συνάξει τὸν σῖτον αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην, τὸ δὲ ἄχυρον. κατα- καύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ. 8. π.κ. ΞΞ "2 ney, g. Our idiom, “think to say,” suits this exactly: and so we do not see the difficulty of extracting that meaning out of δοκέω λέγειν, according to its correct and classical use. Grimm sees it, and translates ‘‘nolite putare licere vobis di- cere,” which, of course, is right. Natu- rally the phrase means ‘‘do not think you are saying.” ‘There are three uses of do- κέω, in its sense of ‘‘cogito,” in N.T. E.g. (1) Mk. vi. 49, αὐτὸν ἔδοξαν φάντα- σμα εἶναι. (2) J. ν. 39, ὑμεῖς δοκεῖτε ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν. (3) The passage be- fore us, where apparently ἐξεῖναι, or some similar word, is understood, Ir. ἐν] Literal translation of 3; and used for it, in all its various ies of meaning, indiscriminately in V.A., though utterly inadequate to express ‘its real meaning. E.g. 2 Sam. xxiii. 17, τῶν πορευθέντων ἐν ταῖς ψυχαῖς αὐτῶν oniwp23 odin, 1 Sam. xxiv. 22, Sucre μοι ἐν Κυρίῳ nym ” myawi, Exod. iv. 21, τὰ répura ἃ δέδωκα ἐν ταῖς χερσί σου ἽΝ yn ὍΝ, Ps. evi. 20, ἠλλάξαντο τὴν δόξαν αὐτῶν ἐν ὁμοιώματι (Rom. i. 23) mana oT23 ὙΠ, Numbers xx. 20, ἐν ὄχλῳ βαρεῖ TAD DYA, 1 Kings x. byna, Ps. lv. 19, ἐν πολλοῖς ἦσαν σὺν ἐμοί ὉΠ 53:35 TOY, Deut. xxviii. 62, καταλειφθήσεσθε ἐν dpO ues βραχεῖ DYID NDB, Is. Ivili. 1, ἀναβόησον ἐν ἴσχυι 133, The last five may be said more or less to express the manner (A): Numbers xiv. 10, κατελιθοβόλησαν ἐν λίθοις DYAND che tnstrument (B): and Deut. xxiv. 16, and 2 Kings xiv. 6, ἕκαστος é εν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις αὐτοῦ ἈΠ ΤΣ Τὴ) Iwona WN the cause (C). Τ have cited the above in full, because the writers of N.T. have gone in ‘the same track, in their use of ἐν, more especially in (A), (B), (C), for which we have dative alone comparatively seldom in either. There are some startling examples of this use in N.T. E.¢g. vii. 6, 1x. 34; L. xi. 20, 1 Core iv. 21, ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθῳ πρὸς ὑμᾶς; V.A. Θεὸς ἰσχυρός Deut. x. 17 and Θεὸν ἰσχύοντα Is. xx. 21 for WAI by. The Greek word here and Mk. i. 7, L. iii. 11, would seem too weak to express the idea, but for this use of it in Κ΄. Δ, 2, ἐν δυνάμει ἰσχυρᾷ TAD καὶ μὴ δόξητε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, Πατέρα 9 10 ET 12 6 MATTHEW, III. 13—IV. 11. v3 Ἄν, Ὁ / een, A 13 Tore παραγίνεται ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ τῆς Τ'αλιλαίας ἐπὶ τὸν » i Ν \ 3 U n θῇ ς 9 ᾽ lal ε δὲ 14 Ιορδάνην πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ιωᾶάννην, τοῦ βαπτισθῆναν ὑπ αὐτοῦ. ὁ ὃὲ f / 7 δ. ἐνὰ A a διεκώλυεν αὐτὸν λέγων, "Eyd χρείαν ἔχω ὑπὸ σοῦ βαπτισθῆναι, Lav ἔ τὰ θεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ["Ade 15 καὶ σὺ ἔρχῃ πρός με; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ( ς δι an lol an ἄρτι] οὕτως yap πρέπον ἐστὶν ἡμῖν πληρῶσαι πᾶσαν δικαιο- 16 σύνην. > \ a ee: 4 A a \ τι , θ Ε] r ς 3, \ \ 75 ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕδατος" Kal ἰδοὺ ἀνεώχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρανοὶ, καὶ εἶδεν \ Δ. Caz fal ᾽ Ν Φ ᾿ τότε ἀφίησιν αὐτόν. βαπτισθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς εὐθὺς ἀνέβη Ν nr fo! fal a ς Ν A » , τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν, ἐρχόμενον “5 ’ , \ > \ Ν > lal 5 _ / Οὗ = 17 ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδοὺ φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα, Οὗτός ἐστιν id 9% \ 3 ae ’ , ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητὸς, ἐν ᾧ εὐδόκησα. CAP. ' ς 7 A SP > \ ” Coa a r 4 Τότε ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀνήχθη εἰς τὴν ἔρημον ὑπὸ τοῦ IIvevpatos, fal lal , \ , «ς , 2 [πειρασθῆναι] ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλουι καὶ νηστεύσας ἡμέρας τεσσα- 7 3 ράκοντα καὶ νύκτας τεσσαράκοντα, ὕστερον ἐπείνασε. καὶ προσεὰλ- Ν 2 - e 7 5 > ay 3 »" Ὁ » Δ « / θὼν αὐτῷ ὁ πειράζων εἶπεν, Ki vids εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰπὲ ἵνα ot λίθοι ε \ » Ν 53 9. Ο δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, Τέγραπται, * Οὐκ » οἰ ΕΣ / wv θ TAN. 3 \ ‘\ Ch 3 ἐπ᾿ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσετα: ἄνθρωπος, a ἐπὶ παντὶ ῥήματι ἐκπο- Ἂ rn 5 ρευομένῳ διὰ στόματος Θεοῦ. ἢ / * 4 οὗτοι ἄρτον γένωνται. ς Τότε παραλαμβάνει αὐτὸν ὁ διά- > \ £: U f A. “ ’ \ Σ Ν ss Uy Boros εἰς THY ἁγίαν πόλιν, καὶ ἵστησιν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ TO πτερύγιον “ e lal \ , ’ a > e\ 3 lal “ x 6 τοῦ ἱεροῦ καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, Ki vids εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν A , ἐφ Lal a a κάτω᾽ γέγραπται yap, “Ott τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ ἐντελεῖται περὶ an a 7 a σοῦ, καὶ ἐπὶ χειρῶν ἀροῦσί σε, μήποτε προσκόψῃς πρὸς λίθον τὸν “4 ” » lal i 2 n / 5 ’ 7 πόδα gov. “Edy αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, law γέγραπται, Οὐκ ἐκπειρά- / , 8 σεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν cov. Ἰ]άλιν παραλαμβάνει αὐτὸν ὁ διάβολος » " id \ / Ν “ οὐ a / \ / εἰς Opos ὑψηλὸν λίαν, καὶ δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ πάσας τὰς βασιλείας a 7 Ld \ \ , ᾽ n \ / 2 “Ὁ a / Q τοῦ κόσμου Kal τὴν δόξαν αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, Ταῦτα πάντα 10 got δώσω, ἐὰν πεσὼν προσκυνήσῃς μοι. , , ᾽ Sali Le Ὰ lal Τότε λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς, rf " Ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου Σατανᾶ; 4 \ , Ν Ld γέγραπται yap, Κύριον tov Θεόν 11 σου προσκυνήσεις, καὶ αὐτῷ μόνῳ λατρεύσεις. Τότε ἀφίησιν αὐτὸν Ξ , x ἅς ἢ Ry LY A \ , x» δ ὁ διάβολος" καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄγγελοι προσῆλθον καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ. 15. πᾶσαν δικαιοσύνην] every claim of religious duty and piety. 17. εὐδόκησεν €v= 2 YEN and is fre- quently put for it, e.g. 2 Sam. xxii. 19, by V.A.: which also follows literally other varieties of the Hebrew idiom con- nected with (2M and its cognate M$), but ‘‘any thing—coming out from the mouth of the Jord,” ‘‘any thing ap- pointed by God.” Ordinary food is not necessary for human life when God pro- vides extraordinary. ζῆν ἐπὶ = dy mn literally: but not really. 6. V.A. for ΒΞ 2Y, Ore is an in- e.g. Ps. 11. τό, MYND diy ὁλοκαυτώ- para οὐκ εὐδοκήσεις. Ps. Ixxxy. τ 1S) qs myn? εὐδόκησας, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν σοῦ. : CapV: 4... V.A. Deut. vin. gs 73 nym 5) δεν ΠΟ 29 by not ‘‘every word” tegral part of the quotation from V.A. answering to 3 in the Hebrew. I note this, that it may not be considered an in- stance of the ὅτι recitativum, as Grimm styles it; classing under this head ii. 23, vil. 23, xvi. 7, σι: on which I hope to offer some observations hereafter. MATTHEW, IV. 12—25. 7 "AKOTEA® δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ὅτε Ἰωάννης παρεδόθη, ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ καταλυπὼν τὴν Ναζαρὲτ, ἐλθὼν κατῴκησεν εἰς Καφαρναοὺν τὴν παραθαλασσίαν, ἐν ὁρίοις Ζαβουλὼν καὶ ΝΝεφθαλείμ: [ἵνα πληρωθῇ} τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ησαΐου τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, I} Ζαβουλὼν καὶ γῆ Νεφθαλεὶμ, ἕ ὁδὸν θαλάσσης * πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου, Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὁ λαὸς ὁ καθήμενος ἐν σκέτιᾳ φῶς εἶδεν μέγα, καὶ τοῖς καθημένοις *év χώρᾳ καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου, φῶς ἀνέτειλεν αὐτοῖς. ᾿Απὸ τότε ἤρξατο ὁ ᾿Ι]ησοῦς κηρύσσειν καὶ λέγειν, Μετανοεῖτε" ἤγγικεν γὰρ *1) βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν." ἹἸΠεριπατῶν δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν τῆς Γαλιλαίας, εἶδεν δύο ἀδελφοὺς, Σέμωνα τὸν λεγόμενον Ilétpov, καὶ ᾿Ανδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, βάλλον- τας ἀμφίβληστρον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν: ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς. καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου, καὶ ποιήσω ὑμῶς ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων. δὲ εὐθέως [ἀφέντες] τὰ δίκτυα, ἠκολοίθησαν αὐτῷ. Kati προβὰς ἐκεῖθεν, εἶδεν ἄλλους δύο ἀδελφοὺς, ᾿Ιάκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ μετὰ Ζεβεδαίου τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτῶν, καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς" οἱ δὲ εὐθέως [ἀφέντες] τὸ πλοῖον καὶ τὸν πατέρα αὐτῶν, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ. Καὶ [περιῆγεν] ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς, διδάσκων ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασι- λείας, καὶ θεραπεύων πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ πᾶσαν MAAAKIAN ἐν τῷ λαῷ. καὶ [ἀπῆλθεν] *2) ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ ἔ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν καὶ προσή- νεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, καὶ δαιμονιζομένους, καὶ σεληνιαζομένους, καὶ παραλυτικούς" καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς. καὶ ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοὶ ἀπὸ τῆς αλιλαίας καὶ Δεκαπόλεως, καὶ “Ἱεροσολύμων καὶ ᾿Ιουδαίας, καὶ πέραν τοῦ ‘lopdavov. e.g. Deut. vii. 15, xxviii. 61, from nbn ‘*delinivit, demulsit,” and so μαλακὸν ἐποίησε: as if wadaxds= “‘languidus.” Is. xxxix. 1, non 3 you ἤκουσεν ὅτι 15. The confessedly obscure passage Isaiah viii. 23 andix. ris made hopelessly unintelligible in V.A. We have here a literal translation of it. ὁδὸν θαλάσσης] for ὉΠ 774, which is correctly rendered e οὐ in our Auth. Vers. ‘*by the way of the sea.” χώρα καὶ σκιὰ θανάτου for Γ ΟΣ Ysa *¢in the land of the shadow of death : a purely Hebrew idiom ; as in Ps. xxiii. 4, xliv. 19, cvii. το, Jerem. ii. 6, derived, apparently, from the idea of death as a dark mountain-barrier casting its gloomy shadow up the long valley through which it must be approached. ; 23. ix. 35. μαλακία in V.A.= ‘bn Ben J ἐμαλακίσθη. The word is found in this sense in Arrian de Ven. VIII. 4, and Xenophon de Ven. Vv. 2, as Schleusner shows. 24. ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ =I] Is. Ixvi. 19. ‘YrwW=rd ὄνομά μου V.A. The Hebrew idiom seems to have influenced the LXX. in their frequent use of ἀκοὴ in this sense: though it is also found in clas- sical authors. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 8 MATTHEW, 'V. CAP. 5 ἼΔΩΝ δὲ τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνέβη fal a n Ὁ . a. \ 2 αὐτοῦ, προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ" καὶ lal , φ \ a , = 3 αὐτοῦ," ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς λέγων, Μακάριοι οἱ πτωχοὶ [τῷ πνεύματι ]" ΓΞ ΤΟΝ ᾽ \ ” = Ν ΄ εἰς τὸ ὄρος" καὶ καθίσαντος Ἅ *avoi~as τὸ στόμα 4 ὅτι αὐτῶν ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. ᾿ μακάριοι οἱ πρᾳεῖς" 5 ὅτι αὐτοὶ κληρονομήσουσι τὴν γῆν. μακάριοι οἱ πενθοῦντες" ὅτι 6 αὐτοὶ παρακληθήσονται. “μακάριοι οἱ [πεινῶντες καὶ διψῶντες] τὴν 7 δικαιοσίνην' ὅτι αὐτοὶ χορτασθήσονται. μακάριοι οἱ ἐλεήμονες" 8 ὅτι αὐτοὶ ἐλεηθήσονται. μακάριοι οἱ καθαροὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ ὅτι αὐτοὶ 9 τὸν Θεὸν ὄψονται. μακάριοι οἱ εἰρηνοποιοί ὅτι αὐτοὶ υἱοὶ Θεοῦ 10 κληθήσονται. μακάριοι οἱ δεδιωγμένοι ἕνεκεν δικαιοσύνης" ὅτι Il αὐτῶν ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. μακάριοί ἐστε, ὅταν ὀνει- δίσωσιν ὑμᾶς καὶ διώξωσι, καὶ *eitwoww* καθ᾽ ὑμῶν πᾶν πονη- 12 ρὸν ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ. χαίρετε καὶ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε, ὅτε ὁ μισθὸς ὑμῶν πολὺς ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς" οἵτως γὰρ ἐδίωξαν τοὺς προφήτας τοὺς πρὸ ὑμῶν. 13 Ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς γῆς" ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἅλας * μωρανθῇ, ἐν τίνι ἢ ἁλισθήσεται; εἰς οὐδὲν ἰσχύει ἔτι, εἰ μὴ βληθὲν ἔξω, κατα- Ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου. , ~ ’ \ I5 οὐ δύναται πόλις κρυβῆναι ἐπάνω ὄρους κειμένη" οὐδὲ aA ς Ν a » , 14 πατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. καίουσι Ν \ \ , λύχνον καὶ τιθέασιν αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τὸν μέδιον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν, ef [a \ a «ς a οὕτως λαμψάτω TO φῶς ὑμῶν 2, a ΕῚ , (da ” € a Ν \ Μ Ν ἔμπροοθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ὕπως ἴδωσιν ὑμῶν τὰ καλὰ ἔργα, καὶ \ / μὴ -“ 5 a 5. Α 16 καὶ λάμπει πᾶσι τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ. a o 2 lal δοξάσωσι τὸν πατέρα ὑμῶν τὸν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. Cap. V. 3, 4. πτωχὸς and ταπεινὸς are used indifferently in V.A. for 13) or ὍΝ) in sense of “" humble, modest, gentle, meek” as opposed to DD “proud:” e.g. 2 Sam. xxii. 28, Ps. xviii. 28, which are two copies of the same hymn; where *)} is rendered by πτωχὸς in the one and ταπει- vos in the other. But the word is much more frequently translated by πτωχὸς, even where the meaning is ‘‘ humility” and not ‘poverty.’ See Trommius. This is an instance in which the Septua- gint use of a word seems to have won for it, by mere force of familiarity, a meaning not its own before, in the popular phrase- ology. See cap. xi. 29, where our Lord, applying to Himself the terms πραὸς and ταπεινὸς τῇ καρδίᾳ, corresponding to the adjectives in vv. 3, 4, bids His foilowers learn of Him and so find peace and bless- ing. Ps, xxxvil. 11, of πραεῖς κληρονομή- σουσι γῆν. 13. μῶρος] -Ξ ἅ11]}], sluggish, slow: hence metaphorically (a) of the mind, “silly, foolish ;” (ὁ) and of taste, ‘insipid, flat :” as fatuus in Latin, with its double mean- ing answering to (a) and (6): and ban (which is primarily ‘“calx tectoria,” or- tar, Ez. xili. 10, 12) signifies in Job vi. 6, ‘“tnsulsum;” and in Threni ii. 14, ‘‘7z72- eptum guiddam,” and is rendered in V.A. ἀφροσύνη. 16. ἔμπροσθεν] ‘in front of,” for ἐνώ- mov ‘*in presence of:” both being equi- valent to yd, which has the two mean- ings, are constantly confused in V. A., and not kept distinct: and so, naturally, and as might be expected, in N.T.; e.g. L. i. 17 ἐνώπιον for ἔμπροσθεν, M. xi. 27, Xvil. 2. ᾿Εναντίον also which corre- sponds to ΣΡ) ‘“‘against,” is similarly mis- placed in Mark ii. 12, instead of ἐνώπιον ; whereas in Matt. xxiii. 14 we have éu- προσθεν instead of ἐναντίον. This seems to be peculiar to V.A. and N.T. Neither Grimm nor Schleusner, nor Liddell and Scott, give any instance, MATTHEW, V. Μὴ νομίσητε ὅτι [ἦλθον καταλῦσαι] τὸν νόμον ἢ τοὺς προ- 17 φήτας" οὐκ ἦλθον καταλῦσαι, ἀλλὰ πληρῶσαι. 17—24. 9 ἀμὴν Ἐ con fod Ἃ / is >? \ A c a IA a x , / ὑμῖν, ἕως av παρέλθη ὁ ovpavcs καὶ ἡ γῆ, ἰῶτα ἕν ἢ μία κεραία 3 ‘\ f ’ \ “a , “ ΩΝ , οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου, ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται. [ὃς ἐὰν οὖν λύσῃ] μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων καὶ διδάξῃ bs Ἁ ᾽ , > , οὕτως τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ἐλάχιστος a » A, a 2] Δ ἔ Ἂ, , Ὁ τῶν οὐρανῶν ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ποιήσῃ καὶ διδάξῃ, οὗτος σεται Ἐ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν. Ἐ κληθήσεται ἢ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ Ἐμέγας κληθή- , \ Ὁ fal [7 03. A λέγω yap υμῖν, UTL ἐαν μὴ , ς ΄ «ς a a an περισσεύσῃ ἡ δικαιοσύνη ὑμῶν πλεῖον τῶν γραμματέων καὶ Da- “ ᾽ \ > » fa) 3 \ . ta » a sien ov μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς THY βασιλείαν τῶν pial ash ’Hxov- σατε ὅτι ἐρρήθη [rots ἀρχαίοις], Οὐ φονεύσεις" ds δ᾽ ἂν φονεύσῃ, ἔνοχος ἔσται τῇ κρίσει. A ἰδελ, A , “Ὁ y TO aoe φῷ αυτου, ενοχος ἔσται τῇ κρίσει" ᾿ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ * ῥακὰ, ἢ \ , ld a μωρὲ, ἔνοχος ἔσται * eis τὴν γέενναν τοῦ πυρός. "Eye δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ὑργιξόμϑιος 22 ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπῃ TO ἔνοχος ἔσται τῷ συνεδρίῳ: ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴ χος τῴ νεδρίῳ᾽ ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπῃ φέ \ δῶ , Sk \ θ ΄ 3 a 67 Ἂν ς pys TO δωρὸν σου ἐπὶ TO θυσιαστηρίον, KaKkeL μνησθῃς OTL oO , i a a -“ Ἂ ἀδελφός σου ἔχει τὶ κατὰ σοῦ, ἄφες ἐκεῖ τὸ δῶρόν σου ἔμπροσθεν 24 a “ ἐς ἢ a a 7 a τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου, καὶ ὕπαγε, πρῶτον διαλλάγηθι τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, in classical authors, οἵ ἔμπροσθεν ‘‘in sight of.” 18, ἀμὴν] never used in this sense by V.A.: seldom put at all as a Greek word: generally rendered by γένοιτο. 19. ὃς ἐὰν λύσῃ] I mark once for all this use of ἐὰν, so frequent in N.T., as indicative of deviation from pure Greek style. 22. ῥακὰ] from Heb. pI evacuart, or P21 conspuit: each of them suggesting contempt and insult. D3n ) oor DN j2 Ἅ] the ravine under Mount Zion, where was nana or nani nina, spoken of 2 Kings xxiii. 10 and Jerem. vii. 31; the ‘‘locus combus- tionis” (Gesenius), the ‘furnace’ or **fire” sacred to Molech, the fire-shrine, where the children passed through the fire: which was desecrated by Josiah, and made the place for burning the filth of the city, carcases of criminals, and the offal of the victims sacrificed in the Tem- ple, brought down into it by the great sewers recently discovered. The name γέ-εννα τοῦ πυρὸς, ‘* The flaming Gehenna,” would have been appropriate, in the days of its honour and dishonour alike. The loathsome task of burning the garbage was probably performed by convicts, employ- ed, both in ancient and modern times, as scavengers of great cities: asin Spain and Portugal till quite recently. Hence the force of ἔνοχος eis τὴν γέενναν τοῦ πυρός. **Obnoxius poenze usque ad Gehennam ardentem.” Our Lord names three degrees of offence, deserving of citation before a recognized tribunal, of Jess or greater jurisdiction, naming in the last case, not the tribunal (as in the others) but the penalty. We must carefully note the difference of construction: ἔνοχος κρίσει (a), συνεδρίῳ (6ὴ, els γέενναν (ε). The latter can- not be considered as equivalent to the dative yeévva,—so ἔνοχος (in c) must be taken alone, as “ poenze obnoxius.” InV.A. it stands, I believe, always alone (exce ot in two cases: Deut. xix. τὸ [ΠῚ Π XN?) dD) ey " . ‘and there shall : not be upon thee an onilt of blood,” οὐκ ἔσται ἐν σοὶ αἵματι ἔνοχος, ‘there ‘shall not be in the midst of thee any one liable to punishment by reason of blood,” i. e. ‘ouilty of manslaughter ;” and Gen. xxvi. 11, TD) ND, θανάτῳ ἔνοχος ἔσται, morti obnoxius erit) : Schl. gives three mean- ings: (1) ὑποκείμενος. Heb. ii. 15, ἔνοχος δουλείας. (2) ὑπεύθυνος, as above, and Mk. iii. 29. (3) ὑπαίτιος, as 1 Cor. xi. 27, ἔνοχος τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Κυρίου, and James li. 10, πάντων ἔνοχος. But throughout N.T. its construction is very irregular, and it appears to take genitive or dative indifferently. γὰρ λέγω 18 ἐὰν οὖν προσ- 23 25 καὶ τότε ἐλθὼν πρόσφερε τὸ δῶρόν σου. 26 καὶ εἰς φυλακὴν βληθήσῃ. 27 ἕως ἂν ἀποδῷς τὸν ἔσχατον κοδράντην. 3 ‘ \ Ψ Ἔν ὦ σὰ vA ta) ς Eyo δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, OTL πᾶς ὃ 10 MATTHEW, V. 25—33. v ᾽ lel - -Ὗ [ἴσθι εὐνοῶν] τῷ ἀντι- ὃ ἐ \ “ “ 3 » lal “ὃ lel ᾽ αὐτοῦ" \ITOTE σε ἱκῷ σου ταχὺ, ἕως OTOUV εἰ ἐν Τῇ οὐῳ μετ vo μὴ κι oF ’ a A \ ς ’ a A of / παραδῷ ὁ ἀντίδικος τῷ κριτῇ, Kal ὁ κριτής σε παραδῷ τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ, - >’ / ’ , 28 τοῖς ἀρχαίοις, Ov μοιχεύσεις. [βλέπων γυναῖκα] πρὸς τὸ ἐπιθυμῆσαι αὐτῆς, ἤδη ἐμοίχευσεν αὐτὴν ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, οὐ μὴ ἐξέλθῃς ἐκεῖθεν Ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἐρρήθη 29 ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ. εἰ δὲ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ὁ δεξιὸς * σκανδαλίζει ἢ a ’ : ἢ vA » σε, ἔξελε αὐτὸν καὶ βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ" συμφέρει γάρ σοι [ἵνα ἀπό- ἃ lal aA a AN A , a 3 ληται] ἕν τῶν μελῶν σου, καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου βληθῇ ᾿ εἰς ! » 3 \ 30 γέενναν. καὶ εἰ ἡ δεξιά σου χεὶρ σκανδαλίζει σε, ἔκκοψον αὐτὴν \ , a Ὡ νι a, a ͵ 7 > 7 AY a δῦ καὶ βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ συμφέρει γάρ σοι ἵνα ἀπόληται ἕν τῶν μελών 31 32 33 \ , 7 = \ fel , > / Ψ 0 σου, Kal μὴ ὁλὸν TO σῶμα σοὺ εἰς γεενναν ἀπελῦθῇ. ¢ A Lol , 9 Ἔρρήθη δὲ, ὃς ἂν ἀπολύσῃ τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, δότω αὐτῇ ἀποστάσιον. > aA \ * / ΄ τ αὐτοῦ, παρεκτὸς “λόγου πορνείας, ἐὰν ἀπολελυμένην γαμήσῃ, μοιχᾶται. - ἃ x 3 a "Eyo δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, OTL ὃς ἂν ἀπολύσῃ THY γυναῖκα ποιεῖ αὐτὴν μουιχευθῆναι" καὶ ὃς Πάλιν ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἐρρήθη a ᾽ ΄, ’ 5) , > ὃ δὲ a K / \ τοις αρχαιοίς, Οὐκ επιορκησειίς, ATTOOWTDELS € τῷ upl@ TOUS 29. In the parallel passage, Mk. ix. 43, 44, we have the additional descrip- tion, ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν ov τελευτᾷ Kal τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται. Compare Isai. lxvi. 24. Ν.Α. ἥξει πᾶσα σὰρξ τοῦ προσκυνῆσαι ἐνώπιον ἐμοῦ ἐν Ἱερουσαλὴμ εἶπε Κύριος. Καὶ ἐξελεύσονται καὶ ὄψονται τὰ κῶλα τῶν ἀνθρώπων τῶν παραβεβηκότων ἐν ἐμοὶ, 12 DYWEM. ὁ γὰρ σκὡληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευ- τήσει καὶ τὸ πῦρ αὐτῶν οὐ σβεσθήσεται, καὶ ἔσονται εἰς ὅρασιν πάσῃ σαρκὶ, PSV ἡ" ΠῚ, LXX. seem to have had iN, Note the use of εἰμὲ εἰς for 2 MI = γίγ- voua. Comp. Dan. xii. 2, where 814 is ὀνειδισμὸν in V.A., ‘‘shame and ever- lasting contempt,” ‘‘abominatio.” The carcases of offenders against God were to be seen by all who should come up to Jeru- salem, devoured by worms, rotting away, or consumed by a fire kept constantly burning,—apparently in γέεννα, the ra- vine of Hinnom ‘ outside” the city: verse 22. The horrible and loathsome sight, ever before their eyes, day and night, with all its foul accompaniments of smell and sound, where the bodies of transgressors against God or man, exposed to ‘‘ shame and contempt,” suffered the extreme pe- nalty of their crimes, suggested naturally the idea of the place οἱ torment in Hades, recognized as the doom of sinners by our Lord, x. 28, ΧΙ, 33, Τὰ x1. 5 eves more especially as Daniel used the same word in describing the future doom of the wicked. Whether the particular passage before us here (verses 29, 30) refers to punishment of ¢47s world or the next, may be thought doubtful, as it makes no allusion to the soul. It may possibly contain only the counsel to de- stroy an offending member,—remove the cause of temptation and instrument of some besetting sin,—to prevent any chance of its leading to such crime, as would entail the death of a criminal and subsequent exposure to worm and fire in the reeking pit of Gehenna. A counsel of worldly prudence, as vv. 25, 26; capable, no doubt, of a higher and spiritual application; but not, in the first instance, necessarily and essentially in- volving it. 32. A. w.]= NAT I, “the matter of adultery,” ‘‘the case of...;” as Phil. iv. 15 els λόγον δόσεως = TAT by a common Hebrew idiom, here literally translated. Grimm gives vatio as the meaning of λό- γος. and quotes many passages from class. authors; but in all these λόγος stands alone, with no genitive, as here: e.g. ἐκ τίνος λόγου; τίνι δικαίῳ λόγῳ;... This does not cover our phrase, which is sim- ply Ifebraic. MATTHEW, V: 34—VI. τ. ΠῚ ὥρκους cov. ᾿γὼ δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν μὴ ὀμόσαι ὅλως, μήτε *ev τῷ 34 xe ᾽ a θ , 3 \ a Θ ῦ" μ 3 a “4 ἢ] [ 5 / - οὐρανῷ, ὅτι θρόνος ἐστὶν τοῦ Θεοῦ" μήτε ἐν τῇ γῇ, ὅτι ὑποπόδιόν 35 > a a , a. / > c , ¢ , > \ a ἐστιν τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ" μήτε [εἰς] “lepoodAuma, ὅτι πόλις ἐστὶν TOU / / a a f , μεγάλου βασιλέως" μήτε ἐν TH κεφαλῇ σου ὀμόσῃς, ὅτι ov δύνασαι 36 / \ a lal a μίαν τρίχα λευκὴν ἢ μέλαιναν ποιῆσαι. ἔσται δὲ ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν, 37 \ \ Δ ᾿ Ἁ ‘ \ i} a aA ναὶ val, ov οὔ τὸ δὲ περισσὸν τούτων ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ ἐστιν. ᾽ , vA ? \ 9 a AF Ηκούσατε ὅτι ἐρρήθη, ᾿Οφθαλμὸν ἀντὶ ὀφθαλμοῦ, καὶ ὀδόντα ἀντὶ 38 5 f > \ \ / c -“ \ , a “ -ς % 7, ὀδόντος. “Eye δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν μὴ ἀντιστῆναι TO πονηρῷ ἀλλ᾽ ὅστις 39 \ / a σε ῥαπίσει ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιάν cov σιαγόνα, στρέψον αὐτῷ Kal τὴν », Ν a Col a a ἄλλην" καὶ τῷ θέλοντί σοι κριθῆναι Kal τὸν χιτῶνά σου λαβεῖν, 40 Ὑ > an \ ‘ 68 “ a \ “ ΕῚ , Xr if ἄφες αὐτῷ Kal TO ἱμάτιον: Kai ὥστις σε ἀγγαρεύσενι μίλιον 4 a ὦ κα 2 ᾽ a U ’ a ἕν, ὕπαγε μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ δύο. τῷ αἰτοῦντί σε δός" καὶ τὸν θέλοντα 42 ’ x a a ἀπὸ σοῦ δανείσασθαι μὴ ἀποστραφῇς. ᾿Ηκούσατε ὅτι ἐρρήθη, 43 7A , \ x LA \ / \ 3 θ , γαπήσεις τὸν πλησιόν σου, καὶ μισήσεις τὸν ἐχθρόν σου. 44 > lal a a Eyo δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀγαπῶτε τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑμῶν, καὶ mpocev- / a ὅπως γένησθε viol τοῦ πα- ἐπὶ 45 \ \ > ‘ \ / > \ , A ’ / πονηροὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς, καὶ βρέχει ἐπὶ δικαίους καὶ ἀδίκους. χεσθε ὑπὲρ τῶν διωκόντων ὑμᾶς" \ ¢ a n ’ Ε] aay “ \ [ἢ ΕῚ a > 7 TPOS ὑμῶν τοῦ EV οὐρανοῖς" OTL τὸν Ἥλιον αὐτοῦ ανατέλλει > , a an - ἐὰν γὰρ ἀγαπήσητε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας ὑμᾶς, τίνα μισθὸν ἔχετε; 46 ν᾽ \ \ « fal “ a \ +N ’ Ul \ οὐχὶ Kal οἱ τελῶναι οὕτως ποιοῦσι; Καὶ ἐὰν ἀσπάσησθε τοὺς 47 » ‘ ς a / U) Ki a ’ \ δ ς 5 \ ἀδελφοὺς ὑμῶν μόνον, [τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε :] οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ ἐθνικοὶ KY \ 2 Ἁ n ς θ * > ς Lal / ef ' Ν 4 fal TO αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν; “εἐσεσθεῖ οὖν ὑμεῖς τέλειοι, WOTTEP ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν 48 ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τέλειός ἐστι. a [IIPOSEXETE] δὲ τὴν δικαιοσύνην ὑμῶν μὴ ποιεῖν ἔμππροσθεν & 534. ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ] 3 yay), ‘“Guravit 15. V.A. has ἔσονται: our Engl. Version ger:” rendered literally here, as in V.A, ¢vative rightly, ‘Let the words of my passim: e.g. DION xda yaw), Jerem. ν. 7, ὥμννον ἐν τοῖς οὐκ οὖσι θεοῖς. Ido not understand the force of the preposi- tion in εἰς Ιεροσόλυμα. Grimm explains ‘fanimo in Jerusalem directo,” very un- satisfactorily. 37. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ] ‘‘on the side of,” ‘*under the category of,’”’ as Gal. iii. 9, To, 12, of ἐκ πίστεως, the faith party, ἐξ ἔργων νόμου, ‘Son the side of religious works,” ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως, ‘the Jewish religion is not a rule or system of faith.” 1 John ii. 21, πᾶν ψεῦδος ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἔστι, ‘‘there can be no lie in the ranks of the truth:” where mark He- braism πᾶν y. οὐκ = eee b5 i 48. ἔσεσθε) Future for imperative (or optative), a common Hebraism. Ps. xix. mouth...” Cap. VI. τ. This is the only instance of προσέχειν alone followed by μή. The general uses in the N.T. are (a) προσέχειν amd, infra vii. 15, x. 7, and L. xx. 46, which is found in Apocrypha; or (6) προσέχειν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπὸ, L. xiie 13 or (c) προσέχειν ἑαυτοῖς, L. xvii. 3, Acts v. 35, which both occur constantly in V.A. for WW, 2 Chr.xxv,13, or Twi, Deut. iv. 23, iv. 93 Gen. xxiv. 6. This usage seems un- known to class. authors. Many MSS. have ἐλεημοσύνην. V.A. for ΠΡ ΜΞ, Dan. iv. 24, has ἐν ἐλεημο- σύναις. Hence we gather that ἐλεημο- σύνη, an essential element in Jewish δικαι- οσύνη, had come to be used as equivalent to it: a part for the whole. 12 MATTHEW, VI. 2—18. τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς" εἰ δὲ μήγε, μισθὸν οὐκ 2 ἔχετε παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ ὑμῶν τῷ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. ὅταν οὖν ποιῇς ἐλεημοσύνην, μὴ σαλπίσῃς ἔμπροσθέν σου, ὥσπερ οἱ ὑποκριταὶ ποιοῦσιν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ ἐν ταῖς ῥύμαις, ὅπως δοξασθῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπέχουσι τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν. 3 σοῦ δὲ ποιοῦντος ἐλεημοσύνην, μὴ γνώτω ἡ ἀριστερά σου [τί] ποιεῖ καὶ ὁ Καὶ ὅταν 4ἡ δεξιά σου, ὅπως ἦ σου ἡ ἐλεημοσύνη ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ; 5 πατήρ σου ὁ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ, ἀποδώσει σοι. προσεύχησθε, οὐκ ἔσεσθε ὥσπερ' οἱ ὑποκριταὶ, ὅτι φιλοῦσιν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν ἑστῶτες προσεύχε- σθαι, ὅπως [φανῶσιν] τοῖς ἀνθρώποις" 6 χουσι τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν. ᾽ \ / 6 -“ » , ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, aTre- > Ἁ σὺ δὲ ὅταν προσείχη, εἴσελθε εἰς τὸ -“ , al , TAMIEION σου, καὶ κλείσας τὴν θύραν σου, πρόσευξαι τῷ πατρί σου lal 5 a a. \ ¢ be ¢ ὔ > a n τῷ ἐν TO κρυπτῷ καὶ ὁ πατήρ cov ὁ βλέπων ἐν TO κρυπτῷ, 7 ἀποδώσει σοί. [οἱ ἐθνικοί] ΤΡροσευχόμενοι δὲ μὴ βαττολογήσητε, δοκοῦσι yap ἜΣ ὙΠ a en 5 \ ς ν μὴ οὖν ὁμοιωθῆτε αὐτοῖς" οἶδεν γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ οὑμῶν ὧν χρείαν ἔχετε, πρὸ τοῦ ὑμᾶς αἰτῆσαι αὐτόν. οὕτως οὖν προσεύχεσθε ὑμεῖς" ἸΙάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ἁγιασθήτω τὸ 10 ὄνομά σου ἐλθέτω ἡ βασιλεία σου γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου, ὡς * N& > \ les \ ” (ss a \ zt , δὸ καὶ ἢ ἐπὶ γῆς" τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν [ἐπιούσιον] δὸς ξ fr , — \ ΕΣ Ὁ tal * \ > nv , δε € a «ς A I2 piv σήμερον καὶ ages nw “Ta opet ματι μων, ὡς Kat Ι ς a ’ / * a ah λέ * € oS \ \ εἰ / ς a 3 ἡμεῖς ἀφίεμεν ἕτοῖς ὀφειλέταις ἢ ἡμῶν" καὶ μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς ° Qn -“ a A 14 εἰς πειρασμὸν, ἀλλὰ ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ. “ 5 WOTTEp an > A ὅτι *éy τῇ πολυλογίᾳἜ αὐτῶν ὃ εἰσακουσθήσονται. ε} ν᾽ Lal II εν ovpavo, *Eav yap ? f \ ἀφήσει καὶ ‘ > a - ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις a A f 15 τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, οὐδὲ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἀφήσει τὰ παραπτώ- ματα ὑμῶν. 16 σκυθρωποί" Ἃ a a ? , 3, a ἀφῆτε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, © LA ¢ \ e a [ 4 τὶ Ud ὑμῖν ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ οὐράνιος" “Ὅταν δὲ νηστεύητε, μὴ γίνεσθε ὥσπερ οἱ ὑποκριταὶ ω) TE, μὴ Y ρ ν -“ -“ αφανίξζουσι] γὰρ τὰ πρόσωπα αὐτῶν, ὅπως φανῶσι ρ τὰ πρ ; τοῖς ἀνθρώποις νηστεύοντες" 17 μισθὸν αὐτῶν. ’ \ la ¢ - > F \ αμὴν λέγω υμῖν, ἀπέχουσιν τὸν x , σὺ δὲ νηστεύων ἀλειψαί σου τὴν κεφαλὴν, καὶ τὸ > / / ὔ - [72 ‘ an Lal ,’ / , 18 προσωπὸν cov νίψαι ὅπως μὴ φανῇς τοῖς ἀνθρώποις νηστεύων, 6. Βάδιζε λαός μου, εἴσελθε εἰς τὰ τα- μιεῖα σοῦ, Is. xxvi. 20. V.A. for OY 12 yi. ΝΞ. which probably accounts for the use a the word in N.T. 7. ἐν with dative for ‘ cause, cause of.” 12. V.A. does not use ὀφείλημα as =dpapria. But the Rabbins in their Targums employed this phraseology.— eee Schleusner quotes Gen. xx. 9 doy mason paraphrased by 82) ΔΤ, and Ps. xxv. 18 *ONONM rendered ‘ain in the Targum, ΔΓ being Chaldee for debt. Also Gen. xviii. 20, Ex. xxxii. 32. Hence we see that the idea of siz as debt was familiar to the Jews; and our Lord recognizes it in His parables. MATTHEW, VI: ἀλλὰ τῷ πατρί σου τῷ ἐν TO KpUhaiw’ Kal ὁ Γ᾿ ρ « & ρ « ΤΟ τ 8.3: 13 \ c πατήρ σου ὁ βλέ- a / ’ , πων ἐν τῷ κρυφαίῳ, ἀποδώσει σοι. \ , ΓΉΨῪ \ > \ a a A 7 Ἁ Μὴ θησαυρίζετε ὑμῖν θησαυροὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, Grou σὴς καὶ 19 a ᾽ / Ἂν / / \ / βρῶσις ἀφανίζει, καὶ ὅπου κλέπται διορύσσουσι Kal κλέπτουσι" θη- 50 a \ ’ a / Yj \ v a σαυρίξετε δὲ ὑμῖν θησαυροὺς ἐν οὐρανῷ, ὕπου οὔτε σὴς οὔτε βρῶσις > / \ @ , > , OL , [7 ἀφανίζει, καὶ ὅπου κλέπται οὐ διορύσσουσιν οὐδὲ κλέπτουσιν. ὅπου 21 a f Ν γάρ ἐστιν ὃ θησαυρός σου, ἐκεῖ ἔσται καὶ ἡ καρδία σου. Ὁ , rn δ ’ / ς λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν ὁ ὀφθαλμός: ἐὰν οὖν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου c ΟΣ 5 “ Ἁ a 4 X ” a ,,\ \ ες > f ἁπλοῦς 7, ὅλον TO σῶμά σου φωτεινὸν ἔσται: ἐὰν δὲ ὁ ἐφθαλμός \ 3 ¢ a fy σου πονηρὸς ἢ, ὅλον TO σῶμά σου σκοτεινὸν ἔσται. , AY \ , τὸ ἐν σοὶ σκότος ἐστὶ, τὸ σκότος πόσον ; > 53 ἣν an εἰ οὖν TO φῶς οὐδεὶς δύναται δυσὶ , , Br \ \ Ὁ , \ \ > Kuplols δουλεύειν ἢ yap TOV EVA μισηῆσει, KAL TOV ετέρον aya- ͵ πα, ee |N 2 a \ ΓΤ, , moe ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται, καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει. διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ μεριμνᾶτε lol , \ an Θεῷ δουλεύειν Kal μαμμωνᾷ. οὐ δύνασθε a a - - Vf / \ / / in δὲ a , ς - τῇ ψυχῇ ὑμῶν, [τί φάγητε] καὶ τί πίητε" μηδὲ τῷ σώματι ὑμῶν fr 3 , tI \ c \ at a) a a Ν Ἀ “, τί ἐνδύσησθε. οὐχὶ ἡ ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστι τῆς τροφῆς, καὶ τὸ σῶμα rn > , > , > \ \ a ’ lo) “ > τοῦ ἐνδύματος; ἐμβλέψατε εἰς τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ὅτι οὐ σπείρουσιν, οὐδὲ θερίζουσιν, οὐδὲ συνάγουσιν εἰς ἀποθήκας, καὶ ὃ \ Θ Ὁ“ e 3. ‘a / ᾽ ΓΞ > id tal a , πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ οὐράνιος τρέφει αὐταὶ οὐχ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλον διαφέρετε 22 25 ᾽ a / baer € a a , a 8. πὰ Ν ς / αὐτῶν; Tis δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν μεριμνῶν δύναται προσθεῖναι ἐπὶ THY ἡλικίαν 27 a a \ , , a αὐτοῦ πῆχυν ἕνα; καὶ περὶ ἐνδύματος Ti μεριμνᾶτε ; καταμάθετε τὰ , a ’ a a 49. ) Ε ᾽ - ΩΝ , κρίνα τοῦ ὠγροῦ [πῶς] αὐξάνουσιν᾽ οὐ κοπιῶσιν, οὐδὲ νήθουσιν. lal f ᾽ πὴ la an ΄ “ λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδὲ Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ περιε- t ς A “ βάλετο ὡς ἕν τούτων. \ / fal ἴω Uy εἰ δὲ TOV χόρτον τοῦ ἀγροῦ, σήμερον ὄντα, "» , ς sy καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν, > A r id a > la \ > ' / οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς, OALYOTTLOTOL; μὴ οὖν μεριμνήσητε λέγον- , τ / x / / vx 4 , , \ τες, Ti φάγωμεν, ἢ τί πίωμεν, ἢ τί περιβαλώμεθα; πάντα yap 32 a a 3 3 a ,’ ταῦτα τὰ ἔθνη ἐπιζητοῦσιν" οἷδεν yap ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ οὐράνιος ὅτι χρήζετε τούτων ἁπάντων. ζητεῖτε δὲ πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ n \ \ ὃ , » “, \ fo! , * θ ’ ΕἼ Θεοῦ καὶ τὴν Οοἰκαιοσυνὴν αὐτου, καὶ TAVTA TAVTA πτρροστεσησεται 22. ἁπλότης Ν.Α. for OF) ‘‘integritas.” 2 Kings xv. 11, Prov. xix. I. 33. προστεθήσεται] here and L. xii. 31, in sense of ‘‘come in aftérwards,” ‘‘ come next,” as Acts xii. 3, προσέθετο συλλαβεῖν Πέτρον: ‘he seized Peter afterwards.” L.xx. 11. Always used by V. A. for ἢ) insame sense. Here the /w¢wre stands for imperative or permissive, a usage not un- common in Hebrew; and vice versa. Is. ly. 2, ‘* Hearken unto me and eat:” i. e. “γε shall eat ;” and the commandments in Ex. xx.—V.A. frequently renders He- brew imperative by future: e.g. Is. vi. 9, a passage very loosely translated in it: see infra, cap. xiii. 14—16. My conclusion is that this verse does not contain a promise of the supply of our bodily and temporal wants, as the consequence of our devotion to God's service (as our English Version seems to imply); but a permission from the mouth of our great Teacher and Law- giver to prowide for ¢Aem after we have first discharged our duties to God; ‘‘seek ye first the kingdom of God and His righteousness, and then all these claims of the world and the flesh may allowably and innocently be attended to:” the life of the soul to be the first care and thought, the life of the hody the second. 28 30 31 99 14 MATTHEW, VI. 34—VII. 19. 34 ὑμῖν" μὴ οὖν μεριμνήσητε εἰς τὴν αὔριον ἡ γὰρ αὔριον μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς. ἀρκετὸν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ [ἡ κακία] αὐτῆς. CAP. δ ® \ , * r ἐν @ yap κρίματι ἢ κρίνετε, ig MH κρίνετε, ἵνα μὴ κριθῆτε. 3 κριθήσεσθε. καὶ ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν. Τί δὲ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν 4 δὲ ἀδελφῷ σου, "Ades ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου, \ 2 \ ς \ 3 a ’ a « \ ” - 5 καὶ ἰδοὺ ἡ δοκὸς ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σου; ὑποκριτὰ, ἔκβαλε πρῶτον > Ὁ an 0 Q Ἃ lol ὃ \ ’ a x a > a a ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ Coxov ov κατανοεῖς ; ἢ πῶς ἐρεῖς τῷ τὴν δοκὸν ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου, καὶ τότε διαβλέψεις ἐκβαλεῖν τὸ 6 κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ cov. Μὴ δῶτε τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσί μηδὲ βάλητε τοὺς μαργαρίτας ὑμῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν 3 a # * αὐτῶν, καὶ , “ χοίρων, μήποτε κωταπατήσωσιν αὐτοὺς * ἐν τοῖς ποσὶν 7 «ἡ (¢ A > a εὐ Ud ξ fal “ Ἃ στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς. Αἰτεῖτε, καὶ δοθήσεται ὑμῖν. ζητεῖτε, καὶ , μὰ ΕῚ Ἢ c a a A , 8 εὑρήσετε" κρούετε, Kal ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν πᾶς yap ὁ αἰτῶν λαμβάνει, fal lal , > A x ο καὶ ὃ ζητῶν εὑρίσκει, καὶ τῷ κρούοντι ἀνοιγήσεται. ἢ τίς ἐξ A aA 2 ξ ey 5 nr Ui \ ms! , ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, [ὃν αἰτήσει ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἄρτον, μὴ λίθον ἐπιδώ- ’ io Ἂ \ > θὺ 5 f \ v = ὃ τ ᾽ a Z τὶ τὰ 10 σεν αὐτῷ ἢ καὶ ἰχθὺν αἰτήσει, μὴ ὄφιν ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ :) εἰ οὖν al \ A Ψ \ ΄ - / 11 ὑμεῖς, πονηροὶ ὄντες, οἴδατε δόματα ὠγαθὰ διδόναι τοῖς τέκνοις a Ὁ id lal ¢ a ? a Ὁ ὑμῶν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον 6 πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς δώσει ἀγαθὰ a an , > 7 x , “ A ctw 12 τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν Ilavta οὖν ὅσα ἂν θέλητε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν ¢ \ ς A a ’ wus Pe at , 3 ς οἱ ἄνθρωποι, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε αὐτοῖς" [οὗτος͵ γάρ ἐστιν ὃ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται. a Lal , - (v4 aA « Ud \ 03 Eicé\@ate διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης" OTL πλατεῖα ἡ πύλη, Kab > 4 «ς egy ς 5 , > ‘ ? , \ ! 3 εὐρύχωρος ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν, καὶ πολλοί εἰσιν δἰ φοϑ , ? ΝΡ Or \, ae , \ ͵ € κῶν 14 οἱ εἰσερχόμενοι δι’ αὐτῆς" ὅτι στενὴ ἡ πύλη, καὶ τεθλιμμένη ἡ ὁδὸς , ! ’ \ «ς € ’ , ἡ ἀπάγουσα eis τὴν ζωὴν, καὶ ὀλίγοι εἰσὶν οἱ εὑρίσκοντες αὐτήν. ͵ A lal iA ” Ν Ὁ A 15 TIpocéyete δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν ψευδοπροφητῶν, οἵτινες ἔρχονται πρὸς ὑμᾶς la > 7 , \ 16 *év ἐνδύμασι προβάτων," ἔσωθεν δέ εἰσιν λύκοι ἅρπαγες. * ἀπὸ 3 s Si , ΕΣ 7 , τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς" μήτι συλλέγουσιν ἀπὸ “ \ Ey ’ \ / nq iA A , 17 ἀκανθῶν σταφυλὴν, ἢ ἀπὸ τριβόλων σῦκα; οὕτως πᾶν δένδρον ἀγαθὸν καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖ τὸ δὲ σαπρὸν δένδρον καρποὺς a > / > \ 18 πονηροὺς ποιεῖ. ov δύναται δένδρον ἀγαθὸν καρποὺς πονηροὺς - Ἂ, na a 19 ποιεῖν, οὐδὲ δένδρον σαπρὸν καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖν. πᾶν δένδρον of the mote and beam: the words are not 24.) ἡ γάριει.- ] ‘‘for the morrow will found in V.A. have to care for its own matters,” ‘‘is sure to have,” ‘will certainly have,” “‘ cares enough of its own.” κακία] V.A. for ‘‘ vexatio, cerum- ha.’ 1 Kings xx. 28, Eecl. xi, Am: iii.6. Is the word ever thus used in pure Greek ? Cap. VII. 2. Instances are given by Lightfoot of an old Rabbinical proverb 9- Confessedly ungrammatical. 12. οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ν. κ. ὁ. 7.] A strange construction utterly at variance with ordi- nary forms. 16. ἀπὸ] =}! used to express cause; In xviii. 7, instrument or manner: He- brew rather than Greek: Gen. ix. 11; Ps, Ixxvi. 7. MATTHEW, VII. 20—28. 15 μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν, ἐκκώπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται. ἄραγε 20 ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς. Οὐ πᾶς ὁ λέγων μοι, Κύριε, Κύριε, εἰσελεύσεται εἰς * τὴν 21 βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν" Ἐ ἀλλ᾽ ὁ ποιῶν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. πολλοὶ ἐροῦσίν μοι ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, Κύριε, 22 Κύριε, οὐ [τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι] προεφητεύσαμεν, καὶ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι δαιμόνια ἐξεβάλομεν, καὶ τῷ σῷ ὀνύματι ᾿ δυνάμεις ᾿ πολλὰς * * / OTL* οὐδέποτε ἔγνων 23 Πᾶς οὖν 24 , \ lal ᾽ \ c / ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους, Kal ποιεῖ αὐτοὺς, ὁμοιώσω > , \ f ς Ά ? Lal ἐποιήσαμεν; καὶ τότε [ὁμολογήσω] αὐτοῖς, a a an ΑΨ , ΝΥ ’ / ὑμᾶς" ἀποχωρεῖτε ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ οἱ ἐργαζόμενον τὴν ἀνομίαν. SiN ᾽ \ , “" > ’ \ ΕΝ > ya \ αὐτὸν ἀνδρὶ φρονίμῳ, ὅστις ὠκοδόμησεν τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿ \ \ lj πέτραν" καὶ κατέβη ἡ βροχὴ καὶ ἦλθον οἱ ποταμοὶ καὶ ἔπνευσαν 25 - , \ ᾽ , ο οἱ ἄνεμοι, καὶ προσέπεσον τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ, καὶ οὐκ ἔπεσεν" τεθε- a c > ’ δ / μελίωτο yap ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν. Kal πᾶς ὁ ἀκούων μου τοὺς λόγους 26 a ς , γ᾽ \ A (vA τούτους, καὶ μὴ ποιῶν αὐτοὺς, ὁμοιωθήσεται ἀνδρὶ μωρῷ, ὕστις ? , \ ΘΝ ’ i 8. ὍΝ \ wv A \ , ς \ ὠκοδόμησε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ THY ἄμμον" καὶ κατέβη ἡ βροχὴ 27 Ἑ v \ Δ καὶ ἦλθον οἱ ποταμοὶ καὶ ἔπνευσαν οἱ ἄνεμοι, καὶ προσέκοψαν ol \ > ς a tet | LU Ἂς τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνη, καὶ ἔπεσεν καὶ ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη. Kat ll >’ lal \ , Uy > la [ἐγένετο] Ore ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοὺς λόγους τούτους, [ἐξεπλήσ- 28 infra cap. xxvl. 72, 74, XXvil. 43 among others. J purposely confine myself to 22. τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι] Here, where we should naturally expect ἐν, we have da- tive alone: not: easy to account for: unless as, in some sense, conveying the idea of instrumentality, though this seems forced and unnatural. And besides, M. very seldom uses dative for this. δυνάμεις] Found once only zz this sense in V.A. for MNDDY Job xxxvii.16. MY, to which Schleusner considers it parallel, is rather the abstract, δύναμις, dower, than its manifestation by a miracle; and be- sides there are no other instances, but that above, of the plural in V.A. In N.T. we have both (a) singular and (6) plural, in this sense: (α) Mk. ix. 39, (ὁ) infra xi. 20, 21, 22, Acts ii. 22. 23. I select ¢4zs instance of ὅτι, ina collocation frequent in N.T., to offer a few remarks on its probable force and meaning, because it has been allowed to remain in the text by Tischendorf, who has so unsparingly eliminated the word elsewhere. I cannot regard it as univer- sally pleonastic or superfluous, or as merely introductory to a quotation or the statement of another person’s opinion, though this, of course, is occasionally its use and meaning, what Grimm calls ‘‘8re recitativum,” specifying this passage and S. Matt., although I might cite the other sacred authors largely. I cannot, in any of these instances, nor in many others, e.g. cap. xix. 8, xxvi. 65, x. 7, xiv. 26, acquiesce in this annihilation of its signi- ficance. Twice, at least, in V.A., Gen. xxviii, 16, xliv. 28, itis given for JS or j28, “‘verily,” in strong asseveration, as emphatic, which would suit all the pas- sages above. Nor may we forget how frequently it is used in V.A. as=%3, in all its various meanings, and that one of those is asseveration, as recognized by lexicographers and by our Auth. Version. Gen. xxix. 33 ‘7! YIDY 3 TONA), καὶ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἤκουσε Kiptos. Josh. ii, 24 PITS ny wD TY [ΠΣ 5. NN, kai εἶπαν, ὅτι παραδέδωκεν ὁ Κύριος πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν ἐν χειρὶ ἡμῶν. Jerem. xxii. 22 WIE) ISD, ὅτι τότε αἰσχυνθήσῃ, “sure- ly then thou shalt be ashamed.” I think therefore that we may claim this meaning for ὅτι in those passages where it mani- festly suits the sense and gives force to the expression. 28. The omission of any conjunction to connect the two verbs, so frequent in 16 MATTHEW, VII. 29—VIII. 14. ¢ 9! a a ’ a, soy s 29 σοντο] οἱ ὄχλοι ἐπὶ TH διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ ἦν yap διδάσκων αὐτοὺς «ς cal rf cap, ws ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς αὐτῶν. 8 KATABANTI δὲ αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἔρους, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι 2 πολλοί καὶ ἰδοὺ λεπρὸς προσελθὼν προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λέγων, Κύριε, 7\ , ΄ , Ι ct 5] , \ an dA 3 ἐὰν θέλῃς, δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι. καὶ ἐκτείνας THY χεῖρα, ἥψατο αὐτοῦ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγων, Θέλω, καθαρίσθητι. καὶ εὐθέως ἐκαθαρίσθη ᾽ A c ΄ \ , 20) ta es VS a “ \ ” a, 4 αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα. Kal λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς, “Opa μηδενὶ εἴπης ᾽ te a a a “ ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προσένεγκε τὸ δῶρον ὃ , an Ἂς » , * 3 wn προσέταξεν Μωσῆς, * ets μαρτύριον ἢ αὐτοῖς. > / lel ‘ A 5 Eice\@ovte δὲ αὐτῷ εἰς Kadapvaovp, προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ἢ , “Ὁ 9 A ia a 6 ἑκατόνταρχος παρακωλῶν αὐτὸν καὶ λέγων, Κύριε, ὁ παῖς μου [βέβληται] ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ παραλυτικὸς, δεινῶς β ζό ὶ Gh τα τῇ οἰκίᾳ ραλυτικὸς, δεινῶς βασανιζόμενος. καὶ / 5 m 2089 a 3 s\ , τ / ὃ λέγειν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ᾿Εγὼ ἐλθὼν θεραπεύσω avtiv. καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ce , ” r ᾽ oN « \ if c \ A , ὁ ἑκατόνταρχος ἔφη, Κύριε, οὐκ εἰμὶ [ἱκανὲς) iva pov ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην ὙΠῸ Ὁ Hoe x , ΒΕ ΤῸΝ t CS ͵ ς . \ 9 εἰσέλθῃς" ἀλλὰ μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ, καὶ ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου. καὶ \ > \ vv ἐφ > «ς Ν 3 / », € > 3 Ν yap ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπός εἶμι [ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν, ἔχων ὑπ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν] στρατι- ’ \ ΄ f , xX , μὲ Sr aS ” ὦτας" καὶ λέγω τούτῳ, ἸΤ]ορεύθητι, καὶ πορεύεται" καὶ ἄλλῳ, "ἔρχου, a “ \ - . 10 καὶ ἔρχεται" καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου, Ποίησον τοῦτο, καὶ ποιεῖ. ᾿Ακούσας A Ges A 2 , \ “- al ’ a ? Ν , ε an δὲ 6 Incods ἐθαύμασεν, καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς ἀκολουθοῦσιν, ᾿Α μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, I ’ ὃ \ Ud ͵ > a lo yr al λέ δὲ Ἐπ... αν I παρ᾽ οὐδενὶ τοσαύτην πίστιν ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ εὗρον. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, 3 Ὁ aA » Ψ if ὅτι πολλοὶ ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ δυσμῶν ἥξουσι, Kal ἀνακλιθήσονται ‘ \ \ ’ a / a -“ μετὰ ᾿Αβραὰμ, καὶ ᾿Ισαὰκ, καὶ ᾿Ιακὼβ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν" € e a / / > , 12 οἱ δὲ viol τῆς βασιλείας ἢ ἐκβληθήσονται εἰς TO σκέτος TO ἐξώ- " > na * ¢ \ \ ς \ an 286 * x 13 Tepov’ ἐκεῖ ἔσται *O κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν cdovtwv.* καὶ if fal a f / « ΕῚ / εἶπεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τῷ ἑκατοντάρχῃ, Ὕπαγε, ws ἐπίστευσας γενηθήτω σοι. καὶ ἰάθη ὁ παῖς αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐκείνῃ. [ an Ν Ss \ 14 Kai ἐλθὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ἸΤέτρου, εἶδεν τὴν πενθερὰν N.T., is due to depravation of style; as also cap. viii. 6, 8, 9, βέβληται for “ eegro- tus decumbit lecto affixus,’’? as Grimm paraphrases it; and ἱκανὸς, ‘‘a sufficiently great person,” “grand enough;” and ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν in accusative. Cap. VIII. 12. The Hebrew idioms, in which 13, in its various derivative or metaphorical significations, is employed, —rendered literally in V.A. by υἱὸς, and in our Auth. V. by ‘‘son” or ‘‘child,”— are so familiar to us, that we very often do not stop to get a clear and definite idea of their meaning: e.g. ‘‘sons of Be- lial,” Deut. xiii. 13, 1 Sam. ii.12, and vids θανάτου, ‘‘death’s child,” doomed to die, 1 Sam. xx. 31, 2 Sam. xii. 5; and infra cap. Xxili. 15 υἱὸς γεέννης, “a child of hell,” and viol τοῦ νυμφῶνος, ix. 15, ‘‘ children of the bride-chamber ;” John xvii. 12, vids ἀπωλείας, ‘‘the son of perdition.” No general rule can be given: each case re- quires its own special consideration. τὸ ox. τὸ €&.| ‘‘the darkness outside,” contrasted with the brilliancy and splen- dour which light up the banquet of the king, referred to in verse 11, and in the Parable of the Marriage Feast, cap. xxii. 1—14. It is aperiphrasis for the place of punishment. ὁ κλ, x. ὃ Bp.] The article here and in L. xiii. 38 seems to imply a well-known form of expression for the misery of the scene: ‘‘¢he wailing...that all have heard of.” Possibly a phrase of some sacred writer that had passed into a proverb. Ps. cxi. 10, τοὺς ὀδόντας αὐτοῦ βρύξει ὁ ἁμαρτωλός. MATTHEW, VIII. 15—34. 17 , fol Ls A / \ “ lel \ , -" αὐτοῦ [βεβλημένην]) καὶ πυρέσσουσαν, καὶ ἥψατο τῆς χειρὲς αὐτῆς, 15 \ yan Cae, ε ΕΝ \ ἘΠῚ \ , Se Ὡς καὶ ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὃ πυρετός" καὶ ἠγέρθη, καὶ διηκόνει αὐτῷ. , - ,ὔ , Οψίας δὲ γενομένης προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ δαιμονιζομένους πολλούς" 16 > , 4 , , \ Ls aA καὶ ἐξέβαλε τὰ πνεύματα λέγῳ, καὶ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας Ξ: A fal \ e oh a ἐθεράπευσεν" [πως πληρωθῇ) τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ησαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 17 , 3 \ A 9 / € tal ΕΖ \ \ / δ᾿ , λέγοντος, Αὐτὸς τὰς ἀσθενείας ἡμῶν ἔλαβεν καὶ τὰς νόσους ἐβά- στασεν. > ig 3 a Ἰδὼν δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς πολλοὺς ὄχλους περὶ αὐτὸν, ἐκέλευσεν 18 ’ a > εἶ ΄ x ‘ - \ > ἀπελθεῖν εἰς τὸ πέραν. καὶ προσελθὼν [εἷς] γραμματεὺς εἶπεν 1g » κα Δ ὃ ΄ Χ > Ἃ θ ͵ { ὍΝ ’ , \ λέ αὐτῷ, Διδάσκαλε, ἀκολουθήσω σοι, [ὕπου ἐὰν ἀπέρχῃ. καὶ λέγει 20 ’ a“ «ε » “ ld % , \ » \ \ \ fal αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς, Αἱ ἀλώπεκες φωλεοὺς EYOUCL, καὶ Ta πετεινὰ τοῦ ᾽ -“᾿ ‘ a“ οὐρανοῦ κατασκηνώσεις" ὁ δὲ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἔχει, [ποῦ] " a a a τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ. “KEtepos δὲ τῶν μαθητῶν εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Κύριε, 21 ἐπίτρεψόν mot πρῶτον ἀπελθεῖν καὶ θάψαι τὸν πατέρα μου. - ᾽ Ὁ“ ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῖς λέγει αὐτῷ, ᾿Ακολούίθει μοι, καὶ [ἄφες τοὺς νε- 22 \ , \ € “a , \ ’ Id ’ fal ’ κροὺς) θάψαι tors ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς. Καὶ ἐμβάντι αὐτῷ εἰς 23 fol , τ lel e a πλοῖον, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἰδοὺ σεισμὸς 24 ὁ > δε 3 a / WA A lal , € \ μέγας ἐγένετο ἐν TH θαλίσσῃ, ὥστε TO πλοῖον καλύπτεσθαι ὑπὸ a ᾽ τῶν κυμάτων" αὐτὸς δὲ ἐκάθευδεν. καὶ προσελθόντες ἤγειραν 25 ’ a a] a αὐτὸν λέγοντες, Κύριε, σῶσον, ἀπολλύμεθα. καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, 26 pila / > ’ ἡ / » \ 3 ΄ n , , Τί δειλοί ἐστε ὀλιγόπιστοι; τότε ἐγερθεὶς ἐπετίμησεν τοῖς ἀνέμοις καὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη μεγάλη. οἱ δὲ ἄνθρωποι 27 ἐθαύμασαν λέγοντες, Ἰ]οταπός ἐστιν οὗτος, CTL οἱ ἄνεμοι καὶ ἡ ΄ , a θάλασσα ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ; Καὶ ἐλθόντι αὐτῷ εἰς τὸ πέραν εἰς τὴν «ὡραν τῶν Τ᾿αδαρηνῶν, 28 ὑπήντησαν αὐτῷ δύο δαιμονιζόμενοι ἐκ τῶν μνημείων ἐξερχόμενοι ‘ / iA \ Ψ , ‘\ “Ὁ \ n ς “-“ χαλεποὶ λίαν, ὥστε μὴ ἰσχίειν [τινὰ] παρελθεῖν διὰ τῆς ὁδοῦ , ‘ ς - \ ’ lel . ἐκείνης, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἔκραξαν λέγοντες, * Τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοὶ, ᾿Ιησοῦ υἱὲ 29 an nr - / « n 3 \ \ τοῦ Θεοῦ ; [ἦλθες ὧδε πρὸ καιροῦ βασανίσαι] ἡμᾶς ; ἦν δὲ μακρὰν 30 ata ἃ A Je if a , 8 \ / ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν ἀγέλη χοίρων πολλῶν βοσκομένη. οἱ δὲ δαίμονες 31 » -“ . , παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν λέγοντες, Ei ἐκβάλλεις ἡμᾶς, ἀπόστειλον A » ΄ a / 3 , ral / ἡμᾶς eis τὴν ἀγέλην τῶν χοίρων. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, “Ὑπάγετε. 32 n \ ᾽ / a 2 \ οἱ δὲ ἐξελθόντες ἀπῆλθον εἰς τὴν ἀγέλην τῶν χοίρων Kai ἰδοὺ ri cal a ta) fal > ‘ ὥρμησεν πᾶσα ἡ ἀγέλη τῶν χοίρων κατὰ ποῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν - " δ \ U 7 θάλασσαν, καὶ ἀπέθανον ἐν τοῖς ὕδασιν. οἱ δὲ βέσκοντες ἔφυγον, 33 , ‘ , a , \ \ lal καὶ ἀπελθόντες εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα, καὶ Ta τῶν a ἡ , ‘Ga , U δαιμονιζομένων. καὶ ἰδοὺ πᾶσα ἡ 'πόλις ἐξῆλθεν εἰς συνάντησιν 34 19. 20. εἷς yp. for yp. rls. ποῦ for ‘‘terribilis, formidandus,” Niph. well ὅπου. ; defined to mean ‘‘hard of things, harsh 28. xaderds] V.A. Is. xviii.2, for NDI οἵ men, fierce of beasts.’’ W. W. σα: 2 18 MATTHEW, IX. 1—17. τῷ ᾿ἸΙησοῦ καὶ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν, παρεκάλεσαν ὅπως [μεταβῇ) ἀπὸ cap, τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν. 9 ΚΑῚ ἐμβὰς εἰς πλοῖον διεπέρασεν καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν. καὶ ἰδοὺ προσέφερον αὐτῷ παραλυτικὸν ἐπὶ κλίνης [βεβλη- μένον καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν, εἶπεν τῷ παραλυ- i) ῳϑ a 53, ἣ “ ‘\ > \ ‘ τικῷ, Θάρσει téxvov' [ἀφέωνταί] cov ai ἁμαρτίαι. καὶ ἰδοὺ τινὲς > 3 ς a e n \ ss c 4 τῶν γραμματέων εἶπον ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, Οὗτος βλασφημεῖ. καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ a ’ a 53 ¢ ‘ca 3 a > lal Ἰησοῦς τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν, εἶπεν, Ἱνατί ὑμεῖς [ἐνθυμεῖσθε πο- lal «ς lal / Γ 2 Ne ? n 5 νηρὰ] ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν ; [τί yap ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον), εἰπεῖν, Ἂ > a ἢ \ , aor 6 Αφέωνταί cov ai ἁμαρτίαι: ἢ εἰπεῖν, "Kyewpe καὶ περιπάτει ; ἵνα a “a 7] Yj « PA an τὰ , > x lel “ δὲ εἰδῆτε, ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 3 , c / = , us A a. > \ > , ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας" τότε λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ" ᾿᾿ὑγερθεὶς ἄρον σου Ν , N17. > s 4. / Ν 5 θ A > fal θ ἡ τὴν κλίνην, καὶ ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκον σου. καὶ ἐγερθεὶς ἀπῆλθεν a \ e t X SEE 8 εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ. ἰδόντες δὲ οἱ ὄχλοι ἐφοβήθησαν, καὶ ἐδόξασαν \ \ r , - 5 , τὸν θεὸν, τὸν δόντα ἐξουσίαν τοιαύτην τοῖς ἀνθρώποις. K Νὴ Ul ς 3 lal 2) 10 io Ὑ θ θη 9 at [παράγων] ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐκεῖθεν, εἶδεν ἄνθρωπον καθήμενον “Ὁ , \ / ’ f 5 Ἐξπὶ τὸ τελώνιον, Ματθαῖον λεγόμενον, καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, ᾿Ακο- > \ ’ A Ἢ ͵ 9 lal 10 λούθει por. καὶ ἀναστὰς ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ. *Kai éyéveto* αὐτοῦ > , > a ENG ΕἼ \ 8 \ εἶ a Tay AVAKELMEVOU EV τῇ οἰκίᾳ, “Kal LOoU™ πολλοὶ τέλωναι καὶ ἀμαρτω- ‘4 5 nr a a ° a Ν II λοὶ ἐλθόντες συνανέκειντο τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ καὶ τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ. καὶ ε a fal a , fal ld \ Led ἰδόντες οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἔλεγον τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, Διατί μετὰ τῶν aA A 4 a [τ \ ’ U 12 τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει ὁ διδάσκαλος ὑμῶν ; ὁ δὲ ἀκούσας 53 > t ” e 9 t > Ce ee λα ὄν ες εἶπεν, Οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες. , aN . / » 13 πορευθέντες δὲ μάθετε τί ἐστιν, "Ἄλεος θέλω, καὶ οὐ θυσίαν" οὐ 5 \ yap [ἦλθον καλέσαι] δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλοὺς. Τό , ’ a e θ \ τὴ ἢ / Lg , 14 OTe προσέρχονται αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ ᾿Ιωάννου λέγοντες, Διατί ς a \ e a ἡμεῖς Kal οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύομεν πολλὰ, οἱ δὲ μαθηταί cov > , ‘ Ν 3 ’ a 6 5 Lol \ , & e 15 οὐ νηστεύουσι; καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Μὴ δύνανται 3" οἱ PAX, a a ὡς 0 n be Ie (v4 ’ > - 5 ς viol τοῦ νυμφῶνος ὁ πενθεῖν, ἐφ’ ὅσον μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐστιν ὃ ! Ξ > , δὲ € lA of ᾽ lel > ’ ’ Ὁ ς νυμῴφιος ; ἐλεύσονται. δὲ ἡμέραι [ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ] ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν ὁ ,ὔ Ἂς , , 16 νυμφίος, Kal τότε νηστεύσουσιν. οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐπιβάλλει ἐπίβλημα Care ’ “ " \ ¢ / A. ” ἣν \ , pakous ἀγνάφου ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ αἴρει yap [τὸ πλήρωμα b a ? Ν aA “- ἐ 17 αὐτοῦ] ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱματίου, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται. οὐδὲ [βάλ- ° » 5 \ / Nova] οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς" εἰ δὲ μή γε, ῥήγνυνται οἱ ΟΡ. ΙΧ. 9. ἐπὶ] Here probably used ἐπὶ τὸν Σαούλ, “It is for Saul and for his as =8, ‘fapud,”’aselsandmpdsareinV.A. bloody house.” or N.T. See xiii. 56. It isfound in V.A. 10. Gen. xxiv. 30 ND)... 90. καὶ frequently for Oy with all its varieties of ἐγένετο... καὶ ἦλθε. V.A. passim ; as also meaning, e.g. 2 Sam. xxi, 2 ηρευ τοις, in Ν.Τ. — Sr | MATTHEW, IX. 18—33. 19 ᾿ \ Ν © ΑΙ, > a \ e > \ ? “a 9. \ , ἀσκοὶ, καὶ ὃ οἶνος ἐκχεῖται, καὶ οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται' αλλὰ βαλ- “. , > 3 \ , a λουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς, καὶ ἀμφότεροι συντηροῦνται. “a > Ὁ a fal Ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτοῖς, ἰδοὺ ἄρχων ἐλθὼν προσεκίνει 18 δες τ , 7] ς t ” > ’ " αὐτῷ λέγων, “Ὅτι ἡ θυγάτηρ μου ἄρτι ἐτελεύτησεν: ἀλλὰ ἐλθὼν » , \ Lal ΄ > > ἈΝ - ἐπίθες τὴν χεῖρά σου ἐπ᾽ αὐτὴν, καὶ ζήσεται. καὶ ἐγερθεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 19 ᾽ / ’ a A ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ. Ls \ i" € a a Καὶ ἰδοὺ γυνὴ αἱμοῤῥοοῦσα δώδεκα ἔτη, προσελθοῦσα ὄπισθεν, 20 “ a , a ς / A A ἥψατο τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ. ἔλεγεν yap ἐν ἑαυτῇ, 51 wR \ , eA lal τς , γ᾽ “Ὁ ' ©. δὰ Ψ a av μόνον ἅψωμαι τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι.) ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς 22 N \ 2 \ ’ = στραφεὶς καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὴν, εἶπεν, Θάρσει θύγατερ ἡ πίστις σου / / bess / « \ 3 \ nr e/ >? / \ Σ δ σέσωκέν σε. καὶ ἐσώθη ἡ γυνὴ ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης. Kai ἐλθὼν 23 ¢ > lal . \ > / n v ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἄρχοντος, καὶ ἰδὼν τοὺς αὐλητὰς \ \ 4 a καὶ τὸν ὄχλον θορυβούμενον, ἔλεγεν ᾿Αναχωρεῖτε' οὐ yap ἀπ- 24 40 \ Ul 3 \ "4 έθανεν τὸ κοράσιον, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει. \ ,, a καὶ κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ. OTE 25 δὲ ἐξεβλήθη ὁ ὄχλος, εἰσελθὼν ἐκράτησεν τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς, καὶ ἠγέρθη τὸ κοράσιον. καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ φήμη αὕτη εἰς ὅχην τὴν ἐκείνην. γῆν 26 Καὶ [παράγοντι] ἐκεῖθεν τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ δύο 27 τυφλοὶ, κράζοντες καὶ λέγοντες, ᾿Ελέησον ἡμᾶς υἱὸς Δαυίδ. €d- 28 θόντι δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ τυφλοὶ, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Πιστεύετε ὅτι δύναμαι τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; λέγου- σιν αὐτῷ, Ναὶ Κύριε. τότε ἥψατο τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν λέγων, 29 Κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηθήτω ὑμῖν. καὶ ἠνεῴχθησαν αὐτῶν 30 οἱ ὀφθαλμοί: καὶ [ἐνεβριμήθη]) αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγων, “Oparte μηδεὶς γινωσκέτω. οἱ δὲ ἐξελθόντες [διεφήμισαν) αὐτὸν ἐν ὅλῃ 31 τῇ γῇ ἐκείνῃ. Αὐτῶν δὲ ἐξερχομένων, ἰδοὺ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ ἄνθρωπον 32 κωφὸν [δαιμονιζόμενον]. καὶ ἐκβληθέντος τοῦ δδιμονίογ, ἐλάλησεν 33 ὁ κωφός: καὶ ἐθαύμασαν οἱ ὄχλοι λέγοντες, Οὐδέποτε [ἐφάνη] οὕτως 21. σωθήσομαι] Schleus. cites Xen. 77ε)ε. II. 10. 1 to show that odfew=* toheal,” and that cwr#p=physician, and σῶστρον his fee for restoring health. But it is not a com- mon use of the words in Greek authors. It is not found in this sense, so far as I can discover, in V.A. in which it stands for YW, as ἴασθαι for ND), uniformly. But in N.T. it very often means “to heal:” as here: and Mk. v. 23, vi. 56: L. viii. 36, J. xi. 12, Acts iv. 9. And our Auth. Ver- sion curiously renders σωτηρία, ‘‘ health,” Ps. xlii. 11, xliii. 5 ; and *‘ saving health,” Ps. Ixvii. 2: most probably from the double meaning of ‘‘salus,” (a) health and (ὁ) salvation; which latter they dis- tinguish from (a), as ‘saving health:” Vulgate has in the above “‘salutare vultts mei,” ‘‘salutare tuum”: in fact ‘‘salu- tare” is its usual rendering of σωτήριον and σωτηρία. 33. The notion of “‘ev7l spirits” at- tached to δαιμόνια seems to be entirely Jewish: we have the term used of an in- ferior race of divine beings by Plato and Xenophon: and hence, probably, its application to the gods of the heathen by V.A. for DW, Deut. xxxii. 17 TON xd o> nan, δαιμονίοις ἔθυσαν καὶ οὐ Θεῷ, quoted by 5. Paul, 1 Cor. x. 20, apparently in same sense, and Ps. xevi. 5 "τ ~ MATTHEW, 20 IX. 34—X. ct, 34 ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ. οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἔλεγον, *’Ev τῷ ἄρχοντι ἔ τῶν 39 36 37 CAP. 10 2 pareve πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ πᾶσαν MAdAaKidN. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια. » an U / KAI περιῆγεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τὰς πόλεις πάσας Kai Tas κώμας, a A tal ; , διδάσκων ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν, Kal κηρύσσων TO εὐαγγέ- λιον τῆς, βασιλείας, καὶ θεραπεύων πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ πᾶσαν MAAAKION. ἰδὼν δὲ τοὺς ὄχλους, ἐσπλαγχνίσθη περὶ αὐτῶν, ὅτι ἦσαν [ἐσκυλμένοι καὶ ἐρριμμένοι] ὡσεὶ πρόβατα [μὴ] ἔχοντα ποιμένα. τότε λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, \ € Av ons ἢ Sai ῃ πολὺς, οἱ δὲ ἐργάται ὀλίγοι θερισμοῦ, “ 5 , > , > \ x ’ fol ὅπως [ἐκβάλῃ] ἐργάτας εἰς τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτοῦ. Ὃ μὲν θερισμὸς δεήθητε οὖν τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ Καὶ , " f Ν ’ n 5, » a προσκαλεσάμενος TOUS δώδεκα μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς , / U ’ U ef > U » A εν ἐξουσίαν πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων, ὥστε ἐκβάλλειν αὐτὰ, καὶ θε- Τῶν δὲ δώδεκα J t \ ’ t {i I an " lal “ ς t ἀποστόλων TA ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα πρῶτος Σίμων ὁ λεγόμενος Πέτρος, καὶ ᾿Ανδρέας ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ" Ιακωβος ὁ τοῦ Ζεβε- 3 δαίου, καὶ ᾿Ιωάννης ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ: Φίλιππος, καὶ Βαρθολο- 5 7 ὃ patos’ Θωμᾶς, καὶ Ματθαῖος ὁ τελώνης" 4 καὶ Λεββαῖος, Σίμων * \ ’ / παραδοὺς αὐτόν. ᾿Ιάκωβος ὁ τοῦ ᾿Αλφαίου, ὁ Kavavaios,* καὶ lovdas ᾿Ισκαριώτης ὁ καὶ Τούτους τοὺς δώδεκα ἀπέστειλεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, παραγγείλας av- τοῖς λέγων, Eis ὁδὸν ἐθνῶν μὴ ἀπέλθητε, καὶ εἰς πόλιν Σαμα- 6 ρειτῶν μὴ εἰσέλθητε' πορεύεσθε δὲ μᾶλλον πρὸς τὰ πρόβατα / τὰ ἀπολωλότα ὃ οἴκου / λέγοντες, θεραπεύετε, ᾿ΙἸσραήλ." Ἤνγικεν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. λεπροὺς καθαρίζετε, 9 ἐλάβετε, δωρεὰν δότε. πορευόμενοι δὲ κηρύσσετε ἀσθενοῦντας δαιμόνια ἐκβάλλετε, δωρεὰν Μὴ [κτήσησθε] χρυσὸν, μηδὲ ἄργυρον, το μηδὲ χαλκὸν εἰς τὰς ζώνας ὑμῶν, μὴ πήραν εἰς ὁδὸν, μηδὲ δύο χιτῶνας, μηδὲ ὑποδήματα, μηδὲ ῥάβδους" ἄξιος γὰρ ὁ ἐργά- II της τῆς τροφῆς αὐτοῦ. His δ᾽ ἂν πόλιν ἢ κώμην εἰσέλ- , , OA ” ᾽ - Ὰ θητε, ἐξετάσατε τίς ἐν αὐτῇ ἄξιός ἐστιν κἀκεῖ μείνατε, ἕως ἂν τῶν ἘῸΝ ᾿ς ἐν Rad so the term easily passed to mean “ Devils,” ‘Spirits of evil,” about men and 27 men: the fallen angels, Satan and his agents. 38. βάλλειν = =" put” (a), and ἐκβάλλω = ‘put forth” or ‘‘send out’ (4), con- stantly in N.T.—(a) M. xii. 35, xxv. 27, xxvi. 12, Mk. vii. 30, 33; (ὁ) here and Mk. i. 43, Jo. 2% tile V.A. uses ἐμβάλλειν for OY pono Gen. xxxi. 34, xliv. 1, Deut. x. 2, and ἐκβαλ- New for 7 2.Chr. xxii, τὰ. XK. 5: It seems clear from this that βάλλειν could be used in a much milder sense in later Greek than it bore in earlier authors. See ἃ, 34. 4: Kavavirns or Καναναῖος from J), ‘*zelotypus fuit,” and so = Ζηλωτής. ᾽Αλ- patios, Hebr. ‘DM, seems to be from the same root as Cleophas ; and probably the same name, if not the same person, as in ipa χίχο ες 6. οἷκος ᾿Ἰσραήλ]-Ξ 5.1} na= ‘the descendants of Jacob,” "the family of Israel.” MATTHEW, Χ. τ12---30. 21 ΕΥ̓͂ ᾽ , \ > A Sas. f > , Sk κ᾿ ἐξέλθητε. εἰσερχόμενοι δὲ εἰς τὴν “οἰκίαν, ἀσπάσασθε αὐτήν. καὶ 12 Ν \ Φ ¢ > / ’ / > ’ 4 Ἔ ys « “Ὁ Ss 3 ’ ‘ 7\ ἐὰν μὲν ἢ ἡ οἰκία ἀξία, ἐλθέτω ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν ἐπ αὐτὴν ἐᾶν 13 \ \ > es ς ε al an ¢ δὲ μὴ ἢ ἀξία, ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπιστραφήτω. καὶ ὃς 14 p Ja \ δέ [4 lal δὲ ᾽ , \ / € lal ᾽ ti? ἐὰν μὴ δέξηται ὑμᾶς, μηδὲ ἀκούσῃ τοὺς λόγους ὑμῶν, ἐξερχό- , a ll δ lal ΄ μενοι ἔξω τῆς οἰκίας ἢ τῆς πόλεως ἐκείνης, ἐκτινάξατε τὸν κονιορ- \ lal a ε a Ψ \ / δ' ,σι ’ / ” a TOV TOV ποδῶν ὑμῶν. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται γῇ 15 , \ ta J 4 5 c / / xX fal Σοδόμων καὶ Τομόῤῥας ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως, ἢ TH πόλει ἐκείνῃ. ’ \ > \ ᾽ / ¢ na ¢€ , Ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ὠποστέλλω ὑμᾶς ὡς πρόβατα ἐν μέσῳ λύκων" γί- 16 a 2 / € νεσθε οὖν φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις, Kal ἀκέραιοι ὡς αἱ περιστεραί. / \ Nt al δ᾿ n [προσέχετε δὲ ἀπὸ] τῶν ἀνθρώπων παραδώσουσιν yap ὑμᾶς εἰς 17 lig \ a a lal n συνέδρια, καὶ ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν μαστυγώσουσιν ὑμᾶς" Kai 18 > \ ¢ / Ν \ lal Ἂς , a 3 “Ὁ > ἐπὶ ἡγεμόνας δὲ καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, [εἰς pap- , > a a », - nr τύριον] αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν. ὅταν δὲ παραδῶσιν ὑμᾶς, μὴ 19 4 a Δ fi , -“ μεριμνήσητε πῶς ἢ τί λαλήσητε' δοθήσεται γὰρ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ lal [4 / tal nr τῇ ὥρᾳ τί λαλήσετε" οὐ γὰρ ὑμεῖς ἐστε of λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ 20 n na \ ad - lal πνεῦμα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν TO λαλοῦν ἐν ὑμῖν. Ἰ]Παραδώσει δὲ 21 ° \ > \ > ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον᾽ Kal ἐπαναστή- a σονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς, καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς. Kal ἔσεσθε 22 / d μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων διὰ TO ὄνομά μου ὃ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς , € c τέλος, οὗτος. σωθήσεται. ὅταν δὲ διώκωσιν ὑμᾶς ἐν TH πόλει 23 / / >? ss ” > N \ » κε» > \ ταύτῃ, φεύγετε [εἰς τὴν ἄλλην] ἀμὴν yap λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ μὴ τελέσητε Tas πόλεις Ἰσραὴλ, [ἕως ἔλθῃ] ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώ- που. Οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον, οὐδὲ δοῦλος 24 ὑπὲρ τὸν κύριον αὐτοῦ. ἀρκετὸν τῷ μαθητῇ ἵνα γένηται ὡς ὁ 25 διδάσκαλος αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὁ δοῦλος ὡς ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ. εἰ τὸν al > οἰκοδεσπότην Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκάλεσαν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς a a , αὐτοῦ; Μὴ οὖν φοβηθῆτε αὐτούς" οὐδὲν γάρ ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον 26 Ν > BI t « \ \ ΩΣ » θ , “ὍὋδ,.' O οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται καὶ κρυπτὸν, ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται. 0 27 a aA ine Ai sk ᾽ \ 9 λέγω ὑμῖν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ, εἴπατε ἐν τῷ φωτί" καὶ ὃ ἢ εἰς τὸ οὖς * ’ ted Ν \ a > \ ἀκούετε, κηρύξατε ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων. καὶ μὴ * φοβεῖσθε ἀπὸ * 28 a -“ Ν \ \ / >’ τῶν ἀποκτεννόντων TO σῶμα, THY δὲ ψυχὴν μὴ δυναμένων aTro- an Lf nr \ Ν lal κτεῖναι" φοβήθητε δὲ μᾶλλον τὸν δυνάμενον καὶ ψυχὴν καὶ σῶμα . 7 a ἀπολέσαι * ἐν γεέννῃ. οὐχὶ δύο στρουθία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται; 29 fal tal lal wv aA \ ig me. καὶ ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται ἐπὶ THY γῆν avev τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν 6... δὴ \ \ ς / tal a a > θ f ee O UL@V δὲ Kal at τρίχες TNS κεφαλῆς TATAL ἡρισμημέναι εἰσίν. 3 23. ἕως] for πρὶν often in N.T. xi. 22. It seems to have been adopted 27. This peculiar use of εἰς τὸ οὖς or 5 an idiomatic equivalent. els τὰ ὦτα had probably become habitual 28. φοβεῖσθαι ἀπὸ] in V.A. and N.T. from its frequent occurrence in V.A. for is a literal rendering of a common He- DIA, Gen. xx. 8, xxiii. 16, Ex. x. 2, braism: [Ὁ NY Deut. i. 29, v. 5, Ps. Is. Vv. 9. ἠκούσθη els τὰ Gra: as Acts iii. 7, Xxvil. τ. 22 MATTHEW, X. 31—XI. 9. n lal / e ral “ [] 31 μὴ οὖν φοβεῖσθε [πολλῶν στρουθίων διαφέρετε] ὑμεῖς. lds οὖν 3: al rd , ς / 32 ὅστις * ὁμολογήσει ἐν ἐμοὶ Ἐ ἔμπροοθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ὁμολογήσω a 32: “ a ? "“ 3 “ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ ἔμπροοθεν τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. ᾽ a , > ge an Ne 33 ὅστις δὲ ἀρνήσηταί με ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἀρνήσομαι αὐτὸν a r 5 lal ’ r \ 34 κἀγὼ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. Μὴ vo- ig “-“ Le ἘΝ Ὁ >’ 5. lal μίσητε ὅτι [ἦλθον βαλεῖν] εἰρήνην ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἦλθον βαλεῖν » ᾽ / 2 Ἂς , “ θ \ ὃ is wv 0 \ nr 35 εἰρήνην, ἀλλὰ μάχαιραν. ἦλθον yap [διχάσαι] ἄνθρωπον κατὰ τοῦ rn lal \ 1D sate \ / πατρὸς αὐτοῦ, καὶ θυγατέρα κατὰ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς, Kal νύμφην n n fal n ε 3 \ 36 κατὰ τῆς πενθερᾶς αὐτῆς" καὶ ἐχθροὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οἱ οἰκιακοὶ » 3 fal ς (al A Ἂ / ς \ re ? ” / BL . 37 αὐτοῦ. ὁ φιλῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα ὑπὲρ ἐμὲ, οὐκ ἔστίν μου ἄξιος 8 A” ak fal e\ Δ / © \ phe ? » / ” Ρ \ 35 καὶ 6 φιλῶν υἱὸν ἢ θυγατέρα ὑπὲρ ἐμὲ, οὐκ ἔστίν μου ἄξιος" καὶ ᾿ “ - 3 / ὃς οὐ λαμβάνει τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ Kal ἀκολουθεῖ ὀπίσω μου, ᾽ ” / wv ¢ e \ \ \ zd lal bl] yr 5 la - 39 οὐκ ἔστίν μου ἄξιος. ὁ εὑρὼν THY Ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, ἀπολέσει αὐτὴν n Qn 5 , , “ καὶ ὁ ἀπολέσας τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, εὑρήσει αὐτήν. Ὅ ὃ « Ὁ nd \ δέ rn ἢ ε > \ ὃ δέ εται 40 ἐχόμενος ὑμᾶς, ἐμὲ δέχεται καὶ ὁ ἐμὲ δεχόμενος, δέχ / ? li 41 τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με. ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην * εἰς ὄνομα ἢ προ- , \ / , Ἄ ἂν ¢ , / > φήτου, μισθὸν προφήτου λήμψεται Kal ὁ δεχόμενος δίκαιον εἰς v if \ / , 4 \ ““ 5" , “ 42 ὄνομα δικαίου, μισθὸν δικαίου λήμψεται" καὶ [ὃς ἐὰν ποτίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων ποτήριον ψυχροῦ μόνον εἰς ὄνομα μαθητοῦ, cap, ὠμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ. 11 Καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε * ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς διατάσσων τοῖς δώδεκα a ’ n * , ae > a n ὃ ὃ , \ , > μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, * μετέβη ἢ ἐκεῖθεν τοῦ διδάσκειν καὶ κηρύσσειν ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν αὐτῶν. ! «ς ’ U 2. , 5 nr / \ 5, “ O AE ᾿Ιωάννης ἀκούσας ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ a / n lal 3 n 5 τ n 3 Χριστοῦ, πέμψας διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Σὺ εἶ ὁ 4 ἐρχόμενος, ἢ ἕτερον προσδοκῶμεν; καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν " aA , > 7 7 , “ ? , \ Ζ αὐτοῖς, LlopevOévtes ἀπαγγείλατε ᾿Ιωάννῃ, ἃ ἀκούετε καὶ βλέπετε: 5 τυφλοὶ ἀναβλέπουσιν, καὶ χωλοὶ περιπατοῦσιν' λεπροὶ καθαρίζον- ται, καὶ κωφοὶ ἀκούουσιν νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται, καὶ πτωχοὶ εὐαγγε- 6 λίζονται' καὶ μακάριός ἐστιν ὃς ἐὰν μὴ * σκανδαλισθῇ ἐν ἐμοί." Ais , δὲ id ” c call n λέ lal » \ 7 Lovtwy δὲ πορευομένων, ἤρξατο ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγειν τοῖς ὄχλοις περὶ >? ? f Iwavvov, Τί [é&jOere] εἰς τὴν ἔρημον [θεάσασθαι;] κάλαμον ὑπὸ ’ / / ’ lal ὃ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον ; ἀλλὰ τί ἐξήλθετε ἰδεῖν; ἄνθρωπον [ἐν pa- λακοῖς) ἠμφιεσμένον; ἰδοὺ οἱ τὰ μαλακὰ φοροῦντες ἐν τοῖς 9 οἴκοις τῶν βασιλέων εἰσίν. ἀλλὰ τί ἐξήλθετε; προφήτην .32. ὁμολογήσει ἐν ἐμοί] here and 1. οὔ εἰς for ἐν, of which we have so many xii. 8, have no parallel in V. A. examples in V.A. and N.T. The phrase ΠΕ εν eveas PP Ore m.] Grimm renders Ἔ OWA! is rendered ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι by respiciens nomen prophetze quod gerit, . 5 J . ὃ x 2 q ci “‘out of regard to.” But it may possibly Moe Ἔχ, ¥e.285, Jerem, κὶ, ὅς, be nothing more than an inaccurate use MATTHEW,. ΧΙ. 10o—10. 29 ἰδεῖν ; vat λέγω ὑμῖν, Kal περισσότερον προφήτου. ἐστιν περὶ οὗ γέγραπται, μου πρὸ προσώπου σου, προσθέν σου. οὗτος γάρ ᾿Ιδοὺ ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἀγγελόν καὶ κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου ἔμ- ᾿Αμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ ἐγήγερται ἐν TENNHTOIC ΓΥΝΔι- κῶν μείζων ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ" [ὁ δὲ μικρότερος] ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν, μείζων αὐτοῦ ἐστιν. ’ \ \ lal « n ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ ἕως ἄρτι * 7 βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανών ἢ βιάζεται, καὶ βιασταὶ ἁρπάζουσιν ἌΡΗ πάντες γὰρ οἱ προ- “Ὁ &. if ᾿ id > φῆται καὶ ὁ νόμος ἕως ᾿Ιωάννου ἐπροφήτευσαν καὶ εἰ θέλετε ,ὔ Ψ I 4 3 . / δέξασθαι, αὐτός ἐστιν ᾿Ἡλίας ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσθαι. ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ’ v4 / aN . 4 \ ἀκουέτω. Τίνι δὲ ὁμοιώσω τὴν γενεὰν ταύτην ; ὁμοία ἐστὶν παι- / > > a / “Ὁ a Lal δαρίοις ἐν ἀγοραῖς καθημένοις, ἃ προσφωνοῦντα τοῖς ἑτέροις λέ- , , ¢ cal \ , » γουσιν, ΗἩὐλήσαμεν ὑμῖν, καὶ οὐκ ὠρχήσασθε: ἐθρηνήσαμεν, καὶ P| » Ψ > AY 2 , οὐκ ἐκόψασθε. ἦλθε yap ᾿Ιωάννης [μήτε] ἐσθίων μήτε πίνων" Ν ,ὔ , ” 5 c ey nA , / > / καὶ λέγουσιν, Δοιμόνιον ἔχει. ἦλθεν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐσθίων \ Η \ ΄ > \ ” t \ > , καὶ πίνων" καὶ λέγουσιν, ᾿Ιδοὺ ἄνθρωπος φάγος καὶ οἰνοπότης, lal / lal τελωνῶν φίλος καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν. Cap. XI. 11. Jobxiv. 1, xv. 14, xxv. 4 ων ἽΝ, V.A. γεννητὸς γυναικὸς: evi- dently taking γεννητὸς as a noun. The phrase is very peculiar: apparently Hebr. and brought into familiar use, possibly, from these passages. Keo te Βα 311, . 2 : yaw ΠΡ DTS, ὦτα ἔχουσι τοῦ ἀκούειν V.A., and Deut. hes 3 without τοῦ. See above ii. 6 for Ὀ with infinitive. 19. ἡσοφία = MINA, “Divine wisdom,” or ‘*wisdom-in-divine-things,’’ ‘‘The true Religion has ever been and always is cleared of any charge of inconsistency,— acquitted of any unreality, —by her chil- dren,” ‘‘declared faultless,” ‘proclaimed to be always right and true,’ Compare 1 Tim. iii. 16, ἐδικαίωθη ἐν Πνεύματι “was declared to be true Christ,” ‘‘ authenti- cated” ‘*by the Holy Spirit ;” i.e. at His Baptism: Schleusner “‘declaratus est talis qualis vere est,” which Grimm also gives. For this sense of δίκαιος and its deriva- tives, as equivalent to ἀληθὴς, see Luke xvi. 9, x. 11. The words PJ¥ and Nips, from their usage in the Old Test., would seem to be almost convertible terms. Ἐπ lii. 3 PITY WAV “py AIS in which ay stands for now. "Ts. xly. 19 ‘IN a 75 myn. Is. xlii. 3 wy not? Ἔ 2 shall make judgment to Sri s ac- καὶ * ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία amo* cording to justice and right.” Proverbs viii. 7, 8, where the two words might be used one for the other. And V.A., ap- parently recognizing this, constantly uses (1) ἀληθεία for δικαιοσύνη, (2) ἀληθινὸς and ἀληθὴς for δίκαιος, (3) ἄδικος for ψευδὴς, (4) ἀδικία for ψεῦδος ; and vice versa. (1) Is, xlv. τὸ; Ps. lii. 3 above. (2) Is. xli. 26. (3) Deut. xix. 18, Jerem. Va oi bss Cxx) ΖΕ. ΕΙΘΌΥ: CX1ks: 2s) bo taeile 19. (4) Ps. lit. 3, Lev. vi. 3 ἀδίκως for spy-by (Hebr. Text v. 22), Micah vi. 12. And we, in our English Version, have often followed suit, translating literally, to the great obscuration of the meaning : e.g. Ps. lii. 3, ‘Thou hast loved lying rather than to speak righteousness.” The N.T. writers carry on the same inter- change of the words, to which doubtless their acquaintance with V.A. had fami- liarised them: e.g. Luke xvi. 9, 10, 11, where we have μαμμωνὰ τῆς αδικίας in 9, corresponding to τὸ ἀδικὸν mw. in 11, and contrasted with τὸ ἀληθινὸν ; i.e. ἀδικὸς = ψευδὴς; and in 10, πιστὸς contrasted with ἀδικός. Here therefore ἀδικὸς means ‘false, untrue, unreal, unreliable ;” ἀλη- Owos=‘‘true, real, substantial.” Com- pare J. iii. 21 (ἀληθεία for δικαιοσύνη, as opposed to φαῦλα in 20) and vii, 18 οὗτος ἀληθής ἐστὶ καὶ ἀδικία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἐστιν (ἀδικία for ψεῦδος); as in Romans ii. 8. 1 Cor. xv. 345 ἐκνήψατε δικαίως, i i.e. “truly, in earnest :” xiii. 6 ἡ ἀγάπη οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ Io 1 12 < 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 24 MATTHEW, XI. 20—XII. 1. , “Ὁ 2οτῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς. Τότε ἤρξατο ὀνειδίζειν τὰς πόλεις, ἐν αἷς 21 ἐγένοντο [αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις] αὐτοῦ, ὅτι οὐ μετενόησαν. got Χοραζὶν, οὐαί cot Βηθσαϊδὰν, ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι al < ἡ £ ἐγένοντο ai δυνάμεις ai γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι av ἐν σάκκῳ \ , (4 Lal / Ν rn >’ πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι avek- ‘ » > Ἦν , / a e na αὐ \ \ 23 τότερον ἔσταν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως, ἢ ὑμῖν. Kal ov Καπερναοὺμ, δι. ’ n « , “ “ , ae iA > ὧν , ἢ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψώθης, ἕως ὥδου καταβήσῃ ὅτι εἰ ἐν Σοδόμ- δ / ols ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις ai γενόμεναι ἐν col, ἔμειναν ἂν μέχρι al a a 24 τῆς σήμερον. πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι γῇ Σοδόμων ἀνεκτότερον " ᾽ Ce ἘΠ / x / > Ε / a a 3 25 ἔσται ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως, ἢ σοί. “Ev ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ aTroKpt- if >] θεὶς ὁ - lal “i fal ‘ lal pavod καὶ τῆς γῆς, ὅτι ἀπέκρυψας ταῦτα ἀπὸ σοφῶν Kal συν- \ an / 22 καὶ σποδῷ μετενόησαν. an a “-“ ' lol ᾽ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν, ᾿ΕΞομολογοῦμαί cou πάτερ κύριε τοῦ οὐ- 26 a Ἀ Ψ Ul αἱ \ lA Ν Pa ς \ a [4 26 ετῶν, καὶ ἀπεκάλυψας αὐτὰ νηπίοις. ναὶ *6 πατὴρ, ὅτι οὕτως 2 Ἵ , iT) τὰ »» θέ * Ξ 500 i 4 ἣΝ lal 27 ἐγένετο εὐδοκία ἔμπροσθέν σουΐ. πάντα μοι παρεδόθη ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰ - i? ρον πατρός LOU" καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐπιγινώσκει τὸν υἱὸν, εἰ μὴ ὁ πατήρ᾽ οὐδὲ \ » \ 5 fe > \ ig CaN \ - By 4 τὸν πατέρα τὶς ἐπιγινώσκει, εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς, καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν βούληται 28 ΄ CN al , Δ ~ , , e a ne \ <~9 ὁ UIlOS ἀποκαλύψαι. ευτε προς μὲ σαντες Ob KOTTLMVTES Kab Ovai 29 Tepo te ’ \ > , ς a = PTLO (EVOL, KaY@ ἀναπαύσω υμας. id lal \ , 9 ’ > -“ ὑμᾶς, καὶ μάθετε ἀπ᾽ ἐμαῦ, v \ / bs > ἄρατε τὸν ζυγὸν μου ἐφ 4 ol a ὅτι πρᾶυς εἶμι Kat ταπεινὸς [τῇ 20 δ \ ἌΝ 5 a a con ς \ ‘4 ss 30 καρδίᾳ] καὶ εὑρήσετε ἀνάπαυσιν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν. 6 yap bv li Ν cap, γός μου [χρηαστὸς,] καὶ τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν. Ἔν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἐ θη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦ is σάββ διὰ ῳ τᾷ ρῷ ἐπορεύθη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοῖς σάββασιν διὰ a a /- τῶν σπορίμων" οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπείνασαν, καὶ ἤρξαντο τίλ- 12 τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συγχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ. 2 Thess. ii, 10, 12, ἐν τέρασι ψεύδους καὶ ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ τῆς ἀδικίας ; and οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ ἀλλ᾽ eideehoarret ἐν τῇ ἀδικίᾳ. 1 John ii. 4, we should expect ἀδικὸς for ψεύστης, and δικαιοσύνη for ἀληθεία : and similarly 3 John 4, περιπατεῖς ἐν ἀλη- θείᾳ, and 12, Δημητρίῳ μεμαρτύρηται ὑπ’ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας: may this possibly mean ‘‘ by his holy life itself?” 25. 連ouodoyotuat] is almost univer- For the Hithp., which always means ‘“confess,” they use ἐξαγορεύω (Trommii Concord.), as also once, when the Hiph. means ‘‘ confess,” Ps. xxxii. 5. In Lid- - dell and Scott the word is rendered solely by ‘‘to confess in full,” ‘‘to agree or promise.’ 26. εὐδοκία] (‘vox pian incog- nita.” Grimm) in V.A, = })¥7 ‘appro- bation, favor: active or passive: approv- ing or being approved. 2 (een) ἘΣ Ixix, 14 fis MY καιρὸς “evdoxlas. Ps. xix. 15 5 ‘VON is? WN ἔσονται εἰς εὐδοκίαν, 1.6. γενήσονται εὐδοκία (or δεκτὸν, which. is sometimes given for })¥1) “let the words of my mouth be acceptable ” (supra v. 48). δες and L. x. 21 éyé- vero εὐδοκία = wp mn, 30. χρηστὸς] =" mitis: gentle, .kind, sally used by V.A. for ann Hiph. ia tender:” from which it seems to have ΓΙ, in sense of ‘“praise, give thanks:” slid into “easy.” Wulgate ‘‘jugum meum and. 50 ἐξομολόγησις stands in V.A. for suave est :” = almost **pleasant, soft, de- MA “praise.” Pss. xli, 5, xcix. 1,3, _lightful. an big Cap. XII. 1. τοῖς σάββασι] one of the few instances in M. of dative alone, with- out preposition, to express the time when, or place where, or manner or instrument, or cause. Tots σάββασιν, ἐν σαββάτῳ. We should have expected the article just different. **(1) On a certain sabbath... (2) not law- ful on ¢he sabbath day.” MATTHEW, XII. 2—20. 25 a Ss lal New στάχυας καὶ ἐσθίειν. οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἰδόντες εἶπαν αὐτῷ, 2 an « -“ , ᾿Ιδοὺ οἱ μαθηταί σου ποιοῦσιν, ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστι ποιεῖν ἐν σαββάτῳ. a , " δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε [τί] ἐποίησε Δαυὶδ, ὅτε ἐπεί- 5 \ e ’ ? n lal ’ lal ᾽ \ + n vacev καὶ of pet αὐτοῦ; [πῶς] εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ 4 an \ *% \ v al , ΕἼ ” “δ " TEN θεοῦ, καὶ ἕτοὺς ἄρτους τῆς προθέσεως ἢ ἔφαγεν, ὃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ba » an tal » \ lal ’ ’ “Ὁ > Ν “- € an / ἣν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν, οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις ; a , n ld a Ul 6 € cal ’ r ἢ οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, OTL τοῖς σάββασιν οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ 5 « “Ὁ , an > le oe ἱερῷ τὸ σάββατον βεβηλοῦσι, καὶ [ἀναίτιοί] εἰσιν; λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, 6 ad na ce nn a > \ a > \ οἱ 4 ΚΣ ” OTL τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζον ἐστὶν ὧδε. εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί eat,” EXeEos 7 , ͵ὔ , θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους. κύριος 9 yap ἐστι καὶ τοῦ σαββάτου 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. \ \ wares > > a \ STA \ Καὶ μεταβὰς ἐκεῖθεν, nXOev εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν. Kal 9 > v lal ,’ / ἰδοὺ ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν: καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν λέ- I » ὥ -“ Α yovtes, * Εἰ ἔξεστιν ἢ τοῖς σάββασι θεραπεύειν ; ἵνα [κατηγο- ᾿ ᾽ n Ἀ rf Lal ’ ρήσωσιν] αὐτοῦ. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Tis ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, τι O “Ὁ “ , ἃ \ “Ὁ b ῇ n a U ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν, καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς σάββασιν > ΄ tal > els βόθυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ ἐγερεῖ; πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει 12 ” θ U 2 ef ” “- U fal - ἄνθρωπος προβάτου; ὥστε ἔξεστιν τοῖς σάββασι καλῶς ποιεῖν. , / fel a τότε λέγει TO ἀνθρώπῳ, "Extewov τὴν χεῖρά σου" Kai ἐξέτεινεν, 13 \ > U e μὰ « Ε ” c \ Tal , καὶ ἀπεκατεστάθη ὑγιὴς ὡς ἡ ἄλλη. οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι [συμβού- 14 lL n é τ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἐξελθόντες, ὅπως αὐτὸν [ἀπολέσωσιν. λίον ἐλαβον)] κατ a nO δ ATONE € Nie J a a fal O δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς γνοὺς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν. καὶ ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ 15 vw \ A U ᾽ \ , \ > , ὄχλοι πολλοὶ, καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς πάντας" καὶ [ἐπετίμησεν] 16 > an “ “ A αὐτοῖς, a μὴ φανερὸν αὐτὸν ποιήσωσιν. ἵνα [πληρωθῇ] τὸ 17 \ oh ny . ¢ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἡσαΐου tod προφήτου λέγοντος, ᾿Ιδοὺ ὁ παῖς μου, ὃν 18 ΠΣ, ae ὃ ς ᾿ ἡρέτισα᾽ ὁ ἀγαπητός μου, εἰς [ὃν εὐδόκησεν] ἡ ψυχή μου θήσω \ lal U “ “-“ τὸ πνεῦμά μου ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν, καὶ κρίσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπαγγελεῖ" ᾽ x f ’ a οὐκ ἐρίσει, οὐδὲ Kpavydce’ οὐδὲ ἀκούσει τις ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις Ig \ \ > a τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ. κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, Kal 20 4. et uy]=“ but only,” “but on the They knew ON=e/ generally: and so contrary.” Compare Mk. xiii. 32, Le iv. yendered it by εἰ, even in interrogations 26, 27, Gal. ii. 16. Ἶ : and in other constructions, very awk- Io, εἰ] for ON interrogative: xix. 3, wardly. 1 Kings i. 51, 52 ON yas Mk. x. 2, L. xiii. 23, xiv. 3. In 1 Kings i. 27 np ὁμοσάτω εἰ θανατώσει, and ON V.A. has εἰ for DN: ΠΣ ν Gani Xiv. bay & Sin 4 my, ; 45, εἰ a as stands for MVD sil [3 ἌΝ FA, AERTS ἢ and 1 Kings xxii. 15 εἰ ἀναβῶ for 30, υἱὸν δυνάμεως, εἰ πλοῦ κὺ where εἰ is put leading us to infer that εἰ was a common for No, apparently, to, comes pond: ὙΨΊ εν form of interrogation in Macedonian ἰὴ previous verse. I quote this latter pas- Greek. Bat Gen. vi. 7 DAY.» "any, ge an ns of te tig a V.A. εἰ γενήσεται υἱὸς. καὶ εἰ Ἔα Job all probability had their ἘΠῸῸ on the vi. 6 DS. εν a, as above, by εἰ twice, phraseology GEN. ES 56 MATTHEW, XII. 21—36. a a » »-“ : \ / λῖνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει ἕως av ἐκβάλῃ [εἰς νῖκος] THY κρίσιν. Ν an 5» ' ἢ -“ ΕΣ r 21 καὶ [τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ ἔθνη ἐλπιοῦσιν.) a ͵ \ \ Vlp \ 22 Tote προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός" Kat ef ᾽ \ a \ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτὸν, ὥστε TOV τυφλὸν καὶ κωφὸν Kal λαλεῖν καὶ ’ a δον τὰ 23 βλέπειν. καὶ ἐξίσταντο πάντες οἱ ὄχλοι καὶ ἔλεγον, Μήτι οὗτός - a L. Ὁ 24 ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς Δαυίδ; οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες εἶπον, Οὗτος ’ n οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ * ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ ἢ ἄρχοντι lal / “ lal 25 τῶν δαιμονίων. Hidds δὲ τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν, εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, an / a n an a Πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ᾽ ἑαυτῆς, ἐρημοῦται: καὶ πᾶσα ΩΝ 5 ῃ “ > ε n > Ud \ 26 πόλις ἢ οἰκια μερισθεῖσα καθ᾽ ἑαυτῆς, ov σταθήσεται. καὶ 5. tar n \ ἢ - 5) , sigs) wie \ » / 5 a εἰ ὁ σατανᾶς τὸν σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλει, ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἐμερίσθη: πῶς 27 οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ : καὶ εἰ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ, ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσι; διὰ “Ὁ ’ a ¢ an », , ’ \ ’ ἣν > t nr 28 τοῦτο αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν ἔσονται κριταί. εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Τ]νεύματι Θεοῦ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ. » Dy an ὃ ᾿ / > 0 tal > nS » / “Ὁ 5 “Ὁ Ν A 29 ἢ πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς THY οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ Kal τὰ / ’ nr is Ul - Ni n σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ TOV ἰσχυρὸν, καὶ ie: \ O55 ih > lal ς ’ ἡ n 30 τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσει; ὁ μὴ ὧν μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ, κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ 2 = eG \ , > A a 31 ἐστιν Kal ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ, σκορπίζει. Διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ς a [2] ς Ὁ ὑμῖν, Πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις" ς Le! -“ ἡ δὲ [τοῦ Πνεύματος] βλασφημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώ- Ὁ, μεν x t lol a an ’ 32 ποις. Kal ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ λόγον KaTa τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, ade- ’ an “Δ 3 n na θήσεται αὐτῷ᾽ ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπη κατὰ τοῦ Ivedpatos Tod ἁγίου, οὐκ "ἢ / >) n , n lal n ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ, οὔτε ἐν τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι. XN ‘ let , a 33) ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλὸν, Kal τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν ἢ / ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον σωπρὸν, Kal τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν" ἐκ \ n n Lf 34 yap τοῦ καρποῦ τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται. Ἔ γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν, lal / - ᾿ lel πώς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ λαλεῖν, πονηροὶ ὄντες ; ἐκ yap τοῦ περισ- Ud fal / \ / a ς 5 \ ” > 35 σεύματος τῆς καρδίας TO στόμα λαλεῖ. ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ lol 9 A ny > U > Lae ἊΝ ς \ af τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει ἀγαθά: καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄνθρω- 2 a c es if , / Ni Vee a πος ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει πονηρά. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, i a en > Ἂ “Δ , ἘΝῚ oF 3 Lg 36 OTe πᾶν ῥῆμα ἀργὸν, ὃ λαλήσουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ἀποδώσουσιν 20. See xiii. 52. V.A. εἰς ἀλήθειαν ginal; ‘‘The isles shall wait for His ἐξοίσει κρίσιν : much more exact; though Law:” i.e. ‘‘The Gentiles shall look on- it also renders ἡ DON Imaimd3. as ward in hope to His new rule of life and PS alee” Eke holiness.” in N.T., putting ὄνομα for TA, 28. ἔφθασεν] “Shas come on you un- 2) M = ἐλπίζω and τηαγ-- πέποιθα, as = AWATES. A : . ποιήσατε] “suppose it,” ‘set it nbnin, ἐλπίς = πίστις ;—but our English ya as.” ! τ : Version is more true to sense of the ori- 35. ἐκβάλλει] See ix. 38. MATTHEW, XII. 37—XIII. 4. 27 \ ᾽ a Γ > « , / 9 \ -“ , περὶ αὐτοῦ λόγον ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως. EK Yap τὼν λόγων σου 37 nr ‘ δικαιωθήσῃ, καὶ ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου καταδικασθὴη σῃ. . lal fal / Τότε ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ τινες τῶν γραμματέων καὶ Φαρισαίων 38 “Ὁ cat ral , λέγοντες, Διδάσκαλε, θέλομεν ἀπὸ σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν. ὁ δ᾽ ἀπο- 39 a \ ἈΝ a κριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Veved πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζη- -“ a > nr > lal an r Tel’ Kal σημεῖον ov δοθήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ TO σημεῖον ᾿Ιωνᾶ τοῦ la 3 » lal nn A“ a προφήτου. ὥσπερ yap ἣν ᾿Ιωνᾶς ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ τοῦ κήτους τρεῖς 40 ral ἧς εν n > ἡμέρας Kal τρεῖς νύκτας οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν a “ an ΄“ Θ / \ a τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς τρεῖς ἡμέρας Kal τρεῖς νύκτας. “"Avdpes Νι- 41 lal > lal / tal lal vevital ἀναστήσονται ἐν TH κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, Kal fol > cal κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν ὅτι μετενόησαν * εἰς TO κήρυγμα ἢ “lwva: Ne .3' x. a a & Λ καὶ ἰδοὺ [πλεῖον ᾿Ιωνᾶ] ὧδε. βασίλισσα νότου ἐγερθήσεται ἐν 42 an / \ lal an / “ τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, καὶ κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν ὅτι > >’ an ͵ nr rn ,’ n \ ͵7 ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς [ἀκοῦσαι] τὴν σοφίαν Σολο- -“ : col tal iA \ μῶνος" καὶ ἰδοὺ πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε. “Otay δὲ τὸ ἀκάθαρ- 43 lol > ,ὔ > Ν lal Ψ / / 3 ’ , Tov πνεῦμα ἐξέλθη ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, διέρχεται Ov ἀνύδρων / A , , \ ’ id / if 7] » τόπων, ζητοῦν ἀνάπαυσιν, καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκει. τότε λέγει, ᾿Ενπι- 44 στρέψω εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον: καὶ ἐλθὸν εὑρίσκει ~ , [σχολάζοντα,) σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον. τότε πορεύεται 45 n \ / καὶ παραλαμβάνει μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ ἑπτὰ ἕτερα πνεύματα πονηρότερα « lal Lal fal \ ἑαυτοῦ, Kal εἰσελθόντα κατοικεῖ ἐκεῖ. καὶ γίνεται Ta ἔσχατα n lal dA , \ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου χείρονα τῶν πρώτων. οὕτως ἔσται Kal rn a / a a τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ TH πονηρᾷ. Uj fol a a " \ c , \ c "Ere δὲ αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος τοῖς ὄχλοις, ἰδοὺ ἡ μήτηρ καὶ οἱ 46 “Ὁ A , - nr > ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ εἱστήκεισαν ἔξω, ζητοῦντες αὐτῷ λαλῆσαι. εἶπεν 47 δέ ει lal » \ Ὁ , \ « τὶ ‘3 » £ / έ τις αὐτῷ, ᾿Ιδοὺ ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἔξω ἑστή- “ , “ ¢ ἣν ? \ Ie a / κασιν, ζητοῦντές σοι λαλῆσαι. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν τῷ λέγοντι 48 ᾽ fal Ahi , Ly / Ξ ἊΝ / ’ \ e iO ON / rp αὐτῷ, Tis ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου; καὶ τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ ἀδελφοί μου ; -“ -“ \ ’ fal 9S καὶ ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ, εἶπεν, 49 ἼΣ \ e / \ ε LO Α “ \ Ἂ a \ ov ἡ μήτηρ μου Kal οἱ ἀδελφοί pov. ὅστις γὰρ av ποιῇ TO το , fal al 3 , ’ % \ θέλημα τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς, αὐτός μου ἀδελφὸς καὶ iO \ \ / 8 J ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν. Gap > \ Γαδ ρῶν, ? ΄ > \ ee a πεν, a Cet: τ Ev δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ ἐξελθὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς απὸ τῆς οἰκίας, 18 bo \ \ U é \ t 6 \ + es ΝΜ ὌΝ ro) ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν Oddaccay’ καὶ συνήχθησαν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὄχλοι 2 + a / lal "- \ a πολλοὶ, ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς πλοῖον ἐμβάντα καθῆσθαι: καὶ πᾶς , . “-“ \ ὁ ὄχλος [ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν] εἱστήκει. καὶ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ 3 “ lal ς / a / ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων, ᾿Ιδοὺ ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων [τοῦ σπείρειν. \ a a \ ” \ \ NW ae \ καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν, [ἃ μὲν] ἔπεσεν Tapa τὴν ὁδόν" Kai 4 21, εἰς Τὸ x.] Ps. xviii. 44 % yyw? ir pow, els axdnv ὠτίου ὑπήκουσάν μοι. 2ὃ MATTHEW, XIII. 5—17. 5 ἐλθόντα τὰ πετεινὰ, κατέφαγεν αὐτά. ἄλλα δὲ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη, ὅπου οὐκ εἶχεν γῆν πολλήν" καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν, διὰ 6 A No ar ' Cea) Ne ὧδ “ > / \ TO μὴ ἔχειν βάθος γῆς" ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος ἐκαυματίσθη, Kat \ \ \ 4 e/ b] id 7 διὰ TO μὴ ἔχειν pilav, ἐξηράνθη. 8 θας, καὶ ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι, καὶ ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά. ἄλλα δὲ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὰς ἀκάν- ἄλλα δὲ ” > \ \ lal aN \ \ 26 (ὃ \ a \ € ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ THY γῆν THY καλὴν, Kal ἐδίδου καρπὸν, ὃ μὲν ἑκα- \ a δὲ e , A δὲ / * ς BA πε * Qtov, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα. δ ἔχων ὦτα, , : niet ta} a 10 Kal προσελθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ, Διατί ἐν παραβολαῖς ᾿] ἀκουέτω. Lal a ¢ > Ε] rn “ 11 λαλεῖς αὐτοῖς; ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, “Οτι ὑμῖν δέδοται - a / lal - γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ 2 - 12 δέδοται. ὅστις γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ, καὶ περισσευθήσεται, “ \ ,’ ” ΝΙΝ ἊΡ oe , Sees ’ a \ lal 13 ὅστις δὲ οὐκ ἔχει, Kal ὃ ἔχει, ἀρθήσεται ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. διὰ τοῦτο a > a a (4 / ἐν παραβολαῖς αὐτοῖς λαλῶ, ὅτι βλέποντες οὐ βλέπουσι, καὶ = / Ψ °’ , » \ Ὁ“ 14 ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδὲ συνιοῦσι. 15 μὴ συνῆτε: καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε. \ 9. / \ ΞΡ ’ / 16 καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσι, Kal ἰάσομαι avTovs. 17 Ν τοὶ “ > Kal αναπληροῦται αὖὐ- a / ς sf. e / > a >’ , τοῖς ἡ προφητεία “Ἡσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα, ᾿Ακοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ ἐπαχύνθη \ ς / ΄ La] , x a Died ἃ / Ὑ γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, , \ ᾽ al U “ καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν' μήποτε ἴδωσι τοῖς ? a \ a ᾽...Ἃ > , \ a / an ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσι, καὶ TH καρδίᾳ συνωώσι “Ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι / Ji ἢ Ν \ 4 "3 an οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ, ὅτι βλέπουσιν" καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἀκούουσιν. > \ \ / © 3A a \ n \ / > , ἀμὴν γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν, OTL πολλοὶ προφῆται καὶ δίκαιοι ἐπεθύ- Cap. XIII. 14, 15, 16. Acts xxviii. 26, 27. In both we have the exact words of V.A., except ἰάσωμαι for ἰάσομαι. I need scarcely say that it is not an accu- rate rendering. The Vulgate and Eng- lish Version come close to the original. The first two clauses are imperative: the judgment of God passing sentence on those who resist Him, a heavy present penalty, lightened by hope of its remis- sion. The “lest,” {, μήποτε, is not exclusive, prohibitory, preventive, but provisional ; “in case that at some future time,” ‘‘ne forte,” Vulg., “1 so be, per- chance.” It is not a doom of hopeless condemnation, but of temporary suspen- sion of blessings, lost for a time by apa- thy and disobedience, but recoverable upon repentance and conversion to God. The original certainly admits of this in- terpretation ; and it seems most in accord- ance with the context in N.T. Our Lord spoke to the people at large in parables ; dark sayings beyond their present com- prehension—each with its hidden esoteric meaning. Short, striking, impressive lessons, to be stored up in their memo- ries, wondered at, pondered over, till possibly the day of divine illumination should shine upon. their hearts and reveal the mysteries of the kingdom of heaven. The μήποτε in 15 is the apodosis of the διὰ τοῦτο in 13, ‘‘ Because they see not what is before their eyes and hear not what is spoken in their ears, and do not understand ; and so in.them is fulfilled...;” “therefore speak I to them in parables, in case that, at some future time, they may see....” καὶ ἰάσωμαι αὐτοὺς, ND Ὁ, May not this possibly be 19 85}, (participle) ; “And there may be a Healer for them:” ‘‘and that they may find a Saviour,” ‘‘a Physician for their Souls’’? Or possibly the subject of JY and ND) may be the same, as change of tense seems to indicate: ‘and God may return and heal them.” The free paraphrase of the passage from Isaiah in Mk. iv. 12 carries out this idea, and seems to justify, on our Lord’s authority and in His own words, the ap- plication or explanation suggested above. MATTHEW, XIII. 18—33. 29 » -»" wv / νι" ’ "- Ν" \ » -» “ > , μησαν ἰδεῖν ἃ βλέπετε, καὶ οὐκ εἶδον: καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ἃ ἀκούετε v a > > , ‘ a Kal οὐκ ἤκουσαν. “Tels οὖν ἀκούσατε τὴν παραβολὴν τοῦ σπεί- 18 ᾽ / \ / n povtos. ἱπαντὸς] ἀκούοντος τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας καὶ μὴ 19 , - \ \ id re a TUVLEVTOS, ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει TO ἐσπαρμένον ἐν TH / i n - , e \ \ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ" οὗτός ἐστιν [ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς.) ὁ δὲ 20 \e \ / e is ἐπὶ Ta πετρώδη σπαρεὶς, οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ TOV λόγον ἀκούων Kal 10 \ \ lel x β , ᾽ Le > ” δὲ er 3 e lal εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, 21 ᾽ \ / / / δ A ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιρός ἐστι γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν εἰ / , λόγον, εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται. ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρεὶς, οὗτός 22 > c \ / > / fel lal ἐστιν ὁ TOV λόγον ἀκούων, Kal ἡ μέριμνα * τοῦ aidvos* καὶ ἡ ’ / a / / ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου συμπνίγει TOV λόγον, καὶ ἄκαρπος γίνεται. 23 Ἑ \ 3 Ν ‘ lal \ \ \ ες ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρεὶς, οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ τὸν λόγον νι . « a n ἀκούων καὶ συνιείς. ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ, καὶ ποιεῖ ὁ μὲν ἑκατὸν; « \ / ὁ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὁ δὲ τριάκοντα. » , ’ a / ¢ Ad\Anv παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, “OpoidOn ἡ Ba- 24 a a / \ / a σιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ σπείροντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν TO ’ lal b] a. 5] \ a U \ bd f, 3 ᾽ a ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ" ἐν δὲ τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ 25 . > \ Ν > , / > ‘ - na J \ ’ Ὁ ὁ ἐχθρὸς καὶ ἐπέσπειρεν ζιζάνια ἀνὰ MECON τοῦ σίτου, καὶ ἀπῆλθεν. 4 Ν > / 6 4 \ \ > / / | , ὅτε δὲ ἐβλάστησεν ὁ χόρτος, καὶ καρπὸν ἐποίησεν, τότε ἐφάνη 26 e a A > / καὶ τὰ ζιζάνια. προσελθόντες δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι τοῦ οἰκοδεσπότου, 27 53 fal f : ld n fol 3 fal εἶπον αὐτῷ, Ἰζύριε, οὐχὶ καλὸν σπέρμα ἔσπειρας ἐν τῷ σῷ ἀγρῷ; / > ς lj 9. Lal > \ v πόθεν οὖν ἔχει ζιζάμια; ὁ δὲ ἔφη αὐτοῖς, ᾿Ιχθρὸς ἄνθρωπος 28 a a , a > / τοῦτο ἐποίησεν. οἱ δὲ δοῦλοι λέγουσιν, Θελεὶις οὖν ἀπελθόν- ΄ " , , \ τες συλλέξωμεν αὐτά; ὁ δὲ ἔφη, Οὔ μήποτε 'συλλέγοντες τὰ 29 f > a [ , an \ an ΕΣ 7 6 ζιζάνια, ἐκριζώσητε ἅμα αὐτοῖς τὸν σῖτον. ἄφετε συναυξάνεσθαι 30 ἀμφότερα ἕως τοῦ θερισμοῦ: καὶ ἐν καιρῷ τοῦ θερισμοῦ ἐρῶ -“ a n \ / Ν f ᾽ \ τοῖς θερισταῖς, Συλλέξατε πρῶτον Ta ζιζάνια, Kal δήσατε αὐτὰ n ? / \ \ “Ὁ 4 > δέσμας πρὸς τὸ κατακαῦσαι αὐτά᾽ τὸν δὲ σῖτον συναγάγετε εἰς \ ’ τὴν ἀποθήκην μου. \ , eer. a ¢ / apne ἃ ¢ "λλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, Opola ἐστὶν ἡ 31 a an / / “Ὁ \ wv βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν κόκκῳ σινάπεως, ὃν λαβὼν ἄνθρωπος » > As A ’ πρὸς eX , μι 2 4 = » ἔσπειρεν ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ" ὃ μικρότερον μέν ἐστιν πάντων τῶν 32 / a ee \ Ξ a lal lal / 5 \ \ σπερμάτων" ὅταν δὲ αὐξηθῇ, [μεῖζον τῶν λαχάνων] ἐστὶν, καὶ / id lal \ \ lal > lal Ν γίνεται δένδρον, ὥστε ἐλθεῖν τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ κατα- Lal lal , σκηνοῖν ἐν τοῖς κλάδοις αὐτοῦ. ,’ lal id / ’ \ € "AdAnv παραβολὴν ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς, “Opoia ἐστὶν ἡ βασι- 3 lal an « n \ , >’ > , λεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ζύμῃ, ἣν λαβοῦσα γυνὴ ἐνέκρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύ- / ud pov σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ ἐζυμώθη ὅλον. io) 19—23. Hopeless intricacy of sub- 25. ἀνὰ μέσον] V.A. for 13. ‘in the jects, genders, and relations. midst of.” 20 MATTHEW, XIII. 34—48. 34 Ταῦτα πάντα ἐλάλησεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐν παραβολαῖς τοῖς ὄχλοις, 35 καὶ χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς" [ὅπως πληρωθῇ] τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, ᾿Ανοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα pov’ [ἐρεύξομαι κεκρυμμένα ἀπὸ καταβολῆς]. 36 Τότε ἀφεὶς τοὺς ὄχλους, ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν καὶ προσῆλθον ὑτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ λί Φράσον ἡμῖν τὴν παραβολὴ αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ λέγοντες, Pp ἡμῖν τὴ ραβολὴν 37 τῶν ζιζανίων τοῦ ἀγροῦ. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Ὁ 38 σπείρων τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα, ἔστιν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου" ὁ δὲ a ; \ ov ς , Ξ \ ne Ne ΄ e / > ΕἾ aypos ἐστιν O KOO (oS TO € καλὸν σπέρμα, OUTOL εἰσιν οι ο- a σ, ce aN A A 39 υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας" Ἐ τὰ δὲ ζιζάνια εἰσὶν Ἐ οἱ viol τοῦ πονηροῦ" Ἐ δὲ > θ \ ς / ’ \ »᾿ id ὃ , εἶ is δὲ θ \ & ἐ ἐχθρὸς ὁ σπείρας αὐτὰ ἔστιν ὁ διάβολος" ὁ δὲ θερισμὸς, Ἔσυν- / a 7A / ΕΣ > 3 7 \ \ v {? > 4 40 τέλεια τοῦ αἰῶνός ὃ éotw' οἱ δὲ θερισταὶ ἄγγελοί εἰσιν. ὥσπερ a ‘ or οὖν συλλέγεται Ta ζιζάνια, Kal πυρὶ κατακαίεται, οὕτως ἔσται nA a a a Ν “Ὁ ’ 41 ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ Tod αἰῶνος. ἀποστελεῖ ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου [ L \ ᾽ / ’ a \ ͵ ϑ a / > a TOUS ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ, καὶ συλλέξουσιν ἐκ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ \ a , ‘ 42 πάντα * Ta σκάνδαλα Ἔ καὶ τοὺς ποιοῦντας τὴν ἀνομίαν, καὶ βαλοῦσιν αὐτοὺς “εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός" ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ a / fe 43 κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων." τότε of δίκαιοι ἐκλάμ- « ς vA 2 a if a \ ᾽ a ec ψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος, ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ TOD πατρὸς αὐτῶν. “ὃ ὁ ἔχων 9 “ ὦτα," ἀκουέτω. \ A ,’ “ fal rf 44 Ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν θησαυρῷ κεκρυμμένῳ 3 fad , lal «Ῥ ξ \ v θ vy Ῥ Ν * > \ n [ev τῷ ἀγρῷ, dv εὑρὼν ἄνθρωπος ἔκρυψεν. καὶ * amo τῆς A a / lal \ - ὥ χαρᾶς Ἐ αὐτοῦ ὑπάγει καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἔχει πωλεῖ, καὶ ἀγοράζει \ 2 \ a TOV ἀγρὸν ἐκεῖνον. ,ὔ a ’ - 3A fi >) 3 45 1]άλιν ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ, a \ , / 46 ζητοῖντι καλοὺς μαργαρίτας" εὑρὼν δὲ ἕνα πολύτιμον μαργαρίτην, 3 , ΄ 5 ,’ , 2 / ἀπελθὼν πέπρακεν πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν, καὶ ἠγόρασεν αὐτόν. Li n >: n / 47 =Lladw ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν σαγήνῃ βλη- , , is . Ἐπ 48 θείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ ἐκ παντὸς γένους συναγαγούσῃ; ἣν 35. Ps. Ixxvili.2 Dp nnn, “dark have come down and met together.” sayings from time-of-old:” V.A. προβλή- From this close, precise sense, it easily para dm’ ἀρχῆς. passed into ‘end ;” as here and vy. 40, 39. συντέλεια] “Confinium quod duo 49; and Cap. xxiv. 3, xxviii. 20. V.A. extrema jungit,” Schl.; e.g. N23 nbiy renders by it 23, ὙΠ and ΠΝ, and ΠῚΠ ὨΣῚΝ, and so in strict exactness Dan. ix. Eo tee rege with καίρων or ie: a : ; ἡμερῶν. And from hence is probably requiring Pl. αἰώνων, as in Heb. ix. 26, derived its use in N.T. Classical authors Where it expresses the confluence, or qo not employ it in above sense. Grimm meeting, of the extremities of the twoages, gives one passage from Polybius, where it zeras, or dispensations; i.e. the Ante- stands for “completion, fulfilment.” Christian and Christian. Compare 1 Cor. 42. In parallel passage, v. 22, yéerva x. II, εἰς os τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήν- corresponds to κάμινος here. τησεν, “ὌΡΟΣ whom the extremities,” the end and beginning, ‘‘ of the two zeras MATTHEW, XIII. 49—XIV. 9. 31 a “ » , a / : 22} y «ἃ. \ >? \ / ὅτε ἐπληρώθη ἀναβιβάσαντες αὐτὴν ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν, καθίσαντες \ \ \ / συνέλεξαν Ta καλὰ εἰς ἄγγη, [τὰ δὲ σαπρὰ] ἔξω ἔβαλον. οὕτως 49 » Aa Δ a bal e » ‘ ἔσται ἐν TH συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰώνος" ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι, καὶ , a Ἂν / lal la) ἀφοριοῦσιν τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μέσου τῶν δικαίων, Kal βαλοῦσιν 50 μι A / a αὐτοὺς * εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς ἢ ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυθμὸς Kal ς \ a 5 ἴω ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. Συνήκατε ταῦτα πάντα; λέγουσιν 51 ᾽ an \ \ S 2 a a a αὐτῷ, Nat. ‘O δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Διὰ τοῦτο πᾶς γραμματεὺς 52 ἊΝ A , -“ » - “ , > ? ’ [μαθητευθεὶς] τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν, Ὁμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ Le U > lol ἴω ’ A“ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅστις ἐκβάλλει ἐκ TOU θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ καινὰ καὶ / παλαια. ᾽ Καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς τὰς παραβολὰς ταύτας, 53 fel 2 a \ : \ > \ An μετῆρεν ἐκεῖθεν. καὶ ἐλθὼν εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ, ἐδίδασκεν 54 2 \ a lal 5 Lal 2 > αὐτοὺς ἐν TH συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν, ὥστε ἐκπλήσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς καὶ / 4 ¢ / la e U , φ / λέγειν, Πόθεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία αὕτη καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις ; οὐχ οὗτός 55 5 Cs na a ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός ; οὐχὶ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Mapua, ᾿] a A 3 / καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ᾿Ιάκωβος καὶ ᾿Ιωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ ᾿Ιούδας ; \ © » A al a καὶ at ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ οὐχὶ πᾶσαι πρὸς uds* εἰσιν; πόθεν οὖν 56 a » ’ a ¢ \ τούτῳ ταῦτα πάντα; καὶ ὃ ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ. * ὁ 6857 » “ 53 ᾽ cal > » ͵ » > ἈΝ 9 “Ὁ Inoods εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ Lal ᾿ ὁ ᾽ fo] / > al ta πατρίδι καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ. καὶ οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις 58 ᾽ / ’ -“ πολλᾶς διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν. enn ? ? / a lal v ε / e £ \ EN ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἤκουσεν “Hpoddns ὁ τετράρχης τὴν 14 ’ \ 3 fol \ 5 a 4 » A Φ ᾿ς ? ΕῚ ἀκοὴν ᾿Ιησοῦ, καὶ εἶπεν [τοῖς παισὶν] αὐτοῦ, Οὗτός ἐστιν ᾽Ἴω- 2 , ip ’ ‘ a al \ ἄννης ὁ βαπτιστής" [αὐτὸς] ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ a 4 ὃ / > na > , - Ὅ \ "H ᾽ὃ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ. γὰρ “Ἡρώδης κρα- 3 / \ al / ἔδ ᾽ \ rn) n r Ὁ ὃ \ Ἥ ὃ τήσας τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ, διὰ ᾿Ηρωδι- / \ “ n ᾽ fal ει nr of \ τ an [2 dda τὴν γιναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ. ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ 4 2 / ’ ” / v > / \ θέ Ε] \ ,’ Ἰωάννης, Οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. Kal θέλων αὐτὸν ἀπο- ul κτεῖναι, ἐφοβήθη τὸν ὄχλον, OTL ὡς προφήτην αὐτὸν εἶχον. [γενεσίοις δὲ γενομένοις] τοῦ Ἡρώδου, ὠρχήσατο ἡ θυγάτηρ τῆς 6 Ἡρωδιάδος ἐν τῷ μέ δ 9 Ἡρώδῃ" ὅθεν μεθ᾽ ὅρκου ρωδιάδος ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, καὶ ἤρεσεν τῷ Ἡρώδῃ ὅθεν μεθ᾽ ὅρκου 7 ὡμολόγησεν αὐτῇ δοῦναι [ὃ ἂν αἰτήσηται.] “H δὲ [προβιβασθεῖσα)] 8 ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς, Δός μοι φησὶν, ὧδε ἐπὶ πίνακι τὴν κε- φαλὴν ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ. καὶ λυπηθεὶς ὁ βασιλεὺς διὰ ο 56. πρὸς judas] Mk. vi. 3, Johni. 1. λων, ‘inter angelorum ordines,” Deut. In V.A. πρὸς stands for by “apud” or ΧΧΧΙΪ, 2. εἰς also, in its almost universal », ; “inter,” Jerem. xli. 12; and εἰς for 28 use for δ᾽ in V.A., is put for it occasion- frequently. Deut. xvi. 6, 1 Kings viii. 30. ally when it means ‘‘apud.” Ps, xvi. τὸ Hence in N.T. Mk. i. 39, ii. 1, xiii. 9, 16, Lisepis wD) siynend ats: dav. els συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσθε, and ὁ els τὸν ΛΩΝ oe a ’ ἀγρὸν wy. Acts vii. 53 els διαταγὰς ἀγγέ- 29 MATTHEW, XIV. 10—31. \ or \ \ , Sift ὃ 67 F κ Ιο τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους ἐκέλευσεν δοθῆναι καὶ “ lal \ 11 πέμψας ἀπεκεφάλισεν τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ. Kai ἠνέχθη ς λὴ ’ A “ \ / Ν ἐὃ 0 lal ee s ” ἡ κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πίνακι, καὶ ἐδόθη TO Kopacio’ καὶ ἤνεγκεν a a a 5 12 τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς. καὶ προσελθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἦραν τὸ lal \ 4 ,’ / \ 2 , ϑ' , δ ὖ na σῶμα, καὶ ἔθαψαν αὐτόν" καὶ ἐλθόντες ἀπήγγειλαν τῷ ᾿Ιησοῖ. a} , Ν ς. | a τ᾿ 4 ? a us / > ” 13 ἀκούσας δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον , . °’ ’ a τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων. 14 Καὶ ἐξελθὼν εἶδεν πολὺν ὄχλον, Kal ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ᾽ av- \ ‘ 3 , \ ,’ ΄ ᾽ n ᾽ / \ 15 τοὺς, καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν τοὺς ἀρρώστους αὐτῶν. ᾿Οψίας δὲ γε- / a ,’ a € \ / » , 2 νομένης, προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ λέγοντες, “Epnuos ἐστιν c , \ ¢ ef v a 5 2: / > \ ” ὁ τώπος, Kal ἡ ὥρα ἤδη TapHdrAOev' ἀπόλυσον οὖν τοὺς ὄχλους, ᾿ ,’ , -“ 16 ἵνα ἀπελθόντες εἰς τὰς κώμας, ἀγοράσωσιν ἑαυτοῖς βρώματα. ὁ ἄν. αὶ an 5 ᾽ nr 7 / ” ’ mars "4 ,’ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Ov χρείαν ἔχουσιν ἀπελθεῖν [δότε av- rn lal lal lal 3 17 τοῖς ὑμεῖς φαγεῖν.) οἱ δὲ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Οὐκ ἔχομεν ὧδε εἰ μὴ 18 ΄ ” \ δυ ? θύ ς δὲ ΞΨ dé / ’ \ 50 πέντε ἄρτους καὶ δύο ἰχθύας. ὃ δὲ εἶπε, Φέρετέ μοι αὐτοὺς ὧδε. Ν , \ vv ᾽ -“ ’ Ν \ , 19 καὶ κελεύσας τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνακλιθῆναι [ἐπὶ τοὺς χόρτους,] λα- \ \ rd " Ν Ἂς / > TA 3, is > \ βὼν τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας, ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν ’ Ν 3 4 ΠῚ \ [a ” “ lal a4 οὐρανὸν, [ηὐλόγησεν καὶ κλάσας ἔδωκεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς τοὺς ” ς \ Ν a v \ » 2 \ 20 ἄρτους, of δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις. καὶ ἔφαγον πάντες, Kal ἐχορτάσθησαν' καὶ ἦραν τὸ περισσεῦον τῶν κλασμάτων δώδεκα / e \ 5 / ες wv «. \ , 21 κοφίνους πλήρεις. οἱ δὲ ἐσθίοντες ἦσαν ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ πεντακισχί- 22 λιοι, χωρὶς γυναικῶν καὶ παιδίων. καὶ εὐθέως ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς ᾽ nr ? lal μαθητὰς ἐμβῆναι eis πλοῖον, Kat [προάγειν αὐτὸν] εἰς τὸ πέραν, 23 [ἕως οὗ ἀπολύσῃ] τοὺς ὄχλους. καὶ ἀπολύσας Tols ὄχλους, ἀνέβη εἰς τὸ ὄρος κατ᾽ ἰδίαν προσεύξασθαι. ᾿Οψίας δὲ γενο- tA . 2 a \ \ “-“ Ὑ ΄ a t 24 μένης, μόνος ἣν ἐκεῖ. τὸ δὲ πλοῖον ἤδη μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης ἦν, βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων ἦν γὰρ ἐναντίος ὁ ἄνεμος. yy If ΙΝ a a \ ΒΡ \ ’ \ lal 25 Teraptn δὲ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς ἦλθεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς περιπατῶν ἌΝ \ I N 0. 7 SiN e \ ew A 26 ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν. καὶ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ot μαθηταὶ [ἐπὶ τῆς θα- λάσσης] περιπατοῦντα, ἐταράχθησαν λέγοντες, ἘΟτι ἔ φάν- Ἐ ἀπὸ τοῦ φόβου ἔ ἔκραξαν. εὐθέως δὲ ἐλά- λησεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγων, Θαρσεῖτε᾽ ἐγώ εἰμι, μὴ φοβεῖσθε. De) τ \ 27 τασμὰ ἐστιν και 28 ᾿Αποκριθεὶς δὲ αὐτῷ 6 ἹΠέτρος εἶπεν, Κύριε, εἰ σὺ εἶ, κέλευσόν με πρός σε ἐλθεῖν ἐπὶ τὰ ἵδατα. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ᾿᾽Ελθέ. καὶ καταβὰς ’ \ a / / , 5 \ \ UO ἣν “5. 20 απὸ τοῦ πλοίου ILerpos, περιεπώτησεν ETL TA VOATA, καὶ ἦλθεν \ \ Ἴ lal Br / δὲ ‘ ” ο > \ ’ β 10 _ \ 30 πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν. έπων δὲ τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν, ἐφοβήθη" καὶ > , ͵ ” , ͵ ee 9 31 ὀρξάμενος καταποντίζεσθαι, ἔκραξεν λέγων, Κύριε σῶσόν με. ev- Cap. XIV. 26. Compare vii. 23, xix. {Ὁ Ὸ very strong instances in point. 8, Acts xxviii. 25, L. iv. 41, 43 and vi 5, MATTHEW, XIV. 32—XV. 1r. 33 / % διὸ. ΝΒ a , ld Ν a > / γ᾽ ἴω \ Me θέως δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα, ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ, καὶ λέγει ’ Lal > a * 4 aS 26 ᾿ Ν ᾽ ᾽ fal > αὐτῷ, ᾿Ολιγόπιστε, * εἰς τί ἢ ἐδίστασας ; Kat ἀναβάντων αὐτῶν εἰς 32 Ν - » eed cw e \ > a / 3 , τὸ πλοῖον, ἐκύπασεν ὃ ἄνεμος. οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ ἐλθόντες προσ- 55 εκύνησαν αὐτῷ, λέγοντες, ᾿Αληθῶς Θεοῦ υἱὸς εἶ, \ ’ “5 » ‘ n ΄ \ > Καὶ διαπεράσαντες ἦλθον εἰς τὴν γῆν Vevvnoapér. καὶ ἐπι- 34 , rn , γνόντες αὐτὸν οἱ ἄνδρες τοῦ τόπου ἐκείνου, ἀπέστειλαν εἰς ὕλην 35 A -“ Ὁ τὴν περίχωρον ἐκείνην, καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς » a ἔχοντας, Kal παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν, ἵνα μόνον ἅψωνται τοῦ κρασ- 36 ἐδ na ¢ , ᾽ ας Ne Ἐξ “ * , * πέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ" Kal ὅσοι ἥψαντο, * διεσώθησαν. ΤΟΤΕ ; 3 Ἰησοῦ of ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύ 5 προσέρχονται τῷ Inoov ol απὸ ἱεροσολύμων γραμ- 15 lal ad / ματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι. λέγοντες, Διατί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαί- 2 νουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων; οὐ γὰρ νίπτονται τὰς -“ > - [72 v > / id δὲ b] Q \ 3 ,’ χεῖρας αὐτῶν, ὅταν ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν. Ὃ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν av- 3 a , ἣν ¢ a / \ b] \ n a \ \ τοῖς, Διατί Kai ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν , fie. on ς \ \ s , \ , \ \ παράδοσιν ὑμῶν; Ὃ yap Θεὸς εἶπεν, Τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν 4 μητέρα' καὶ, ὋΟ Kakodor@n πατέρα ἢ μητέρα, θανάτῳ τελευτάτω" ς a \ , a x v - x a - \ lal A ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, “Os ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρὶ, Δῶρον ὃ 5 * τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ 6 ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς: *xal οὐ μὴ τιμήσει ἢ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ" καὶ ἠκυρώσατε τὸν νόμον τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν 7 ὑποκριταὶ, καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν περὶ ὑμῶν 8 Ἡσαΐας λέγων, Ὃ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ" ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόῤῥω ἀπέχει ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ. μάτην δὲ σέβονταί με, διδάσκοντες g διδασκαλίας ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων. Καὶ προσκαλεσάμενος τὸν 10 ὄχλον εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿Ακούετε καὶ συνίετε. ‘ ΄ Ax ? \ \ > f 5" A TO στόμα ἕκοινοῖ ἢ τὸν ἄνθρωπον" ἀλλὰ TO ἐκπορευόμενον EK TOU παράδοσιν ὑμῶν. , > οὐ TO εἰσερχόμενον εἰς ΤΙ age Jelsi7t = mgd literally rendered. 36. διεσώθησαν] ix. 21. Cap. XV. 4. @av. rerX.] V. A. for ni) yd, Ex. xxi. 17. The translation of ὁ κακολογών, ““Π that curseth,’’ is incon- gruous with the context. It was, rather, heartless indifference, want of due respect for parents, that led to the evading of the plain duty of supporting them. Now κακολογέω is used by V. A. several times for Pihel or Hiphil of bbp, ‘“levis, vilis fuit;” in sense of wi/ipendit, ‘lightly re- garded,” ‘‘ treated with disrespect :” viz. Ex. xxii, 28, Ez. xxii. 7, $9) DN) IN, Auth. V. “ they have set light by.’”’ Prov. - xx.20. 1 Sam.iii. 13, 992 O79 DODpND 5, which may perhaps mean ‘had no respect for themselves.” Now in other similar passages the same verb, and the cognate Gre nbp, are rendered ἀτιμάξω in V. A., e.g. Deut. xxvii. 16, WON) WAN ΠΡΡΙΡ, the exact counterpart of Exod. xxi. 17, quoted by S. Matthew here, is ἀτιμάζων. Gen. xvi. 4, 5, Is. xvi. 14, and 2 Sam. xix. 44, sndpn Ὁ), ‘why hast thou despised us?” Hence we see that κακολογέω -- ἀτιμάζω in V.A. But 22) Pi. means “curse” also; Gen. viii. 21, xii. 3. And so the two senses have been confounded together and a wrong interpretation given. Better to translate ‘‘he that makes light of,” ‘‘disregards the claims of” his father and mother, so as to refuse to assist them, on the plea of a previous offering of his money to God’s service. For κορβᾶν see M. xxvii. 6. 11. See Miki? vitp 2. 15; ‘Acts xi 14, 28, xi. 8, Rom, xiv. 14. κοινὸς =‘unclean.” No such use of word in 3 34 MATTHEW, XV. 12—31. ΄ a a \ ” θ To λθό e 12 στόματος, τοῦτο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον. OTe προσελθόντες οἱ lel a ᾽ / \ μαθηταὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Οἶδας ὅτι οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες τὸν / 13 λόγον ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν; 6 δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, ἸΠᾶσα [φυτεία] ἢ , wv 14 ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος, ἐκριζωθήσεται. ἄφετε -" \ A Ν Ά « aA αὐτούς" τυφλοί εἰσιν ὁδηγοὶ τυφλῶν τυφλὸς δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, “ Ν « vA ᾧ 15 ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται. ᾿Αποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ Ἱ]έτρος εἶπεν an nr , ¢ NS La oJ \ \ 16 αὐτῷ, Φράσον ἡμῖν τὴν παραβολήν. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, [Ακμὴν] Kat n nA a \ / > \ 17 ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε; οὐ νοεῖτε, ὅτι πᾶν TO εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς TO Lal iN 18 στόμα εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ, Kal εἰς ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται; τὰ lal / , > δὲ ἐκπορευόμενα ἐκ Tod στόματος, ἐκ τῆς καρδίας ἐξέρχεται, κά- - na fal Me / 19 κεῖνα κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον. ἐκ yap τῆς καρδίας ἐξέρχονται δια- λογισμοὶ πονηροὶ, φόνοι, μοιχεῖαι, πορνεῖαι, κλοπαὶ, ψευδομαρτυ- " / airs \ a X 10 hee Be 20 plat, βλασφημίαι. ταυτὰ ἐστίν TA KOLVOUYTA τὸν ἀνῦρωπον᾽ TO OE ἀνίπτοις χερσὶ φαγεῖν, οὐ κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον. ies \ a uA cas a > ͵ > Α , , 21 Καὶ ἐξελθὼν ἐκεῖθεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Τύρου \ lal A ae: \ \ vn / > \ led Rie oy 2 / 22 Kal Σιδῶνος. καὶ ἰδοὺ γυνὴ Xavavaia ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων fa / ἐξελθοῦσα ἐκραύγασεν λέγουσα, EXénoov με, Kipie *vids* Δαυίδ" ς / lal ὃ / c δὲ * 3 γα (0 5 [4] 23 ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμονίζεται. ὁ δὲ *ovK ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον. καὶ προσελθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ [ἠρώτουν] αὐτὸν 24 λέγοντες, [Απόλυσον] αὐτὴν, ὅτι κράζει ὄπισθεν ἡμῶν. ὁ δὲ 3 0 \ “ 3 3 / > \ * >? \ / \ ΕῚ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, Οὐκ ἀπεστάλην εἰ μὴ *eis τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπο- 25 λωλότα οἴκου ᾿Ισραήλ. ἡ δὲ ἐλθοῦσα προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λέγουσα, 26 Κύριε, βοήθει μοι. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, Οὐκ ἔξεστιν λαβεῖν \ ! n n lal 27 τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις. ἡ δὲ εἶπεν, Ναὶ, \ nr - Κύριε" καὶ γὰρ τὰ κυνάρια ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων \ n a an a 28 ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης τῶν κυρίων αὐτῶν. τότε ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 5 » nF , ! ς , A , ¢ I εἶπεν αὐτῇ, Ὦ γύναι, μεγάλη σου ἡ πίστις" γενηθήτω σοι ὡς θέλεις. καὶ ἰάθη ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτῆς ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης. \ \ a > a 29 ΚΚαὶ μεταβὰς ἐκεῖθεν 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς ἦλθεν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν / A. cam, \ \ -“ fal 30 THs Γαλιλαίας, καὶ ἀναβὰς εἰς τὸ ὄρος ἐκάθητο ἐκεῖ, καὶ προσῆλ- θ > A ” Ἂν PAG \ 5, θ᾽ ε A PN \ \ ον αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοὶ ἔχοντες μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν χωλοὺς, κωφοὺς, τυφλοὺς, κυλλοὺς καὶ ἑτέρους πολλοὺς, καὶ ἔῤῥιψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ > A 31 τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ" Kal ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς, ὥστε τὸν ὄχλον θαυμάσαι βλέποντας κωφοὺς λαλοῦντας, κυλλοὺς ὑγιεῖς καὶ V.A.: but it stands for ἐδ in 1 Macc. 23. ONY = αἰτέω and ἐρωτάω. V.A, i. 50, 65, θύειν ὕεια καὶ κτήνη κοινὰ and μὴ constantly misplaces the two, putting one φαγεῖν κοινὰ, and Josephus 4. F x11. 12, for the other: as also N.T. writers, L. 13, κοινοὺς ἀνθρώπους and κοικὸν βίον, ΑΞ iv. 38, J. iv. 31, 1 Thess. v. 12, 1 John in Acts x. 28, ἄνθρ. x.=‘‘gentilis, homo ν. 16, profanus.” MATTHEW, XV. 32—XVI. 14. 35 a : \ χωλοὺς περιπατοῦντας Kal τυφλοὺς βλέποντας" Kai ἐδόξασαν τὸν Θεὸν ᾿Ισραήλ. «ς fal ἴω Ο δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς προσκαλεσάμενος τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ εἶπεν, 32 / Μ ͵ a Σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν , ‘a - \ lal μοι καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν [τί] φάγωσιν" καὶ [ἀπολῦσαι) αὐτοὺς νήστεις οὐ θέλω, μή ποτε ἐκλυθῶσιν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ 33 a lj fal μαθηταὶ, ἸΙόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ΕΣ lal \ / ? a LA+% a / ΕΙΣ ” ὄχλον τοσοῦτον ; Kal λέγει αὐτοῖς. ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Ἰ]όσους ἄρτους ἔχετε ; 34 οἱ δὲ εἶπον, Ἑπτὰ, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια. καὶ ἐκέλευσεν τοῖς ὄχλοις 35 > a > we \ lal \ \ \ e \ ” \ \ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν. καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς 36 > , > / ΝΜ Ν ” a a ς \ ἰχθύας εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασεν Kal ἔδωκεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς, οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις. καὶ ἔφαγον πάντες καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν, καὶ 37 \ a a TO περισσεῦον τῶν κλασμάτων ἦραν ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας πλήρεις. οἱ δὲ ἐσθίοντες ἦσαν τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες χωρὶς γυναικῶν καὶ 38 δί \ > , \ ” > , > \ a \ 4 παιδίων. Kal ἀπολύσας τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνέβη εἰς TO πλοῖον, Kal 39 ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅρια Μαγαδάν. ΤῊΝ Καὶ προσελθόντες οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι πειράζοντες 16 , 3 lal n fal ΄“ a ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν σημεῖον ἐκ Tod οὐρανοῦ ἐπιδεῖξαι αὐτοῖς. ὁ δὲ 2 ΕῚ ιν 5 ,’ an 5 / , / ΟῚ , See ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Orwrlas γενομένης λέγετε, Kudla, πυῤῥάζει Ν > yap ὃ οὐρανός. καὶ πρωὶ, Σήμερον χειμὼν, Tuppater yap στυγνά- 3 n ? la) Cov ὁ οὐρανός. τὸ μὲν πρόσωπον Tod οὐρανοῦ γινώσκετε διακρί- \ lal a a \ νειν, Ta δὲ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν οὐ δύνασθε; γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ 4 a a lal 3 an Ἐμοιχαλὶς 5 σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ εἰ a an 5 \ 5 lal μὴ TO σημεῖον ᾿Ιωνᾶ. καὶ καταλιπὼν αὐτοὺς ἀπῆλθεν. Καὶ ἐλθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ εἰς τὸ πέραν ἐπελάθοντο ἄρτους 5 λαβεῖν. ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, *‘Opdte καὶ προσέχετε ἀπὸ 6 a a / e \ / τῆς ζύμης ὃ τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων. οἱ δὲ διελογίζοντο 7 ἄγε € a , of ” Ὁ Sue? Nesting a πα τον ἐν ἑαυτοῖς λέγοντες ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἐλάβομεν. γνοὺς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ὃ a / f 2 εἶπεν, Τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ὀλυγόπιστοι, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ - / / n ἐλάβετε; οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ μνημονεύετε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους τῶν 9 / \ / / 3 “ fs Ἰδὲ \ « \ πεντακισχιλίων καὶ πόσους κοφίνους ἐλάβετε; οὐδὲ τοὺς ἑπτὼ 10 a / / A n ἄρτους τῶν τετρακισχιλίων καὶ πόσας σπυρίδας ἐλάβετε; πῶς II tal a / \ 2 \ “ οὐ νοεῖτε ὅτι οὐ περὶ ἄρτων εἶπον ὑμῖν; προσέχετε δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς -“ , a “ ᾽ ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων. τότε συνῆκαν OTL οὐκ 12 3 Ls > \ lal Α lal » ἌΝ \ > \ fal ὃ ὃ a εἶπεν προσέχειν ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν ἄρτων ἀλλὰ ἀπὸ τῆς διδαχῆς lal M4 τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων. a / lel “ Ἐλθὼν δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς τὰ μέρη Καισαρείας τῆς Φιλίππου 13 ’ / \ \ ’ nr , Τί / e ” 0 ἠρώτα τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ λέγων, Τίνα λέγουσιν οἱ ἀνθρωποι a s id \ 3 / \ εἶναι τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου; οἱ δὲ εἶπον, Οἱ μὲν ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν 14 ¢ / ᾺἋ Φ lal βαπτιστὴν, ἄλλοι δὲ ᾿Ηλίαν, ἕτεροι δὲ “lepepiay ἢ ἕνα Tav προ- 2 - pe Pe 36 MATTHEW, XVI. 15—28. lel a lal > \ 15 φητῶν. λέγει αὐτοῖς, “Ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνα pe λέγετε εἶναι; ἀποκριθεὶς 16 δὲ Σίμων Πέτρος εἶπεν, Σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς 6 υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ a nr n / ea / 17 ζῶντος. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Μακάριος εἶ, Σίμων n > ι Ae , Bapiwvd, ὅτι *capé καὶ αἷμα ἢ οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι ἀλλ᾽ ὁ πατὴρ δ τ 3 a > \ δέ , “ \ 5 Tlé d 8' * 18 μου ὁ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. κἀγὼ δέ cot λέγω ὅτι σὺ εἶ Πέτρος, καὶ ἐπὶ , a , ᾿ § , \ > / \ x ' “ὃ * ταύτῃ TH πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, Kal ἔπύλαι ἅδου a lal n / 19 οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς. Kal δώσω σοι τὰς κλεῖδας τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, καὶ ὃ ἂν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται δεδεμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν λύσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται λελυμένον ἐν τοῖς a a a 7 20 οὐρανοῖς. τότε διεστείλατο τοῖς μαθηταῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ εἴπωσιν ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός. » \ if ” (tee) fal , a -“ " » 21 Amo τότε ἤρξατο ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς δεικνύειν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ὅτι δεῖ αὐτὸν εἰς Ιεροσόλυμα ἀπελθεῖν καὶ πολλὰ παθεῖν * ἀπὸ Ἐ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ ἀρχιερέων καὶ γραμματέων καὶ ἀἁποκταν- lod an φ' lal 22 θῆναι Kal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθῆναι. καὶ προσλαβόμενος αὐτὸν ς > A lal Ud ’ ὁ Ilétpos λέγει αὐτῷ ἐπιτιμῶν, *”INeds σοι, ἢ Kupse* [ov μὴ ἔσται 23 σοι τοῦτο.] ὁ δὲ στραφεὶς εἶπεν τῷ Πέτρῳ, Ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, mn / ἡ 72 Ὁ Ὁ \ fa) na αὶ Ν A Σατανᾶ" σκάνδαλον εἶ pov, ὅτι ov φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. Τότε ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, Ei τις θέλει ὀπίσω μου ἐλθεῖν, ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, Ν 5 / “Ὁ x SAN ΄ aN x > n n 25 Kal ἀκολουθείτω μοι. ὃς yap ἐὰν θέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ σῶσαι, ᾽ , > Toa «Ὁ 2. ἃ > , x Ἂν ’ nan ἡ > nr ἀπολέσει αὐτήν ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ἀπολέσῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, ς / > / / \ » ” ὟΝ \ , 26 εὑρήσει αὐτήν. τί γὰρ ὠφεληθήσεται ἄνθρωπος, ἐὰν τὸν κόσμον ὅλ ὃ / \ δὲ Ἂν 3 lol θῇ τ x 2 ὃ ” ov κερδήσῃ, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ζημιωθῇ; ἢ TL δώσει av- fal “ ,’ “ Ν “ 27 θρώπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ; μέλλει γὰρ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ’ fa} / ” * DJ a ὃ / * lal \ 3 fal A fal ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεσθαι *év τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων αὐτοῦ, καὶ τότε ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν πρᾶξιν an \ - an αὐτοῦ. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰσίν τινες ὧδε ἑστῶτες οἵτινες οὐ μὴ 24 28 Cap. XVI. 18. πύλαι ἅδου] i.e. ‘the Powers of Hades:” the gate of the city was, on fit occasions, the place of the tri- bunal, or throne of the judge or chief ruler. Deut. xxi. 19, Jerem. xxxviii. 7, Lam. v. 14, Esth. iv. 2, v. 13, Dan. ii. 49, xii, 23, mim Non % nbn, ἐμοὶ μη- δαμῶς τοῦ ἁμαρτεῖν τῷ Κυρίῳ (an instance of strange obscuration of all meaning by literal translation): but generally ἵλεώς go, τ Chr. xi. 19, 2 Sam. xx. 20. Sup- posed to be a form of ‘God be merciful Amos v.15. Hence it came to beaterm {to you,” ‘*God forbid.” Schl. and for “the king’s court ;” ‘‘the central seat Grimm quote Elian for ἵλεως as an ad- of empire;” as with the Turks at this jective. day; ‘‘the Porta Sublimis,” ‘the Sublime 26. ‘*What will he-have-to-give-in- Porte.” εἰς Ὄς i ' exchange-for his lost soul,” at the last 22. For i2%2n, (‘‘vox indignantis, day? The different meanings of ψυχὴ detestantis,” Gesen.,) ‘‘ profanum habea- tur tibi,’’ V.A. once has μηδαμῶς, 1 Sam, (life and soul) in 25 and 26 make the pas- sage difficult to translate, See x. 39. MATTHEW, XVII. 1—20. 37 , , ev A Μ \ eae rf ᾽ , > , γεύσωνται θανάτου ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου épyo- μενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ. at / Lee. A \ Καὶ μεθ᾽ ἡμέρας ἕξ παραλαμβάνει 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς τὸν Πέτρον καὶ 17 » , Ye ’ Ν » \ > lal ® ’ Pi 9 Ἰάκωβον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀναφέρει αὐτους ’ ” « \ ’ A \ 50 Ἢ ᾽ al 2 εἰς ὄρος ὑψηλὸν κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. Kal μετεμορφωθη ἔμπροοθεν αὐτῶν, 2 Ν ” \ / ’ lal «ς sty J \ ie 8 / > fo) καὶ ἔλαμψεν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος, τὰ δὲ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἔφθη αὐτοῖς Μωυσῆς καὶ 3 Ὁ an a Ηλίας μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ συλλαλοῦντες. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ἹΠέτρος εἶπεν 4 a? “ τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, Κύριε, καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι" εἰ θέλεις, ποιήσω δὸ a \ \ / \ M a , \ Ἥ / I x ὧδε τρεῖς σκηνὰς, col μίαν καὶ Μωυσεῖ μίαν καὶ “Hrla μίαν. ἔτι 5 . Ὁ Lal αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, ἰδοὺ νεφέλη φωτεινὴ ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτοὺς, Kal ἰδοὺ \ 3 lal , fe @ / 9 « ΓΑ; ς ’ 5 φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης λέγουσα, Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς μου ὁ ἀγαπητὸς, ες > κυ Io , x τὶ ͵ ’ lal Ἄ, ’ , e \ ἐν ᾧ εὐδόκησα" ἢ ἀκούετε αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ μαθηταὶ 6 , “Ὁ ἔπεσαν ᾿ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτῶν" καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν σφόδρα. καὶ 7 \ £4.39: r gd ? a Ν 5 3 , \ \ προσελθὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἥψατο αὐτῶν καὶ εἶπεν, EyépOnte καὶ μὴ - \ ? lal φοβεῖσθε. ἐπάραντες δὲ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν οὐδένα εἶδον εἰ 8 μὴ τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν μόνον. καὶ καταβαινόντων αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ὄρους ἐνε- 9 τείλατο αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγων, Μηδενὶ εἴπητε τὸ ὅραμα [ἕως οὗ] ¢ e\ lol ’ , > lal ’ θῇ ἮΝ > / ’ Ar ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεκρῶν [ἐγερθῇ]. Kat ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν ΤΟ a e - lA οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ λέγοντες, Τί οὖν οἱ γραμματεῖς λέγουσιν ὅτι a a > Ν ᾿Ηλίαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν πρῶτον; ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, «Ἡλίας μὲν ΤΊ » δ ὦ , , = 4 δὲ Εἰ τ νὰ {4 Ἥ , 10 > ἔρχεται Kal ἀποκαταστήσει πάντα᾽ λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτι “Ηλίας ἤδη 12 Ss ξ Ε] ᾽ / DAN ᾽ \ x > / > ’ AX Ὁ ἦλθεν, καὶ οὐκ ἐπέγνωσαν αὐτὸν, adda ἐποίησαν ἐν αὐτῷ ἢ ὅσα a / ἠθέλησαν" οὕτως καὶ *6 vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μέλλει πάσχειν ὑπ᾽ » lal / lol a αὐτῶν. τότε συνῆκαν οἱ μαθηταὶ ὅτι περὶ ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ 13 εἶπεν αὐτοῖς. - ’ lal } Καὶ ἐλθὼν πρὸς τὸν ὄχλον, προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ἄνθρωπος γονυπε- 14 a \ « / τῶν αὐτὸν καὶ λέγων, Κύριε, ἐλέησόν μου τὸν υἱὸν, ὅτι σεληνιάξεται 15 A / > \ Le \ , καὶ κακῶς πάσχει" πολλάκις γὰρ πίπτει εἰς τὸ πῦρ καὶ πολλάκις a al \ »Ι εἰς τὸ ὕδωρ. καὶ προσήνεγκα αὐτὸν τοῖς μαθηταῖς σου, καὶ οὐκ 16 » / , \ nr ’ θ \ δὲ « i | rn [ἡ I ἠδυνήθησαν αὐτὸν θεραπεῦσαι. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εὖπεν, 17 ld ΙΑ > id fal ” A Ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος Kal διεστραμμένη, ἕως πότε μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ἔσομαι; “ , δ ν δ ΠΑ, , ῇ ΕἸΗ͂ΒΕΥ δὸ ἌΣ: / 18 ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν; φέρετέ μοι αὐτὸν ὧδε. καὶ ἐπετίμησεν , fal e’ 3 Ὁ \ > lal » > ᾽ fal \ ὃ / . ‘ 20 αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὸ δαιμόνιον" Kai ἐθε- a a / lf € ραπεύθη ὁ παῖς ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης. Τότε προσελθόντες οἱ 19 θ \ a? a > 3997 5 Δ \ fete a , 8 10 μαθηταὶ τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ κατ᾽ ἰδίαν εἶπον, Διὰ τί ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἠδυνήθημεν a n NN ᾿ , ἀ, ον ορρ ΉΓ ἐκβαλεῖν αὐτό; ὁ δὲ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν ὑμῶν" ἀμὴν 20 Cap. XVII. 2... 566 v. 16. ; ‘ : " 12, ἐποίησαν ἐν αὐτῷ] Is. ν. 4 13 ἜΣ sy "273? rityyd Wd, 38 MATTHEW, XVII. 21—XVIII. 7. a U € Ρ / ’ - “Ὁ γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, ἐρεῖτε τῷ " lal / Ὁ» \ ’ ὄρει τούτῳ, Μετάβα ἔνθεν ἐκεῖ, καὶ μεταβήσεται, καὶ οὐδὲν [ἀδυνα- 21 τήσει] ὑμῖν. τοῦτο δὲ προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ. Ἄν / ν > e > \ * > TO γένος οὐκ ἐκπορεύεται εἰ μὴ * ἐν fal fal > , »" ε 22 ᾿Αναστρεφομένων δὲ αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ Τ᾽ αλιλαίᾳ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ lal fal > “ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Μέλλει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοσθαι εἰς χεῖρας fal 9 \ \ lal / ¢ / > / 23 ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτὸν, καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθή- σεται. καὶ ἐλυπήθησαν σφόδρα. a \ a e \ / 24 ᾿Ελθόντων δὲ αὐτῶν eis Καφαρναοὺμ προσῆλθον οἱ τὰ δί- n 5S « lal δραχμα λαμβάνοντες τῷ Ilétpw καὶ εἶπαν, ‘O διδάσκαλος ὑμῶν a \ Shes ἢ 25 οὐ τελεῖ τὰ δίδραχμα; λέγει, Nal. καὶ ἐλθόντα εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν n lal e προέφθασεν αὐτὸν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγων, Τί σοι δοκεῖ, Σίμων ; ot Ba- a fal a 3 an , \ lel σιλεῖς τῆς γῆς ἀπὸ τίνων λαμβάνουσιν τέλη ἢ κῆνσον; ἀπὸ τῶν n a 3 lal Fh ΣΝ lal > 26 υἱῶν αὐτῶν ἢ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ; λέγει αὐτῷ, ᾿Απὸ τῶν ἀλλο- / », » A ig ἘΠ nr ad js\ 2 10. / > e δι. ἃ τρίων. ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, "Apa γε ἐλεύθεροί εἰσιν οἱ υἱοί. 27 ἵνα δὲ μὴ σκανδαλίσωμεν αὐτοὺς, πορευθεὶς εἰς θάλασσαν βάλε fal \ 5 > He / x ἄγκιστρον καὶ τὸν ἀναβάντα πρῶτον ἰχθὺν ἄρον, Kat ἀνοίξας τὸ ΡΤ ΟἽ an fal Ἕ lal 3 \ στόμα αἰτοῦ εὑρήσεις στατῆρα" ἐκεῖνον λαβὼν δὸς αὐτοῖς [ἀντὶ] cap, ἐμοῦ καὶ σοῦ. 5 Ἔ 2 , A ae. χα ς θ \ fal af A xe 18 ν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ προσῆλθον οἱ μαθηται τῷ Inoov λέγοντες, 2 Τίς ἄρα μείζων ἐστὶν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν; καὶ προσ- \ = 5 3 καλεσάμενος παιδίον ἔστησεν αὐτὸ ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν Kai εἶπεν, 7A \ , ¢ a 2>\ \ a \ s θ « Ν δι μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν μὴ [στραφῆτε] καὶ γένησθε ὡς τὰ παιδία, ’ \ » ΄ θ , \ ᾿ς r ’ Δ cd = 400 μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. ὅστις οὖν \ ΄ n , ταπεινώσει ἑαυτὸν ὡς τὸ παιδίον τοῦτο, οὗτός ἐστιν [ὁ μείζων] 5 ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν. 6 οῦτον * Ne x , ἃ / καὶ ὃς ἂν δέξηται ἕν παιδίον τοι- BIN alee eA “1 p< aN δέ \ δ᾽ x ὃ ri ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί ἢ pov, ἐμὲ δέχεται. ὃς δ᾽ av σκανδαλίσῃ a fal a / > Dba X if 5 an Eva TOV μικρῶν τούτων *TaV πιστευόντων εἰς ἐμὲ, συμφέρει αὐτῷ vA On ΤᾺ ’ \ * 3 \ , * 3 n \ iva κρεμασθῇ pros ὀνικὸς *eis τὲν τράχηλον ἢ αὐτοῦ καὶ KaTa- n 3? aA ͵ aA , O Cn. A , KA 7 ποντισθῇ ἐν τῷ πελάγει τῆς θαλάσσης. Οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ “ἀπὸ al a2 ,’ \ al \ / \ ’ a τῶν σκανδάλων" ἀνάγκη yap ἐλθεῖν τὰ σκάνδαλα, πλὴν οὐαὶ τῷ 5. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου] = δ by. 7. σκάνδαλον V.A. passim for pape) from bya ‘*to stumble,” e.g. Lev. xix. —~ 7) 3 27. Strange use of ἀντὶ : not found in V.A.: in which the word very rarely occurs. Cap. XVIII. 3, v.18. ἀμὴν only found three times in V.A., 1 Chr. xvi. 36, Neh. v. 13, viii. 8; and in these only to show the very word used. Elsewhere it is ren- 14, and for Wid, “a springe,” Judges vili, 27, ‘‘anything that catches the feet and upsets a man,” or ‘‘ makes him stum- dered by ἀληθῶς and γένοιτο, which com- prise its two meanings as used by us severally at the end of Creed or Prayer, Ps, xii, 14, Jerem. xxviii. 6, Jerem. os Ἐΐ ble.” Lexicographers limit the use of the word to V.A. and N.T. απὸ 7. ox. for 12. ‘‘in consequence of:” or “ because of.” “(vii. 16.) MATTHEW, XVIII. 8--2ι. 39 ’ , / ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ τὸ σκάνδαλον ἔρχεται. εἰ δὲ ἡ yelp σου “Ὁ ΄ ἢ ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζει σε, ἔκκοψον αὐτὸν καὶ βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ" Ἐκδλόν col ἐστιν Ἐ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν FH κγλλὸν, ἢ δύο na x ὃ , ὃ », θῇ > \ n \ Jie! A A χεῖρας ἢ δύο πόδας ἔχοντα βληθῆναι εἰς τὸ πῦρ TO αἰώνιον. καὶ > Ε > 0 / ὃ » 2 a "54 , -} \ εἰ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζει σε, ἔξελε αὐτὸν Kal βάλε ἀπὸ a , a Ὠ σοῦ" καλόν σοί ἐστιν μονόφθαλμον εἰς τὴν ζωὴν εἰσελθεῖν, ἢ δύο 2 \ 4 lal > \ ἴον a ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντα βληθῆναι * εἰς THY γέενναν τοῦ πυρός ἡ “Ὁρᾶτε \ Ye \ n tal - μὴ καταφρονήσητε ἑνὸς τῶν μικρῶν τούτων" λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν ὅτι tr Of ’ lal \ \ , fa) οἱ ἄγγελοι αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς βλέπουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον τοῦ πατρός “ > ’ an o a μου Tov ἐν οὐρανοῖς. Ti ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνθρώπῳ e \ / ‘ nm ἃ la) ἑκατὸν πρόβατα καὶ πλανηθῇ ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν, οὐχὶ ἀφήσει τὰ ἐνενή- > , > \ \ lj a κοντα ἐννέα ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη Kal πορευθεὶς ζητεῖ TO πλανώμενον; καὶ 3... , δ a 3 A > \ / ιν rs [ / ϑω 9, 3 a ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτὸ, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι χαίρει ἐπ’ αὐτῷ Lol ἡ SENN a > , , a μᾶλλον ἢ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα τοῖς μὴ πεπλανημένοις. v ’ 2 ἴω r οὕτως οὐκ ἔστιν θέλημα ἔμπροεθεν ἢ τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν > n ivf ἃ a an οὐρανοῖς ἵνα ἀπόληται ἕν τῶν μικρῶν τούτων. ᾿Εὰν δὲ ἁμαρ- , > n τήσῃ ὁ ἀδελφός cov, ὕπαγε ἔλεγξον αὐτὸν *peTaEd σοῦ Kal av- a , ox Sick 5 > fs ee ὃ \ iO ᾿ 5" τοῦ μόνου" ἢ ἐάν σου ἀκούσῃ, ἐκέρδησας τὸν ἀδελφόν σου. ἐὰν Ν \ > U \ la) 2 δὲ μὴ ἀκούσῃ, παράλαβε μετὰ σοῦ ἔτι ἕνα ἢ δύο, ἵνα ἐπὶ στόματος / / Ey fal A a a δύο μαρτύρων ἢ τριῶν [σταθῇ πᾶν ῥῆμα]. ἐὰν δὲ παρακούσῃ ’ lal nr n αὐτῶν, εἰπὲ TH ἐκκλησίᾳ" ἐὰν δὲ καὶ τῆς ἐκκλησίας παρακούσῃ, ” ef ¢ > \ \ 6 / > x , σ᾽. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ [ὁ ἐθνικὸς καὶ ὁ τελώνης]. ᾿Αμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 7 a a n ὅσα av δήσητε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται δεδεμένα ἐν οὐρανῷ, καὶ ὅσα ἐὰν λύσητε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἔσται λελυμένα ἐν οὐρανῷ. ἸΠάλιν λέγω ὑμῖν on ῆς γῆ μένα ἐν οὐρανῷ. yo ὑμ “ pee” 4 / 58) «ς n > \ lal A ὅτι ἐὰν δύο συμφωνήσουσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς περὶ [παντὸς] πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται, γενήσεται αὐτοῖς παρὰ τοῦ πατρός “Ὁ a / lal μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. οὗ yap εἰσιν δύο ἢ τρεῖς *ouvynypévor εἰς TO al ᾿] lal ἐμὸν ὄνομα," ἐκεῖ εἰμὶ ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν. Τότε προσελθὼν ὁ Ilérpos εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Κύριε, ποσάκις ἅμαρ- ’ > ae: c ’ ‘ \ 3 , 2 n va ς / τήσει εἰς ἐμὲ ὁ ἀδελφός μου Kal ἀφήσω αὐτῷ; ἕως ἑπτάκις ; 8, As the Hebrews had no compara- tive form, so we meet the same omission in V.A. as here, καλὸν...ἢ τε Ὁ 21D, Ps. cxviil. 8, ἀγαθὸν πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ Κύ- ριον ἢ ἐπ᾽ ἄνθρωπον. Tob. iii. 6, λυσιτελεῖ μοι ἀποθανεῖν ἢ ζῆν, which exactly paral- 1615 1,. xvii. 2, L. xviii. 14, οὗτος κατέβη δεδικαιωμένος ἢ ἐκεῖνος. 12. ἀφίημι, “send away, let go, quit hold of, let alone,” easily slides into **leave,” a constant sense of it in V.A. and N.T., e.g. xxiii. 38, xxiv. 2, Mk. xii. 19, 21, xiv. 50, John x.12. In Exod. ix. 21 V.A. has ἀφῆκε for DIY? and Ruth ii. 16, 2 Sam. xx. 3 M3 WW, ds ἀφῆκε, ‘which he had left to keep the house.” 14. θέλημα = εὐδοκία = δεκτὸν -- ΕἾΝ Ἢ, xi. 26. Ps. xix. 15, Ἴ2)8 PIP HP, ἔσονται els εὐδοκίαν (i.e. ἔσονται δεκτὸν or θέλημα) ἔμπροσθεν σοῦ, V.A. Hence we may infer the process by which the expression οὐκ ἔστι Bed. ἔμπρ. τ. πατρὸς came into our text. 16. Every thing may be settled. 20. The exact parallel to this is found in the Hebrew “71' pv 15}2%, Isai. Ix. 9 (V.A. διὰ τὸ ὄνομα) and Jerem. iii. 17. ὃ Ὁ Io 12 13 14 5 16 17 18 19 21 40 MATTHEW, XVIII. 22—XIX. 8. / , A nw , r 3 \ ἢ ΄ 22 λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Οὐ λέγω σοι ἕως ἑπτάκις, ἀλλὰ ἕως EB- , © , Ν an « if c , fal , a 23 δομηκοντάκις ἑπτά. διὰ τοῦτο ὡμοιώθη ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν A oo [9] a , ἀνθρώπῳ βασιλεῖ, ὃς ἠθέλησεν συνᾶραι λόγον μετὰ τῶν δούλων rn rn , 2 fal » 24 αὐτοῦ. ἀρξαμένου δὲ αὐτοῦ συναίρειν, προσήχθη αὐτῷ εἷς ὀφει- n ’ ἴω , 25 λέτης μυρίων ταλάντων. [μὴ] ἔχοντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι ἐκέ- ’ ς a a μὴ nr \ λευσεν αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος πραθῆναι Kal THY γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ 7, \ U ¢/ » \ 5" a \ Ὁ [4 fal 26 τέκνα καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἔχει, Kal ἀποδοθῆναι. πεσὼν οὖν ὁ δοῦλος , > a , , προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λέγων, Μακροθύμησον ἐπ᾽ ἐμοὶ, καὶ πάντα ? ἐς ‘ \ ¢ , lol , ’ 7 > be 27 ἀποδώσω. σπλαγχνισθεὶς δὲ ὁ κύριος τοῦ δούλου ἐκείνου ἀπέ- » ν , lal an 9 ‘ [ fal 28 λυσεν αὐτὸν, Kal TO δάνειον ἀφῆκεν αὐτῷ. ἐξελθὼν δὲ ὁ δοῦλος an nA n ¢ a n x ἐκεῖνος εὗρεν ἕνα τῶν συνδούλων αὐτοῦ ὃς ὠφειλεν αὐτῷ ἑκατὸν ὃ , Ν ῇ +N ” , > f ” > / ηνάρια, Kal κρατήσας αὐτὸν ἔπνιγεν λέγων, ᾿Απόδος el TL ὀφεί- \ Ls 4 , > lal / . Ν [4 29 λεις. πεσὼν οὖν ὁ σύνδουλος αὐτοῦ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν λέγων, ἢ 30 Μακροθύμησον ἐπ᾽ ἐμὲ, καὶ ἀποδώσω σοι. ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἤθελεν, ἀλλὰ \ n ἀπελθὼν ἔβαλεν αὐτὸν εἰς φυλακὴν ἕως ἀποδῷ τὸ ὀφειλόμενον. » P56 5 e / ὃ 2) lal \ ’ » / ὃ 31 ἰδόντες οὖν οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτοῦ τὰ γενόμενα ἐλυπήθησαν σφόδρα, \ / {2 a 32 καὶ ἐλθόντες διεσάφησαν τῷ κυρίῳ πάντα τὰ γενόμενα. τότε , » \ id an a rn προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ λέγει αὐτῷ, Δοῦλε πονηρὲ, lal \ τ \ > Sf οἱ - / > ἊΝ / / 4 πᾶσαν τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἐκείνην ἀφῆκά cot, ἐπεὶ παρεκάλεσάς με ’ ” \ \ > ue \ ͵ / id ’ \ \ 5 la 33 οὐκ ἔδει Kal σὲ ἐλεῆσαι τὸν σύνδουλόν σου, ὡς κἀγὼ σὲ ἠλέησα ; .34 καὶ ὀργισθεὶς ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν τοῖς βασανισταῖς a A a ’ 35 ἕως οὗ ἀποδῷ πᾶν τὸ ὀφειλόμενον. οὕτως Kal ὁ πατήρ μου ὃ 5 / i ES oc ας aes \ ’ a iva a 3 lal 2 rf οὐράνιος ποιήσει ὑμῖν, ἐὰν μὴ ἀφῆτε ἕκαστος TO ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ > \ nr »ᾳ. c “ ἀπὸ τῶν καρὸ : ae ν καρδιῶν ὑμῶν \ > ( ed 5 A C5 A AN , / lal 19 Kat ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς τοὺς λόγους τούτους, μετῆ- , ‘ n , 5 a pev ὦπο τῆς 1 αλιλαίας καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅρια τῆς lovdalas πέραν (oN, U ‘ ’ / a 2 τοῦ ‘lopdavov. καὶ ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοὶ, Kal ἐθερά- πευσεν αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ. iN lal τὰ lal lal 3 Kal προσῆλθον αὐτῷ Φαρισαῖοι πειράζοντες αὐτὸν καὶ λέ- ? 3 ἴω lal “ an yovtes, *Ei ἔξεστιν ὃ ἀπολῦσαι τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ κατὰ πᾶσαν ded A 4 id δὲ ’ \ > “ ’ a {7 id / 4aitiav; ὁ δὲ ὠποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, Οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε OTL ὁ ποιήσας 3... δ > al / \ A , 9. 7 sam ἀρχῆς ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς ; καὶ εἶπεν, “Evexa / , li τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα Kal τὴν μητέρα Kal θή “Ὁ \ ’ n \ Kr e , 3 / κολληθήσεται TH γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ, Kal *écovTat οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα / = « > 6 μίαν. ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο ἀλλὰ σὰρξ μία. ὃ οὖν ὁ Θεὸς , ἢ \ fal on 7 συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριξζέτω. λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Τί οὖν Mav- A 5 ΜΝ n ᾿ an g σῆς ἐνετείλατο δοῦναι βιβλίον ἀποστασίου καὶ ἀπολῦσαι; λέγει > a / Ὁ n lal αὐτοῖς, Ἐ“Οτι ἢ Μωυσῆς *apos* τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν ἐπέ- (ot > A \ a A a Tpepev ὑμῖν ἀπολῦσαι τὰς γυναῖκας ὑμῶν: ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς δὲ ov Cap. XIX. 8, mp. τ. ox.] As we say, ‘‘ for the hardness of your heart.” MATTHEW, XIX. 9—26. 41 γέγονεν οὕτως. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, ὃς ἂν ἀπολύσῃ τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ μὴ ἐπὶ πορνείᾳ καὶ γαμήσῃ ἄλλην, μοιχῶται, καὶ 6 ἀπολελυμένην γαμήσας μοιχᾶται. λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ, Ei οὕτως ἐστὶν [ἡ αἰτία] τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μετὰ τῆς γυναικὸς, οὐ συμφέρει γαμῆσαι. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Οὐ πάντες [χωροῦσιν] τὸν λόγον ἀλλ᾽ οἷς δέ- δοται. εἰσὶν γὰρ εὐνοῦχοι οἵτινες ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς ἐγεννήθησαν οὕτως, καί εἰσιν εὐνοῦχοι οἵτινες εὐνουχίσθησαν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώ- πων, καί εἰσιν εὐνοῦχοι οἵτινες εὐνούχισαν ἑαυτοὺς διὰ τὴν βασι- λείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. ὁ δυνάμενος χωρεῖν χωρείτω. Τότε προσηνέχθησαν αὐτῷ παιδία, ἵνα τὰς χεῖρας ἐπιθῇ αὐτοῖς καὶ προσεύξηται᾽ οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ ἐπετίμησαν αὐτοῖς. ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν, Ἄφετε τὰ παιδία καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτὰ ἐλθεῖν πρὸς μέ; τῶν γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. καὶ ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς ἐπορεύθη ἐκεῖθεν. Καὶ ἰδοὺ [εἷς] προσελθὼν αὐτῷ εἶπεν, Διδάσκαλε, τί ἀγαθὸν ποιήσω ἵνα σχῶ ζωὴν αἰώνιον ; ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Τί με ἐρωτᾷς περὶ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ; εἷς ἐστὶν ὁ ἀγαθός. εἰ δὲ θέλεις εἰς τὴν ζωὴν εἰσελθεῖν, τήρει τὰς ἐντολάς. λέγει αὐτῷ, Ilolas; ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν, To *ov φονεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις, οὐ κλέψεις, οὐ ψευδο- μαρτυρήσεις," τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα, καὶ ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν. λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ νεανίσκος, Ἰ]άντα ταῦτα ἐφύλαξα" τί ἔτι ὑστερῶ; ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Ei θέλεις τέλειος εἶναι, ὕπαγε πώλησόν σου τὰ ὑπάρχοντα καὶ δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς, καὶ ἕξεις θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανοῖς, καὶ δεῦρο ἀκολούθει μοι. ἀκούσας δὲ ὁ νεανίσκος ἀπῆλθεν λυπούμενος" ἦν γὰρ ἔχων κτή- ματα πολλά. ‘O δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ᾿Αμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι πλούσιος δυσκόλως εἰσελεύσεται εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. πάλιν δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυπήματος ῥαφίδος εἰσελθεῖν ἢ πλοίσιον εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. ἀκούσαντες δὲ οἱ μαθηταὶ ἐξεπλήσσοντο σφόδρα λέγοντες, Τίς ἄρα 2 δύναται σωθῆναι; ἐμβλέψας δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Lapa ἀνθρώποις τοῦτο ἀδύνατόν ἐστιν, παρὰ δὲ Θεῷ πάντα δυνατά. 10. αἰτία] Only instance of this sense and Engl. have. The expression in text in N.T. None in V.A. is a Hebrew idiom turned word for word i. mn xd Game Lx. A’ ~ into Greek, intelligible to Orientals, but ΓΈΡΟ eae ele of Wiehe vise of’Future 8 Yatiance with the grammar and genius for Imperative: as in English also, “ Thou valiant 5 . 23. δυσκόλως, ‘‘with hard effort,” shalt not kill:” apparently, but not really: νι ἥν Sgr ore for “‘shall” there is not future at all. with reluctance,” fits in with the young Ye rs But the Greek future form has no possi- mermae τς bility of such double meaning as Hebr. 13 14 15 16 17 18 42 MATTHEW, XIX. 27—XX. 15. νυ , «9 Ν « » / 27 ‘Tore ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ἹΠέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ, ᾿Ιδοὺ ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν 8 , Ἂν, ’ DY Qn if 4 Aged ” Crs “ £ δὲ "al lol 28 πάντα καὶ ἠκολουθήσαμέν cor’ τί ἄρα ἔσται ἡμῖν; ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς 4 ’ a A. \ x y, δ a isd 4 Lal ς , Ἃ; θ , , εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿Αμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ὑμεῖς οἱ ἀκολουθήσαντές μοι, ᾿] Ὁ / A Ud c oN ἴω 3 , πων, ἐν τῇ παλυγγενεσίᾳ, ὅταν καθίσῃ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου [ἐπὶ θ Ul 60 5 lal θί. θ \ € “ » Ν ὃ ᾽ὃ θ / povov] δόξης αὐτοῦ, καθίσεσθε καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐπὶ δώδεκα θρόνους lal Ὁ fo > nr 29 κρίνοντες τὰς δώδεκα φυλὰς τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ. καὶ πᾶς ὅστις ἀφῆκεν 2 \ ΩΝ , \ a / Ἄ , Δ la x > \ b>) > , ἀδελφοὺς ἢ ἀδελφὰς ἢ πατέρα ἢ μητέρα ἢ τέκνα ἢ ἀγροὺς ἢ οἰκίας Ὡ lal >’ / / id , Ν \ ἕνεκεν TOU ὀνόματός μου, πολλαπλασίονα λήμψεται Kal ζωὴν > 4 / \ \ 5 n ” \ 30 αἰώνιον κληρονομήσει. πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι Kal CAP, ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι. ᾿ ‘O , 3 ε ͵7 a ’ a > 9 f » ὃ if 20 Hola yap ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, 7 3 A“ ; Ἁ fh, >] , zd \ 3 “ ὅστις ἐξῆλθεν [ἅμα πρωὶ] μισθώσασθαι ἐργάτας εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα an a / 2 αὐτοῦ. συμφωνήσως δὲ μετὰ τῶν ἐργατῶν [ἐκ δηναρίου)] τὴν ¢ tA Ψ ἊΨ >t ἈΝ > ΟῚ -} A » Lal x ᾿] A 3 ἡμέραν ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἐξελθὼν 3 a » a περὶ τρίτην ὥραν εἶδεν ἄλλους ἑστῶτας ἐν TH ἀγορᾷ ἀργούς" ᾽ / 5 ᾿Ξ) , ees a > \ >’ XO \ Δ Shy be 4 κἀκείνοις εἶπεν, Ὑπάγετε καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα, Kai [ὃ ἐὰν 9] 5 δίκαιον δώσω ὑμῖν. οἱ δὲ ἀπῆλθον. πάλιν δὲ ἐξελθὼν περὶ ἕκτην A > f e/ >] ‘2 ¢ / \ \ A e / 5᾽ Ἁ 6 καὶ ἐνάτην ὥραν ἐποίησεν ὡσαύτως. περὶ δὲ τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ἐξελθὼν e oo c a \ , ᾽ a f @ ε Ul “ \ etpev ἄλλους ἑστῶτας, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Ti ὧδε ἑστήκατε ὅλην THY ς ΄ ? / s 3 A Ὁ ’ \ € a » , , 7 ἡμέραν ἀργοί; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Oru οὐδεὶς ἡμᾶς ἐμισθώσατο. λέγει Ὁ ῇ a fal ὃ αὐτοῖς, “Trrayete καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα. ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης λέγει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος τῷ ἐπιτρόπῳ αὐτοῦ, Kadeoov τοὺς 3 , i SoCs ΑΜ ΕΣ a \ \ > , ab Ὧν a ᾽ , ἐργάτας καὶ ἀπόδος αὐτοῖς τὸν μισθὸν ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τῶν ἐσχάτων 4 a , ἈΝ 3. , ς \ \ Β ΓᾺ “ ” 9 ἕως τῶν πρώτων. καὶ ἐλθόντες οἱ περὶ THY ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν ἔλαβον ’ lal a το ava δηνάριον. καὶ ἐλθόντες οἱ πρῶτοι ἐνόμισαν OTL πλεῖον / τι [λήμψονται] καὶ ἔλαβον τὸ ava δηνάριον καὶ αὐτοί, λαβόντες δὲ , fal > Υ͂ » Γ 12 ἐγόγγυζον κατὰ τοῦ οἰκοδεσπότου λέγοντες, Οὗτοι οἱ ἔσχατοι μίαν 7 / a ’ | ὥραν ἐποίησαν, καὶ ἴσους ἡμῖν αὐτοὺς ἐποίησας τοῖς βαστάσασιν a «ς Ν 13 τὸ βάρος τῆς ἡμέρας καὶ τὸν καύσωνα; ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν ἑνὶ ὦ Ὁ ε lal "ὦ > A Ξ ’ A 14 αὐτῶν, “Eraipe, οὐκ ἀδικῶ ce οὐχὶ δηναρίου συνεφώνησάς μοι; apov τὸ σὸν καὶ ὕπαγε. θέλω δὲ τούτῳ τῷ ἐσχάτῳ δοῦναι ὡς καὶ σοί. Ι a fal Ἵ a “ 3 15 οὐκ ἔξεστίν μοι ὃ θέλω ποιῆσαι ἐν τοῖς ἐμοῖς ; *ei ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου 28. Note change of case after ἐπί. 33, XVill. 23, xx. 3, and Jamesiv. 13. Schl. Cap. XX. 2, “With the men he quotes Ruth ii. το MWY MIS, ποῦ ἐποί- found there who worked-at-a-denarius gas; Semel in N.T. : er day.” épy. ἐκ. δι] Have we any au- 15. Deut. xv. MND S19) Aion. for such a rendering in class. ‘ cuts 3¥- 9) Pee authors? Schleusner cites cap. xxvii. 7, Acts i. 18. I see no parallel to this pas- sage in them. 12. W.& W. suggest ‘‘have made one hour:” as if by an idiom, corresponding to our own in English: and cite Acts xv. V.A. πονηρεύσηται ὀφθαλμός cov τῷ ἀδελ- φῷ σοῦ, ‘‘envy, grudge.” Tobit iv. 7, I find no instances of πονηρὸς with this force in V.A. but in Apocr. Sir. xiv. 10, XXXi. 14. MATTHEW, XX. 16—XXI, 2. 43 ͵ ’ “ ? \ ’ θ A > ΕἾΝ A » δ Ὁ πονηρός ἐστιν OTL ἐγὼ ἀγαθός εἰμι. οὕτως ἔσονται οἱ ἔσχατοι 16 “ e lel lj " πρῶτοι Kal οἱ πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι. ᾽ ε ᾽ fal ’ € , , Καὶ ἀναβαίνων ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα παρέλαβεν τοὺς 17 ri > ms \ , a ¢ a 3 με a ᾽ \ » ΄ δώδεκα κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, καὶ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿Ιδοὺ ἀναβαίνομεν 18 δ τὰ , Ais 8 εχ εἰν 5 , εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Kat ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν [αὐτὸν θανάτῳ] καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εἰς τὸ ἐμπαῖξαι καὶ μαστι- 19 a “ a , ε γῶσαι καὶ σταυρῶσαι, καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερθήσεται. , a ? A ς , a Cn Ι A A Τότε προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ ἡ μήτηρ τῶν υἱῶν Ζεβεδαίου μετὰ τῶν 20 ta + et nr a ’ ’ na υἱῶν αὐτῆς, προσκυνοῦσα καὶ αἰτοῦσά TL ἀπ᾽ αἰτοῦ. ὁ δὲ 5 ’ A ! 7 / ’ fal ͵ εἶπεν αὐτῇ, Τί θέλεις ; λέγει αὐτῷ, [Εἰὐπὲ] ἵνα καθίσωσιν οὗτοι . δύ e Ul e 5» ὃ Lal 5. e 3 , ἷ ’ ot δύο υἱοί μου εἷς ἐκ δεξιῶν σου καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων σου ἐν a , ’ S ἴω , τῇ βασιλείᾳ σου. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ι]ησοῦς εἶπεν, Οὐκ οἴδατε 22 t > ° , - \ if "a ’ \ / , [τ] αἰτεῖσθε. δύνασθε πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ μέλλω πίνειν; γ Ε] -“ , ’ Σ an a: ἣν λέγουσιν αὐτῶ, Δυνάμεθα. λέγει αὐτοῖς, Τὸ μὲν ποτήριόν μου 23 ’ \ \ , > a \ 2 ᾽ , , ” πίεσθε, τὸ δὲ καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου καὶ ἐξ εὐωνύμων, οὐκ ἔστιν πόδ τὰ a a ᾽ ᾽ ᾿- ε ¢ a ἐμὸν τοῦτο δοῦναι, ἀλλ᾽’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός μου. Ψ , \ e la 3 Ε , \ a , J) lal ¢ ἀκούσαντες δὲ of δέκα ἠγανάκτησαν περὶ τῶν δύο ἀδελφῶν. ὁ 24 ΝΆ a t > \ = y “ > SF δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς εἶπεν, Οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἄρχοντες 25 -“ n , 3 ec τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυριεύουσιν αὐτων Kal οἱ μεγάλοι κατεξουσιάζου- ν - 7 la CA ? > a b | a σιν αὐτῶν. οὐχ οὕτως ἔσται ἐν ὑμῖν: ἀλλ᾽ [ὃς ἐὰν] θέλῃ ὑμῶν 26 / a ” ¢ a , x a 2. , > (a Mal) μέγας γενέσθαι, ἔστω ὑμῶν διάκονος, καὶ ὃς ἐὰν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν 27 3 a a nr ¢ ς a εἶναι πρῶτος, ἔστω ὑμῶν δοῦλος" ὥσπερ ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 2 ? a ᾿ \ a \ lol \ οὐκ [ἦλθεν διακονηθῆναι,,) ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι καὶ δοῦναι τὴν Ἂς » “ , 3 \ a ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν. χα 15 χες 5 Ta enn 3 \ ᾽ , 3:. κα Καὶ ἐκπορευομένων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ “Ἱεριχὼ ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ 29 v / > / \ / \ Ἁ ¢ \ ὄχλος πολύς. καὶ ἰδοὺ δύο τυφλοὶ καθήμενοι παρὰ τὴν cdov, 30 ᾽ / [2 ᾽ lal / ” ie , > la ἀκούσαντες ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς παράγει, ἔκραξαν λέγοντες, Κύριε, ἐλέησον rn a εκ \ i edmie TF ͵ e ἡμᾶς, υἱὸς Δαυίδ, ὁ δὲ ὄχλος ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα [σιωπήσωσιν]" 31 e \ al 7 / / / ¢ a ΕΝ ! οἱ δὲ μεῖζον ἔκραξαν λέγοντες, Κύριε, ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς, υἱὸς Δαυίδ. Ld nr ἣ \ 5 / f καὶ στὰς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς [ἐφώνησεν] αὐτοὺς καὶ εἶπεν, Τί θέλετε 32 ε Lal » a 4 © ,’ Lal e ’ Ν ποιήσω ὑμῖν; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Κύριε, ἵνα ἀνοιγῶσιν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ 33 ς a eo fal lA -“ 5 ἦ bd A ἡμῶν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἥψατο τῶν ὀμμάτων αὐτῶν, 34 93 , 5» , ? a καὶ εὐθέως ἀνέβλεψαν καὶ ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ. oun \ Yj ¢ ἣ Ss . Ψ a νι Καὶ ὅτε ἤγγισαν εἰς ἱἹεροσόλυμα καὶ ἦλθον εἰς Βηθσφαγῆ 21 . a a , a ᾽ , ’ \ εἰς TO ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν, τότε ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀπέστειλεν δύο μαθητὰς , ᾽ a , > \ ΄ \ ποι ον ξ a ae λέγων αὐτοῖς, IlopeverOe εἰς τὴν κώμην THY ἀπέναντι ὑμῶν, Kal 2 24. ‘About the two brothers.” 28. Extreme instance of inf. after 25. ‘Lord it over them.” “Keep verb intrans., answering to inf. with 2 them under and down by arbitrary : » in Hebr. power. A! Ἐν y r 5 κ᾿ eet erat , εὐθέως εὑρήσετε ὄνον δεδεμένην καὶ πῶλον μετ᾽ αὐτῆς λύσαντες - , a a ς lal καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ τι, ἐρεῖτε ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτῶν [τοῦτο δὲ γέγονεν MATTHEW, ΧΧΙ. 3—9. vv , 3 ἄγετε μοι. , ” = ἿὟΔ’' \ ’ a ,’ , 4 χρείαν ἔχει" εὐθέως δὲ ἀποστελεῖ αὐτούς. 5 ἵνα πληρωθῇ) τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ ποῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, Εὔπατε τῇ θυγατρὶ Σιὼν, ᾿Ιδοὺ ὁ βασιλεύς 6 βηκὰὼς ἐπὶ ὄνον καὶ ἐπὶ πῶλον υἱὸν ὑποζυγίου. of μαθηταὶ καὶ ποιήσαντες καθὼς συνέταξεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, σου ἔρχεταί col πραὺς, ἐπιβε- πορευθέντες δὲ v ‘ v Ἂς \ a \ ayy, 53: 9 σοι Ν γ ἤγαγον τὴν ὄνον καὶ τὸν πῶλον, καὶ ἐπέθηκαν ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν τὰ . Ι / a a ὃ ἱμάτια, καὶ ἐπεκάθισεν ἐπάνω αὐτῶν. [ὁ δὲ πλεῖστος ὄχλος] 5 € lal \ e U > nA « “Ὁ » Ni ὅ΄, [ ἔστρωσαν ἑαυτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, ἄλλοι δὲ ἔκοπτον κλάδους ’ \ a ῇ Ν > , 3 ta) eon « \ ” e Ο ἀπὸ τῶν δένδρων καὶ ἐστρώννυον ἐν τῇ CO@. οἱ δὲ ὄχλοι οἱ ’ ’ \ 3 Ur wed lal 5 , ΕἼ \ προάγοντες αὐτὸν καὶ οἱ ἀκολουθοῦντες ἔκραζον λέγοντες, ἢ Ooavva τῷ cA A 1d Xi , ς 3 {a 3 τὰ Ι K Ud @ vio QULO, EVAOYHMEVOS O EPXOMEVOS εν CVOLAaATL uplov, Cap. XXI. 5, Quotation from V.A. ἪΡ Nia), not POX, which may possibly account for oo; literally ‘‘Thy King shall come for thee,” ‘‘ Thou shalt see thy King come.” τρ is generally ren- dered by σοι in V.A., whether it express ‘*motion towards,” or not. |, 9. Ps. cxvili. 25, API “AY NaN NJ, V.A. ὦ Κύριε σῶσον δή. “ Ho- sanna”=‘*‘O save us, we pray Thee;” “Ὁ be Thou our Saviour.” They ap- plied to Jesus, whether consciously or not, the words of the Messianic Psalm, and hailed Him ‘‘ Son of David,” “ King,” ** Saviour.” How are we to account for the dative τῷ υἱῷ A.? We are expressly told they used ¢hese very words. Can it be, as it were, an ascription to Jesus— recognized as the Son of David, the true Messiah—of his Attribute of Saviour? Or were they possibly, in their ignorance of Hebrew, unaware of the exact force of the word, and thought of it only as an Act of Adoration, a Form of Praise—-as unlearned Christians generally now-a- days—equivalent to ‘‘ Honour,” ‘‘ Glory,” ‘* Praise,” to the Son of David? Grimm translates wo., σῶσον δὴ, by ‘‘ propitius sis.’ And then, forgetting that both MYWII and σῶσον are transitive, and require an accusative after them, renders wo. τῷ vig A. ‘propitius sis filio Davidis,” 1. 6. ‘* Messize,”’ which is untenable. There is another difficulty in the words ἐν τοῖς ὑψ.; not very great if we adopt the suggestion above of ὡσαννὰ being used with no very distinct idea of its real mean- ing: for then the phrase, in their mouths, would be much the same as Ps. exlviil. 1, py moda, αἰνεῖτε K, ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις, V.A. If however we are to suppose them to have used the word with full understand- ing of its true meaning, then it becomes exceedingly difficult to connect ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις with it and explain it rightly. ‘**Be Thou our Saviour in Heaven above,” taking ἐ. τ. ¥. = DYDINDE, is scarcely sa- tisfactory. May we hazard the interpretation, ‘Save us by the Most High,” i.e. ‘in the name of the Most High”? Ps. liv. 2, ἼΡΟΞ WWI “ON, Ὃ Θεὸς, ἐν τῷ ὀνό- ματί σου σῶσόν με, V.A. Now troy, V.A. ὕψιστος, ‘*Most High,” is one of the Names of: God, by which, He is ad- dressed and invoked. Ps. ix. 2, lvi. 2, Xi; ok, EVI: ὃ; Wey "ΠΣ OAS, In Dan. vii. 18, 22, 28, 27, we find poy in plural; V.A. ὕψιστος, without article, as Κύριος constantly: Eng. V. ‘‘The Most High;” corresponding in structure and character to DO S. Gesenius shows it to have been a name for God among the VPhcenicians. If then the prayer obs ay win, ‘Save us in the name of God,” “‘by the power of God,” be possible; might not pspoya my win be a possible form also, and ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις its equivalent? I anticipate the obvious objection that we should, in that case, expect the singular and not the plural; and that payoy is, in point of fact, rendered by ὕψιστος in V.A. But the frequency of literal word-for-word translations from Hebrew and Chaldee in MATTHEW, Χ ΧΙ. το--26. 45 Ἂ ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις." καὶ εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 10 ᾿ , A ς , / , > Φ Ρ e \ Μ ἐσείσθη πᾶσα ἡ πόλις λέγουσα, Τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ; οἱ δὲ ΟΧΧΟΙ ΤΙ «ς » » « fal ἔλεγον, Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ προφήτης ᾿Ιησοῦς ὃ ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲθ τῆς Γαλιλαίας. a nr 2 A e \ a na , Kal εἰσῆλθεν ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ ἐξέβαλεν 12 rn \ , , n Ὁ πάντας τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, καὶ τὰς 7 - a / \ \ , a τραπέζας τῶν κολλυβιστῶν κατέστρεψεν Kal Tas καθέδρας τῶν Ν / ’ ΄“ , πωλούντων τὰς περιστερᾶς, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Τέγραπται, ‘O οἶκός 13 -“ , ς lal > 4 μου οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται, ὑμεῖς δὲ αὐτὸν ποιεῖτε σπήλαιον a \ a ὅς ων \ \ \ ᾽ AL ve aA λῃστῶν. καὶ προσῆλθον αὐτῷ τυφλοὶ καὶ χωλοὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 4 , , Je » Ul \ e ο lal \ 2 nr καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοίς. ἰδόντες δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς Kal οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 : \ ε al - τὰ θαυμάσια ἃ ἐποίησεν καὶ τοὺς παῖδας τοὺς κράζοντας ἐν τῷ ς a \ ΧΩ Ke) \ a en A 1 > , , Nog ἱερῷ καὶ λέγοντας, Qoavva τῷ υἱῷ Δαυὶδ, ἠγανάκτησαν καὶ εἶπαν 16 » ee) δ / a ’ ς hit! fal la ’ lal Δ αὐτῷ, ᾿Ακούεις τί οὗτοι λέγουσιν ; ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς, Ναί οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε ὅτι ἐκ στόματος νηπίων καὶ θηλαζόντων / 5. \ \ > \ 3.» κα ” fal UG κατηρτίσω aivov; καὶ καταλιπὼν αὐτοὺς ἐξῆλθεν ἔξω τῆς πόλεως ΠΡ > , \ ᾽ / 5 al εἰς Βηθανίαν, καὶ ηὐλίσθη ἐκεῖ. i δὲ » \ > \ t 5 , \ > \ IIpwias δὲ ἐπαναγαγὼν εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἐπείνασεν. καὶ ἰδὼν 18 fol / 5 \ a c an 53 chee) ’ ἣ \ IAN - . συκῆν [μίαν] ἐπὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ ἦλθεν ἐπ᾽ αὐτὴν, καὶ οὐδὲν εὗρεν ἐν 19 2A ? \ , \ , be ᾽ , > a αὐτῇ εἰ μὴ φύλλα povoy, καὶ Eyer αὐτῇ, Οὐ μηκέτι ἐκ σοῦ > \ tel a καρπὸς γένηται *eis τὸν αἰῶνα. καὶ ἐξηράνθη παραχρῆμα ἡ fal \ > , « \ > , / lal συκῆ. καὶ ἰδόντες ot μαθηταὶ ἐθαύμασαν λέγοντες, [Πῶς πα- 20 a 5 , ς lal > \ iar | ἴω a ραχρῆμα] ἐξηράνθη ἡ συκῆ; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, 21 9 \ " conan TR 3 / Ν \ “ ᾽ / Apny λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν Kal μὴ διακριθῆτε, οὐ μόνον a a , \ x a , TO τῆς συκῆς ποιήσετε, ἀλλὰ κἂν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ εἴπητε, "ApOnTL A ͵ > ‘ / , Ἡ \ , dA φ 5 καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν, γενήσεται: καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἐὰν 22 αἰτήσητε ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ πιστεύοντες λήμψεσθε. ’ fal ᾽ \ e \ n Kai ἐλθόντι αὐτῷ εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν, προσῆλθον αὐτῷ διδάσκοντι 23 td ᾽ Lal \ € , fal A Si *>? if οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ λέγοντες, * Ev ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ἢ ταῦτα ποιεῖς ; καὶ τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἑξουσίαν ταύτην ; > \ \ δ Ἢ a 3 ἥν A ᾽ , ΓΝ ea ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ᾿Ερωτήσω ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ 24 ¥X6 ov * ἃ 3S ΝΜ , ? εὖ». a ΔΙ > A > , BI , δ όγον éva,* ὃν ἐὰν εἴπητέ μοι, Kayo ὑμῖν ἐρῶ *év ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ fa! n a / ? , , an ταῦτα ποιῶ τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ ᾿Ιωάννον πόθεν ἦν; ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 25 > \ / a ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων; οἱ δὲ διελογίζοντο ἐν ἑαυτοῖς λέγοντες, "Eav 26 ΕΣ "RE » fal > a € lal A \ ὔ 4 > > . > lal ὅ εἴπωμεν, οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ ἡμῖν, Διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε AUTO; the V.A.—the only witness to the prac- αὐτοῦ for wibwa SINS bp» ate tice of the time within our reach—sug- : apie ἧς gests the possibility of such close clinging paar Ge Dy Ge aan Ee erat Ἀπ ee eeomees and 12. τὸ ἱερὸν] the sacred precinct; ὁ ordinary Greek equivalent, even against : analogy and strict preciseness and pro- ἢ ads, the Temple, the Sanctuary. priety of expression. See 1 Sam. xvii. 43 19. εἰς τὸν aldva= De, V.A. κατηράσατο τὸν Δαυὶδ ἐν rots θεοῖς 46 MATTHEW, XXI. 27—42. ἐὰν δὲ εἴπωμεν, KE ἀνθρώπων, φοβούμεθα τὸν ὄχλον" πάντες yap > n Lal 27 ws προφήτην ἔχουσιν τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην. Kat ἀποκριθέντες τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ 4 > 7 ἣν, ’ lal \ ’ \ ’ x > \ , ig - εἶπον, Οὐκ οἴδαμεν. ἔφη αὐτοῖς καὶ αὐτὸς, Οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν 28 ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ Ti δὲ ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; ἄνθρωπος εἶχεν , we \ Ν »" Γ 53 , ‘ry , δύο τέκνα, καὶ προσελθὼν τῷ πρώτῳ εἶπεν, Τέκνον, ὕπαγε σήμερον 5 , Ax 3 a 8, 2 29 ἐργάζου ἐν τῷ ἀμπελῶνι. ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, Οὐ θέλω, ὕστερον 0 δὲ μεταμεληθεὶς ἀπῆλθεν. προσελθὼν δὲ τῷ ἑτέρῳ εἶπεν ὡσαύτω 30 δὲ μεταμελη λθεν. mp ῷ ἑτέρᾳ ς. 2 δὲ ’ 0 \ > %? ἘΠΊ , \ > ’ n θ 5 an 310 δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, *’Eyo* Kipie, καὶ οὐκ ἀπῆλθεν. τίς ἐκ τῶν , > / \ / an iy / ς n , δύο ἐποίησεν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πατρός ; λέγουσιν, ‘O πρῶτος. λέγει ’ Lal Εν lal 3 Ν is id n (dA « “ Ἁ e i αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ᾿Αμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν CTL οἱ τελώναν καὶ αἱ πόρναι , lal lal ἴω 32 προάγουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ. ἦλθεν γὰρ ᾿Ιωάννης πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν ἑδῷ δικαιοσύνης, καὶ οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ οἱ δὲ τελῶναν καὶ at πόρναι ἐπίστευσαν αὐτῷ pels νυ Ὁ Χ , “ a a 215A " 23 δὲ ἰδόντες οὐδὲ μετεμελήθητε ὕστερον [τοῦ πιστεῦσαι) αὐτῷ. “AX- \ > y ᾧ “ τὰ , Anv παραβολὴν ἀκούσατε. ἄνθρωπος ἢν οἰκοδεσπότης ὅστις 3 / εἰ λῷ Ἂν Ν > lal 40 \ wv ἐφύτευσεν ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ φραγμὸν αὐτῷ περιέθηκεν καὶ ὠρυξεν > ᾽ fol Ν 5 “ ἐν αὐτῷ ληνὸν καὶ ὠκοδόμησεν πύργον, καὶ ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς, Ἂ, ὦ a a 34 καὶ ἀπεδήμησεν. ὅτε δὲ ἤγγισεν ὁ καιρὸς τῶν καρπῶν, ἀπέστειλεν \ A a fal τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς γεωργοὺς λαβεῖν τοὺς καρποὺς αὐτοῦ. Ν , e \ \ , ᾽ fal a \ ΕΣ ΩΣ 35 καὶ λαβόντες οἱ γεωργοὶ τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ [ὃν μὲν] ἔδειραν, [ὃν > , «Ὁ 3 ῇ i 36 δὲ] ἀπέκτειναν, [ὃν δὲ] ἐλιθοβόλησαν. πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους , / a a δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων, Kal ἐποίησαν αὐτοῖς ὡσαύτως. a \ ᾽ , \ =} 4 \ εν » A , 37 UoTepov δὲ ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ λέγων, 5 Ul Ἂν, Ν 48 Βντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν pov. οἱ δὲ γεωργοὶ ἰδόντες τὸν υἱὸν 3 a Ὁ A fal ΕῚ εἶπον ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος" δεῦτε ἀποκτείνωμεν 39 αὐτὸν καὶ σχῶμεν τὴν κληρονομίαν αὐτοῦ. καὶ λαβόντες ΟΜΝ a A 40 αὐτὸν ἐξέβαλον ἔξω Tod ἀμπελῶνος Kal ἀπέκτειναν. ὕταν 3 lf la) A a a οὖν ἔλθῃ ὁ κύριος TOD ἀμπελῶνος, τέ ποιήσει τοῖς γεωργοῖς nr lal ? 41 ἐκείνοις; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Κακοὺς κακῶς ἀπολέσει αὐτοὺς, ἈΝ al a es °’ Kai Tov ἀμπελῶνα ἐκδώσεται ἄλλοις γεωργοῖς, οἵτινες ἀποδώσουσιν al n - > n ? - Ce a 42 αὐτῷ τοὺς καρποὺς ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς αὐτῶν. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, O07 Sir ee 5) a a / a 3 , ς Οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε ἐν ταῖς γραφαῖς, Λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ ᾽ aA @ ᾽ ἢ wD 4 he Se \ 2 οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη *els κεφαλὴν γωνίας ὃ παρὰ Ἰζυρίον 30. Probably τε "2317 = ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ V.A. quite that of ἃ key-stone, συναρμολογοῦντα Gen. xxii. 1, 1 Sam. iii. 8. καὶ συμβιβάζοντα the whole structure. 42. κεφαλὴ γωνίας, V.A. for vein Warburton, in his Crescent and Cross, 320, Ps. cxvili. 22: ἀκρογωνιαῖον λίθον, apres of very ancient arcles in Egypt marge ὅτι pared: supposed to be as old as Joseph’s time. Is. xxviii. 16. Can it mean’“‘the key- Hence we may suppose the Jews not stone of the arch,” ‘‘the top or head of altogether unacquainted with the use and theangle,” “the crown ofthe pointed arch,’ properties of the arch. that binds alltogether? See Eph. ii. 20, iv. αὕτη] V.A. for TNT fem. 16, where the picture and description is MATTHEW, XXI. 43—XXII. 21. 47 ἐγένετο *atrn,* καὶ ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν; διὰ 43 τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι ἀρθήσεται ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ δοθήσεται ἔθνει ἔποιοῦντι τοὺς καρποὺς αὐτῆς. καὶ ἀκούσαντες 45 οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι τὰς παραβολὰς αὐτοῦ ἔγνωσαν ὅτι περὶ αὐτῶν λέγει: καὶ ζητοῦντες αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι ἐφοβήθησαν 46 τοὺς ὄχλους, ἐπεὶ εἰς προφήτην αὐτὸν εἶχον. a Kai ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς πάλιν εἶπεν *év παραβολαῖς ἢ av- 90 τοῖς λέγων, Ὡμοιώθη ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ βασιλεῖ, 2 ὅστις ἐποίησεν γάμους τῷ υἱῷ αἰτοῦ. καὶ ἀπέστειλεν τοὺς δούλους 3 αὐτοῦ [καλέσαι] τοὺς κεκλημένους εἰς τοὺς γάμους, καὶ οὐκ ἤθελον ἐλθεῖν. πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δούλους λέγων, Εἴπατε τοῖς 4 κεκλημένοις, ᾿Ιδοὺ τὸ ἄριστόν μου ἡτοίμακα, οἱ ταῦροί μου καὶ τὰ σιτιστὰ τεθυμένα, καὶ πάντα ἕτοιμα δεῦτε εἰς τοὺς γάμους. οἱ δὲ 5 ἀμελήσαντες ἀπῆλθον, ὃς μὲν εἰς τὸν ἴδιον ἀγρὸν, ὃς δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμπορίαν αὐτοῦ: οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ κρατήσαντες τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ 6 ὕβρισαν καὶ ἀπέκτειναν. ὁ δὲ βασιλεὺς ὠργίσθη, καὶ πέμψας τὰ 7 στρατεύματα αὐτοῦ ἀπώλεσεν τοὺς φονεῖς ἐκείνους καὶ τὴν πόλιν αὐτῶν ἐνέπρησεν. τότε λέγει τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ, ‘O μὲν γάμος 8 ἕτοιμός ἐστιν, οἱ δὲ κεκλημένοι οὐκ ἦσαν ἄξιοι. πορεύεσθε οὖν ἐπὶ g τὰς διεξόδους τῶν ὁδῶν, καὶ ὅσους ἐὰν εὕρητε καλέσατε εἰς τοὺς γάμους. καὶ ἐξελθόντες οἱ δοῦλοι ἐκεῖνοι εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς συνήγαγον 10 πάντας ὅσους εὗρον, πονηρούς τε καὶ ἀγαθούς" καὶ ἐπλήσθη ὁ γάμος ἀνακειμένων. [εἰσελθὼν δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς θεάσασθαι) τοὺς ἀνακει- II μένους εἶδεν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἐνδεδυμένον ἔνδυμα γάμου. καὶ 12 λέγει αὐτῷ, “Εταῖρε, πῶς εἰσῆλθες ὧδε [μὴ] ἔχων ἔνδυμα γάμου; ὁ δὲ ἐφιμώθη. τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν τοῖς διακόνοις, Δήσαντες αὐτοῦ 15 πόδας καὶ χεῖρας ἐκβάλετε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ σκότος τὸ ἐξώτερον᾽ ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. πολλοὶ γάρ εἰσιν 14 κλητοὶ, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεκτοί, Τότε πορευθέντες οἱ Φαρισαῖοι [συμβούλιον ἔλαβον) ὕπως 15 αὐτὸν [παγιδεύσωσιν)] ἐν λόγῳ. καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν [αὐτῷ] τοὺς 16 μαθητὰς αὐτῶν μετὰ τῶν ΗἩρωδιανῶν λέγοντες, Διδάσκαλε, οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς εἶ καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ διδάσκεις, καὶ οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός" οὐ γὰρ ἢ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἢ ἀνθρώπων' εἰπὲ οὖν ἡμῖν τί σοι δοκεῖ" ἔξεστιν δοῦναι κῆνσον Καίσαρι ἢ ov ; 17 γνοὺς δὲ ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς τὴν πονηρίαν αὐτῶν εἶπεν, Τί με πειράζετε, ὑπο- 18 κριταί; ἐπιδείξατέ μοι τὸ νόμισμα τοῦ κήνσου. οἱ δὲ προσήνεγκαν 19 αὐτῷ δηνάριον. καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, Τίνος ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπι- 20 γραφή ; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, Καίσαρος. τότε λέγει αὐτοῖς, ᾿Απόδοτε οὖν 21 Cap. XXII. 9. “Outlets or byways ” (strict and minute details). 48 MATHEW, XXII. 232 -X RIS. fa] la) lal a δὴ >] , 22 τὰ Καίσαρος Καίσαρι καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ. καὶ ἀκούσαντες 20 2 \ Ὁ , ᾽ \ ᾽ Lod 6 = ἐθαύμασαν, καὶ Abéntec αὐτὸν ἀπῆλθα!ι". a -“ “-“ a e 23 Ep ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ προσῆλθον αὐτῷ Σαδδουκαῖοι, οἱ λέγοντες . \ , , 24 [μὴ] εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν λέγοντες, Διδάσκαλε, a hc Pw ἡ “J ͵ \ ” , > , Μωυσῆς εἶπεν, “Kav τις ἀποθάνῃ μὴ ἔχων τέκνα, ἐπυιγαμβρεύσει ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀναστήσει σπέρμα τῷ n 7 fal “ 2 tal 25 ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ. ἦσαν δὲ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοί. καὶ ὁ πρῶτος r \ tal γήμας ἐτελεύτησεν, καὶ [un] ἔχων σπέρμα ἀφῆκεν THY γυναῖκα 26 αὐτοῦ τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ. ὁμοίως καὶ ὁ δεύτερος καὶ ὁ τρίτος, ἕως n , δι / nr 27 τῶν ἑπτά. ὕστερον δὲ πάντων ἀπέθανεν Kai ἡ γυνή. ἐν TH ava- 28 στάσει οὖν τίνος τῶν ἑπτὰ ἔσται γυνή; πάντες γὰρ ἔσχον αὐτήν. 7). ¢ na 5 a Aa ᾽ 29 ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Ἰ]λανᾶσθε, [μὴ] εἰδότες τὰς 30 γραφὰς [μηδὲ] τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ. ἐν γὰρ τῇ ἀναστάσει οὔτε ἴω » e YU A a αμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται, ἀλλ᾽ ws ἄγγελοι ἐν TH οὐρανῷ εἰσίν. γαμ ; calla ia lol / ~ A Ψ 7 Ν [ἃ nr 31 περὶ δὲ THs ἀναστάσεως τῶν νεκρῶν οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε TO ῥηθὲν ὑμῖν a rn ? ‘ 32 ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ λέγοντος, ’Eys εἰμι ὁ Θεὸς ᾿Αβραὰμ καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ Θεὸς Θεὸς νεκρῶν ἀλλὰ ζώντων. καὶ ? ’ / ew > “ 3." ες a 8 ὃ a b) fal ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ TH διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ. a / 7 34 Oi δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες ὅτι ἐφίμωσεν τοὺς Σαδδουκαίους \ @ 5 a 35 συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ ayTO, Kal ἐπηρώτησεν εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν νομικὸς πει- / \ , - 36 ράζων αὐτὸν, Διδάσκαλε, ποία ἐντολὴ μεγάλη ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ; ὁ δὲ ἔφη rn \ / il A 37 αὐτῷ, ᾿Αγαπήσεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου *év* ὅλῃ τῇ καρδίᾳ cov καὶ a A lA al 38 *év* ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ cov καὶ *év* ὅλῃ TH διανοίᾳ cov. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ͵ \ ῃ > ͵ ὃ , δὲ ε , ad A es ἢ 5 39 μεγάλη καὶ πρώτη ἐντολή. evTepa ὃὲ ὁμοία αὐτῇ, Δγαπὴήσεις τὸν a Ν lal 40 πλησίον cov ws σεαυτόν. ἐν ταύταις ταῖς δυσὶν ἐντολαῖς ὅλος ὁ , ©. an νόμος κρέμαται καὶ οἱ προφῆται. A me “ 41 Συνηγμένων δὲ τῶν Φαρισαίων ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτοὺς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - a n a r es 42 λέγων, Τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ περὶ τοῦ Χριστοῦ; Tivos vids ἐστιν; λέγουσιν A » cal a Φ, lal 43 αὐτῷ, Tod Δαυίδ. λέγει αὐτοῖς, Ids οὖν Δαυὶδ *év* πνεύματι καλεῖ 5 a 7 ~ 44 αὐτὸν κύριον λέγων, Εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ κυρίῳ pov, Κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν an , id , A - 45 μου ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου. εἰ οὖν Ν al 2) ἃ , al ey ? fot op) ΄ \ , \ Ὁ" 46 Δαυὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν κύριον, πῶς υἱὲς αὐτοῦ ἐστίν ; καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο a 3 La) 4 XOX 5 Ld , 5 > “ ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ *doyor,* οὐδὲ ἐτόλμησέν τις ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνης τῆς. a ’ -} , ἡμέρας ἐπερωτῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐκέτι. CAP. ͵ Cas en ae “ιν \ a a alas 93 Tore ὁ ‘Inoovs ἐλάλησεν τοῖς ὄχλοις Kal τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ d "Emi τῆς M g θέδ ἐκάθ is καὶ of 2 λέγων, “Ent τῆς Μωυσέως καθέδρας ἐκάθισαν οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ ot a * / cn aA 3 Φαρισαῖοι. πάντα οὖν toa ἂν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν ποιήσατε καὶ τηρεῖτε, κατὰ δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε λέγουσιν γὰρ καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσιν. 25. ἀφῆκεν] xviii. 12, xxiii. 38, xxiv. 34. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ] -Ξ- VIN), “ together,” 2. Weer Deut. xxi) 5. Ps. ΤΙ 2. SS —E—EEEIE MATTHEW, XXIII. 4—24. 49 ͵ \ / , \ > , + \ ΝΜ [δεσμεύουσιν] δὲ φορτία βαρέα καὶ ἐπιτιθέασιν ἐπὶ tots ὥμους 4 n ᾽ / fel \ t 3 n > I fal τῶν ἀνθρώπων, τῷ δὲ δακτύλῳ αὐτῶν οὐ θέλουσιν κινῆσαι αὐτά. πάντα δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν ποιοῦσιν πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι τοῖς 5 » \ \ “ > a \ , ἀνθρώποις. πλατύνουσιν yap τὰ φυλακτήρια αὐτῶν καὶ μεγαλύ- \ , a δὴ \ , > lal / νουσιν τὰ κράσπεδα, φιλοῦσιν δὲ THY πρωτοκλισίαν ἐν τοῖς δείπνοις 6 καὶ τὰς πρωτοκαθεδρίας ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν 7 fal > -“ \ A ¢ \ lel > / \s la ς a \ \ ταῖς ἀγοραῖς καὶ καλεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων paBBi. ὑμεῖς δὲ μὴ 8 a Cpe nese ͵ a κληθῆτε ῥαββί" εἷς yap ἐστιν ὑμῶν ὁ διδάσκαλος, πάντες δὲ ὑμεῖς \ ε a tal a = ἀδελφοί ἐστε. καὶ πατέρα μὴ καλέσητε ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς" εἷς yap 9 a ς 7 \ A ἐστιν ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ οὐράνιος. μηδὲ κληθῆτε καθηγηταὶ, ὅτι τὸ θ \ ¢ an > ‘ e ς ΧΙ , ¢ δὲ / ς a v καθηγητὴς ὑμῶν ἐστὶν eis ὁ Χριστός. [ὃ δὲ μείζων] ὑμῶν ἔσται τ1 ὑμῶν διάκονος. ὅστις δὲ ὑψώσει ἑαυτὸν ταπεινωθήσεται, καὶ ὅστις 12 7 ταπεινώσει ἑαυτὸν ὑψωθήσεται. al ἴω Ν Lal e Οὐαὶ δὲ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταὶ, ὅτι κλείετε τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν ἔμπροοθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων᾽ ὑμεῖς γὰρ Ἢ » Ps Σ \ \ ] / > / 3 lal δι το δ Lal οὐκ εἰσέρχεσθε, οὐδὲ τοὺς εἰσερχομένους ἀφίετε εἰσελθεῖν. oval ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταὶ, ὅτι [περιάγετε τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ τὴν ξηρὰν ποιῆσαι] ἕνα προσήλυτον, καὶ ὅταν γένηται, ποιεῖτε Φ \ *% Ἐν / Ἂς ὃ , « a ᾿ς ρα « -“ ¢ \ \ αὐτὸν ἢ υἱὸν γεέννης ἢ διπλότερον ὑμῶν. οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, ὁδηγοὶ τυφλοὶ, « λέ Ly @) “Ὁ 4 [ἡ * 2 “ ἴω Cd Ἰδέ > Ξ a δ᾽ Ἃ , , οἱ λέγοντες, Ὃς av ὀμόσῃ *év τῷ ναῷ, οὐδέν ἐστιν" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ὀμόσῃ la! Lat eR * τοῦ ναοῦ ὀφείλει. μωροὶ καὶ τυφλοὶ, τίς yap μείζων ΕῚ \ ¢ \ We \ ¢ 6 Ls AS , Va x Φ f ἐστὶν, ὁ χρυσὸς ἢ ὁ ναὸς ὁ ἁγιάσας τὸν χρυσόν; καὶ, Ὃς ἂν ὀμόσῃ % 13 15 16 4 3 A lal εν To χρύυσῳ ἐν τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ, ἢ οὐδέν ἐστιν' ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ὀμόσῃ * ἐν τῷ δώρῳ Ἐ τῷ ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ, ὀφείλει. τυφλοὶ, τί γὰρ μεῖζον, τὸ δῶρον ἢ τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ ἁγιάζον τὸ δῶρον; ὁ οὖν ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ θυσι- αστηρίῳ ὀμνύει ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ᾽' καὶ ὁ ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ ναῷ ὀμνύει ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ κατοι- κήσαντι αὐτόν. καὶ ὁ ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ὀμνύει ἐν τῷ θρόνῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἐν τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ. οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταὶ, ὅτι ἀποδεκατοῦτε TO ἡδύοσμον καὶ τὸ ἄνηθον καὶ τὸ κύμινον, καὶ ἀφήκατε τὰ βαρύτερα τοῦ νόμου, τὴν κρίσιν καὶ τὸ ἔλεος καὶ τὴν πίστιν. ταῦτα δὲ ἔδει ποιῆσαι κἀκεῖνα μὴ ἀφεῖναι. ὁδηγοὶ τυφλοὶ, οἱ διυλέίζοντες τὸν κώνωπα, τὴν 24 Cap. XXIII. τι; ative, v. 48. 13. ἔμπροσθεν here for ἐναντίον, v. 16, Future for imper- 15. υἱὸν y.J ‘*Criminal,” ‘‘repro- bate,” ‘‘felon.” v. 22, ‘‘one of the Ge- henna brood,” ‘‘ one of those who repre- and vice versa, Mk. ii. 12. Gen. xxx. 30, ΣΡ ‘fante me,” ‘ante meum adven. tum,” V.A. ἐναντίον ἐμοῦ. L. i. 17, ἐνώ- mov for ἔμπροσθεν ; and vice vers’ M. XXV. 32. G, sent it and incur its penalties.” “23 D3, Compare viii. 12, of ὑ, τῆς βασι- λείας, L. x. 6, ὑ. εἰρήνης. xx. 36, dva- στάσεως, 2 Thess, ii. 3, ἀπωλείας. 4 50 MATTHEW, XXIII. 25—XXIV. 2. cern, ¢e a“ “ \ ἴα 25 δὲ κάμηλον καταπίνοντες. οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταὶ, ὅτι καθαρίζετε τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τῆς παρο- / a \ > a 26 Widos, ἔσωθεν δὲ γέμουσιν [ἐξ] ἁρπαγῆς καὶ ἀκρασίας. Φαρισαῖε fal A τὰ A X τυφλὲ, καθάρισον πρῶτον τὸ ἐντὸς τοῦ ποτηρίου, ἵνα γένηται καὶ TO rn an A a La 27 ἐκτὸς αὐτοῦ καθαρόν. oval ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς Kat Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκρι- ivf 3. , ταὶ, ὅτι παρομοιάζετε τάφοις κεκονιαμένοις, οἵτινες ἔξωθεν μὲν φαίνον- -“ “ ΄ ται ὡραῖοι, ἔσωθεν δὲ γέμουσιν ὀστέων νεκρῶν καὶ πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας. a Lal lq 28 οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔξωθεν μὲν φαίνεσθε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δίκαιοι, ἔσωθεν DWN a tad \ 29 δέ ἐστε μεστοὶ ὑποκρίσεως καὶ ἀνομίας. oval ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι ὑποκριταὶ, ὅτι οἰκοδομεῖτε τοὺς τάφους τῶν προφητῶν a a a / 9) τ 5 -“ 30 καὶ κοσμεῖτε τὰ μνημεῖα τῶν δικαίων, καὶ λέγετε, ἘΠ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς A a \ Led ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, οὐκ ἂν ἤμεθα [αὐτῶν κοινωνοὶ ἐν TO A -“ “Ὁ i e - 31 αἵματι] τῶν προφητῶν. ὥστε μαρτυρεῖτε ἑαυτοῖς ὅτι υἱοί ἐστε τῶν Ὁ \ lal 32 φονευσάντων τοὺς προφήτας. Kal ὑμεῖς πληρώσατε TO μέτρον τῶν -“ / lal lal 33 πατέρων ὑμῶν. ὄφεις, γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν, πῶς φύγητε ἀπὸ τῆς A cal > an 24 κρίσεως τῆς γεέννης; διὰ τοῦτο ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω πρὸς ὑμᾶς \ \ \ a val ’ a προφήτας Kal σοφοὺς καὶ γραμματεῖς" ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀποκτενεῖτε καὶ σταυρώσετε, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μαστυγώσετε ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς ὑμῶν b] \ A fal - 35 καὶ διώξετε ἀπὸ πόλεως εἰς πόλιν ὅπως ἔλθῃ ἐφ᾽ ὑμῶς πᾶν αἷμα δίκαιον ἐκχυννόμενον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος Αβεδ τοῦ δικαίου ἕως τοῦ αἵματος Ζαχαρίου υἱοῦ Βαραχίου, ὃν ἐφονεύσατε 36 μεταξὺ τοῦ ναοῦ καὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἥξει πάντα - , 37 ταῦτα ἐπὶ τὴν γενεὰν ταύτην. “Ἱερουσαλὴμ “Ἱερουσαλὴμ, ἡ ἀπο- , Ἁ / \ rn \ ΒΕ , κτείνουσα τοὺς προφήτας Kal λιθοβολοῦσα τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτὴν, ποσάκις ἠθέλησα ἐπισυναγαγεῖν τὰ τέκνα σον, ὃν τρό- f \ \ a πον ὄρνις ἐπισυνάγει τὰ νοσσίω ὑπὸ Tas πτέρυγας αὐτῆς, Kal οὐκ 230.» , δ ΧΟ Cone ον» ἐ ulate, L στ ΟΞ ἠθελήσατε. ἰδοὺ ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν ἔρημος. λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, SO) 23 , " 2 + ῳ 5 ἡ Ὁ Ey , 655) πὰ 2 ov μή με ἴδητε am ἄρτι ἕως ἂν εἴπητε, Εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ’ , / Ce Τὴν nea ante a) AN ne hae , \ a 24 Καὶ ἐξελθὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο, καὶ [προσῆλθον 2 οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπιδεῖξαι] αὐτῷ τὰς οἰκοδομὰς τοῦ ἱεροῦ. ὁ Nie ἂν \ 3 ee ᾽ , a , ae δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Οὐ βλέπετε ταῦτα πάντα; ἀμὴν ay ᾽ ’ A Ὁ \ / a ͵ λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται. 25. γέμουσιν ἐξ a. K.ax.] Not “full 26. ἵνα expresses not ‘‘the means,” of” (as 27), but ‘filled from or by,” ex- but “the preparation:” not ‘‘in order tortion or excess. But compare L. xi. 39. that,” but ‘‘so that afterwards:’ ‘cleanse The ποτήριον and mapoyis, though not the inside (the heart) first, as preliminary to used in such special sense by V.A., may _ cleansing the outside.” And as one ele- perhaps mean here bowls and dishes, the ment in the process, L. xi. 41, τὰ ἐνόντα cup and platter, in which the drink- δότε ἐλεημοσύνην, ‘‘give all you can in offering and meat-offering were presented ‘works of mercy.” before God: the externals of worship. MATTHEW, XXIV. 3—26. 51 Oo καθημένου δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ ὄρους τῶν ἐλαιῶν προσῆλθον αὐτῷ 3 e a \ ? isd, , EZ \ eon , a ” οἱ μαθηταὶ κατ᾽ ἰδίαν λέγοντες, Εἰπὲ ἡμῖν πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; x a a a 2 a a καὶ τί TO σημεῖον τῆς σῆς παρουσίας καὶ ᾿ συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος ;* ἈΝ ’ n n a καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Βλέπετε μή τις ὑμᾶς 4 TANS λλοὶ yap ἐλεύσονται * ert TH ovomaTti™ μου λέ avnon. πολλοὶ yap ἐλεύσον ( ματί ὃ μ γοντες, 5 > , 2 c \ \ , 4 Eyo εἶμι ὁ Χριστὸς, καὶ πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν. [μελλήσετε] 6 δὲ ἀκούειν πολέμους καὶ [ἀκοὰς] πολέμων" ὁρᾶτε μὴ θροεῖσθε: ὃ a \ Ul ,ὔ θ % ᾽ wv > Ἂν a ls > θ εὖ γὰρ πάντα γενέσθαι, adr’ οὔπω ἐστὶν τὸ τέλος. ἐγερθήσεται 7 \ ” δ v \ / 5 \ ΄ \ ” yap ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν, καὶ ἔσονται λιμοὶ καὶ σεισμοὶ [κατὰ τόπους]. πάντα δὲ ταῦτα ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων. 8 = a a fal -“ τότε παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς θλῖψιν καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν ὑμᾶς, Kalo ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν ἐθνῶν διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου. καὶ το τότε σκανδαλισθήσονται πολλοὶ καὶ ἀλλήλους παραδώσουσιν καὶ μισήσουσιν ἀλλήλους. καὶ πολλοὶ ψευδοπροφῆται ἐγερθήσονται 11 Ἀ , , \ ὃ \ \ 0 θῇ \ ᾽ ΄ὔ καὶ πλανήσουσιν πολλούς. καὶ Ola τὸ πληθυνθήῆναν τὴν ἀνομίαν 12 Ψψυγήσεται ἡ ἀγάπη τῶν πολλῶν. ὁ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, 15 na ’ a οὗτος σωθήσεται. Kal κηρυχθήσεται τοῦτο TO εὐαγγέλιον τῆς 14 βασιλείας ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἰκουμένῃ εἰς μαρτύριον πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, f. Ὁ“ καὶ τότε ἥξει τὸ τέλος. “Otay οὖν ἴδητε τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς 15 » , * A e θὲ ὃ \ A \ lal f e \ ᾽ ἐρημώσεως ἢ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Δανιὴλ τοῦ προφήτου ἑστὸς ἐν τόπῳ aA , ἁγίῳ, ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω, τότε οἱ ἐν TH ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ φευγέτωσαν 16 ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη, ὁ ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος μὴ καταβαινέτω ἄραι τὰ ἐκ τῆς 17 Def > fal A e 3 "Ὁ ᾽ n ἢ > f ’ , Ss οἰκίας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὁ ἐν TO ἀγρῷ μὴ [ἐπιστρεψάτω ὀπίσω ἄραι] 18 τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ. οὐαὶ δὲ ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις καὶ ταῖς 19 “ / \ “ \ θηλαζούσαις ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις. προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ 20 A \ , γένηται ἡ φυγὴ ὑμῶν χειμῶνος μηδὲ σαββάτῳ. ἔσται γὰρ τότε 21 “ 3 A ia a fal θλῖψις μεγάλη, οἵα ov γέγονεν am’ ἀρχῆς κόσμου ἕως τοῦ νῦν e / a οὐδ᾽ ov μὴ γένηται. καὶ εἰ μὴ [ἐκοχλοβώθησαν]) αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι, 22 a , Ἐρύκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ" διὰ δὲ τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς κολοβωθήσονται nr Cie ? \ φ« ς \ A ai ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι. τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ᾿Ιδοὺ ὧδε ὁ Χριστὸς, ἢ 23 , \ ὧδε, μὴ πιστεύσητε. ἐγερθήσονται yap ψευδόχριστοι καὶ ψευδο- 24 a lal U \ la 4“ lel προφῆται, καὶ [δώσουσιν σημεῖα] μεγάλα καὶ τέρατα ὥστε πλανῆ- ,, ς Cc A aX Ls σαι, εἰ δυνατὸν, Kal τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς. ἰδοὺ προείρηκα ὑμῖν. ἐὰν οὖν 46 a lel Se! \ > lal εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν, 180d ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ ἐστὶν, μὴ ἐξέλθητε" ᾿Ιδοὺ ἐν τοῖς Cap. XXIV. 15. βδ. τ. ἐρημ.} Μ.Α, — sanct, “an idolatrous emblem, and the ae 3 3 : ERT for DOWD PIpwn, Dan. xi. 31, the Very symbol of desolation. W. & W. OR Ae 18. NS, oval, vee: all the same sound qualifying genitive, borrowed from Hebr., 4 ? 1 “detestabile illud quo desolatio efficitur.” probably, or nearly 50. ar) “ The desolating abomination” or ‘‘ idol” 22. δὲ, .23 = “‘nullus, nihil,” is ren- (Engl. Vn. passim), i.e. “the Eagle of dered in V.A. πᾶς...οὐκ, universally : e.g. the Roman legions,” which was sacro- Ἐν, xii, 16, copied in N.T. as L. i. 38. 4—2 52 MATTHEW, XXIV. 27—45. 27 ταμείοις, μὴ πιστεύσητε. ὥσπερ yap ἡ ἀστραπὴ ἐξέρχεται ἀπ᾽ ἀνατολῶν καὶ φαίνεται ἕως δυσμῶν, οὕτως ἔσται ἡ παρουσία τοῦ 28 υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. [ὅπου ἐὰν] ἦ τὸ πτῶμα, ἐκεῖ συναχθήσονται οἱ 29 ἀετοί, Ἐὐθέως δὲ μετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται, καὶ ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς, καὶ οἱ ἀστέρες πεσοῦνται ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τῶν οὐρανῶν 30 σαλευθήσονται. καὶ τώτε φανήσεται τὸ σημεῖον τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν οὐρανῷ, καὶ τότε κέψονται πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ ὄψονται τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ 31 οὐρανοῦ [μετὰ δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης πολλῆς]. καὶ ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ [μετὰ σάλπιγγος φωνῆς μεγάλης], καὶ ἐπισυνάξουσιν τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων AT. AKPWN OYPAN@N 32 ἕως ἄκρων ἀὐτῶν. ᾿Απὸ δὲ τῆς συκῆς μάθετε τὴν παραβολήν. ὅταν ἤδη ὁ κλάδος αὐτῆς γένηται ἁπαλὸς καὶ τὰ φύλλα ἐκφύῃ, 33 γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγγὺς τὸ θέρος. οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ὅταν ἴδητε πάντα 34 ταῦτα, γινώσκετε Ore ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἐπὶ θύραις. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ 35 μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται. ὁ οὐρανὸς 36 καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσεται, οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρέλθωσιν. ἹΠερὶ δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης καὶ ὥρας οὐδεὶς οἶδεν, οὐδὲ οἱ ἄγγελοι τῶν 37 οὐρανῶν, εἰ μὴ ὃ πατήρ μου μόνος. ὥσπερ δὲ αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ Nae, 38 οὕτως ἔσται ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. ὡς γὰρ ἦσαν ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ τρώγοντες καὶ πίνοντες, γαμοῦντες ALS , ” Ld ς / 3. Shr a > \ \ καὶ ἐκγαμίζοντες, [ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας] εἰσῆλθεν Nae eis τὴν κιβωτὸν, 30 καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν ἕως ἦλθεν ὁ κατακλυσμὸς καὶ ἦρεν ἅπαντας, οὕτως 40 ἔσται ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. τότε δύο ἔσονται ἐν τῷ 41 ἀγρῷ, εἷς παραλαμβάνεται καὶ εἷς ἀφίεται: δύο ἀλήθουσαι ἐν τῷ 2 μύλῳ, μία παραλαμβάνεται καὶ μία ἀφίεται. ypyyopeite οὖν, ὅτι 43 οὐκ οἴδατε ποίᾳ ἡμέρᾳ ὁ κύριος ὑμῶν ἔρχεται. "Exetvo δὲ γινώσκετε, ὅτε εἰ ἤδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης ποίᾳ φυλακῇ 6 κλέπτης ἔρχεται, ἐγρηγόρησεν ἂν καὶ οὐκ ἂν εἴασεν διορυγῆναι τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ. 44 διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ὑμεῖς γίνεσθε ἕτοιμοι, ὅτι ἣ [οὐ δοκεῖτε] ὥρᾳ ὃ υἱὸς 45 τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεται. Τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν ὁ πιστὸς δοῦλος καὶ 31. Μετὰ with gen. has so essenti- σπροσερχώμεθα per’ ἀληθινῆς καρδίας. We ally the idea of “societas,” that except must not be misled by the coincidence with persons, or things personified, it is between our idiom and the Hebrew, to rarely found in classical authors. Hence think the use of μετὰ natural and gram- its use in V.A. and N.T. is often perplex- matical in Greek, because ‘‘ with,” in ing. Ps. xvi. 11 for ΠΝ, quoted Acts these and similar phrases, is so in English. ii. 28, πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης werd τῦ Compare Mk. xiii. 27, ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως προσώπου cov. L.-xiv. 9, κατέχειν τὸν ἄκρ. οὐρανοῦ. V. A. for N¥P =‘ Πηΐ5, ἔσχατον τόπον mer’ αἰσχύνης. Acts xv. 33 extremitas.” Deut. iv. 32, xxviii. 64, am’ ἀπελύθησαν per εἰρήνης. Hebr. x. 22, ἄκρ.. ἕως axpov. MATTHEW, XXIV. 46—XXV. or. 53 , Δ , a a a φρόνιμος, ὃν κατέστησεν ὁ κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς οἰκετείας αὐτοῦ τοῦ - ? a \ ᾿ > A U ig a a « rm δοῦναι αὐτοῖς τὴν τροφὴν ἐν καιρῷ; μακάριος ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος dv 45 ᾽ \ a A A ἐλθὼν ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὑρήσει οὕτως ποιοῦντα. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν 47 " a - > a ὅτι ἐπὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν αὐτοῦ καταστήσει αὐτόν. ἐὰν δὲ 48 v € ‘\ a 5 a 5 a ? fal r 7 ς εἴπῃ ὃ κακὸς δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, Χρονίζει μου ὁ ’ “- fal κύριος ἐλθεῖν, καὶ ἄρξηται τύπτειν τοὺς συνδούλους αὐτοῦ, ἐσθίῃ δὲ 49 \ a Ρ a καὶ πίνῃ μετὰ τῶν μεθυόντων" ἥξει ὁ κύριος τοῦ δούλου ἐκείνου 50 > ¢ / - > n Nie “ - , ͵ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ 7) οὐ προσδοκᾷ καὶ ἐν ὥρᾳ ἡ οὐ γινώσκει, καὶ διχοτομήσει 51 > a a e r lal αὐτὸν Kal TO μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν θήσει ἐκεῖ ἔσται ς Ν a *0 κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. Ἐ Sie , ¢ ¢ a a 2 ᾿ Τότε ὁμοιωθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν δέκα παρθένοις, 95 “ A \ / ς a Suen ? ¢ , fal αἵτινες λαβοῦσαι Tas λαμπάδας ἑαυτῶν ἐξῆλθον εἰς ὑπάντησιν τοῦ ’ A . , νυμφίου. πέντε δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἦσαν μωραὶ Kai πέντε φρόνιμοι. 2 [αἵτινες μωραὶ,] λαβοῦσαι τὰς λαμπάδας αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔλαβον μεθ᾽ 3 [ - lel ” " e \ ’ 5» 5» 3 Lal ’ / Ἁ ἑαυτῶν ἔλαιον" αἱ δὲ φρόνιμοι ἔλαβον ἔλαιον ἐν τοῖς ἀγγείοις μετὰ 4 τῶν λαμπάδων αὐτῶν. χρονίζοντος δὲ τοῦ νυμφίου ἐνύσταξαν πᾶσαι 5 \ > , Va \ μὰ \ 7 ᾽ \ & / καὶ ἐκάθευδον. μέσης δὲ νυκτὸς κραυγὴ γέγονεν, ᾿Ιδοὺ ὁ νυμφίος, 6 4 ΟΝ a ἐξέρχεσθε εἰς ἀπάντησιν. τότε ἠγέρθησαν πᾶσαι ai παρθένοι 7 ἐκεῖναι καὶ ἐκόσμησαν τὰς λαμπάδας ἑαυτῶν. αἱ δὲ μωραὶ ταῖς 8 z 53 Uj c A 9 a > / ¢ fal [72 -« Γ᾿ φρονίμοις εἶπαν, Δότε ἡμῖν ἐκ τοῦ ἐλαίου ὑμῶν, ὅτι αἱ λαμπάδες c a ’ ᾽ LQ δὲ e , / , ἡμῶν σβέννυνται. ἀπεκρίθησαν δὲ αἱ φρόνιμοι λέγουσαι, Μή ποτε 9 Ce wx na , lal οὐ μὴ ἀρκέσῃ ἡμῖν καὶ ὑμῖν. πορεύεσθε [μᾶλλον] πρὸς τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ ἀγοράσατε ἑαυταῖς. [ἀπερχομένων δὲ αὐτῶν 10 ἣν / > c / \ cer , lol > ’ fal >? ἀγοράσαι] ἦλθεν ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ ai ἕτοιμοι εἰσῆλθον μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ εἰς \ ’ \ 3 f Ls , “ \ », τς € τοὺς γάμους, καὶ ἐκλείσθη ἡ θύρα. ὕστερον δὲ ἔρχονταν καὶ ai II λοιπαὶ παρθένοι λέγουσαι, Κύριε κύριε, ἄνοιξον ἡμῖν' ὁ δὲ ἀπο- 12 \ 3 2 \ / δ lal τι 5 ς A a 5 A κριθεὶς εἶπεν, ᾿Α μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς. γρηγορεῖτε οὖν, ὅτι 13 > ” \ τ OX \ vA ae \ ” οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἡμέραν οὐδὲ τὴν ὥραν. “Ὥσπερ yap ἄνθρωπος 14 ’ n ᾽ / \ 5, / \ / ? lal \ ἀποδημῶν ἐκάλεσεν τοὺς ἰδίους δούλους Kal παρέδωκεν αὐτοῖς τὰ id / ΕῚ “Ὁ x κυ \ ξὸ f , - \ δύ ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ, καὶ [ᾧ μὲν] ἔδωκεν πέντε τάλαντα, ᾧ δὲ δύο, 15 1 Xe e , \ \ γὼ " , Ὁ ’ r 3 , ᾧ δὲ ἕν, ἑκάστῳ κατὰ THY ἰδίαν δύναμιν, Kal ἀπεδήμησεν εὐθέως. / a πορευθεὶς δὲ ὁ τὰ πέντε τάλαντα λαβὼν εἰργάσατο *év αὐτοῖς Ἐ 16 as oe , Μ / Ul ios / ‘ee \ / ΕῚ , ὃ καὶ ἐποίησεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα. ὡσαύτως καὶ ὁ τὰ δύο ἐκέρδησεν 17 ἄλλα δύο. ὁ δὲ τὸ ἕν λαβὼν ἀπελθὼν wpvEev γῆν καὶ ἔκρυψεν τὸ 1ὃ 2 n n \ , , , ἀργύριον τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ. μετὰ δὲ πολὺν χρόνον ἔρχεται 6 κύριος 19 a , 5 Ις \ r / » > a “ θ Ἂν 2 τῶν δούλων ἐκείνων καὶ συναίρει λόγον MET αὐτῶν. καὶ προσελθὼν 20 Yj / / & ὁ Ta πέντε τάλαντα λαβὼν προσήνεγκεν ἄλλω πέντε τάλαντα λέγων, Κύριε, πέντε τάλαντά μοι παρέδωκας, ἴδε ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα a a 3 a ? \ \ ‘ ἐκέρδησα. ἔφη αὐτῷ 6 κύριος αὐτοῦ, Εὖ, δοῦλε ἀγαθὲ καὶ πιστὲ, [ἐπὶ 21 54 MATTHEW, XXV. 22—36. a , , » Ἁ ὠλίγα] ἧς πιστὸς, ἐπὶ πολλῶν σε καταστήσω" εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν lal ? Ἂν 2 \ id / 3 22 χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου σου. προσελθὼν δὲ καὶ ὁ τὰ δύο τάλαντα εἴπεν, ΕΞ Κύριε, δύο τάλαντά μοι παρέδωκας, ἴδε ἄλλα δύο τάλαντα ἐκέρδησα. A a a \ \ A τ πο 2 23 ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ, Kv, δοῦλε ἀγαθὲ καὶ πιστὲ, ἐπὶ ὀλύγα ἧς es \ \ a , πιστὸς, ἐπὶ πολλῶν σε καταστήσω" εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου > , ” 24 σου. προσελθὼν καὶ ὁ τὸ ἕν τάλαντον εἰληφὼς εἶπεν, Κύριε, ἔγνων 4 7 ? 4 \ σε OTL σκληρὸς εἶ ἄνθρωπος, θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρας, Kal ᾽ \ ” 25 συνάγων ὅθεν ov διεσκόρπισας" καὶ φοβηθεὶς ἀπελθὼν ἔκρυψα \ La 2 ‘ \ c 26 τὸ τάλαντόν cov ἐν τῇ γῆ᾽ ἴδε ἔχεις TO σόν. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ἴω n ’ ! id / κύριος αὐτοῦ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, ἸΠονηρὲ δοῦλε Kal ὀκνηρὲ, ἤδεις OTL θερίζω ld ° 27 ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρα, Kal συνάγω ὅθεν ov διεσκόρπισα; ἔδει σε οὖν <2) \ ’ , , ad / \. \ BJ Ἂ 23 , BAAEIN τὸ ἀργύριόν μου τοῖς τραπεζίταις, καὶ ἐλθὼν ἐγὼ ἐκομισάμην 28 x A a A \ , ΕἸΣ > ’ 3 ’ lal \ , \ δέ 28 ἂν τὸ ἐμὸν σὺν TOK@. ἄρατε οὖν aT αὐτοῦ τὸ τάλαντον καὶ δότε 9 a \ δέ n \ ἐπ Ν ὃ θ lA \ 29 τῷ ἔχοντι Ta δέκα τάλαντα. τῷ yap ἔχοντι παντὶ δοθήσεται καὶ τ , aA Ν Σ Ν » , ΕΣ » περισσευθήσεται" τοῦ δὲ μὴ ἔχοντος, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ a ᾽ an \ \ τὶ - fal 2 U ’ \ 4 A. 13 = 30 αὐτοῦ. καὶ τὸν ἀχρεῖον δοῦλον ἐκβάλετε εἰς TO σκότος TO ἐξώτερον > ἊΨ ς \ N: ge \ a 5 , ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. ‘A An A \ , 31. Ὅταν δὲ ἔλθῃ 6 vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῇ δόξη αὐτοῦ Kal πάντες 27279 (Sate) ? 5 ΓΝ , , ὧι καὶ Ω ,ὔ , a. \ 3 οἱ ἀγγέλοι μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, τότε καθίσει ἐπὶ θρόνου δόξης αὐτοῦ" καὶ le 3) an a συναχθήσονταί ἔμπροοθεν αὐτοῦ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, καὶ ἀφοριεῖ » id αὐτοὺς ἀπ᾿ ἀλλήλων, ὥσπερ ὁ ποιμὴν ἀφορίζει τὰ πρόβατα 79 2 \ a bay \ , Ν \ , > - > a 33 απὸ τῶν ἐρίφων, Kat στήσει τὰ μὲν πρόβατα ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ, \ \ > > cal n 34 τὰ δὲ ἐρίφια ἐξ εὐωνύμων. τότε ἐρεῖ ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ a 2 “ a a δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ, Δεῦτε *oi εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός Ἔ μου, κλη- \ ε , ς a id >’ \ lal ρονομήσατε [τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς Ξ- 4 5 / \ rn 35 Κόσμου]. ἐπείνασα γὰρ καὶ ἐδώκατέ μοι φαγεῖν, ἐδίψησα καὶ ents / , , " \ 30 ἐποτίσατέ pe, ξένος ἤμην Kal συνηγάγετέ pe, γυμνὸς καὶ περιε- ᾿ Λ΄ ? t Se L 7 ᾽ n βάλετέ με, ἠσθένησα καὶ ἐπεσκέψασθέ με, ἐν φυλακῇ ἤμην Cap. XXV. 21. Mark change of case, __vah’s blessed ones.” These terms of ex- without any apparent reason. pression are as unnatural in English, as 27. βαλεῖν] See ix. 38. (1) and (2) are in Greek. In our “blessed 34. “MY FIR, V.A. εὐλογητὸς Ku- — of the Lord,” οὔ-- ὑπὸ: and we have trans- plov (1), Gen. xxiv. 31, Vulg. ‘‘Benedic- ated according to the spirit, and not the tus Domini,” and xxvi. 29, εὐλογημένος letter, as V.A. in evAoy. ὑπὸ Κι As ὑπὸ Κυρίου. The general form is "3 also in translating ev. τοῦ πατρός μου, rey (2) eddoynuévos τῷ Kuply, The We have evaded the stiffness of the literal So , ‘ eat ς rendering ‘‘ My Father’s blessed ones,” two are practically identical [though V.A. by turning it “Ye blessed of my Father.” puts the latter in dative on account of 2, — The irregular syntax of the latter portion which is here ‘“ possessoris;” as 1 Sam. Of the verse has many parallels in N -T., xvi. 18, sb }2, and xiv. τό, D‘DNO eo. (σ᾽. ii. 23): pi te ene oe Sey ? τ τ ὀργῆς, and has prototypes, possibly, in DIN], and signify ‘‘Jehovah’s blessed Hebrew: e.g. 2 Sam. xiii. 16. one,” or, more correctly, ‘‘one of Jeho- MATTHEW, XXV. 37—XXVI. 12. κα ’ n καὶ ἤλθατε πρὸς μέ. τότε ἀποκριθήσονται αὐτῷ οἱ δίκαιοι 37 , , , yy Ὁ \ 3 / wn λέγοντες, Κύριε, πότε σε εἴδομεν πεινῶντα καὶ ἐθρέψαμεν; ἢ tal / διψῶντα καὶ ἐποτίσαμεν ; πότε δέ σε εἴδομεν ξένον καὶ συνηγά- 38 a \ \ , Ξ δέ ἴὸὃ LS nr yomev ; ἢ γυμνὸν καὶ περιεβάλομεν ; πότε δέ σε εἴδομεν ἀσθενοῦντα 39 x na \ [4 Ν 5 ¢ ἢ ἐν φυλακῇ καὶ ἤλθομεν πρὸς σέ; Kal ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ βασιλεὺς 40 5 “Ὁ > a Ψ \ / «ς lal 3 PIE A x bf ey / lal ἐρεῖ αὐτοῖς, Auny λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐφ ὅσον ἐποιήσατε ἑνὶ τούτων τῶν LO nr fal / > \ > , , 5] a \ -“ I ἀδελφῶν μου τῶν ἐλαχίστων, ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. τότε ἐρεῖ Kal τοῖς 4 Ὁ « / “ ἐξ εὐωνύμων, Πορεύεσθε ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ οἱ κατηραμένοι εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώ \ ¢ / n ὃ β a \ a 3 aN > lol νιον τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον τῷ διαβόλῳ Kal τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ. 2 / \ \ ’ 28 / , Lal 25 ¢ \ ᾽ 2 ἐπείνασα yap καὶ οὐκ ἐδώκατέ μοι φαγεῖν, ἐδίψησα καὶ οὐκ 4 / / / 4 \ ν᾽ ἐποτίσατέ με, ξένος ἤμην καὶ οὐ συνηγάγετέ με, γυμνὸς καὶ οὐ 43 / / > \ \ > a \ ? > / / περιεβάλετέ με, ἀσθενὴς καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ καὶ οὐκ ἐπεσκέψασθέ με. , τότε ἀποκριθήσονται καὶ αὐτοὶ λέγοντες, Κύριε, πότε σε εἴδομεν 44 Lal Ἂ a Ἂ / Ἂ x ἣν ὦ Ky, ΚΒ, Ὁ \ πεινῶντα ἢ διψῶντα ἢ ξένον ἢ γυμνὸν ἢ ἀσθενῆ ἢ ἐν φυλακῇ, καὶ 7 , , > / » n 7 > nt οὐ διηκονήσαμέν σοι; τότε ἀποκριθήσεται αὐτοῖς λέγων, ᾿Αμὴν 45 - lal , λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐφ᾽ ὅσον οὐκ ἐποιήσατε ἑνὶ τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων, Ἰδὲ > ΑΝ f Νι ΟΝ ’ φ γ᾽ , ὙΠ 6 οὐδὲ ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. καὶ ἀπελεύσονται οὗτοι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον, 4 « Ἂ / >? εὖ ΟΡ ῃ οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον. ae Καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους, 26 5 a a ᾽ a ors “ \ ὃ / ς / \ a εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, Οἴδατε OTe μετὰ δύο ἡμέρας τὸ “ ? f > \ πάσχα γίνεται, Kal ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς τὸ σταυρωθῆναι. Τότε συνήχθησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ 3 Ψ \ ,’ \ n od / “Ὁ / of A εἰς τὴν αὐλὴν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως τοῦ λεγομένου Kaiada, Kat ovve- 4 κε , ΄ βουλεύσαντο ἵνα τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν δόλῳ κρατήσωσιν καὶ ἀποκτείνωσιν. ble \ Ny ae a \ / > Ἂ n ἔλεγον δὲ, Μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ ἵνα μὴ θόρυβος γένηται ἐν TO λαῷ. lol ἈΝ lel / μι Ἕ ’ > , / Led Tod δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦ γενομένου ἐν Βηθανίᾳ ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ Ἢ C)\ Se λεπροῦ, προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ γυνὴ ἀλάβαστρον μύρου ἔχουσα βα- ρυτίμου καὶ κατέχεεν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ ἀνακειμένου. ἰδόν- ὃ U τες δὲ οἱ μαθηταὶ ἤἠγανάκτησαν λέγοντες, Kis τί [ἡ ἀπώλεια] αὕτη ; ἠδύνατο γὰρ τοῦτο πραθῆναι πολλοῦ καὶ δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς. 9 n a / γνοὺς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Τί κόπους παρέχετε TH γυναικί; 10 5 \ ἔργον yap καλὸν εἰργάσατο εἰς ἐμέ. πάντοτε yap τοὺς πτωχοὺς IT ” ee ue Ὁ » \ \ ’ fe ΕΝ “ \ icf ΤΩ ἔχετε μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε. Badoyca yap αὕτη Cap. XXVI. 4. δόλῳ] Dative of man- 5, where it is opposed to τήρησις. It ner: very rare in M. I have noted it corresponds probably to NMW1D = “per- only in ili, 12, iv. 24, vii. 22, xv. 8, 20, — ditio,” active (a) and passive (4), (a) Prov. Xxill. 4, XXVil. 59. Ah ea a xvili. 9, xxviii. 24 and here; and (ὁ) Is. 8. ἀπώλεια] “profusio,” Grimm. ΝῸ j, 4, with which compare John xvii. 12. quotations from any class. author, except 12. Two things to be noted here: Ba- one from Polybius, given by Schl., VI. 59. 56 MATTHEW, XXVI. 13—28. - lal ι 8 A ‘ , τὸ μύρον τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ σώματός μου πρὸς τὸ ἐνταφιάσαι με a A y 3. I A 13 ἐποίησεν. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ TO εὐαγγέλιον τοῦτο a \ / / , ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ, λαληθήσεται καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη εἰς μνημόσυνον αὐτῆς. - a ε ' > , > 14 Tote πορευθεὶς cis τῶν δώδεκα, ὁ λεγόμενος ᾿Ιούδας *Ioxa- a 3 na ’ εἴ 15 ριώτης, πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς εἶπεν, Τί θέχλετέ μοι δοῦναι, καγὼ - a / 3 , ὑμῖν παραδώσω αὐτόν; οἱ δὲ ἔστησαν αὐτῷ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια. 16 We ee \ t δ," 5 , “ e's 80 καὶ ἀπὸ τότε ἐζήτει εὐκαιρίαν ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδῷ. An n a e \ A 9. an 17 Τῇ δὲ πρώτῃ τῶν ἀζύμων προσῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ Ἴ na fal « Ν 18 λέγοντες, Ποῦ θέλεις ἑτοιμάσωμεν σοι φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα; 6 δὲ lal 3 nr εἶπεν, Ὑπάγετε eis τὴν πόλιν πρὸς τὸν δεῖνα καὶ εἴπατε αὐτῷ, ‘ \ ‘O διδάσκαλος λέγει, Ὃ καιρός pov ἐγγύς ἐστιν, *mpos σὲ ἢ lal a n e 19 ποιῶ τὸ πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου. καὶ ἐποίησαν οἱ μαθηταὶ / 20 ὡς συνέταξεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἡτοίμασαν τὸ πάσχα. ᾿Οψίας > a 21 δὲ γενομένης ἀνέκειτο μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα. καὶ ἐσθιόντων αὐτῶν i , 22 εἶπεν, ᾿Αμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτε εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν παραδώσει pe. καὶ λυπού- μενον σφόδρα ἤρξαντο λέγειν αὐτῷ εἷς ἕκαστος, Μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι, , Ἢ (g \ ᾽ x op ς 5 le > ’ nr \ an 23 κύριε; ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν, ‘O ἐμβάψας μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ τὴν χεῖρα 24 ἐν τῷ τρυβλίῳ, οὗτός με παραδώσει. ὁ μὲν υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου a an >’ ὑπάγει καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ οὐαὶ δὲ TO ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ n \ 3 fal dt οὗ ὁ vids τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται καχὸν ἦν αὐτῷ εἰ οὐκ > 40 ec wv θ 2 a ’ θ x δὲ Ἴ "ὃ ¢ ὃ ὃ \ 25 ἐγεννήθη ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ᾿Ιούδας ὁ παραδιδοὺς » \ 53 5 , 2 ε / f > n \ 5 αὐτὸν εἶπεν, Μήτι ἐγὼ εἰμι, ῥαββί; λέγει αὐτῷ, [Σὺ εἶπας]. 26 Ἑσθιόντων δὲ αὐτῶν λαβὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τὸν ἄρτον καὶ εὐλογήσας ἔκλασεν καὶ ἐδίδου τοῖς μαθηταῖς καὶ εἶπεν, Λάβετε φάγετε" τοῦτό 27 ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου. καὶ λαβὼν ποτήριον καὶ εὐχαριστήσας 28 ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, tere ἐξ αὐτοῦ πάντες" τοῦτο. γάρ ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης τὸ περὶ πολλῶν ἐκχυννόμενον εἰς ἄφεσιν μ ] 7) λοῦσα expressing too violent an action, and ἐπὶ with gen. where we should ex- pect acc. But βάλλεν 1 is constantly used in N.T. for ‘‘pono, impono;” ix. 38, xxv. 27, Mk. i. 43, vii. 80, J. x. 4, as in V.A. for DY, Gen. xxxi. 34) Deut. x. 2, Gen. xliv. 1, ἐμβάλετε τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τοῦ στόματος τοῦ μαρσίππου (marsu- pium), a similar construction to our pas- sage. 18. πρὸς σὲ] xiii. 56. ποιῶ] ‘‘let me offer;” in sacrificial sense, as Heb. xi. 28. Compare Ex. xii. 45, MDD wy, V.A. ποιήσει τὸ πάσχα. Xie δα; ᾿θύειν τὸ πάσχα. Also xxix. 36, 38, 39, nyy, meaning θύειν, is rendered tal 4 fA A 5 4 by ποιεῖν. τὸ μοσχάριον...τὸν ἀμνὸν... ποιήσεις. 25 and 64. σὺ εἶπας] Not found in V.A. Possibly later Greek. It seems akin to done’ ἐγὼ and aio, of classical authors. In xxvil. 11, Mk. xv. 2, L. xxiii. 3, J. xviii. 37, we have σὺ λέγεις. Lightfoot is cited by Schl. as showing a similar form of affirmation to be found in the Talmud. Hierosol. 26. Ἐὐλογεῖν includes the idea of giving thanks. L. ii. 28. In the other accounts of the institution of the Holy Eucharist, we find, Mk. xiv. 22, εὐλογή- σας, L. xxii. 19, εὐχαριστήσας : τ Cor. x. 16, εὐλογίας. In 1 Cor. xiv. 16 the two seem interchanged; as indeed here, verses 26 and 27. MATTHEW, XXVI. 29—48. 57 c A , \ σ nr [7 ν \ / .. ,’ vv ,’ / a ἁμαρτιῶν. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ὅτε οὐ μὴ πίω ἀπ᾽ ἀρτι ἐκ τούτου TOY 29 γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ὅταν αὐτὸ πίνω μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν καινὸν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ πατρός μου. \ ς ’ eR > \ ” an Αἱ Ὁ , , 30 Kai ὑμνήσαντες ἐξῆλθον εἰς TO ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν. τότε λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ἸΙάντες ὑμεῖς σκανδαλισθήσεσθε * ἐν ἐμοὶ > a \ ah , \ ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ταύτῃ γέγραπται yap, Ἰ]ατάξω τὸν ποιμένα, καὶ διασκορπισθήσονται τὰ πρόβατα τῆς ποίμνης. μετὰ δὲ τὸ 32 a / a ἐγερθῆναί με προάξω ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Τ᾽αλιλαίων. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ 33 ς ,ὔ "- “ “ > / ' > ~ \ > \ ὁ Ilétpos εἶπεν αὐτῷ, Ei πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται ἐν σοὶ, ἐγὼ οὐδέποτε σκανδαλισθήσομαι. ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ᾿Αμὴν λέγω 34 σοι ὅτι ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι τρὶς ἀπαρνήσῃ με. λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ Ilétpos, Kav δέῃ με σὺν σοὶ ἀποθανεῖν [οὐ μή 35 σε ἀπαρνήσομαι͵. ὁμοίως καὶ πάντες οἱ μαθηταὶ εἶπον. Τότε ἔρχεται pet αὐτῶν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς χωρίον λεγόμενον 30 Γεθσημανεῖ, καὶ λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς, Καθίσατε αὐτοῦ [ἕως ἂν ἀπελθὼν ἐκεῖ προσεύξωμαι]. καὶ παραλαβὰν τὸν ἹΠ]έτρον καὶ τοὺς 37 δύο υἱοὺς Ζεβεδαίου ἤρξατο λυπεῖσθαι καὶ ἀδημονεῖν. τότε λέγει 38 > a Λ t 2 ς if Ig , F / κα αὐτοῖς, ἹΠερίλυπός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου ἕως θανάτου" μείνατε ὧδε καὶ γρηγορεῖτε pet ἐμοῦ. καὶ προελθὼν μικρὸν ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ 39 πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ προσευχόμενος καὶ λέγων, Ἰ]άτερ, εἰ δυνατόν n fal \ ἐστιν, παρελθάτω an’ ἐμοῦ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο᾽ πλὴν οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ " “. » c / \ 57 ἊΝ \ A \ ¢ / é) θέλω ἀλλ᾿ ὡς σύ. καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς καὶ εὑρίσκει 4 » \ , Ν ͵7ὔ ΄-“΄»ὦ , dA οὶ , 7 αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, καὶ λέγει τῷ Πέτρῳ, Οὕτως οὐκ ἰσχύσατε μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ; γρηγορεῖτε καὶ προσεύχεσθε ἵνα 41 a Ni μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν" TO μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής. πάλιν ἐκ δευτέρου ἀπελθὼν προσηύξατο λέγων, ἸΤάτερ 43 μου, εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸ πίω, γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου. καὶ ἐλθὼν πάλιν εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας" ἦσαν 43 γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ βεβαρημένοι. καὶ ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς πάλιν 44 " \ , \ “ιν , ᾽ ͵ ͵ ” \ ἀπελθὼν προσηύξατο τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών. τότε ἔρχεται. πρὸς 45 A \ \ 4 , nr / Ἁ A , / A τοὺς μαθητὰς Kat λέγει αὐτοῖς, Καθεύδετε λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε ἰδοὺ ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα καὶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ς a > 7 wv i ἰὃ \ov ἰς ὃ ὃ Uy 6 ἁμαρτωλῶν. ἐγείρεσθε [aywperv| ἰδοὺ ἤγγικεν ὁ παραδιδούς με. 4 Καὶ ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, ἰδοὺ ᾿Ιούδας εἷς τῶν δώδεκα ἦλθεν, 47 \ » , na ow ‘ ‘ a \ , Pe \ a Kal μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὄχλος πολὺς [μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων] ἀπὸ τῶν Ξ ᾿ , = A ε Bs διὸ \ oa 8 ἀρχιερέων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τοῦ λαοῦ. ὁ δὲ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν 4 29. γέννημα V.A. very frequently 23; indeed the latter use, for ‘foetus, for any fruit or produce of field or tree, progenies,” is rare: Josh. xv. 14, Apo- as well as the young of animals, e.g. "1B, ΟΥΡ Ια, Sir. x. 18, γενν, γυναικῶν. Deut. xxvi. 10, and AIAN, Gen. xlvii. 58 MATTHEW, XXVI. 49—68. A a ε 9 , Ἄ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς σημεῖον λέγων, Ὃν ἐὰν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν᾽ κρατή- 40 cate αὐτόν. καὶ εὐθέως προσελθὼν τῷ ᾿Ἰησοῦ εἶπεν, Χαῖρε, ῥαββί Ν I. > ld ‘4 ἈΠ 39 fal 3 ᾽ nA «ς na 977 ἘΔ so kal κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν. ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, “Eraipe, [ἐφ᾽ ὃ , 4 > / \ lal > \ \ 3 la) \ πάρει; τότε προσελθόντες ἐπέβαλον Tas χεῖρας ἐπὶ τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν Kat 51 ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδοὺ εἷς τῶν μετὰ Ἰησοῦ ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα ἀπέσπασεν τὴν μάχαιραν αὐτοῦ, καὶ πατάξας τὸν δοῦλον τοῦ 52 ἀρχιερέως ἀφεῖλεν αὐτοῦ τὸ ὠτίον. τότε λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς, ᾿Απόστρεψον τὴν μάχαιραν σου εἰς τὸν τόπον αὐτῆς" πάντες γὰρ οἱ id - ἃ 7 ΕἼ > a x a a τ. 53 λαβόντες μάχαιραν * ἐν μαχαίρῃ ἢ ἀπολοῦνται. ἢ δοκεῖς ὅτι οὐ ’ J δύναμαι ἄρτι παρακωλέσαι τὸν πατέρα mov, Kal παραστήσει μοι -“ Ὁ e 54 πλείω δώδεκα Neyeavas ἀγγέλων ; πῶς οὖν πληρωθῶσιν ai γραφαὶ v4 vs a 4 > 5 “ a ¢ 3 e ? n a 55 ὅτε οὕτως δεῖ γενέσθαι; "Ev ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ εἶπεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοῖς ὄχλοις, ‘Os ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε [μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων] συλλα- an = θ᾽ ¢ , εἶ a) e n » θ ζό ὃ ὃ \ > Bev pe καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἐκαθεζόμην διδάσκων, καὶ οὐκ ΕῚ U / ἴω \ ef / [4 lal La A 56 ἐκρατήσατέ με. τοῦτο δὲ [ὅλον] γέγονεν ἵνα πληρωθῶσιν ai γραφαὶ τῶν προφητῶν. τότε οἱ μαθηταὶ πάντες [ἀφέντες] αὐτὸν ἔφυγον. Οἱ δὲ ᾿ \ 37 ἢ >? / Ν᾽ K oJ x 57 ι ὃὲ κρατήσαντες τὸν ἰησοῦυν ἀπήγαγον προς αἴάφαν τὸν ἀρχιερέα, ὅπου οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι συνήχθησαν. 58 ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἕως τῆς αὐλῆς τοῦ ἀρχιερέως, καὶ εἰσελθὼν ἔσω ἐκάθητο μετὰ τῶν ὑπηρετῶν ἰδεῖν τὸ a ld 59 τέλος. οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ TO συνέδριον ὅλον ἐζήτουν ψευδομαρτυ- 60 ρίαν κατὰ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ὅπως αὐτὸν θανατώσουσιν, καὶ οὐχ εὗρον πολλῶν προσελθόντων ψευδομαρτύρων. ὕστερον δὲ προσελθόντες 61 δύο εἶπον, Οὗτος ἔφη, Δύναμαι καταλῦσαι τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ διὰ lal lal 3 Ἂ fal 62 τριῶν ἡμερῶν οἰκοδομῆσαι. Kal ἀναστὰς ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, / fe a a 63 Οὐδὲν ἀποκρίνῃ τί οὗτοί cov καταμαρτυροῦσιν ; ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐσιώπα. \ , Ν ς > AN 9 2 lal 3 , \ καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ, ᾿Εξορκίζω σε κατὰ Ὁ lal A lal “ [2 a ΕΣ » \ HP ¢ \ id e\ Qn τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος, iva ἡμῖν εἴπης εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς, ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ an A > lol a 64 Θεοῦ. λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, [Σὺ εἶπας] πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπ᾽ wv ” θ X e\ A > 0 , / 9 ὃ Lal * lal ἄρτι ὄψεσθε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου καθήμενον ἐκ δεξιῶν * τῆς ὃ / * \ > / SLT eN a a a > a / ¢ 65 δυνάμεως * καὶ ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. τότε ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς διέῤῥηξεν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ λέγων, ᾿Εβλασφήμησεν" τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων; ἴδε νῦν ἠκούσατε τὴν βλασφημίαν. 66 τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; οἱ δὲ ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον, “ENoyoc θἀνάτογΥ ἐστίν. 67 Τότε ἐνέπτυσαν εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐκολάφισαν αὐτὸν, οἱ δὲ f an 68 ἐράπισαν, λέγοντες, Τροφήτευσον ἡμῖν, Χριστὲ, τίς ἐστιν ὁ παίσαςσε; ξο. ἐφ᾽ δ] for ἐπὶ τίνι, -- ΠΟ, led?” Numb. xxii. 32 and Jer. ix. 11. 64. τῆς Suvduews] ‘‘ Buxtorf shows 52. ἐν μαχαίρῃ] See iil. 11. (Lex. Talni. p. 385) that the Jews applied 54. ‘‘How are the Scr. to be fulfil- the term MAF to God.” Schl. MATTHEW, XXVI. 69—XXVII. 59 ‘O δὲ Πέτρος ἐκάθητο ἔξω ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ καὶ προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ 69 [μία] παιδίσκη λέγουσα, Kal σὺ ἦσθα μετὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Ταλιλαίου. ὁ δὲ ἠρνήσατο ἔμπροοθεν πάντων λέγων, Οὐκ οἶδα [τί] λέγεις. 70 ἐξελθόντα δὲ αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν πυλῶνα, εἶδεν αὐτὸν ἄλλη καὶ γι ᾿Ιησοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου. \ , ᾽ ἢ Nee KO Ἢ 5) re \ M7 θ καὶ παλιν HPVNTATO META ορκου OTL OVK OLO@ TOV AVUPWTrOV. 72 a A \ Φ 3 \ λέγει αὐτοῖς ἐκεῖ, Kati οὗτος ἣν peta μετὰ μικρὸν δὲ προσελθόντες οἱ ἑστῶτες εἶπον τῷ ἸΠέτρῳ, ᾿Αληθῶς 73 καὶ σὺ ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ" καὶ γὰρ [ἡ λαλιά] σου δῆλόν σε ποιεῖ. τότε 74 ” / ἈΝ , Ke * ’ io \ 7 Η͂ ἤρξατο καταθεματίζειν καὶ ὀμνύειν * ὅτι Ἐ οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον \ , , % / > , N.S: fi ¢ , Aa 27 καὶ εὐθέως ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν. καὶ ἐμνήσθη ὁ Πέτρος τοῦ ῥήματος 75 Ὁ *) ἫΝ fal » a Ἰησοῦ εἰρηκότος ἔτι " πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι τρὶς ἀπαρνήσῃ é ΔΩ Ss \ ες 3 Lal pe’ καὶ ἐξελθὼν ἔξω ἔκλαυσεν πικρῶς. eae Πρωίας δὲ γενομένης [συμβούλιον ἔλαβον] πάντες οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 27 “ a rn -“ 7 a Kal οἱ πρεσβύτεροι τοῦ λαοῦ κατὰ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ὥστε θανατῶσαι αὐτόν. ἡγεμόνι. Τότε ἰδὼν ᾿Ιούδας ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν ὅτε κατεκρίθη, μετα- 5 ͵ a καὶ δήσαντες αὐτὸν ἀπήγαγον καὶ παρέδωκαν ἸΠλάτῳ τῷ 2 \ ” \ / > , lal ’ nr Ἂς μεληθεὶς [ἔστρεψεν] τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ 12 / ¢ ὃ \ - 10 Ὁ c ὃ aS 5 πρεσβυτέροις λέγων, “Huaptov παραδοὺς αἷμα ἀθῷον. οἱ δὲ εἴπον, 4 an ’ / 3. a Τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς: *od ὄψῃ. καὶ ῥίψας τὰ ἀργύρια ἐν TO ναῷ 5 ἀνεχώρησεν, καὶ ἀπελθὼν ἀπήγξατο. > / 5 ’ Μ a 3 \ > \ ἀργύρια εἶπαν, Οὐκ ἔξεστιν βαλεῖν αὐτὰ εἰς τὸν ᾽ A τιμὴ αἵματός ἐστιν. συμβούλιον δὲ λαβόντες ἠἡγόρασαν [ἐξ αὐτῶν] 7 τὸν ἀγρὸν τοῦ κεραμέως εἰς ταφὴν τοῖς ξένοις. - lal \ ἐκεῖνος ἀγρὸς αἵματος ἕως τῆς σήμερον. τότε ἐπληρώθη TO ῥηθὲν ο διὰ τοῦ προφήτου “Ἱερεμίου λέγοντος, Kal ἔλαβον τὰ τριάκοντα οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς λαβόντες τὰ 6 * xopBavay,* ἐπεὶ διὸ ἐκλήθη ὁ ἀγρὸς 8 ἀργύρια, τὴν τιμὴν τοῦ τετιμημένου ὃν ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ υἱῶν ᾽1σ- pair, καὶ ἔδωκαν AYTA εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν τοῦ κεραμέως, καθὰ μοι Κύριος. / / συνέταξέν 10 ¢ δ ν 3 a ’ , ” a ¢ / Ξ Vo» / Ο δὲ ᾿Τησοῦς ἐστάθη ἔμπροσθεν Tod ἡγεμόνος" Kal ἐπηρώτησεν II αὐτὸν ὁ ἡγεμὼν λέγων, Σὺ εἶ ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ; ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς n re a ᾽ Ἁ ε \ na ἔφη αὐτῷ, [Σὺ λέγεις]. καὶ ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τών 12 72, 74, 75. ὅτι] asseverandi Ξε 3 or 7. ἐξ] in this sense ‘ quite unknown to JON, supra vii. 23, and xxviie 43, 47. class. Yash κ Schl.: Acts i. 18. be Cap. XXVII. 4. MN] has force of 9 Zech. xi 13, MA INN WU ‘*look out for,” ‘“‘take care of,” in 1 ἽΣΡΠ “ON “TM, VA. καὶ a αὐτοὺς Kings xii. 16, ἘΠ qa AS, and Ps, XXXVil. 37, ws AN, ie aire, V.A. σὺ ὄψῃ] Future for imp., infra 24, and see v. 48, vi. 33. 6. jay, Lev. vii. 38, xiii. 15, and elsewhere, =“‘oblatio.” Mark vii. 11, κορ- Bay. ence 23, “locus oblationum,” els Tov Pee eis τὸ χωνευτήριον (foun- dry). oN =‘‘apud,” which seems to be the explanation of els-rdv-d-ypov-rod in text. Our English Version of Zech. is accurate, ‘‘I cast them to the potter.” Gesenius suggests SIN = “ zerarium.” 1 Kings vil. 51, xiv. 26. 60 MATTHEW, XXVIT. 1: 57: cd , \ lal / 2 \ , Ψ , / 13 ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίνατο. τότε λέγει lal lel lal \ 14 αὐτῷ ὁ Πιλᾶτος, Οὐκ ἀκούεις πόσα σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν ; Kal οὐκ 3, 6 ᾽ A Ἁ Ἰδὲ ἃ en ᾿Ξ “ θ / \ ¢ , ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ “πρὸς οὐδὲ ἕν ῥῆμα," ὥστε θαυμάζειν τὸν ἡγεμόνα 15 λίαν. Κατὰ δὲ ἑορτὴν εἰώθει ὁ ἡγεμὼν ἀπολύειν ἕνα τῷ ὄχλῳ δέσ- «ὃ 5) by Ά / b] 7 , 2 nr 16 μιον ὃν ἤθελον. εἶχον δὲ τότε δέσμιον ἐπίσημον, λεγόμενον ᾿Ιησοῦν 17 Βαραββᾶν. συνηγμένων οὖν αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Πιλᾶτος, Τίνα > lal a na 5) lal θέλετε ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν, ᾿Ιησοῦν Βαραββᾶν ἢ ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν λεγόμενον a , v \ {4 \ / / b] / Lh Χριστόν; ἤδει yap ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παρέδωκαν αὐτόν. καθημένου I lal Ὁ" , 5» A 2 δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὐτὸν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ λέγουσα, ὃ Μηδὲν σοὶ καὶ τῷ δικαίω ἐκείνῳ" ὃ πολλὰ γὰρ ἔπαθον > tal 20 σήμερον κατ᾽ ὄναρ Ov αὐτόν. οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ἔπεισαν τοὺς ὄχλους ἵνα αἰτήσωνται τὸν Βαραββᾶν, τὸν δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦν ΕΣ 7, 2) \ \ ‘s ¢ \ os ς᾽ - ,ὔ , 21 ἀπολέσωσιν. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὃ ἡγεμὼν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, Τίνα θέλετε - - Ε τιν 53 a 22 *dmo τῶν δυο" ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν; οἱ δὲ εἶπον, Βαραββᾶν. λέγει ᾽ an ς a / = / ? rn \ , τῷ , αὐτοῖς 6 Lindros, Τί οὖν ποιήσω ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν λεγόμενον Χριστόν; , , id 23 λέγουσιν πάντες, Σταυρωθήτω. ὁ δὲ ἔφη, Τί yap κακὸν ἐποίησεν ; an / lal 24 of δὲ περισσῶς ἔκραζον λέγοντες, Σταυρωθήτω. ἰδὼν δὲ ὁ Πιλᾶτος ὅτι οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον θόρυβος γίνεται, λαβὼν ὕδωρ ὠπενί- Ν “ 5 ΝΣ a» / * θ Afr >, 3 \ ae a ψατο τὰς χεῖρας ἀπέναντι τοῦ ὄχλου λέγων, * Αθφός εἰμι ἀπὸ ἢ TOD id lal la) 25 αἵματος τούτον *vpels ὄψεσθε." καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς πᾶς ὁ λαὸς εἶπεν, “6 Τὸ - > A S48) MER ὧδ ROA \ , « an , » Ὧν 26 Τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ἡμῶν. τότε ἀπέλυσεν .“ n SN 2 a αὐτοῖς τὸν Βαραββᾶν, τὸν δὲ ᾿Τησοῦν φρωγελλώσας παρέδωκεν ἵνα σταυρωθῇ. rd 4 lol i τ / , \ ’ le] > 27 Τότε οἱ στρατιῶται τοῦ ἡγεμόνος παραλαβόντες τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν εἰς / ? Jie AN 14 a 28 τὸ πραιτώριον συνήγαγον ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ὅλην THY σπεῖραν. " / - 20 σαντες αὐτὸν χλαμύδα κοκκίνην περιέθηκαν αὐτῷ, καὶ πλέξαντες , > > a Seay, Sah a rn > an \ , στέφανον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν ἐπέθηκαν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ κάλαμον a lal ? “Ὁ \ / an ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γονυπετήσαντες ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ ἐνέπαιζον nr να nr ec ἐν 2 an 30 αὐτῷ λέγοντες, Χαῖρε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἢ τών Ιουδαίων, καὶ ἐμπτύσαντες \ / \ eis αὐτὸν ἔλαβον τὸν κάλαμον Kat ἔτυπτον [εἰς τὴν κεφαλὴν] ? an No eh: Δ. ΟΣ 3 a doer σὺ YN \ , αὐτοῦ. καὶ ὅτε ἐνέπαιξαν αὐτῷ, ἐξέδυσαν αὐτὸν τὴν χλαμύδα καὶ ἐκδύ- 31 14. πρὸς] seems here = 9 in Deut. xxiv. 5, ἽΔΤΟΣ Ἷ “YY NY, “ne minima quidem res, non adeo ulla.” Eccl. AX. 45 0 232 ‘D, ‘‘even a living dog,” “down to a dog,” ὁ κύων 6 fav αὐτὸς, V.A., where avros=‘‘ even.” Or perhaps mpds=Y, rendered by ἕως in Judg. iv. 16, ov κατελείφθη ἕως ἑνὸς, V.A, & IHN TY πο, 2 Sam. xvii. 22. 19. Same sort of expression as τί σοὶ κἄμοι; L. viii. 28, J. ik 4, Je oN, Judg. xi. 12. 21. Tive ἀπὸ τ. δ᾽]. Jobv. 1, Dap. 24. "AO. ἀπὸ] Gen. xxiv. 41, HT) MONI) 2, V. A. ἀθῶος ἔσῃ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρᾶς μου. ies : ; 25. Josh. ii, 19, WNID WA, 1. 6. ‘the guilt is his.” ὃ 20. ὁ βασιλεὺ] See i. 20, xi. 26. MATTHEW, XXVIT. 22---54. 61 \ Bf ψ ἈΝ hy / , n \ ’ / , \ > QA Kal ἐνέδυσαν αὐτὸν τὼ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ, Kal ἀπήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς TO σταυρῶσαι. > / e , a ᾽ Ἐξερχόμενοι δὲ εὗρον ἄνθρωπον Kupnvaiov, ὀνόματι Σίμωνα" 32 ca) ’ Yi \ na τοῦτον * ἡγγάρευσαν * ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἐλθόντες 33 2 , / ~ id > / / / εἰς τόπον λεγόμενον ToryoOa, [Ὁ ἐστιν κρανίου τόπος λεγόμενος, | »᾿, a -“ Ni lal ἔδωκαν αὐτῷ πιεῖν οἶνον μετὰ χολῆς μεμιγμένον" καὶ γευσάμενος 34 ’ ἣν ἃ a / δὲ ae, / XN οὐκ ἠθέλησεν πιεῖν. σταυρώσαντες δὲ αὐτὸν διεμερίσαντο τὰ 35 e U a a a ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ βαλόντες κλῆρον, καὶ καθήμενοι ἐτήρουν αὐτὸν ἐκεῖ. 36 \ > Ὁ Ὁ 2 “Ὁ καὶ ἐπέθηκαν ἐπάνω τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ τὴν αἰτίαν αὐτοῦ γεγραμ- 37 4 rn a μένην, Οὗτός ἐστιν ᾿Ιησοῦς ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων. Tote σταυ- 38 fol δ an a n @ ροῦνται σὺν αὐτῷ δύο λῃσταὶ, cis ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύμων. © δὲ ῇ > / Leta | a \ \ οἱ δὲ παραπορευόμενοι ἐβλασφήμουν αὐτὸν, κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς 39 ᾽ a \ / KS / * \ \ Ae! \ ς f αὐτῶν Kal λέγοντες, Ο καταλύων ἢ τὸν ναὸν καὶ ἐν τρίσιν ἡμέεραῖς 40 > fal an Ὁ 5 n a an οἰκοδομῶν, σῶσον σεαυτόν" εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, κατάβηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ lal a / Ὁ σταυροῦ. ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς ἐμπαίζοντες μετὰ τῶν γραμ- 41 LA \ fe Μ ” 4 ς \ Ε UY ματέων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων Edeyov,” AdouS ἔσωσεν, ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύνα- 42 Tat σῶσαι βασιλεὺς Ἰσραήλ ἐστιν, καταβάτω νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυ- a Ν / 5 > » Lee * / » \ \ a “wm ε / pov καὶ πιστεύσομεν ἐπ᾽ avTov’ “πέποιθεν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεὸν," ῥυσάσθω 43 τὸ δ᾽ 44 ΜΕ" \ ς \ ε / \ We ne 5 7, ΠΡΟ αὐτὸ καὶ οἱ λῃσταὶ οἱ συνσταυρωθέντες σὺν αὐτῷ ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν. a Ls A νῦν αὐτὸν εἰ θέλει αὐτόν᾽ εἶπεν γὰρ * ὅτι ὃ Θεοῦ εἰμὶ vids. τ Ν ὧν ὦ 4 r 5 aRW ce . \ a Ψ WA Απὸ δὲ ἕκτης ὥρας σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν ἕως ὥρας 45 ΜΕΥ \ \ \ δ... Ὁ 4 > f - ἘΠ a a ἐνάτης. περὶ δὲ τὴν ἐνάτην ὥραν ἀνεβόησεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς φωνῇ με- 46 yarn λέγων, ‘HAL nrAL λεμὰ σαβαχθανί; τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Θεέ μου Θεέ μου, ἵνα τί με ἐγκατέλιπες ; τινὲς δὲ τῶν ἐκεῖ ἑστηκότων ἀκούσαν- 47 ef " - \ ,’ - τες ἔλεγον * ὅτι Ἐ᾿Ηλίαν [φωνεῖ] οὗτος. καὶ εὐθέως δραμὼν εἷς ἐξ 48 > led ἈΝ \ / / wv \ a , αὐτῶν καὶ λαβὼν σπόγγον πλήσας τε ὄξους καὶ περιθεὶς καλάμῳ 7 / » 6 \ γῇ. / 7 > lj ἐπότιζεν αὐτόν. of δὲ λοιποὶ ἔλεγον, “Ades ἴδωμεν εἰ ἔρχεται 49 “ / an ‘“Hrlas σώσων αὐτόν. ‘O δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς πάλιν κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 50 ἀφῆκεν τὸ πνεῦμα. καὶ ἰδοὺ τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη τι 6 a ἀπὸ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω εἰς δύο, Kal ἡ γῆ ἐσείσθη, καὶ ai πέτραι na Ul \ / lal ἐσχίσθησαν, καὶ τὰ μνημεῖα ἀνεώχθησαν καὶ πολλὰ σώματα τῶν 52 ‘ 3 ld nr κεκοιμημένων ἁγίων ἠγέρθησαν Kat ἐξελθόντες ἐκ τῶν μνημείων 53 μετὰ τὴν ἔγερσιν αὐτοῦ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν πόλιν καὶ ἐνεφα- a \ e ΕΣ ᾽ fel νίσθησαν πολλοῖς. ὁ δὲ ἑκατόνταρχος καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ τηροῦντες 54 43. ?Y ΠΏΞ, In 2 Kings xviii. 20, 21, we have in succession, τίνι πεποιθὼς, πέποιθας σαυτῷ ἐπὶ τὴν ῥάβδον; “3 32. See Gesenius and Grimm sub voce: ayyapetdw= ““ἴο press into the king’s ser- vice ;” primarily as a “cursor” or “ta- bellarius,” secondarily for any public use, and so generally to “‘ compel,” a word of Persian origin. 2 Chr, xxx. 1, Neh. ii. 7, TVS = ἐπιστολαί, by J?, and πεποιθόσιν ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, 46. Ps. xxii. 2, V.A. *'O Θεός jou,” as Mk. xv. 34, L. xviii. rr, Océ, ὑπ» usual, 62 MATTHEW, XXVII. 55—XXVIII. 9. \ Ἢ} aA ἰὃ , Ν \ \ \ is ’ 2 10 , τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἰδόντες τὸν σεισμὸν Kal τὰ γινόμενα ἐφοβήθησαν σφό- Ὁ a e 3 a lal 55 Spa, λέγοντες, ᾿Αληθῶς Θεοῦ vids Hv οὗτος. Ἦσαν δὲ ἐκεῖ γυναῖκες \ ’ Ἁ / fe] “ ? / Coe a πολλαὶ ἀπὸ μακρόθεν θεωροῦσαι, αἵτινες ἠκολούθησαν τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ 56 ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας διακονοῦσαι αὐτῷ ἐν αἷς ἦν Μαρία ἡ Μαγδα- ληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβου καὶ ᾿Ιωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ ἡ μήτηρ τῶν υἱῶν Ζεβεδαίου. 57 ’Owbias δὲ γενομένης ἦλθεν ἄνθρωπος πλούσιος ἀπὸ Ἀριμαθαίας, 8 By > \ “Δδ \ 5. Ἀν > , a? a, & 58 τοὔνομα Ἰωσὴφ, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς [ἐμαθήτευσεν]) τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ" οὗτος προσ- ελθὼν τῷ Πιλάτῳ ἠτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ. τότε ὁ ἸΤιλᾶτος 50 ἐκέλευσεν ὠποδοθῆναι. καὶ λαβὼν τὸ σῶμα ὁ ᾿Ιωσὴφ ἐνετύλιξεν ΩΣ lal nr n A 60 αὐτὸ ἐν σινδόνι καθαρᾷ, καὶ ἔθηκεν αὐτὸ ἐν τῷ καινῷ αὐτοῦ μνημείῳ a Ld 3 a 7 n ὃ ἐλατόμησεν ἐν τῇ πέτρᾳ, Kal προσκυλίσας λίθον μέγαν TH θύρᾳ a > lol n 61 τοῦ μνημείου ἀπῆλθεν. ἦν δὲ ἐκεῖ Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ ἡ ἄλλη Μαρία, καθήμεναι ἀπέναντι τοῦ τάφου. A / 62 Τῇ δὲ ἐπαύριον, ἥτις ἐστὶν μετὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν, συνήχθησαν 63 οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι πρὸς ἸΠλᾶτον λέγοντες, Κύριε, ἐμ- νήσθημεν Ὅτι ἐκεῖνος ὃ πλάνος εἶπεν ἔτι ζῶν, Μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας 53 n π 64 ἐγείρομαι. κέλευσον οὖν ἀσφαλισθῆναι τὸν τάφον ἕως τῆς τρίτης c / , 9. la e A » a , Ψ xi ἣν ἡμέρας, μή ποτε ἐλθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ κλέψωσιν αὐτὸν καὶ εἴπωσιν τῷ λαῷ, ᾿Ηγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη 6 ’ , a / x” b] Pease a ” 5 πλάνη χείρων τῆς πρώτης. ἔφη αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰ]Πιλᾶτος, “Eyete κουστω- 66 δίαν: ὑπάγετε ἀσφαλίσασθε ὡς οἴδατε. οἱ δὲ πορευθέντες ἡσφα- q] cap, λίσαντο τὸν τάφον σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίθον μετὰ THs κουστωδίας. τὶ 7 A 28 Owe δὲ σαββάτων, [τῇ ἐπιφωσκούσῃ εἰς μίαν σαββάτων,] ἦλθεν 2 Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ ἡ ἄλλη Μαρία θεωρῆσαι τὸν τάφον. καὶ ᾿ η Map ἢ 50.- ἃ qn) ay L ae ΟΝ \ / \ > ᾽ ἰδοὺ σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας" ἄγγελος γὰρ Κυρίου καταβὰς ἐξ οὐ- Ὁ Ν 3 Ud \ If \ » / > / » a pavod προσελθὼν ἀπεκύλισεν τὸν λίθον Kat ἐκάθητο ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ. Φ \ ς » / b] lal «ς 9 \ \ \ » » A Ν id 3 ἦν δὲ ἡ εἰδέα αὐτοῦ ὡς ἀστραπὴ Kal TO ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ λευκὸν ὡς , * ’ ΝΥ δὲ r , * 5 fal > ‘9 e Ἅ Ν 4 χιών. ἕῬὰἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ φόβου αὐτοῦ ἐσείσθησαν οἱ τηροῦντες καὶ Ἵ / ἐφ tg 3 θ Ν δὲ ce, > a \ 5 ἐγενήθησαν ὡς νεκροί. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπεν ταῖς γυναιξὶν, a a a / fal Μὴ φοβεῖσθε ὑμεῖς" οἶδα yap ὅτι Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἐσταυρωμένον ζητεῖτε. 6 οὐκ ἔστιν ὧδε" ἠγέρθη γὰρ καθὼς εἶπεν" δεῦτε ἴδετε τὸν τύπον ὅπου a Ὁ a 3 «ἢ 7 ἔκειτο. καὶ ταχὺ πορευθεῖσαι εἴπατε τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ ὅτι 5 / ’ \ Aa a \ id \ Ι id n > \ iB / ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ ἰδοὺ προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν 1 αλιλαίαν, 8 ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε. ἰδοὺ εἶπον ὑμῖν. καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ταχὺ ἀπὸ n f \ , \ A r ” , a τοῦ μνημείου μετὰ φόβου καὶ χαρᾶς μεγάλης [ἔδραμον ἀπαγγεῖλαι] ο τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἰδοὺ ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς ὑπήντησεν αὐταῖς λέγων, Cap. XXVIII. 1. In Lev. xxiii. 1s, it is apparently not used again in this naw, ἑβδομὰς V.A., corresponds to sense: nor σάββατα in V.A. yaw in parallel passage Deut. xvi. 9: MATTHEW, ΧΟ ΟΥΤΤΠΙ τὸς 56. 65 a ld = e \ lal 5» Ἢ ’ nA \ / \ Xaipete’ ai δὲ προσελθοῦσα. ἐκράτησαν αὐτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ > al , ΄ ᾽ lal ¢ fal \ a ᾿ προσεκύνησαν αὐτῷ. τότε λέγει αὐταῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, Μὴ φοβεῖσθε" 10 ε , > ͵ .“ ᾽ a “ teh: > \ ὑπάγετε ἀπαγγείλατε τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου iva ἀπέλθωσιν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, κἀκεῖ με ὄψονται. ΠΟορευομένων δὲ αὐτῶν, ἰδού τινες τῆς κουστωδίας ἐλθόντες εἰς II τὴν πόλιν ἀπήγγειλαν τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν ἅπαντα τὰ γενόμενα. καὶ 12 , ἣν a / / ll ll συναχθέντες μετὰ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων [συμβούλιόν τε λαβόντες] ἀργύρια ἱκανὰ ἔδωκαν τοῖς στρατιώταις, λέγοντες, Εἰὔπατε ὅτι οἱ 13 \ ? n A! > , » b Ys | ¢ “Ὁ / μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ νυκτὸς ἐλθόντες ἔκλεψαν αὐτὸν ἡμῶν κοιμωμένων. a a a a ? καὶ ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ᾿ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος," ἡμεῖς πείσομεν αὐτὸν 14, ue lal > | Ἃ / e \ la \ 2 , > i καὶ ὑμᾶς ἀμερίμνους ποιήσομεν. οἱ δὲ λαβόντες τὰ ἀργύρια ἐποίη- 15 , e 3 / σαν ὡς ἐδιδάχθησαν" καὶ διεφημίσθη ὁ λόγος οὗτος παρὰ ᾿Ιουδαίοις , lal , ς / μέχρι τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας. Οἱ δὲ ἕνδεκα μαθηταὶ ἐπορεύθησαν εἰς τὴν Τ᾿αλιλαίαν εἰς τὸ τό ὄρος οὗ ἐτάξατο αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν προσεκύνησαν, 17 οἱ δὲ ἐδίστασαν. καὶ προσελθὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, 18 δ 40 a δ / ᾿ | A \ > \ -“ -“ θέ όθη μοι πᾶσα ἐξουσία ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. πορευθέντες 19 / lal μαθητεύσατε πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, βαπτίσαντες αὐτοὺς εἰς TO ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου ἹΠ]νεύματος, διδάσκοντες αὐτοὺς 20 τηρεῖν πάντα ὅσα ἐνετειλάμην ὑμῖν. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν εἰμὶ / a re an πάσας Tas ἡμέρας ἕως τῆς συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος. τὴς émi=by, *juxta, apud.” Is. renderedin V.A. by εἰς generally: though xix. 7. Gen. xvi. 7, V.A. εὗρεν αὐτὴν occasionally by ἐν, e.g. Ex. iv. 21. ἐπὶ τῆς πηγῆς. 20. ἕως τῆς σ. τ. a] See xiii, 30, 19. Does εἰς here -- Ὁ ΟἿΣ ΠΟ ΣΙ 9: latter, in its frequent sense of “into,” is Ce τ μποῦν a iy : 2 Pag: F ae ; Σ Ae ‘casi a A Cyt ie Shieh aL Es: Genial a is ITO δ}, ἢ ae eet eens ie e+ , : ar. . 8 s ‘ = Na 2 as. tia ι ΤῊ 2 ὙΠΟ»: a» dist et εἰ ὦ γῆν, ἃ, « ἢ “ van UP oS " χε Υ ‘<7 | i a ri τ iy ν δγυς: Ὁ Σ ἷ᾿ « _< έ “ἁ, We ; Β | ERIS eS wiAder\ et be a any ἃ owe’ ¢ φυτῷ AN ve i ὌΥ fa" κ᾽ ὧν μ ᾿ ΨΥ 4 Ι ΡΨ ’ ᾽ = a Ὶ ~ “x ps te; co ᾿ . Ἐν ‘ 4 a ‘ > 4 ἢ Π ὶ Ν : 4 € δι ta : . Ὗ ri Ν Α ἡ in . i »“ - . ᾿ς ᾿ . © r 4 5 * να τ wre ;. - ’ ᾿ 5 Η * » ny , . Ἂς ? f ς ι “ - Ν » » ‘ τὰ & a Ν La y τ ᾿ , ; ¢ 5 : ῃ he Fu, ud a p * ry j Α ΣΤ . a ᾿ " a ρα ἃ a ae ϊ ‘ f “= ry A "- at. ¥ μι ᾿ oe a. ia? 's ᾿ ie mee . (= — nt be πε δὰ Ξ: ΤΩΣ δ, . ees a > * ae > 4 es ois ᾿ = a Ἀ Π ts oan 7 . = 'e . ͵ , v5 + a hf Y= Ὁ" ἣν : \ . ἐὰν 2h Sta? +! ἶ aol ε lies ‘ 4 ἊΝ FS hae ς ' Β ᾿ς; my ᾿ ἃ ᾿ »ἥ ' *. , ‘ Σ πριν - ῳ : - κδν νον ἐπ ἴα - a - ‘ 2 . ΕΝ ‘ Φ rs 4 Ἁ Et a . vet " a S. MARK. CHAPTER I. HEBRAISMS. 2. πρὸ 7. σ. 9. ἐν ἐκ. τ. ἡ. 11, ἐν ᾧ εὐδόκ. M. 3.17, note. 15. π. ἐν. 28. ἡ ἀκοὴ, M. 4. 24, note. 39. εἰς or. τ. 1. Also 8. 14. 15. 29. 24, 37. 40. Non-CuassicaL, 16. ἐν 7.0. 24, 7. ἀπ. and τίς ef. 25. hip. 35. ἔνν. dr. 38. dy. 43. ἐμβρ. 45. ἤρχ. SEPTUAGINT. 7. ἰσχυρ. M. 3.11, note. 18. ἀφέντες, M. 18. 12. 21. ta σάββατα for “the Sabbath,” M. 28.1. 34. ἐξέβαλε. 34. ἤ φιε, see L. 18. 16. Cuar. I. 3. πρὸ προσώπου] = 22? as Amos 9, 4, and V. A. passim: an Hebraic idiom unknown in pure Greek. 12, ἐκβάλλει] See M. 9. 38, note, and infra 43. 15. π. ἐν τῷ evayy.] 3 YON = “fidem habuit,” “trusted in,” “put confidence in.” V. A. render generally by πιστεύειν ἐν ; but ? “it = “cre- didit,” “believed,” by same verb with dative. But this distinction is sometimes neglected in V. A., e.g. Gen. 15. 6, Ps. 78. 36, 119. 66. In N. T. we have some few instances of πιστεύειν ἐν and πίστις ἐν: one here; and Rom. 3. 25, Eph. 1. 15, Col. 1. 4, Phil. 3. 3, 1 Tim. 3. 13, 2 Tim. 3. 15; which are probably due to the Hebrew use of 3, as the more frequent forms, with εἰς, ἐπὶ and πρὸς, to the Hebrew re The very rare occurrence of the verb with any such prepositions in Classical Authors, or in any Greek books except N. T., lends weight to this suggestion. 21. τοῖς σάββ.] V.A. generally Plural; Hebr. Singular. This is one of the rare instances of dative of point of time. M. 12, 1. Me 3.2, 45 Ὁ, 2. 23. ἐν mv. ἀκαθ.] a very startling instance of ἐν for 3, M. 3. 11, note: and also infra 2. 8. 24. τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοὶ] M. 27. 19, note. GU. 1 2 5, MARK. CHAPTER II. HEBR. 2. εἰς otk. and ἐλ, av. τ. χ. 10. vi. τ. ἀνθ. 14. ἐπὶ 7.7 15. wat ey....cal. 19. vi.t.y. 20. ἐλ, ὃ, np. 28. oor mm 26. τ. ἄρτ. τ. προθ. Νον-Ο, 1. δ mp. 2. χ. μ. τι πρ. 4. μὴ. 5. τ. abe UL coir. 18. ἦρχ. 14. παράγ. 17. ἦλθ. κα 25. τί ἐπ. 26. πώς. SEPT. 12. ἐναντίον. 22. βάλλ. οἷ. ν. Cuapter ITI. Hesr. 17. Βοαν. 18. Kavav. 22. ἐν τ. dpy. 28. ἐν παρ. 20. εἰς 7, αἱ. Also 11. 21,22, 39. «iso.7.T.] 6.3; 13.9, 16; M. 13. 56, note. 43. ἐξέβ. a.] dimisit eum. V.A. have ἐκβάλλω for nbwi Pihel, Exod, 12. 33, Ps. 43. 3, where the original means “ to cast out.” Hence the word being thus used as equivalent to nev in one mood and sense, seems to have come to be taken as equivalent to it in all its moods and senses ; and so to the general one of “dimitto.” And this has passed on to the N. T., M. 9. 38, J. 10. 4. Cuap. IT. 8. τῷ πν.] dat. of instrument, or manner; very rare; about twelve times in the whole Gospel. 1. 34, 5. 29, 6. 32, 7, 2, 6, 1372656. 412, 125703; 12. ἐναντίον] See M. 23. 14; and 15. 23, for dru 15, καὶ éy....xat] Common Hebrew form. 17. ἦλθον κι] See M. 2. 26. In V. A. we sometimes find τοῦ before infinitive, sometimes not, in similar phrases. Gen. 27, 5, 42%) sayd ἐπορεύθη θηρεῦσαι; and 28. 6, nn? inn mew ἀπέστειλε λαβεῖν. 2 Ch. 20. 36, nave ΤΥ κς nivvy> wan ἐκοινώνησε...τοῦ ποιῆσαι τὰ πλοῖα τοῦ πορευθῆναι. 2. Sam. 21, 16, miaiap ION) διενοεῖτο τοῦ πατάξαι. 28, ὁδὸν x] Judg. 17. 8, DTT MibY2 WD ΝᾺ) ἦλθεν ἕως ὄρους τοῦ ποιῆσαι ὁδὸν αὐτοῦ. Herod. 7. 42, ποιεῖσθαι ὁδόν. Schl. considers it a Latinism for “iter facere.” 26, ἄρτους προθ.] V. A. for NW) ON? (from TW instruxit) Ex, 40, 23; 1 Chr. 9. 32, 23. 29: and also for 0°38 *) Bx. 35, 13, 39. 36; rendered literally rod προσώπου 1 Kings 21. 2, Neh. 10. 33. (In Ex. 25. 30, ἄρτους ἐνωπίους ἐναντίον pov.) The two expressions spring alike from Ex, 40. 23, “"! spb pn? TW TW καὶ προέθηκεν ἄρτους τῆς mpo- θέσεως. This is a good instance of the Hebr. gen. of qualification equi- valent to an adjective: aptly rendered by the English idiomatic com- bination “shew-bread.” M. 1. 11. Cuap. III. 2, Syntax very irregular all through the Chapter. 3. eg. ἔχ. τὴν x.] “that had his hand withered.” S. MARK. 3 Non-C. 3. é@y. εἰς τ. μ. 5. μετ᾽ ὁ. 6. συμβ. ἐπ. 11. ὅτ. av. 20. 13. ἀπῆλ. 14. ἐπ. 5. 20. μήτε. 21. οἱ π. av. ἐξ. xp. 24. σταθ. 29. ἔν. ἐ. αἰ. xp. 81. φων. av. 34, ἴδε. : CHAPTER IV. Hepr. 1. πρ. τ. Oar. 9. ὃ ἔχ. ὦτα ἀκ. 24. “ἐν ὦ μι 80. ἐν π. π. π. 6. συμβ. ἐποίουν; See 15. 1 and compare M. 12, 14, for σ. Aap- βάνειν, of which there are five instances in M. 17. Boavepyts] supposed =) 23. Ps, 2.1, WI, V. A. ἐφρύαξαν (A): and 55. 14, W272 WPM ἐπορεύθημεν ἐν ὁμονοίᾳ (B): and 64. 8, DS OMB NVI ἀπὸ πλήθους ἐργαζομένων ἀδικίαν (C): and Dan. 6. 7, 12, 16, 1¥393 “cum strepitu concurrerunt.” The idea of the word seems to be, “the sound of many voices speaking together”: and so it might come to be rendered by βροντή. Keble, in his close and admira- ble translation of the Psalms, renders (A) “gathering raged”; (B) “Τὸο- gether through the Courts of God, In Choir we sweetly passed” ; (Ὁ) “ When sinners shout and shout again.” This passage is quoted by Westcott (Dict. of Bible) in proof of the supposition that our Lord used Aramaic in familiar discourse. 18. Βαρθολομαῖος] = "P27 ἼΒ, Ps, 2. 12, Prov, 31. 2, 12=Son, con- stantly used in Proper Names. Kavavirny| Syr. {$22 = Ζηλώτης, L. 6. 18, M. 10. 4. 21. of wap αὐτοῦ] I find no instance of this in V. A.: but in 1 Mace. 13. 52 it occurs in same sense (a passage worth consulting for its use of ἐν, μετὰ, rod). The nearest approach to it in N, T. is Me. 5. 26, τὰ παρ᾽ αὐτῆς, her property. ἐξέστη] 2 Cor. 5.13. No instance in V. A. of this sense of word : several of its meaning “terror, astonishment”; but not, ‘loss of reason.” 29. εἰς τ. αἰ] literal for OPV? V. A.: Ps. 48. 8, 89. 37, 1 Kings 1. 31, and passim, See 1 Th. 4.15. For ἔνοχος see M. 5. 21. Cuap. IV. 1. apa τὴν Ὁ.) M. 13. 1, 20. 30, Mc. 5, 21, 10. 46, L, 8. 35, Acts 10.6. These examples of παρὰ with acc., after verbs not signifying ‘“motum ad locum,” seem caught from V. A. usage, which gives παρὰ for bys “juxta, apud,” with ace. as often as with dative, after verbs of same kind: Lev. 10, 12, 1 Kings 10. 19, 13. 24, Ezek. 33. 30. For πρὸς τὴν θ. see M. 13. 56. 10. pwr. αὐτὸν...τὴν π.1 Double acc. after épwrdw: apparently avisivg from its constant confusion with airéw, in N. T.: possibly to be traced to its representing bays which has both meanings, ‘interrogo” and “peto”; John 14. 16, 12. 21, M. 15. 23, L. 14. 18. Other instances are L, 20. 3, J. 16. 23, M. 21. 24: but these do not quite correspond 1—2 4 5. MARK. Non-C. 1. παρὰ and πρὸς τ. Oar. 5. ἄλλο δὲ. 10. ap. av.... τ. π. 21. ἔρχ. 22. οὐ yap....€rOn. 24, BA. τί ἀκ. 34, ἐπέλυε. 98. ἐπὶ τ. π.. 99. πεφ. | Sept. 29. ἀποστ. τ. ὃ. CHAPTER V. Heese. 2. ἐν π. ὦ. ἵ. tléx.o. .8. ἔξ. τ᾿ wv. vor. ΠΤ wv oot ' > > {4 “ > > 7.0. 21. Av π.τ 6. 25. ovoa é. p.ai. 28. ὅτι. 91. ν evs Ἐπ 41. tar. κ. and τὸ Kop. , Non-C. 16. πῶς é. 7.8. 28. σωθ. 32. περιεβ. ἰδ. 43. διεστ. to the phrase here. This confusion is more curious, as V. A. carefully distinguish the two meanings. 12. “So that they may see with their eyes open and not perceive, and hear with open ear, but not understand ; in case they may at some future time turn to God and their sins be forgiven.” This passage confirms my suggestions at M. 13. 14. 21, “Is the lamp brought in ?” 22. The Greek here is very different from M. 10. 26 and L, 12. 2, usually quoted as parallel, and cannot bear the meaning of our A. V. Perhaps we may render thus: ‘For a thing is not necessarily hidden, which may have escaped manifestation hitherto; nor was it made to be a mystery, but to come to light.” Present concealment does not prevent future manifestation (e.g. vv. 21, 27), 23. dra ἀκούειν] Μ. 11. 15. 29. ἀποστέλλει τὸ 8.] Joel 3. 13, bap snbys ἐξαποστείλατε δρέπανον V. A. Rev. 14. 15, 16. 30. ‘To what are we to liken?” or “with what comparison are we to compare it?” bin = similitudo, παραβολὴ, Ez. 24. 3, 17. 2; or = pro- verb, παροιμία, Ez. 18. 2. In each case 20 bin = παραβάλλε παραβολήν. 89, ἐκόπασεν] 6.51, Jonah 1. 11, pres ἪΡ ΠΕΡῚ) ΠῸ τί ποιήσομέν σοι καὶ κοπάσει ἡ θάλασσα; V. A. (mark Hebraism in καὶ). The verb, originally = “to be tired out,” is used as correlative of Hebr. verbs meaning “rest and quiet after labour”; e.g. D7n, pov, It bears this sense also in Class. Authors, Cuap. V. 8. τὸ πν.)] Hebraism for voc., infra 41, and 10. 47, and 14. 34, see note M. 1. 20, 11. 26, Luke 8. 54, 6, 20, Gal. 4. 6, Eph, 5. 22. 22, 23. See notes 4. 1 and M. 7. 23. 25. ἐν ῥ. aip.] Levit. 20. 18. 26. τὰ παρ᾽ αὐτῆς] ὃ. 21. Grimm: “que ab ejus latere erant, ideoque ei suppetebant.” Unsatisfactorily. We may strain it to mean, ‘everything out of her purse.” 5. MARK. 5 CHAPTER VI. Hepr. 2. dvv. 3. mp. ἡ. κι ἐσκ. ἐν av. 7. δύο δύο. 14. 15. 23.35. ὅτι. 39. συμπ. σ. 40. mp. 7p. 48. ἐν τῷ ἐ. Non-C. 19. ἐνεῖχε.. 25. «μετὰ om. 27. σπεκ. 31. vm. avr. 33. mponr. av. 34. μὴ. 35. ὥρα π. 36. Tiy. φ. 45. ἕως αὐ. ἀπ. 51. ἐκόπ. 52. ἐπὶ τ. ἃ. 56. ἐσώξ. 28, ow6.| Μ. 9. 21, note: for sense of “ healing.” 84. 3. cis εἰρήνην] LL. 7. 50, 8. 48; V. A. for DIY 9b 1 Sam. 1. 17, 20. 42. This use of ε and its literal rendering by εἰς in V. A. and N. T., is adverbial; Lev. 25. 18, 26. 5, MOI? AW; V. A. μετὰ ἀσφαλείας -- “securely,” “safely” (as in Auth. V.); Ex. 26, 9, 722, a part, apart; Job 36. 31, A209, abundantly (Ges. ‘‘copiosé”) ; Is. 42. 3, npxd, “according to truth,” ie. “righteousness” (see M. 11. 29, 12. 20); “uprightly.” Compare Jerem. 6. 29 and 4. 30 for δε), V. A. eis κενὸν and εἰς μάταιον : Gal. 2. 2, εἰς κενὸν, adverb: and Rom. 12. 3, εἰς TO σωφρονεῖν, soberly, a very remarkable instance of the form, from containing the article, necessary to turn inf. into noun. The only classical authors cited by Grimm for this use of εἰς, are Diodorus 19. 9 and Heliodorus 10. 30, εἰς κενὸν, Josephus, Philo, A#lian (eis τὸ παντελὲς). 41. "pip ΜΓ] Chaldee or Syriac. This is often cited in proof of our Lord speaking familiarly in Aramaic. Dr Roberts takes the oppo- site view, suggesting, that though he usually spoke Greek, he used Aramaic words on this occasion for the child’s sake; who, from her youth and as being daughter of an ἀρχισυνάγωγος, a strict Jew probably, ‘“EBpatos ἐξ “EBpaiwv, and not an “EAAnviorys with foreign tendencies and sympathies, was likely to know Greek. Cuap. V1.7. δύο δύο] V. A. passim; Gen. 7. 9, 15, OY DY δύο δύο: and infra 39, συμπόσια συμπόσια. 8, 9. Syntax very irregular. 14. ai dvvapes] Μ. 7. 22, note. 19. ἐνεῖχεν at.] Gen. 49. 23, semel in V. A., “were full of hate against, pressed fiercely on,” Herod. 1. 118, 8. 27, χόλον ἐνέχειν τινι. καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο] Bur could not: corresponding to what Ges. calls “vau adversativus” = “sed” or “et tamen,” Gen. 17, 20, 21, Jud. 16. 15: V. A. passim. Infra 7. 24. 27. σπεκουλάτωρ] Latinism ; possibly = spiculator, δορυφόρος, 31. αὐτοὶ] “by yourselves”: alone. 35. dpa πολλὴ] Very strange phrase and baffling analysis, 40. πρασιαὶ] Beds in gardens, squares, plots, rows. 49. ἔδοξαν] M. 3. 9, note: for the various meanings of verb. 6 5. MARK. CHapter VII. Hepr. ὃ. κοιναῖς. 5. περιπ. 22. ὀφθ. πον. 24. καὶ οὐκ ἠδ. Also 6. 15. 20. Non-C. 3. πυγμῇ. 4. map. xp. 19. καθαρ. 25. αὐτῆς. 26. ἡρώτα. 35. ἀκοαὶ. SEPT. 10. ὁ κακολογῶν θ. TeX. 80. βεβλημ. 33. ἔβαλε. 52. ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις], I find no satisfactory explanation of this form, and do not understand it: nor does any one seem to do so. Cuap. VII. 2. κοιναῖς x.] κοινὸς = βέβηλος “profanus,” “ defiled, unclean”: opp. to καθαρὸς, ἅγιος, ἡγιασμένος, ἀφωρισμένος. As the idea of ἅγιον was “separation,” we have it and its derivatives in V. A. for 2, Numb. 6. 12, Lev. 25. 5, 11, Zech. 7. 3. The exactly opposite is contained in κοινός. V. A. never use it in this sense; but in Apocr. 1 Mace. 1. 47, 62, θύειν ὕεια καὶ κτήνη κοινὰ and μὴ φαγεῖν κοινὰ = 82D ; and Joseph. Ann. Iud. xir. 12, 13, κοινοὺς ἀνθρώπους and κοινὸν βίον, “ex usu a nativis Greecis alieno,” Grimm. Infra 15. See note M. 15. 11, Acts 10. 14, 28, and 11. 8, Rom. 14. 14. 3. πυγμῇ] thoroughly: “ jist-deep.” 5, περιπατοῦσι] I find only one passage in V. A., 2 King 20. 3, where this verb is used alone as here, to signify “go on,” ‘‘ conduct them- selves,” “live.” But in N. T. there are many (e.g. Acts 21. 21): chiefly in 8. John and 8. Paul, Eph, 4. 1, Rom. 13. 13, 2 Cor. 5. 8, 2 J. 4, 6. 9. καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε] “’tis well of you to set at naught.” 10. θαν. reX.] =" Nid, Ex. 21. 17, same in V. A. See note, M. 15. 4, for κακολογῶν. 19. καθαρίζον π. τ. B.| Possibly, “clearing away all that has been eaten.” But there may be some special force in καθαρίζειν, as following κοινοῦν 80 closely ; expressing, as it does, the exactly opposite idea, 22. ὀφθ. πον.) M. 20. 15 note. 26. Ἑλληνίς] =a Gentile, see Col. 3.11. The term Ἕλλην includes all heathens. She was a Canaanite, M. 15.21. ἠρώτα ‘she kept asking Him”: mark confusion between this verb and airéw, supra 4. 11, note. 30. βεβλημένην] βάλλω = “put,” very common in N. T., from use in V. A., for DY pono, M. 26. 12, note, infra 33. 34. ἐφφαθὰ] for NDB Niph., from MDD aperuit: Aramaic form, By 17): 35. αἱ ἀκοαὶ] “His ears”; L. 7.1, Acts 17. 20, Heb. 5. 11; all like this, plural with article. None of these seems quite parallel to the Classical use, cited by L. and S., of ἀκοὴ without article; ἀκοαῖς δέχεσθαι, eis ἀκοὰς ἐλθεῖν, δι᾿ ἀκοῆς. 5. MARK. 7 CHAPTER VIII. Her. 4. ἐπ᾽ ἐρημ. 12. εἰ 800. 15, βλέπ. ἀπὸ. 19. εἰς τ. 7. 91, ἀπὸ τ. π. Non-C. 1, μὴ ἐχ. th. 7. εἶπε w. 9, ἀπέλ. 12. τῷ πν. 22. φέρ. 30. ἐπετίμ. SEPT. 92. παῤῥησίᾳ. CHAPTER ΙΧ. Hepr. 1: ἐν & 11. ὅτι λέγ. 19. πρὸς ὁ. ἔσ. 25. τὸ πν. Cuap. VIIL. 8. ἐκλυθήσονται)]ῇ Μ. 15. 32, Hebr. 12. 3, 5, “un- strung, relaxed,” as after fatigue. Frequent in V. A., to express weariness and exhaustion, for ἢ or ἢ), 2 Sam. 16. 14, 17. 29, Is. 46. 1, and for ΠΕ, Is. 13. 7, and other words of similar meaning. And it has Classical authority. 4, ἐπ᾽ ἐρημίας] Grimm defines “ ἐπὶ, c. gen. de loco in quo ; de loco in cujus superficie.” Must not the latter condition always hold, for strict grammatical correctness? We may perhaps say here, “upon. desert ground”; but it is strained. But 2D, to which ἐπὶ corresponds, in V. A., seems to mean “apud, juxta,” without any necessary notion of “super” involved (see Gesenius) : and this has probably affected the use of ἐπὶ in N. T. 1 Cor. 6. 1, M. 28. 14, note. 12. εἰ δ.7 εἰ negandi, for D8, in elliptical expressions: V. A. passim, 1 Sam. 15. 45, Dip) DS “ΠΣ 0 ζῇ Κύριος εἰ πεσεῖται; 2 Sam, 11. 11, MYS OX TO 67 ἡ vu} cov εἰ roujow; 1 Kin. 1. 51, Mp! OY ΥΣ Ὑ5} ὀμοσάτω μοι εἰ οὐ θανατώσει (mark here the insertion of ov). Ps, 94. 11, quoted Hebr. 3. 11, 4. 3. 15. διεστέλλετο] 5. 43, 7. 36, 9. 9, M. 16. 20, Acts 15. 24, Hebr. 12. 20. This middle voice is found in V. A. several times; chiefly in Ez.: for Hiph. V1] monuit. Grimm names Aristotle and Polybius as using it. βλέπετε ἀπὸ] 12. 38: these are the only instances of this form, which appears to be Hebraic. 20. “ Fragment-fillings of how many baskets?” 30. ἐπετίμησεν) “sensu mitiore, severius admoneo = charge strictly” : never so used, apparently, “apud Grecos” (to use Grimm’s term for Classical writers) nor in V, A. 32. παῤῥησίᾳ] See John 7. 4 and 11. 54, παῤῥησίᾳ περιεπάτει, and Col. 2.15; LXX. Ley. 26. 13 for nppiP “ with a high hand”; rather *‘erecto corpore.” Cuap, IX. 11. This uso of ὅτι here and verse 28 is very curious and unique. Are there not two Questions? the first, ὅτι λέγουσιν... ; with 8 5. MARK. 20. 31. ὅτι. 29, ἐν οὐδενὶ...ἐν mp. 39. ἐπὶ τῷ ὁὄ. 41. ἐν τῷ ὁ. . 43, εἰς τ. γ. 47. yéev. τοῦ π. 50. ἐν τίνι. Non-C. 6. ἤδει. τί λαλ. 12. ἐπὶ τ. vi. 21. πόσος xp. ὥς. 35, ἐφών. 42. καλόν... βέβληται. SEPT. 39. κακολογ. CHAPTER X. HeBR. 2. εἰ ἔξεστι, M. 12.10, note. 8. ἔσ. οἱ ὃ. eis, M. 2. 6, note. 11. ἐπ᾽ av. 24. mem. ἐπὶ τ. yp. 26. καὶ τίς. 33. ὅτι. AG. ποτ 0. - AT. αὐ Ἃ. δ᾽] Pap. Non-C. 11. ὃς ἐὰν ἀπ. 17. εἷς. 28. πῶς δι 80. ἐὰν μὴ X. 89. κατακρ. θαν. 38. τί. 42. οἱ δοκ. ἄρχειν. 45. ἦλθε ὃ. 49. εἶπε φ. CHAPTER ΧΙ. HEBR. 3.17. ὅτι. 4. πρὸς τ. 6. 9.10. ‘Qo. ἐν τ. trp. 28. ἐν π. ἐξ. Non-C. 8. εἰς τ. ὅ. 14. φάγοι. 22. ἔχ. π. Θ. 24. ἂν αἰτεῖσθε. SEPT. 16. ἤφιε in sense of permitting: L. 18. 16. its answer, "HAias...7avra: the second, καὶ was..., answered verse 13. 12, ἐπὶ τὸν vi.| John 12. 16, we have ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ yeyp. dative. 19. πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσ.] See notes M. 13. 56 and 2 Th. 3. 10: and com- pare infra 11. 4. 42. Curious use of Tenses: baffling explanation. 44. Quotation from LXX. Is. 66. 24, almost identical. See notes M. 5. 22, 29, for γέενναν τοῦ π. Cuap. X. 24. πεποιθ.] with dative: see note M. 27. 43, and supra, cap. 1. 15. 33. κατακρ. αὐτὸν θανάτῳ] a most strange construction, inexplicable by any ordinary rules of Greek syntax. 42. οἱ δοκοῦντες apyev| Grimm renders “qui censentur imperare, qui agnoscuntur imperatores”’: but this is a very strained interpretation. It is very difficult to unravel the real force of the words. 46. παρὰ] with acc., for $8 near: 4. 1, note. 49. εἶπεν av. φωνηθ.] a thoroughly ungrammatical and unclassical phrase: L. 19. 15, 2 Cor. 4. 6. Cuap. XI. 10. ὡσαννὰ ἐν τ. ὑψ.7] Μ. 21. 10, note. 22. πίστιν Θ.] The expression defies analysis: we see what it means, but cannot define how it gets the meaning. S. MARK. 9 CHAPTER XII. Hesr. 1. ἐν w. 6. 29. Ort. 10. eis κεῖ y. 14. BX. εἰς πρ. 14. 32. ἐπ’ ad. 36. ἐν τ. Πν. 38. BX. ἀπὸ, supra 8. 15. Non-C. 4. ἐκεφαλ. 13. λόγῳ. 18. 24. οἵτινες and μὴ. 28. moia. 30. ἐξ or. 84. νουν. 37. ὁ π. ὄχ. 41. πῶς 06. β. 42. μία. SEPT. 12.19. 20. ἀφίημι, in sense of “leave,” M. 18. 12, note. 44. βίον = means of living, L. 15. 13, note. Cuap. XII. 10,11. See notes, M. 2. 6, 21. 42: the passage is an exact quotation from V. A. The feminine αὕτη is literal rendering of the Hebr. feminine NN’. 12. πρὸς αὐτοὺς] “with a view to them,” “in reference to them”: Rom. 10. 21. 13. λόγῳ] The parallel passages M. 22. 15, L. 20. 20, have ἐν λόγῳ and λόγου. This use of λόγος, sing. where we should expect plural, is curious, 14, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας] “on the side of truth.” Or perhaps a strict literal translation of the Hebrew idiom (vide Gesen, 21): e.g. “BY by LXX. ἀδικῶς (1.6. ψευδῶς), see my note, Matt. 11.19; Ps. 31. 24, ἽΠ" bv mepicows LXX. IN ADVERBIAL SENSE: see infra 32. And so ἐπ᾽ ad, = Nips by. But it has classical authority : Demosthenes passim. 30. Exact quotation from V. A, ; ἐξ for 3. For future ἀγαπήσεις see note M. 19. 18. 36. M. 22. 43 has ἐν πνεύματι = “by inspiration.” Both forms are intensely Hebraic and furnish a good illustration of the perplexities that confront and bewilder any Student of the Sacred Text, acquainted with Classical Greek only, if he is truthfully and honestly striving to wnder- stand what he has before him: and not merely to turn it into English. If he is content with the bald, literal translation of our ἘΠ V., “in spirit,” or “by the Holy Ghost,” corresponding to the Vulgate, “7 spiritw” and “in spiritu sancto,” on the plea that he fully understands what the phrases severally mean, and does not need any exact critical investigation of the original expression: we must deplore the intro- duction of such a spirit into so serious an enquiry. The first step towards any profitable study of G. T., is to divest oneself absolutely of all old memories of the familiar English Version, and of the associations popularly connected with its well remembered phraseology : and then to endeavour, without any @ priori bias, to discover the real meaning. I need not say that “in spirit,” whatever sense may have been popularly connected with it in this particular passage, is widely different from the 10 5. MARK. CHAPTER XIII. Hesr. 3.9.16. eis 7. 6. 14. BO. τ. ἐρ. M. 24.15, note. 20. οὐ...πᾶσα σ. 22. δώσ. σημ. 25. δυνάμεις. Non-C. 6. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόμ. 19. ἀπ᾽ a.xt. 33. πότε. Sept. 3. 9. 16. εἰς ΞΞ οὐ, or near: notes M. 19: 56, 26. 18. 25. ai Suvapers..., 15. 34.4. 27. ἀπ᾽ axp....ovp. 34. ἀφεὶς. CHAPTER XIV. Hepr. 4. eis τί ἡ ἀπ. 6. ἐν ἐμοὶ. 14. 27. 58. 69. 71. Ore. 27. ἐν ἐμοὶ. 36. ᾽Α. ὃ π. 49. fu. mp. v. and 54. 60. eis τ. μ. 62. τῆς ὃ. 64. ἔνοχον θ. notes M. 5. 22, 1 Cor. 11. 27, Heb. 2. 15. INON-C: 1 πῶς ὦ μήποτε... «ἔσται. 5. ἠδ. πρ. and ἐνεβρ. 9. cist. 7. x. 9. els κ. εἷς and μήτι ἐγώ. 51. ἐκ π΄.υυμᾶλλον and οὐ... ἀπαρν. 32. ἕως mp. 36. οὐ τί...σύ. 41. ἀπέχει. 42. ἄγ. 48. μετὰ μι. 44. σύσσ. 51. ἐπὶ x. 56. 59. καὶ io...joav. 65. éB. 72. ἐπὶ: SEPT. 25. γεννήμ. 50. ἀφέντες. more correct rendering of the Hebraic ἐν πνεύματι “by divine inspira- tion,” more fully expressed by the form in Me. ἐν τῷ πν. τῷ ἁγίῳ. Cuap. XIII. 19. ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς κτ.7] The omission of article is simply Hebraic in its irregularity: and in this particular context may possibly be due to the opening words of Genesis. Read carefully J. 1. 1, note, (20. Observe Hebr. idiom: N23, note, M. 24, 22, L. 1. 38, Apoe. 9.1. 2.7. 25. αἱ δυνάμεις...] L. 21, 26, note. The singular form is more frequent in V. A. as the equivalent of S23. 27. am ἄκρου] Note, M. 24. 31. 32. εἶ μὴ] but, on the contrary: M. 24. 36, L, 4. 26, 27, Gal. 2. 16. Cuap. XIV. 4. ἀπώλεια] Μ. 26. 8, note. 41, ἀπέχει)͵ W. and W. quote Herod, 3. 142 as using ἀπέχει for “‘licet.” Schl. gives Anacr, Ode 28. 33, This is the only instance in N. T. Not found in V. A. 43, μετὰ pax.| Μ. 24. 31, note. 54, iS in Hebrew occasionally means ea Is. 44. 16, 47. 14, where V. A. has zip: though almost always elsewhere φῶς, Hence φῶς may possibly have come to be taken in the same double sense as ἰδὲ, for which it so generally stands. 62. τῆς duv.] Note, M. 26, 64, 65. ἔβαλλον] The only instance of this meaning of verb in N.T.; none occurs in V. A, 72. ἐπιβαλὼν] Some refer this to “covering up his face.” 5. MARK. 11 CHAPTER XV. Hesr. 21. ayyap. 34. Ὁ Θ....εἰς τί. Non-C. 1. cup8.m. 11. ἀνέσ. 15. τὸ ix. π: 22. φέρ. 36. εἷς, 47. ποῦ. CHAPTER XVI. Heese. 5. ἐν τ. δι 17. ἐν τῷ ov. Non-C. 6. ἴδε. Cuar. XV. 1. ἐπὶ τὸ πρωΐ] P22. εἰς τὸ πρωὶ V.A., Ps. 30. 6, Bg. 17. 2. σὺ λέγει] Μ. 26. 25, note. 15. ix. π.] satisfacere; suam dare satisfactionem. ? ; note M. 1.6. Mark Hebraism in καὶ ἐκλήθη. : 34. Double notion of ὦ stone set up for (1) a Stumbling Block, an object to knock against and fall over, and (2) a Sign. 38. ἀνθωμ.] M. 11, 25, note. ΑἹ], Dative of time when, “point of time”: very rare in N, T. Mk. 1. 21, note. παρ, ΠῚ. 5. ἔσται εἰς] -- γενήσεται -- ἢ 7M: M. 1. 6, note. We have here a quotation from memory : not exactly agreeing with V. A. 7. τ. ἐκπ. 6, Barr.| Irregular construction ; common both in Hebrew and V. A. 16. icxup.] Note, M. 3. 11; a word not forcible enough for the idea, to our notions, as derived from its Classical use, 21. ἐν τῷ B.| This is almost, but not quite, equivalent to gen. absolute. καὶ I, 8.] Here καὶ is not “and” but “also.” Guar. IV. 4. οὐκ ἐπ᾽ d. μ. 11] M. 4. 4, note: wmportant. 7. ἐνώπιόν μου] = BY, The Greek words do not carry the meaning. 14 5. LUKE. Non-C. 18. ἄχ. κα 14. καθ᾽ ὅ. τ. π. 88. φ. μεγ. Also 10. 84. Sept. 7. ἐνώπιον. 18. οὗ ἕνεκεν. CHAPTER V. Hesr. 1.12. ἐγ....κ. avd. ἦν. 3. pdt. 17. δ. Kup. 26. 36. ὅτι. 84. ul. τ. νυμφ. Non-C. 7. 7 ἐλθ. σ. 19. μὴ. 80. εἰ δὲ μή. 57. βάλλει. Sepr. 11. ἀφ. 19. ἔμπρ. for ἐνώπιον, infra 12. 8. CuapTer VI. Hesr. 4. τ᾽ ἄρτ. τ. προθ. 8. εἰς τ μι. 12. ἐγέν.... ἐξῆλθε, 15. Ζηλ. 20. οἱ πτωχοί, see note, M. ὅ. 8, 35. ὑ. τ. uy. supra 1. 32 and M. 21. 9, notes. Non-C. 7. παρετ. ἵνα εὕρωσι. 12. ἐν τῇ mp. τοῦ Θ. 18. ᾿Ιούδαν ᾿Ιακώβου. 17. ἦλθον ἀκοῦσαι. 18. ὀχλ. 35. ἐπὶ τοὺς a. 43, οὐκ ἐ... «ποιοῦν. 12. This passage shows clearly that ὅτι is not used for Quotations alone, nor always: for in v. 10 it forms part of V. A. text: whereas, in the Quotation in v. 11, there is no ὅτι in V. A, 18. ἄχρι κι͵ ‘till opportunity offered.” 14, Curious use of gen. with xara in this sense: whence obtained? 18. In Gen. 22. 16, TW IY) is, in V. A., οὗ εἵνεκεν, and is equivalent to ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, L. 1. 20, 19. 44, being its kiteral basis. The latter is good Greek, the former bad: but to the V. A. Translators they seemed, appa- rently, identical. πτωχὸς] M. 5. 3, note. Our English Version gives “meek” in this passage of Isaiah. 23. apaB.| = proverb here: as V. A. 1 Sam, 10. 12, Hz. 18. 2. Cuap. V. 34. ποιῆσαι ν.] M. 8. 25, J. 6. 10, Acts 17. 26. Whence is this use of ποιεῖν derived? It suits English idiom exactly, and so does not startle us, but it is not Greek: I trace it in V. A., but not often, e.g. Ps. 104. 32, Jerem. 32. 23, Job 5. 18, gen. for Hiphil, but it is not a Hebrew idiom. 35. ‘But ὦ time will come: and, when the Bridegroom shall have been taken from them, then shall they fast.” Cuar. VI. 5. A strong instance for ὅτι in asseveration: M. 7. 23, note, Acts 28. 25. 20. Nom. plural for Voce. is rare. 24, ἀπέχω seems to carry notion of sufficiency, M. 6. 2,5. In Gen. ΠΡ. 5: ὧν N2 DDBD3, τὸ ἀργύριον ὑμῶν εὐδοκιμοῦν ἀπέχω, V. A. whatever it may mean. 32. 1 Pet. 2. 19, τοῦτο χάρις παρὰ Θεῷ. 5, LUKE. 1ὅ CHAPTER VII. Hepr. 1. εἰς τ΄ d. Me. 7. 35, note. 4.16. ὅτι. 1. ἀγέν.... ἐπορ. 12. καὶ ἰδοὺ. 21. ἀπὸ ν. 23. ox. ἐν ἐμοί. 27. πρὸ προσ. 28. ἐν γ. γυν. Μ. 11. 11, note. 35. κ. ἐδώς. ἡ. σ. ἀπὸ... M. 11. 19, note. 50. op. εἰς εἰρήνην M. 5. 34, note. Non-C. 3. ἐρωτῶν... διασώσῃ. 6. on. 7. εἰπὲ λ. 23. ὃς ἐὰν μὴ. 24, ἐξελ....θεάσ. 28. 6 winxp. 33. 42. μήτε. 36. ἠρ....φάγῃ. Past indic. followed by Subj. infra 9, 45. 87. ἥτις, 89, ποταπὴ. 40. ἔχω σ. τι εἰπ. 42. μὴ for οὐ. CHAPTER VIII. Hesr. 1. καὶ ἐγ... .καὶ av. 6. 8. ὁ ἔχ. ὦτα ἀκ. 15. ἐν κ. κ. and ἐν ὕπομ. 28. τί ἐ. κι σ. 35. παρὰ τ. π. 48. οὖσα... δώδεκα. Also 48. 49. 54, Mc. 5. 8. _ Non-C. 4. τῶν κι π. 5. ὃ μὲν. 18. πρὸς καιρὸν. 17. καὶ εἰς Φ. ἔ, 27. ἐκ x. i, 29. π. γ. xp. CHAPTER IX, Hepr. 18. ἐγέν....συνῆσαν. 22. ὅτι asseverandi, 41. ἔσ. πρὸς v. M. 13. 56, Mc. 9.19, notes. 49. ἐπὶ τῷ ὁὄ. 51. ἐγέν. δὲ... Cuap. VII. 21. ἐθεράπ. ἀπὸ μαστίγων] V. A. use μάστιξ for 53), one of the meanings of which is leprosy (Lev. 13. 3), and elsewhere macula, nevus. Hence possibly our English Translators, Ps. 90. 10, render p. by “plague”; and so the sense of “disease” may have become connected with it, as in Me. 3. 10, 5. 29, and here. 32. a. τοῖς καθ.) For this construction, see supra 3, 7. 45, Mark emphasis in καταφ., M, 20, 48, Cuap. VIII. 10. Compare M. 13. 14, Mc. 4,12. This passage of 8. Luke is much the plainest and clearest. 21. ποιεῖν λόγον] A very singular usage. 27. V. A. use ἱκανὸς for multus, Ez. 1. 24, φωνὴν ὕδατος ἱκανοῦ, and this is common in Apocrypha, 1 Mace. 13. 11, δύναμιν ἱκανὴν, see Xenophon Cyrop. 2. 1. 8, Anab, 4. 8. 18, Polyb. Hist. 2.12. As we use “plenty” and “enough,” in sense of “many.” Infra 20, 8, 9, Cuar. IX. 28. ἐγ... ἡμέραι... καὶ ... ἀνέβη ... προσ.] Most irregular construction: involving Hebraisms and non-classical anomalies, 10 S. LUKE. καὶ av. and τοῦ mop. M. 2. 6,note. 52. πρὸ mp. Mc.1.2.: 61. τοῖς els τὸν οἷ. Non-C. 8. dvad.y. 13. δότε φ. and εἰ μήτι.. .ἀγοράσωμεν. 14. κατακλ. αὖ. κα 22. ἀποκτ. 31. ἔλεγον τ. ἔς 53. μὴ. .«λέγει. 40. τὸ τίς...μείζων av. 48. ὁ γ. μικρ. 52. εἰσ... ὥστε Er. 54. εἴπ. π. κ. 57. ἀπέρχῃ. 60. ἄφες. CHAPTER X. Hepr, 2. οὖν 10. cig τι πὶ 13. at ὃ᾽΄ 21. ναὶ. σῦς ee ἀγαπήσεις, M. 6. 33, 19. 18, notes. 37. 67. ἔ. per a. Also 1. 6. 17. 38. Non-C. 21. ἐν αὐ. τ. 0. 80. ἀφ....συγκυρίαν. 35. ἐπὶ τ. αὖ. 41. τυρβάζῃ Latinism. Sept. 2. 35. ἐκβάλλῃ. 21. ἐξομολογοῦμαι and οὕτως. ..σου. 34. ἐν τῷ ἐκείνους εἰσ.] Strictly rendered, this means the exactly opposite of what took place, and limits the overshadowing by the cloud to our Lord and Moses and Elias. It is, of course, an instance of ungrammatical construction. 36. ἐν τῷ γεν.] “ When the voice had past”; and yet Vulg. give ‘dum fieret vox.” 39. μετὰ ἀ.] Notes, M. 24. 31, Me. 14. 43, Acts 2. 28. 51. πρόσ. ἐστήριξε! So V. A. render 0°35 ny, Jer. 21. 10, Ez. 21. 2, and 0°38 jD3, Ez. 14.83; a merely literal rendering. Cuap. X. 2, οὖν in V. A. often stands for }, because 1 often means “therefore”: thus οὖν and καὶ are both equivalents of 1: can they in consequence have come to be used one for the other? It looks so here. 6. υἱὸς εἰρ.] Common Hebr. idiom Di>¥ 13, passim in V. T. 590 13, 1 Kings 1. 52, υἱὸς δυνάμεως V. A.; Eph. 2. 2, vids ἀπειθείας, 1 Pet. 1. 14, τέκνα ὑπακοῆς, M. 8. 12, note. 7. τὰ παρ᾽ α.] Grimm supplies δοθέντα, Phil. 4. 18. 10. πλατεῖα] V. A. always for 27), “wide place,” or “street.” 19. Compare Ps. 91. 13, “Thou shalt go upon the adder...” 21, ναὶ... εὐδοκία, M. 11. 26, note. 27. This future is most intensely Hebraic and not Greek, which has no such force of command connected with its future tense, as the Hebrew and English have (in shall). M. 5. 48, 19. 18, notes. 37. Oy 7D ney] Literally rendered by V. A. passim: as here, 2 Sam. 10. 2, ποιήσω ἔλεος μετὰ ᾿Αννών. 8. LUKE. 17 CHAPTER XI. HEBR. 4. ofetA. 7. eis Τ᾿ x. €. M. 13. 56, J. 1.1, notes, 22. ἐφ᾽ ἡ ἔπεπ. 32. εἰς τὸ κα Also 20. Non-C. 3. ἐπιούσιον. 5. πορεύσ....εἴπῃ.ς 36. Tu. 87. np. 38. ἐβαπτ. 41. τὰ ἐν. 50. ἀπὸ κ. κα 54. ἀποστ. SEPT. 34. ἁπλοῦς, Μ. 6. 22, note. CHAPTER XII. Hesr. 4. φοβ. amo. 5. εἰς τ. γι 8. dwor. ev. 10. εἰς τ. ὑ. ΟἹ. προστεθ. 32. TO μ. π. voc. 56. ὅτι, M. 7. 23, note. Non-C. 1. ἐν οἷς. 10. πᾶς ὃς ἐρεῖ X. 33. μὴ. 806. πότε a, 40. ἀπίστων. 47. πρὸς τ. θ. for κατὰ. 58. δὸς épy. and πράκτορι. Cuap. XI. 4. ὀφείλ.] Μ. 6. 12, note. 5—8and1l. Utterly irregular construction. 20. ἐν 6.] M. 3. 11, note, infra 14. 31. See note, L. 22. 49, Apoc, 13. 10, 19. 15. All palpable Hebraisms, adopted; no doubt, insensibly and unconsciously into the Greek of our Lord’s time, from the familiar phraseology of V. A., in which 2 is almost always rendered literally by ἐν. And just as V. A. followed Hebr. idiom, and N. T. authors followed V. A., so the Vulgate Translation has kept in the same track, and constantly puts im for ἐν in passages similar to the one before us, against Latin idiom, and the clear sense: e.g. here ; “in digito Dei”; infra 22. 49, “st percutimus in gladio?” 1 Cor. 4. 21, “in virga veniam ad vos?” These instances of the way in which long and intimate acquaintance with V. A. and N. T. moulded the expressions of the Latin Translators, men of education and learning, illustrate and confirm the probability of the argument for referring all similar violations of Greek Idiom in N. Τὶ to a Hebrew source. And it is remarkable how the phraseology of the Vulgate has affected the style even of the most learned Latin Fathers: e.g. 8. Ambrose (De fide 1. v. 42), “Non in dialecticd complacuit Deo salvum facere populum suum,” Just as our own popular theological terminology is coloured throughout by the forms of expression prevalent in our Authorised Version. 41. τὰ évovra]| A remarkable phrase: not used, apparently, in Classical authors, and not found in V. A. Cuap. XII. 8. M. 10. 32, note. Trommius gives no instance of ὁμολογεῖν ἐν from V. A. Schleusner gives some of 177 with by and 2. 29. “Be not unsettled and worried.” 31. τ. 2. προστεῦ. t.] A very difficult and important passage. M. 6. 33, note ; infra 20. 11. Vs GU. yA 18 5. LUKE. Sept. 1. προσέχ. ἑ. ἀπὸ, M. 6.1, note. 8. ἔμπρ. for ἐνώπιον, 5. 19. CHAPTER XIII. Hepr. 4. ὀφειλ. supra 11. 4. 9. εἰς Top. 27. épy. τ. a. 33. mopev. Also 19, 23. “NoseC, 1.91. ὧὅν ὦ τι ἡ. 2. Sox, 11. μὴ. 95, αὐ τ CHAPTER XIV. Hepr. 1. καὶ éy....xal. 31. ἐν δ. y. M. 3 11, Jude 14, notes. 84. μωρ. ἐν τ. dpt. Μ. 5. 13, note. 35. ἐχ. ὦτα a. Also 2. 3. 30. Non-C. 7. ἐπέχων. 8. κατακλ. εἰς τ. mp. 8. 9. μὴ...«ἐρεῖ δὸς τ. τ. δα pet a. 10. ἀνάπεσαι. 12. φώνει. 18, ποι. doy. 15. diy. dpt. 17. τῇ ὥρᾳ. 18. ἀπὸ μ. and ἐρωτῶ. 19. 81. πορ. 6. 28. ΨηΦ. 42. Μ. 24. 45, θεραπεία = θεραπεύοντες. Herod. 5. 21. 53, Change of case after ἐπὶ, is utterly inexplicable. 58. δὸς épy.| Probably a Latinism; “da operam.” JHAP. XIII. 23. Literal translation of D8 interrogative, 14. 3, copied literally in Vulgate: ‘‘si pauci sunt” and ‘si licet sabb. curare,” and 22. 49, “si percutimus ?” 25. Strange confusion of tenses and moods. Perhaps καὶ ἀποκρ. may be a Hebraism: “when once he has shut...then shall he answer,” 27. 2 Mace. 3. 6, épy. τῆς ἀνομίας : the word is not found in V. A. 28. oKA....] M. 8. 12, note. 29. The kingdom of Heaven spoken of as a Feast: as Is. 25. 6. 33. πορεύ.] “go on my way”: as περιπατεῖν in same sense, 34, The mixture of Persons in this verse is very perplexing. Cuap. XIV. 27. β. τ. στ.] It may be doubted whether the meaning -of this expression is generally analysed and ascertained. It is assumed to be equivalent to “mortification,” “self-denial,” “crucifying the flesh” ; and no doubt it implies this, though in a secondary not a primary sense, How then is the second idea involved in the first, and deducible from it? Because the man condemned to be crucified had to carry his cross to the place of execution: hence “to carry a cross” was an open sign, a demonstration, that some one was to be put to death: a symbol and emblem of death to be inflicted. Hence “to take up and carry one’s own cross” voluntarily, came metaphorically to signify the willing- S. LUKE. 19 CHAPTER XV. Hepr. 16. ἀπὸ τ. κ΄ 18. εἰς τ. ov. x. ἐ co. Also 2. 27. Non-C. 4. 8. ἕως εὖ. 7. ἡ. 18. μακρὰν. 22. πρώτην. Also 1. 29. CHAPTER XVI. HEpR. 8. τὸν οἱ. τ. @., οἱ vi. τ. al. τ., and Urrép...yevedy. 9. bt. ὦ. 10. ἄδικος. 11. τῷ a. p....ddnOivov, 26. ἐστήρ. 27. ép. Non-C. 2. φων. av. 14, eeu. 20. ἐβέβλ. 24. βάψῃ... ὕδατος. ness ‘“‘to kill something deserving of death,” “to mortify the evil deeds of the sinful body,” “to crucify the flesh,” and “to exhibit and avow openly the intention to do this:” and so has passed into the common sense of “a symbol of mortification,” “‘an open profession of self-sacrifice and self-denial.” Cuap. XV. 12. Bios] = “facultates vivendi, opes,” Mc. 12. 44, L. 8. 48, V. A. Cant. 8. 7. The same sense seems common in Apocrypha. ἐπιβάλλον] This phrase has classical authority, being found in Herodotus and Demosthenes, and occurs in Diodorus 14. 17, and Polybius. There are some instances in Apocrypha, Tob. 6. 11, 1 Mace. 10. 30, 2 Mace. 3. 3, 9. 16: but none in V. A. 10, ἀπὸ τ. κι] For this use of ἀπὸ for |!) expressing cause or instru- ment, see Μ΄. 7. 16 and Heb. 5. 7, notes. Cuar. XVI. 4. “That people may receive me,” “ qu’on m’admette” : so infra, 9, “that there may be some one to receive you”: ie. “that you may be received.” 6. He gave them the bills, drawn out by himself in the correct amounts, and allowed them to alter the figures. 8. ox.] 1.6. “the rich man, his master.” Our Lord’s remarks on the parable begin at “ὅτι of viol...” 9, M. 11. 19, note. Here ἀδικὸς = ψευδὴς, unreal, unreliable ; δίκαιος = ἀληθινός. 1 Tim. 3. 16, ἐδικαιώθη “was authenticated, pro- claimed to be true Christ, by the Holy Spirit,” at his Baptism. 8S. John 3. 20, 7. 18. 20. ἐβέβλητο] A quasi-Imperfect; βέβληται) a quasi-Present : M. 8. 6. 22. κόλπον] In 23, κόλποις. 26. ἐστήρικται] Used in much the same sense as στερέωμα in Gen. 1. for 2’? “the wide expanse of Heaven.” 2 5: 80 5. LUKE. CHAPTER XVII. Hesr. 4. ἀφήσεις. 10. ὅτι δι 11, ἐγ. καὶ...διήρχ: 20. ἡ Bac. τοῦ ©, Μ. 8. 2, note. Non-C. 1. ἀνένδ....τοῦ. 2. λυσιτ....ἢ. 3. mp. ἑαυτ. Μ, 6. 1, note. 7. avar. δ, ἐτ. τί ὃ. δπα d.«.7. 9. δοκῶ 13. ap. ἢ 24, ἐκ τῆς... εἰς τ. 29. ἔβρ. 35. ἐπὶ τ. av. Also 15. 20. 33. Sept. 1. σκάνδ. M. 18.7, note. 21. ἐντὸς. 33. Swoy. 35. ἐπὶ τὸ av. and adel. CHAPTER XVIII. Hepr. 6. ὁ κρ..τ. ἀἅ. 43. ἔδωκ. ai. Also 11.13. Nomin. Non-C. 2. μὴ. 4. emi y. 5. εἰς τ. ἐ. ὑπ. 6. τί. 10. avé8. mp. 14. παρ᾽ ἐς 15. προσ... ἵνα ἅ. 324. πῶς δι 31. yeyp....7@ vi. 89. προάγ. ἐπετ. ἵ. σιωπήσῃ. Sept. 16. ἄφετε. Cuap. XVII. 1. ἀνενδεκτὸν] (from ἐνδέχεται) = “an impossible thing,” “an impossibility”: ‘there is an impossibility of scandals not coming.” Acts 3. 12 affords an almost parallel instance of a verbal adjective passing into and used as a Substantive. 3. προσ. éavr.] Acts 5. 35. V.A. render thus 1, Gen. 24. 6, Ex. 10, 28. Infra 20. 46, M. 6. 1. 4, ἀφ. αὐτῷ] Fut. for Imper., M. 5. 48, 19. 18. Apoe. 4. 10. 9. δοκέω] = cogito, M. 3. 9. V. A. for 100, Gen. 38. 15, ἔδοξεν αὐτὴν πόρνην εἶναι. 21. ἐντὸς] V. A for 2323 “in medio”: Ps. 38. 3, 108, 21, and also for Plural of 332, Ps. 102.-1, Is. 16. 11, as if it were equivalent, in their usage, to “in the midst of,” as well as “inside,” 29, éBp. π.] = “on pleuvoit.” 33. fwoy.] Acts 7.19. The only two instances in N. T. There are several in V. A. of the word in this sense “to keep alive,” as equiva- lent to the Pihel or Hiphil of 9, Ex. 1. 17, Judges 8. 19, 1 Kings 2. 6, 27.9. It is probably peculiar to V. A. 35. ἐπὶ τὸ αὖὐ.] ΚΑ. for ὙΠ), M. 22. 34, note, Acts 1. 15, Cuap. XVIII. 16. ἄφετε] = “suffer, permit,” very common use of verb in V. A.: the literal rendering of 137, Hiphil of 5), 2 Kings 4. 27, ἄφες αὐτὴν for md ΠΕῚΠ, Also for }D2, Gen. 20. 6, Judges 15. 1. 81. yeyp. τῷ υἱῷ] A very unusual form in ordinary Greek. 33. τῇ ἡμ.] Dative of “time when”: unusual in N. T. M. 12. 1, note: more frequent in L. than in the other Evangelists, as the other cognate forms ; infra 20. 47, note. 35. ἐκαθῆτο π. τὴν 0.] Me. 4. 1, 10. 46, notes. 5. LUKE. 21 CHAPTER XIX. Hepr. 3. ἀπὸ τ. ὁ. 15. ἐγέν. καὶ εἶπε. 27. Gump. 87. δυν. 38. ἐν ὕψ. 43. ἤξ. ἡ..«καὶ. Also 7. 9. 42. Non-C. 2. καὶ ἀ....κ- οὗτ. 8. ἰδ. τίς ἐ. τῇ ἡλ. μ. dat. of part. 11. δοκεῖν. 12. χ. μακρὰν...λ. 13. ἕως é 1ὅ. εἶπε φ... «ἵνα γνῷ. Me. 10. 49, note. 20. ἐν σ. Latinism. 28. ἔπρ. 48. τὸ τί π. Sepr. 44. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, supra 1. 20, note. CHAPTER XX. Hepr. 8. &anr. 11. wp.7. M. 6. 33. 21. λαμβ. mp. and ἐπ᾽ adn. 28. ἐξαν. om. 36. av. viol. 42. ἐκ δι 40, προσ. ἀπὸ. supra 17.3. Also 2. 5. 8. 17. Non-C. 7. μὴ. 9. yp. ix. 19. ἐν αὖτ. τ. ὥ. Sept. 26. ἐνάντιον for ἐνώπιον, infra 24. 19, M. 5. 16, note. Cuap. XIX. 3. τῇ 7A. μικρὸς) Dat. of part., where we should expect acc. J. 13, 21, note. 38. ὁ ἐρχ. β. ἐν ὁ. ΚΙ] For ὁ β. ὁ ἐρχ. ἐν ὁὄ. K. This form, so un- grammatical in Greek, is no doubt due to the frequent occurrence of the same construction in Hebrew, of which I have elsewhere given examples, e.g. infra 21. 1. In «ip. ἐν ovp. we have a curious variation from the Angels’ Song, “Peace on Larth.” They greeted Him as Messiah in words of Ps. 118. 26: see M. 21. 9, note. 48, τὸ τί π.1 “The what-to-do”; “the course to take.” Cuar. XX. 17. κεφ. ywv.] See M. 21. 42, for explanation of this metaphor. 21. dap. zp. is the exact literal rendering of OD NW3, Ley. 19. 15, V. A. od λήψῃ πρόσωπον πτωχοῦ. Fut. prohibitive with οὐ not Greek but Hebraic. M. 19. 18, note. 27. τινες...οἵ] “some,” viz. “those who denied...” 28. ἐξαν. on.]=literally. V. A. YY DP, Gen. 38. 8, avacr. σπ. 35. οἱ kat....tvx.] These words may possibly be quoted as justi- fying the notion of the annihilation of the wicked and the resurrection to life of the good alone. 38. ©. ovk...]= “There is no God of dead people, but of living people: for all are alive for Him”: to do Him service, as God and King, people must be alive. 47. προφ.] Dative of “cause or manner”: very rare generally in N. T. (ΔΙ. 26. 4, Me. 2. 8, notes), though more frequent in 8. Luke than any other writer: I have noted it 18 times in his Gospel, and 22 S. LUKE. CHAPTER XXI. Hepr. 6. ἐλ. nu. 8. ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι. 16. ἐξ ὕ. 18. καὶ = but. 22. τοῦ m7. 26. ἀπὸ φ. and ai Suv. τ. ovp. 35. ἐπὶ m. Also 84. 37. Non-C. 11. φόβ. 14. θ. εἰς τι κι 24. ἄχρι π. 30. ἀφ᾽ é. 34. mp. éavt. Also 27. 88, CHAPTER XXII. Hepr. 1. πάσχα. 15. ἐπιθ. ἐς 30. δώδ. φ. 49. εἰ π. ἐν μ. 53. ἡ ἐξ. τ. σκ. Νον-. 2.4. rom. av. 6. ἐξωμ. 10. 18. Subj. without ἄν. 94. τὸ τίς... 85. μή τ. v. 42. εἰ 8. π. 47. προήρχ. αὐ. 69. ἀπὸ τιν Sept. 18. γεννήματος. Μ. 20. 29, note. 17 in the Acts. In 5. Matthew it occurs, so far as I have marked, only 8 times, in S. Mark 12: in all 8. Paul’s epistles, under 50 times. The usual substitute for this form, so universal in Classical Authors, is év with dative, an evident Hebraism: M. 3. 11, note. Cuap. XXI, 1. τοὺς β....πλ.}] Curious construction: similar to 19. 38. 21. J. 4. 35, James 5. 4, have both, as here, plural of χώρα, in sense of field: a signification belonging to δὲ occasionally, for which V. A. generally give χώρας. Here it need not bear that meaning, but may mean “heathen lands,” “foreign lands.” It has no Classical authority. 26. δύναμις here seems equivalent to “forces” in the physical meaning, such as control the movements of what we call “the heavenly bodies”: e.g. gravitation, attraction, &ec. Cuap. XXII. 19. εἰς τ. ἐμ. ἀνάμν.] “as my memorial, the memo- rial I desire”: or, in active sense, “‘my appointed way of reminding my Father.” For ποιεῖτε see M. 26. 18, note. 25. «vp.| “lord it over them”: M. 20. 25, note. 30. τὰς dud. pvd.] “the different divisions and portions of my people.” The diocese, in the Church, is the equivalent of the Z'ribe among God’s ancient People. κρίνειν, in Hebrew sense, ‘‘ to govern.” 49. war. ἐν paxaipa| This phrase is very frequent in V. A. as literal translation of 112 13, 2 Kings 19. 37, 2 Chr. 29. 9, Josh. 19. 47, Jerem. 26. 23, and a hundred other places. And it was conse- quently, no doubt, (see Apoc. 2. 16, 11. 7,) in common use in our Lord’s S. LUKE. 23 CHAPTER XXIII. Hepr. 9. ἐν Δ. ix. 28. ἐπ᾽ ἐ....τέκνα. 31. ὑγρῷ E....Enpa. 43. ἐν τῷ π. Also 5. 9. Non-C, 3. σὺ λέγ. M. 26. 2ὅ. ὅ. ἀνασ. 8. ἐξ ix. supra 8. 27. 11. σὺν 1. o7....dvém, av. τῷ I. dative. 15. d& θ. 10, παιδ. 17. καθ᾽ é. no article, 38. ἀπῆλθ. 41. ἄτοπον. 51. συγκατατ. CHAPTER XXIV. Heese. 1. τῇ μιῶ τι σ. 4. ἐν ἐ- ἃ. 22. ἐπὶ τ. wv. 25. Bp. τοῦ π. ἐπὶ, M. 2. 6, note. 34. ὅτι emphatic, M. 7. 23, note. 42. ἀπὸ μ. 47. ἐπὶ τῷ cv. 49: ἐξ ὕψ. Also 35. Non-C. 12. πρὸς ὁ. 18. ἐν αὐτ. jy. 18. σὺ μ. π. 21. ἀλλά yeo. π. τ. 25. Bp. τῇ x. dative. 35. ἐγνώσθη αὐτοῖς. ; day. How familiar it was to the Authors of V. A. may be inferred by their rendering the idiomatic expression 2} ‘DD 13%), Josh. 19. 47, by ἐν στόματι μαχαίρας ἐπάταξαν in defiance of Greek grammar and idiom. For εἰ interrogative, see note, M. 12. 10. Cuap. XXIII. 2. Xp. β.] King Messiah. 98, ἐφ᾽ & κλ....7 Judges 11. 37, °Y NBIN, κλαύσομαι ἐπὶ τὰ παρ- θένια μου. 31. ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ...ξηρῷ] Proverbial: Ez. 17. 24, 20, 47. Of course the use of év is Hebraic. 54, py. παρασκευή] “The Preparation day”: in J. 19, 42 it is called 9 7. τῶν Ἰουδ., showing how completely it was looked on as a day of fixed and regular Jewish observance. oaffP. ἐπέφ.] “The sabbath was dawning”: and yet it began at Sunset. The unnaturalness of their division of the day and its arbitrary commencement, is shown strikingly by this use of ἐπέφ. Cuap. XXIV. 25. mor. ἐπὶ π.1] See M. 27. 43, note, Mc. 10. 24. Or perhaps ἐπὶ πᾶσιν may not be connected with mor., but may mean ‘after all.” 42. ἀπὸ μελ.7-- “a part of,” “some,” for "2. V. A. constantly translate this literally, and the Vulgate follows suit. Ex. 17. 5, ἀπὸ τῶν mp., “de senioribus,” Lev. 5. 9, OUD, ῥανεῖ ἀπὸ τοῦ aip. 47, κηρ....ἀρξ A very anomalous and ungrammatical construc- tion, irreducible to any order. 49. ἐξ tyous] V. A. for D109”, Ps. 18. 17, Thr. 1. 13. 24 5. LUKE. Serr. 19. ἐναντίον, supra 20. 26, M. 23. 14, note. 52. μετὰ χαρᾶς] Μ. 24. 31, Acts 2. 28, notes: supra 9, 39. There is a curious example of its use for 2 in V. A. Is. 48. 1, MP2 ND, ov μετ᾽ ἀληθείας, exactly as we use with, and so also Is. 15. 3, 333, pera κλαυθμῶν. Nah. 1. 2, μετὰ θυμοῦ. These are the only instances I find in V. A. of pera with genitive of thing, as distinct from gen. of person. But these are sufficient, I think, to assign it to a Septuagint origin. 5. ΦΟΗΝ, CHAPTER I. HeEBR. 1. wpost.0. 6. dv. αὐτ. 1. 7. εἰς μ. 12. ἔλαβον, and griat. εἰς TO 0. 2. 11. 23. 13. δξ αἷμ... 18. ὧν eis 7. Κι M. 13. 56, note. 23. εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁ. = JT 15, Is. 40.3. Also 20. 26. 31. 32. 33. Cuap. I. 1. ἐν ἀρχῇ How are we to account for the absence of the definite article here, in a passage remarkable for its strict accordance with grammatical precision, and in a writer generally so exact in his use of it? Are we to resort to elaborate refinements of criticism, or strive to give a simpler and more natural, though possibly less philosophical, explanation of its omission? The account of the creation, Gen. 1. 1, opens with ΠΡ ΝΞ, V. A. ἐν ἀρχῇ : no article in either language. We know how familiar the Hebrew phrase was to the Jews in earlier time, as the title of the Book itself; we may well imagine the ideas associated with it, the sanctity (as it were) that environed it. May we not infer that equal honour would be paid, by the later Jews, to the phrase that literally rendered it in the Greek Version, embalming it for all future generations? Is it not probable that the Evangelist had the words of Moses in his mind, and deliberately and intentionally reproduced them ? Me. 13. 19, note. ἦν πρὸς τὸν ΘΙ] For this sense of zpos with acc. = bys apud, juata, see notes, M. 13. 56, Mc. 1. 39, 6. 3, 2 Th. 3. 10. It is a Hebraism and not a metaphysical refinement of Classical usage. It is superfluous, no doubt, to repeat here, what every Scholar knows, that πρὸς with ace. can only follow verbs implying motion towards an object, movement either (1) of body or other material substances, or (2) of mind or spirit, towards something outside it. It cannot follow any verb implying stationariness : with which the dative or genitive are almost invariably 26 S. JOHN. Non-C. 14. povoy. παρὰ 1. 15. 30. πρῶτός pov. 26. μέσος ὑ. 32. ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν, acc.: we should expect αὐτῷ. 383. ὁ. 7. μ. β. M. 2. 2, note. 40. εἶδον ποῦ. 42. πρῶτος for πρῶτον. 47. τι ay. 48, εἶδε...καὶ λέγει, past coupled with present, M. 1. 22, note: infra 50. 49. πόθεν and φωνῆσαι. Sept. 1. ἦν πρὸς τὸν Θ. 15. 27. 80, ἔμπρ. 18. ὁ ὧν εἰς τὸν x. 29. αἴρων ap. found. I say almost, for some few instances of deviation from this general use may, of course, be cited: but such exceptions prove the rule. Πρὸς tov Θεὸν cannot, we may boldly say, in grammatical Greek, mean apud Deum, as it undoubtedly means here, and as the Vulgate has it, and our E. V. “with God.” And yet it is abundantly clear, from the notes referred to above, that πρὸς, εἰς and παρὰ, with acc., are coupled with verbs involving no idea of motion towards, constantly in N. T., suggesting that such must have been the common vernacular usage among Hebrews speaking or writing Greek at the time. To what are we to assign this violation of Grammatical correctness? I venture to hope that the explanation offered by me, 2 Th. 3. 10, is reasonable and sufficient; and that the Septuagint Translators, men evidently possessing a very slight and inadequate acquaintance with Greek, having ascertained that ON generally was equivalent to πρὸς with acc., assumed it to be so wuniver- sally, and rendered it accordingly : or they may only have carried out a misconception previously prevalent and adopted in the vulgar phraseo- logy. In either case, the use, thus introduced, became probably im- bedded, as so many other similar Hebraisms, in the Vernacular Greek of the Jews in Egypt, Palestine and Asia Minor. And hence the words stand for what 8. John meant them to stand for, and not for what they mean in themselves, grammatically. 12. ἔλαβον] “received, accepted”: an unusual sense of the word “apud Grecos,” deducible possibly from παρέλαβον in 11; not found, I think, in V. A.; perhaps only a literal translation of the Chaldee Sap = “to hear and adopt,” whence “ cabala.” 15, 30. ἔμπρ.] de ordine, Gen. 48. 20, ἔθηκεν "Edpaip ἔμπρ. τοῦ Μανασσῆ for 5? 3; Deut. 21. 6, for "5 OY, in same sense, 16. avri] For NOW, “in place of,” one after another: Ps, 45. 17, "2/9 pias NOMA, ἀντὶ τῶν πατέρων cov. 23. τὴν ὁ. K.] From V. A.: there is no def. article in the original, nor is one required; the contrast in our Εἰ. V., “prepare ye the wuy... make straight...a highway,” is without any foundation: neither noun has the def. art. 17. bo -1 5. JOHN. CHAPTER II. HEBR. 3. πρὸς av. 4. τί ἐμ. «. σοί; Also 11. 23. _Non-C. 7. ἕως ἄνω. 10. ἐλάσσω -- ρεΐον, deterior. 19. Avw=diruo, destruo, 20. The construction τεσσ. ἔτεσιν ox. 25. ὁ ἄνθρ. generically, for οἱ ἄνθρ. wnusual. There is a tinge of Hebraism about it. CuHaPTer III. Hepr. 1. Nex. ov. αὐτῷς 15. ὁ mot. εἰς, Me. 1. 15, note. 21. ἐν Θεῷ. 28. ὅτι ἀπ. εἰ. 29. χαρᾷ y. Also 28. Non-C. 3.7. ἄνωθεν = δεύτερον =de novo. 25. ἐκ. 84. ἐκ μέτρου. 36. ἀπειθῶν as opposed to πιστεύων, Eph. 5. 6, note; and ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν. Carrer IY. HEBR. 6. ἐκ τῆς 60. ἐκ for 1D, used in sense of ὑπὸ. 14. εἰς τὸν al. 17. 39.42. ὅτι. 28. Epy. & x. νῦν ἐ. and ἐν πν. Non-C. 7. épy....avtdjoar. 8. τροφὰς. 10. αἰτεῖν with acc. of person. 15. mp. αὐτὸν for αὐτῴ. 16. dwvety=call. 28. ἀπῆλθε = went away. 30. npxovto, 52. κομψ. ἔσχε, and wp. ἐβδ. acc. of time when. Sept. 3. ἀφῆκε, M. 18. 12. 29. aipew]=‘‘recedere facio, removeo”; V. A. Is. 5. 23, Gen. 35. 2 and elsewhere. 43. Κηφᾶς] Aramaic, Me. 3. 17. 44, τῇ ἐπ.) Dative of time when: L. 18. 33, note. Cuap. 11. 4, τί ἐμοὶ καὶ cot] A pure Hebraism. ΕΝ > ΠΡΌ, 2 Sam. ᾿ 16. 10, 19. 22, V. A. Vulgate “quid mihi et tibi”; as much against Latin idiom, as τί ἐ. «. o. is against Greek. M. 27. 19, note, Mc. 1. 24. 25. περὶ τοῦ a....ev τῷ a.] This use of ὁ ἄνθρωπος for mankind is not grammatically correct: it is most probably derived from Hebrew : as Gen. 8. 21, DIST 2? ἽΝ), ἡ διάνοια τοῦ ἀνθ. V. A. Mie eea e Cuap. 111. 15,18. πιστεύειν cis] Me. 1. 15, note: supra 1. 12. 20,21. Here d. =) is opposed to ἀλήθ. -- ΠΡ, V. A. Ps. 119. 86,151. Τὸ 16. 9 and M. 11. 19, notes: infra 7. 18. 35. ἐν τῇ x.] Ex. 4. 21, τὰ τέρατα ἃ δέδωκα ἐν ταῖς χερσί σου, Tha ἘΣ WY. It is the diteral translation of 3. CHap. [V. 31. M. 15. 23, L. 4. 38. 35. τὰς χώρας] L, 21. 21, note, Jac. 5. 4. 28 5. JOHN. CHAPTER V. Hepr. 4. κατέβ. ἐν τῇ κ. for εἰς τὴν. 19. 80. ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ. 25. ἔρχ. ὥρω kK. ν. ἐ. Non-C. 4. κατὰ κα 6. πολὺν xp. ἔχει. 18. ἔλυε TAG. 19. 30. ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ. 35. πρὸς ὥραν, 1 Th. 2. 17, note. 89. δοκεῖτε ἔχ. Μ. 8.9. 44. δόξαν, “approval”: infra 12, 438. 4. εἰς ὃν ἤλπ. Sept. 7. βάλῃ, M. 26. 12. CHAPTER VI. Hepr. 5. πρὸς τ. Φ. 8. εἷς ἐκ τῶν μ. and 11. ἐκ τῶν oy. and 60. 85. ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς. 89. ἵνα πᾶν...μὴ ἀπ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ. 51, εἰς τὸν at. = pbiyd. 57. καὶ ὁ tp. με κἀκεῖνος... Also 14, 42. Non-C. 6. ἤδει τί ἔμ. 7. Svan. δην. ἄρτοι. 9. παιδ. ἕν. 10. ποιήσ... ἀναπεσεῖν. 11. ὀψαρίων. 12. συναγ. τὰ π. 17. ἤρχοντο. 21. ἤθελον λαβεῖν. 25. ὧδε γέγ. 50. τὶς. 52. ἐμάχ. 57. διὰ with acc.: in sense of through or by. 66. ἐκ τούτου and εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω. 68. ἀπελεύσομαι. 71. ἔλεγε τὸν ᾽1. = “he spoke of.” | Sept. 70. διώβολος = “ adversarius, delator”: (as Judas was) : V. A. for WY, hostis, Esther 7. 4, and (toe, Job 1. 6, 7, 9, Ps. 108. 6. Cuap, V. 2. Βηθεσδὰ] = 191] ΓΞ, home of mercy. 4, κατὰ κι “At times.” κατέβ. ἐν τῇ x.]| One instance among many of ἐν for εἰς as literal rendering of 3, 1 Cor. 7. 15. 13. egév.] V. A. constantly for D or 133, literally ‘enato,” Schl. ; Judges 4. 18, 18. 26, 2 K. 2. 24, 23. 16. 18. ἔλυσε τὸ o.] In V. A. we find βεβηλοῦν τὸ o. as opposed to ἁγιάζειν, but not λύειν, as opposed to φυλάσσειν, τὸ σ. In N.T. we have it with ἐντολὴν, M. 5. 19, νόμον, J. 7. 23, γραφὴν, 10. 35. 35. πρὸς wpav| See note, 1 Thess. 2. 17, Gal. 2. 5. 44, δόξα] -- approval, good opinion: infra 12. 44, Rom. 3. 23. Cuap, VI. 2. ἐπὶ réva.| ‘in the case of.” 8. εἷς ἐκ τῶν μ.] Corresponding to the use of [Ὁ partitive. Neh. 1. 2, εἷς ἀπὸ ἀδελφῶν pov, Ruth 4. 2. Also infra 60. 27. ἐργάζ.... βρῶσιν]ρ: Compare Eph. 4. 28, épyag. τὸ ἀγαθὸν... Herodotus 1. 24, χρήματα. It is a very rare application of the verb. 35. ὁ ἄρτος τῆς €] Our English idiom corresponds with this Hebraism, which is utterly alien to the Greek: and the words here used cannot, of themselves, convey the idea required. 45. διδακτοὶ @] V. A. for MT "199, “God's Pupils,” “God's enlightened ones,” “God’s instructed ones”: not “ God-enlightened,” 5. 50ΗΝ. 29 CHAPTER VII. HEBR. 1. περιεπάτει. 18. ἀληθὴς... ἀδικία, M. 11.19, L. 16. 9. 19. 80. xai=but, yet. 2, ἐκ τῶν μ. 31. ὅτε emphatic. Also 12. 28. 29. Non-C. 4, ἐν παρρησίᾳ. 15. μὴ μεμαθ. 41. μὴ γὰρ. SEPT. 20. δαιμόνιον = evil spirit. Infra 10, 20: see M. 9. 33, 1 Tim 4. 1, notes. CHAPTER VIII. Hepr. 10. ἡ γυνή, vocative. 15. κατὰ τὴν σάρκα. 31. μένητε ἐν τῷ dr. Also 17. 35. Non-C. 2. ἡἠρχόμην as imperfect of ἔρχομαι. 6. γῆν = ground. 9. εἷς καθ᾽ εἷς and οἱ ἔσχατοι = youngest. 12. οὐ μὴ with future. 23. ἐκ τῶν κάτω...ἄνω. 25. τὴν ἀρχὴν. 37. χωρεῖ. SEPT. 29. ἀφίημι = “leave,” Mc. 12. 12: CHAPTER IX. Hesr. 9. ὅτε (thrice) emphatic, and 41: M. 7. 23, note, and Cap. 10. 36, 41. 32. ἐκ τοῦ ai. “God-instructed”: Is. 54. 13, θήσω. ..πάντας... διδακτοὺς Θεοῦ, M. 25. 34, note. Our E. V. rendering “ taught of God,” which, no doubt, conveys the spirit of the words, seems to coincide so exactly with διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ, that a less careful student might suppose it gave the letter also, which it does not: this would require ὑπὸ. Cuap. VII. 4. ἐν wappyoia| Mark 8. 32: infra 11.54. Here it seems to mean “a state in which every one talks of you.” 18. ἀληθὴς] Opposed to adios, as L. 16. 9, 11, 2 Thess. 2. 10, 36. Ἑλλήνων] Vulg. “Gentium”; E, V. “Gentiles.” So 1 Cor. 10. 32 and elsewhere. To the Jews, apparently, the term Ἕλλην took in all the rest of mankind : ᾿Ιουδαῖοί re καὶ Ἕλληνες. 38. ποταμοὶ... ζῶντος], There is no such passage, word for word, in the Old T. But the idea is fully conveyed by Is. 35. 1, 6, 7, describing the life-giving, renovating, effects of the Holy Spirit, consequent on the coming of Messiah, God Incarnate, vv. 2, 4. 39. “Nondum effusus erat”: compare Acts 19. 2. Cuap. VIII. 44. Subaudi τις : “when a man speaks a lie, he speaks what is natural to him: for he is a liar, like his father the Devil”: “he and his father” are alike, - 58. πρὶν ᾽Α. γεν.) “before A. was born.” 30 5. JOHN. Non-C. 2. ἤμαρτεν ἵνα γεννηθῇ, irregular sequence. ὅ. ὅταν = ἐβο long as.” 16. τηρεῖν τὸ σ. 18, αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀναβλ. 25. av. CHAPTER X. Hesr. 28. εἰς τὸν ai. 32. ἐκ τοῦ πατρός. 42. ἐπίστευσαν ς... Mc. 1.15, note. Also 36. 41. Non-C. 10. θύειν = “kill.” 11. καλὸς for ἀγαθὸς. 12. ὁ... οὐκ ὧν, for 6 μὴ. 15. γινώσκω =I know. 18. ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ and ἐντολὴ. 24. τὴν ψυχὴν αἴρεις = “suspensam tenes.” 31. ἐβάστασαν. SEPT. 12. ἀφίησι, supra 8. 29. 22. ἐγκαίνια, Ezr. 6. 17, Neh. 12. 27. Also 20. CHAPTER ΧΙ. Hesr. 26. 31. Non- C. 3. ἴδε for ἴδου. 7. ἄγωμεν intrans. 9. προσκόπτει. 17. τ. ἡμ. ἔχοντα. 18. ἀπὸ σταδίων 6. infra 12. 1. 33. ἐτάραξεν ἑ. 44, ἡ ὄψις and ἄφετε ὑπ. 21. 28. 56.57. 47. συνήγ... «συνέδρ. CHAPTER XII. Heese. 4. εἷς ἐκ. 11.386. ἐπέστ. εἰς, infra 14.1,12. 13. ὠσαννὰ, Μ. 21. 10, note. 36. υἱὸν φ. 34. Cuar. IX. 7. Σιλωὰμ] OY, Is. 8. 7, from MY, emisit: “fons emissionis,” i.e. “fons aque se effundens in lacum”: Grimm. Cap. X. 4. ἐκβάλῃ] M. 9. 38, Mc. 1. 43. Same use of verb in V. A. 2 Chr. 23. 14, ἐκβάλετε αὐτὴν ἐκτὸς τοῦ οἴκου, and 29. 5, ἐκβάλετε τὴν ἀκαθαρσίαν ἐκ τῶν ἁγίων, for NYT = « put out.” 10. θύειν, for occidere, to slay, without any sacrificial meaning, is very seldom found in Classical Authors, and in V. A. apparently once only, Is. 22. 13: in Apocrypha Sir. 24. 32, 1 Mace. 7. 19: and in N. T. only in the present instance. 11. καλὸς as equivalent to ἀγαθὸς, is very rarely met with, in the best writers, except in the neuter and in the phrase καλὸς καγαθός. 1ὅ. κἄγω γινώσκω] “so I know”: a common Hebraism, supra 6. 57. 17. τιθέναι] = “‘depono, abjicio,” would seem to be confined to 5. John: supra 11, and 13. 4, 37, 15. 15. 1 John 3. 16. 35. λυθῆναι] supra 5, 18. Cuap. XI. 48. ἔθνος] Only occasionally used for the Jewish nation, instead of Aads, L. 7. 5, Acts 10. 22. 54. παρρησίᾳ! Me. 8. 32, note, Col. 2. 15. 55. χώρα, in sense of the country, rus, has some Classical authority, Xen. Mem. 3. 6. 11. Cuap. XIT. 1. πρὸ ἐξ yy.) A similar construction to ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκ. 11. 18, 21. 8. 5. JOHN. 51 Non-C, 6. τὸ γλ....«Δη τὰ Badr. 8. μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν with you. 15. καθημ. ἐπὶ πῶλον, acc. 32. ἐκ for ἀπὸ 48. δέξα -- good opinion: supra 5. 44. 48, λαμβάνων = receiving, assenting to, SEPT. 21. épwraw for αἰτέω, M. 15. 23, note: infra 14.16. and 17. 9.15. 37. ἔμπροσθεν, in presence of: note M. 5. 16. CHAPTER XIII. Hesr.. 8. 33. 35. Non-C. 4. τίθησι τὸ ἱμ. : supra 10.17. 18. dev. = call: supra 9.18. 21. érap. τῷ mv. dat. 22. ἀπορουμένοι and περὶ τίνος. 87. SEPT. 2.5. βάλλειν = put: note M. 9. 38. 3. ἐπληρώθη ἐκ τῆς ὁ.] -- Ὁ nb, V. A. Ps. 127. 5, μακάριος ὃς πλη- ρώσει τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν αὐτοῦ ἐξ αὐτῶν : Lev. 9. 17, προσήνεγκε τὴν θυσίαν καὶ ἔπλησε τὰς χεῖρας ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς. 7. ἄφες αὐ. “allow her”: see L. 18, 16, and M. 18. 12, notes, Supra 11. 44, 20. Ἕλληνες here stands for Jews settled abroad: Greek-Jews. 22. Andrew and Philip, both Greek names: they may possibly have had Greek connexions, and so were naturally applied to by these Greeks, i.e. foreign Jews. 38. Strictly ἀκοὴ = “id quod audit.” V. A. give it for MUIDY, “id quod auditur”; Is. 53. 1, “a message,” R. 12. 16, Hebr. 4.2. The whole passage is a quotation from V. A., as R. 10. 16. 40, See M. 13. 14, note, for the parallel passage. Cuap, XIII. 21. érap. τῷ πν.] Dat. of part. instead of acc., M. δ. 3, L. 19. 3, Acts 2. 37, 18. 25, R. 14. 1, Eph. 4. 18, 23, Col. 1. 21. Cuar. XIV. 16. παράκλ.] “Qui interpellat divinas aures pro nobis,” Rom. 8. 27: “‘advocationis implens officia et defensionis exhibens munera.” The same word, 1 J. 2. 1, is applied to our Lord, “advocate.” In the Fathers, “advocatio” and ‘ consolatio” are used as equivalent terms: Pearson, Art. 8. But may not owr Translation, * Comforter” = Strengthener (fortis), be a pregnans interpretatio, and really carry us back to the true meaning of Παράκλητος, as understood by Students of V. A., like 8. John; whose knowledge of Greek was probably gained originally from that Book? Ps. 125. 1, pypbns 7, woe. παρακεκλημένοι, Is. 38. 16, YOON, παρακληθεὶς ἔζησα (“so wilt Thou recover me,” E. V.): where V. A. clearly connects notion of “strength, renewal, recovery,” with παρακαλέω. 920 (generally ‘to 92 S. JOHN. CHAPTER XV. Non-C. 18. πρῶτον ὑ. 15.16. ἔθηκα v. CHAPTER XVI. HeBr. 2. ἔρχεται dpa. 26. ἐρωτήσω. 30. ἐν τούτῳ. Non-C. 2. δόξῃ, M. 3.8. 15. ἐκ τοῦ ἐμοῦ for ἐκ τῶν ἐμῶν. 17. εἶπον ἐκ τῶν μ. some of. 21. γεννᾷν, of the mother. dream”) means also to be strong: Job 99, 4, ὉΠῺ3 sn}, “their young ones grow strong”: Job 4. 3, Pion mip) OD), χείρας ἀσθενεῖς παρεκαλέσας: Ts, 35. 3, ἸῸΝ mova ὩΣ ΞἼΞ, yovara παραλελυμένα παρακαλέσατε: Deut. 8, 28, IN¥DN, παρακαλέσατε αὐτόν. In all these, the Hebrew is unmis- takeably “strengthen”: Acts 9. 31, ropevopevar τῇ παρακλ. Cuap. XV. 2,3. xafaipw=purgo, to prune. “Ye are already clean” (not as result of καθ, in 2, but of “the washing” 13. 10). διὰ τ. X.] “for the reception of...” not as our E. V. ‘‘through the word...” nor propter, “on account of,” as Vulgate. 6, 8. The whole construction of these two verses is most irregular ; the tense in ἐβλήθη, ἐξηρ. and ἐδοξάσθη, the article in τὸ κλῆμα, the plural in αὐτὰ, and the change of subject in ovvay. and καίεται, and the illative use of conjunction in καὶ γενήσεσθε. Cuap. XVI. 2. épx. dpa ἵνα] We may translate, almost grammati- cally with Vulgate, ‘“venit hora, ut omnis...arbitretur,” “an hour is coming for every one that killeth you to think”: but this is, possibly, an undue refinement in the conception of the force of ἵνα, which may be meant to convey nothing more than “ when.” 8, ἐλέγξει] “will set the world right”: prove its former notions wrong, give them correct opinions as to sin, and righteousness, and condemnation. 23, 26. ἐρωτήσ. οὐδέν] Ye shall not need to apply to me to explain your difficulties, having the full light of the H. 5. Kai οὐ A. v., ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐρωτ. τ. 7.] Can this perhaps mean “TI shall not need to question the Father as to your acceptance with Him” :—for I know He loves you ? 25, 29. παρρησίᾳῇ] In its primary sense, “speaking everything out,” “keeping nothing back,” “ disguising nothing,” “ plainly,” “ fully.” 32. εἰς τὰ ἴδια] -- εἰς οἶκον, 19. 27, rendered severally in Vulgate “in propria” and “in sua”; against Latin idiom: “to his own house,” V. A. for IMB ΝΣ, Esth. 5. 10, 6. 12, ᾿Αμὰν εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὰ ἴδια and ὑπέστρεψεν... Same sense in Apocrypha, 5. JOHN. 99 CHAPTER XVII. Hepr. 11.17. ev. 9.15. ἐρωτῶ. 12. ὁ vi. τῆς ἀπ. Non-C. 2. πᾶν ὃ for πάντα ἃ. 23. ter. εἰς ἕν. Ἶ CHAPTER XVIII. Non-C. 2. συνήχθη. 11. ov μὴ interrog. 32. ἵνα πληρωθῇ in a past sense: as παραδ. in 80, CHAPTER XIX. HEBR. 3. ὁ Bac. voc. 18. εἰς τόπον, M. 13. 56, note. Sept. 27. εἰς τὰ ἴδια, supra 16. 32. Cuap. XVII. 5. ᾿τῇ δόξῃ] Dat. of “manner,” very rare in 8. John, 11. 2, 33, 43, 21. 8. 11. ἐν τῷ ov. cov] “by Thy power, Thy attributes of might”: involved in DY, 12. ὁ vi τ. dw] Is. 1. 4, MND 13, vids ἄνομος, V. A. 57. 4, DUD "10, τέκνα ἀπωλείας : in Apocrypha, Sir. 16. 9, ἔθνος ἀπ. ‘‘ Homo perditus, de cujus salute plane desperandum est,” Schl. Vulg. “filius perditionis,” which means no more, in real Latin, than “Son of per- dition” does in true English. All three translations, Greek, Latin, and English, of this commen Hebrew form, are utterly against the idiom of the several languages: although a correct sense has been assigned to them by traditional explanation and general acceptation. M. 8. 12, 23. 15, L. 10. 6, notes. Cuap. XVIII. 11. οὐ μὴ πίω] I cannot recal any instance of this equivalent for the future negative, wsed interrogatively. 31. ny. od. € ἀπ. od8.] Not absolutely, but at this season of the Passover (perhaps): or on such a charge, political and not religious. They put Stephen to death: and our Lord recognises their power to do so, M. 33. 31—34. Cuap. XIX. 3. ἐδίδουν av. far.] Supra 18. 22, Vulg. “dabant ei alapas”: comp. 2 Th. 1. 8, διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν : Vulg. “dantis vindictam.” It appears to be a Hebrew idiom ; it is hardly Greek or Latin: but it falls naturally into English, as Hebrew idioms often do. See below, 11. 11. διὰ τοῦτο] is used by V. A. for 122, in both of its meanings: “therefore” and “nevertheless”: “for this” and “for all this.” The latter, of course, is less common. Probably we should take it so here, “ notwithstanding.” Is. 7. 14, 10. 24, 30. 18, Jerem. 5. 2, 16. 14, 30. 16, Ez. 39. 25, in all of which V. A. has διὰ τοῦτο, and our GU. 9 94 5. JOHN. CHAPTER XX. Hepr. 16. ῥαββ. 19. 26. εἰς τὸ μέσον. 21. εἰρήνη ὑ. 31. ἐν τῷ ὁ. αὖ. Non-C. 7. ἕνα for τινα. 15. δοκοῦσα = cogitans, M. 3. 9, and éBaot.=taken away. Also 1. 3. SEPT. 25. βάλω. 27. φέρε.. ἴδε. CHAPTER XXI. Hesr. 4. εἰς τὸν αἰ. supra 1.18, 4. 1. 6. ἀπὸ τοῦ md. for 2) causze, M. 7. 16, Heb. 5. 7, notes. 23. καὶ = adda, a common sense of }. Non-C. 8. ὑπάγω ἁλιεύειν. 8. ὡς ἀπὸ 7. 6.12.1. 9. κειμένην. 12. ἐξέτασαι αὐτὸν. 14. τοῦτο Tp. ἐφαν. 25. πολλὰ ὅσα ἐπ. and omission of ἂν before χωρῆσαι. E. V. “therefore”: although, “for all this,” “nevertheless” is clearly required. Of course we find, as is to be expected, ‘‘ propterea, propter hoc, ideo,” in these passages in Vulgate : the indiscriminate, unreflecting rendering of 122, by the words generally expressing its meaning, as though it had no other. Any one who will take the trouble to examine the passages cited above, will be struck with the obvious inaccuracy of the Greek, Latin, and English translations, and the necessity of substi- tuting the adversative for the causal adverb. Our English idiom “for all this” suits the Hebrew exactly. Cuar. XX. 10. πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς] Vulg. “ad semetipsos”: both alike unintelligible to persons acquainted only with ordinary Greek and Latin, and apparently Hebraic. 1 Sam. 26. 12, pip 339%, is exactly equivalent to our text. Prov. 15. 27, ima DY, V. A. ἐξόλλυσιν ἑαυτὸν. These two passages seem to suggest that πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς = DI? = DMNA OS = οἴκαδε. 20. εἰρήνη t.] This very common Hebrew mode of greeting or blessing, nab Diy, corresponding to the Salaam Aleicum of the East of our day, is not often found in V. A., in ¢éhis, the stmplesé¢ form : instances are Judges 6. 23, 1 Chr. 12. 18. We are so familiar with it, from Scriptural and Liturgical use, that we are apt to forget that neither thus, nor its Latin equivalent, ‘‘ Pax vobiscum,” are natural idiomatic expres- sions in Greek or Latin, or give a full and adequate idea of its Hebrew meaning. THE ACTS. CHAPTER I. HeBR. 5. ov peta π. ἡ. 6. et...a7rox. M. 12. 10 and infra 19. 2., 10. καὶ ἰδοὺ, Gen. 40. 9. 18. ἐκ μ. 19. ᾿Ακελδαμά. ΝΘ 5pn, Ch.: D7 Hebr. = blood. 20. ἐν 8. >. the omission of the article. Also 2. 3. 5. Non-C. 4. συναλιζ. 7. ἔθετο ἐν τ. ἰ. ἐς 18. ἐλάκησε μέσος. 21. συνελθόντων 7. in the sense here obviously required. 2ὅ, παρ-. έβη πορευθῆναι. Serr. 15. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ for WI or WM, cap. 8.1, Deut. 25. 5, 11, ἐὰν κατοικῶσιν and ἐὰν μάχωνται...ἐπὶ τ. av. Cuap. I. 4. τὴν ἐπαγ.] Comp. Eph. 1. 18, πνεῦμα τῆς ἐπ, 6. εἰ] M. 12. 10, note, and infra 19. 2: Τ,, 14. 3, 8, ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς y.| Infra 13. 47, where we have the phrase in text exactly quoted from V. A. for PSP ΠΝ, 10. καὶ ἰδοὺ] M. 9. 10, note. For the apparently superfluous καὶ, see Gen. 40. 9, Py) }P2 7277) spiona, where the Ὁ is purely, to our notions, without force: so 39. 19, IBN 70°...YOWD, ὡς ἤκουσε... καὶ ἐθυ- μώθη. It is a very common Hebr. idiom: impossible to render /iterally in Greek—as V. A. have done, and the N. T. writers, following in their track, and using the familiar phrase caught from them—without a solecism. 18. ᾿Αλφαίου... Ζηλωτὴς.] M. 10. 4. Has the omission of the article in the patronymic genitive, any examples in Classical Greek ? 14. σὺν y.] “with certain women.” Or are we to take this as an instance of an omitted article, so common in G. T.? Heb. 1. 1, ἐν vid. | 15. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ] M. 22. 34, L. 17. 35, notes. It is constantly used by V. A. and seems peculiar to them, Ps. 2. 2, of ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν 3—2 90 ACTS. CHAPTER II. Hesr. 17. πᾶσα σὰρξ -Ξ- 811 mankind. 18. amo τ΄ mv. 19. δώσω τ. 22. ἀπὸτ. ΘΕ 24. ὠδῖνας. 25. εἰς αὐτόν. 27. 31. εἰς ἅδους 28. μετὰ τοῦ π. 80. ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ood. 34, ἐκ δεξιῶν =o", Me. 16. 5, note. 46, ἐν dy. 47. πρὸς ὅ. τ. Ἃ. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ, Deut. 22. 10, οὐκ ἀροτριάσεις ἐν μόσχῳ καὶ ὄνῳ ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ, which I cite to show that the phrase can be used without any idea implied of “motion towards,” as simply meaning “ together,” as in the passage before us, and cap. 2. 1. Observe also the strange misuse of ἐν for 3, so common in V. A., M. 3. 11, note; which Vulgate has per- petuated, here as elsewhere, by its use of in for év, against the very genius of the language: e.g. ‘‘non arabis im bove et asino simul,” where the use of the future tense, in Greek and Latin alike, by way of prohibi- tion, is as utterly wrong as the use of the preposition, M. 5. 48, 19. 18, notes. Ps. 42, 4, 137 32, ἐν φώνῃ ἀγαλλιάσεως, V. A, “in voce exsulta- tionis,” Vulg.: forced even into English, in our Prayer-Book Version, translated mainly from Vulg., by the absurdly literal “I went.. in the voice of joy and praise.” y, M. 18. 5. 47. πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν] An instance of πρὸς = ON, apud: J. 1. 1, 2 Th. 3. 10, notes. Cuar. ILI. 1. ἐπὶ τὴν ὧρ.] ἐπὶ here and 4. 5 is literal for ?. Me. 15. 1, note. 38 SCOTS. Non-C. 2. τις ἀνὴρ. 5. ἐπεῖχεν. 10. πρὸς τὴν ἐλ. 12. rer. tov w. 16. ὁλοκληρ. 19. ἐξαλειφθ. the past tense. 21. ὠπο- KaTaoT. Sept. 1. ἐπὶ τὸ av. supra 1. 15, note. CHAPTER LY. Hepr. 2. ἐν rol. 5. ἐπὶ τὴν αὖ. 3. 1. 12. ἐν a. ovdert. 17. ἀπειλῇ am. and ἐπὶ τῷ ov. τ. Μ. 18. 5. 19. ἐνώπιον τοῦ O, 27. ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας, Mc. 12.14. 36. vids π. 7. 9. 11. 5. ἐπεῖχεν av.] Found in this sense in V. A., Job 27. 8, 30. 26, and in Apocrypha: Sir. 34. 2, 35. 11. 12. πεπ. τοῦ περιπ.] “the efficient cause of”: as if participle had passed into a substantive, and ὁ πεπ. -- ὁ ποιητὴς -- ὁ αἴτιος. LL. 17. 1, ἀνένδεκτον, infra 7. 10, ἡγούμενον ἐπὶ. 18. κατὰ πρ. IL] ΡΣ a pure Hebraism. 19. ὅπως] “in order that a time...may come...and that He may send...”: their repentance and conversion would hasten and secure the coming of Jesus again. ; 25. πατριαὶ] Gen. 12.3: V. A. here has ἔθνη. But πατριὰ gene- rally stands for 19521) familia, “quarum plures una tribus comprehen- debat; sicut una familia plures domos paternas, οἴκους, MIN Ma” Gesenius. ἐξ οἴκου καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυὶδ (L. 2. 4) “non solum ex eddem prosapia, sed etiam ex ipsius Davidis familia” Grimm. Cuap. IV. 11. γεν. eis κεφ. γ.] M. 2. 6 and 21. 42, notes. 12. We can make this grammatical only by taking τὸ δεδομ. ἐν ἀνθ. as the subject to ἐστι. ‘ And the salvation (of the world) is not by any one else: for the Name set forth and given out among men, by and through which we must be saved, is no other Name under Heaven.” All three uses of ἐν in the verse are Hebraic. 21. ‘Finding the-way-to-punish-them none at all”; ‘not forth- coming.” 23. "τοὺς ἰδίους) J. 1. 11, 13. 1, 1 Tim. 5. 8, unusual “apad Greecos” as a noun, or adjective without a noun: J. 6, 32. 27. λαοῖς “I.] Most unusual in plural, as applied to the Jews: Grimm explains its introduction here as due to the use of plural in verse 25, quoted from V. A. But this can hardly hold: for the word- there refers not to Jews, but to heathen, and is put for DYNO = ἔθνη. 30. εἰς ἴασιν καὶ σημεῖα...γίνεσθαι] We may take this either as if (1) all the nouns are connected with γίνεσθαι, or as if (2) the preposition is to be supplied again before σημεῖα : either (1) “ for cures and signs... ACTS. 39 Non-C. 2. διαπ. 3. ἔθεντο εἰς τ. 9. evepy. ἀνθ. ἀσθ, 13. ἰδιῶται. 15. συνέβαλον. 10. τέ π. τοῖς a. τ. dative. 23. τοὺς ἰδ, and ὅσα. 33. μεγ. Suv. 84, κτήτορες. 35. καθ. ἄν τις εἶχε. 37. τὸ χρῆμα. CHAPTER V. Hesr. 8. εἰ, infra 7. 1, interrog. 9. τί ὅτι Ξε 3 AY. 10. πρὸς τ. dad. 28. ὅτι emphatic, and ἐν π. da. 28, παραγγ. παρηγγ. and ἐπὶ τῷ ὁὄ. 806. ἐγέν. εἰς οὐδ. 41. ἀπὸ mp. : Non-C. 1. ᾽Αν. ὀνόματι. 3. edo. σε τὸ πν. 4. ey. avOp. 5. ἐξέψυξε. 7. μὴ id. 16. ὀχλου. 17. ἡ οὖσα αἵ. 19. διὰ τῆς ν. 21. ἀπέστ....ἀχθ. 30. ἐπὶ & 53. διεπρί, 84. τίμιος TOA. 8. προσέχ. ἑ. 1.. 17. 8. 37. ἱκανὸν, L. 8. 27, note. to be done,” or (2) “ἴον healing, and for the working of signs...”._ The difference is very slight: and in each case the strange construction of an infinitive, standing for a noun and governed by a preposition, without an article, εἰς... γίνεσθαι instead of εἰς τὸ... γίνεσθαι, has to be accounted for. This cannot be done on any principles of Greek syntax: but as Dynal nitix nig? would be correct in Hebrew, we see how its literal equivalent may have found its way into N. T. I cannot cite any instances from V. A., though I doubt not they abound. 36. Bap Nafas|=8!3) 13, “filius interpretationis” or “ vaticina- tionis”: not “consolation,” but “instruction, prophesying, preaching.” “Sons of the Prophets,” in V. T., means “persons trained to be Religious Teachers”: and “Son of exposition” = “good expounder.” M. 8. 12, 23.15, Our Translators were influenced, probably, by wswal meaning of παράκλησις, as if wniversal ; but see infra 13, 15, 15. 31, which bear quite naturally the sense of “exhortation,” “ exposition.” 37. τὸ χρῆμα] I find no instance of the singular in V. A. Grimm says, ‘‘raro in sing. pro pecuniad apud profanos.” Cuap. V. 10. ἔθαψαν πρὸς τὸν a.] Vulg. “ad virum ejus” against Latin idiom, for “apud” or “juxta.” J. 1. 1, note. 17. ἡ οὖσα aip.] This cannot be strictly translated, according to grammatical rules, so as to give the meaning required: it is altogether anomalous. Compare infra 13. 1, 28. 17. 18. zyp.] Not the place, but the act: “put them up safe in public keeping.” 28. The Pharisees brought about the death of Jesus, not the Sadducees: and these were naturally unwilling to have it ascribed to them. 40 ACTS. CHAPTER VI. Hepr. 1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμ. τ. 5. ἤρεσεν... ἐνώπιον. 11. ὅτι emph. Non-C. 1. παρεθεωρ. 9. μαρτυρουμ. 7. ὁ λόγος ηὔξανε. CHAPTER VII. Hesr. 1. εἰ...ἔχει, L. 14.3. 2.6 Θ. τῆς δόξης. 4. εἰς ἣν. 14. ἐν ψ. €85. 23. ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τ. x. av. 36. ἐν yf...ev ἐρ. 8. omission of 42. κατ᾽ οἷ} “at home.” πᾶσαν ny. seems to mean, strictly, “all the day long,” rather than “every day.” Σ 3085; Cuap. VI. 1. ἋὩἙλληνισταὶ, Ἑβραῖοι] Dr Roberts (Diss. on Gospels) argues that these terms indicate principles and not birth-place. Clearly, all in the Church as yet were Jews by birth. But the Jews, in Pales- tine and abroad, had long been divided into two parties: the old, strict, Jewish party (Efp.) and the innovators (EAAnvior.) Hellenizers, who adopted Greek names, habits, ideas, “Ἑλληνίζειν is not merely to speak Greek, but to imitate Greeks: “to play the Greek.” οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς, 10. 45, 11. 2 -- Ἑβραϊοι in above sense. Jews settled in Greek countries are called Ἕλληνες, J. 12. 20. But generally in G. T. Ἰουδαῖος is - opposed to Ἕλλην, infra 18. 4, 19. 10, 17, R. 1. 16, 10. 12, 1 Cor. 1. 24, Col. 3. 11, and “Efpatos to “Ἑλληνιστής : and this may possibly illustrate the title of the Epistle πρὸς Ἑβραίους, as addressed, not to the Jews generally, nor even to the Jewish converts collectively, but to the strict Jewish party, the sticklers for the Law, in the Church. 5. ἤρεσεν... ἐνώπιον] =" AN", in V. A. generally: e.g. Deut. 1. 23, 2 Sam. 3. 36, yp. ἐν. αὐτῶν πάντα. It is altogether Hebraic: “it seemed good in their eyes” our EH. V. constantly: exactly corresponding with the Hebrew. It is worthy of note that the names of all the seven are Greek: as if selected on purpose to satisfy the “Ἕλληνισταί, 7. ὁ λόγος... ηὔξανε] We must take the verb as applied to the growth of a tree, and the spread of its branches: “the word of the Lord”—not “increased” (which conveys no meaning, and is, in fact, necessarily impossible: for ‘‘the Gospel,” “the Revealed Word of God,” here alluded to, admits of no increase or addition), but—“spread abroad.” Cuap. VIT. 2. What is the bearing and scope of 8. Stephen’s speech? It seems as if he wanted to reply to the two accusations, cap. 6. 14: and so argues, (1) that while they talked so much of Moses and obedience to the Law, they had really rejected him (39) and many of the Prophets, showing thereby that they did not know God’s messengers when among them, and so it was with the Christ when He came (51): and (2) that ACTS. 41 article. 37. ἀκούσεσθε, future-imperative, 1. 17. 4. 42. τῇ στρατ. τοῦ οὐρ. and ἐν β. τῶν mp. and οἶκος ᾽Ισρ. nom. for voc. 45. ἀπὸ mp. 58. εἰς διατ. Also 29. 34, 8ὅ. 44, 55. Non-C. 10. ἡγούμενον, supra 8. 12. 1]. yopr. 12. σῖτα. 19. κατασοφ. τὸ γι 31. 32. κατανοῆσαι. 51. ἀπερίτμ. TH κ.... dative οἵ part.: and ἀντιπίπτετε. Also 54. SEPT. 10. ἐναντίον. 19. τοῦ 7. for nivyd and ζωογ. CHAPTER VIII. HEBR. ἐν ἐκ, TH ἡμέρᾳ for χρόνῳ. 10. ἀπὸ μ. ἕως μ. 17. 39. mv. ay. Without article: comp. 18. 20. εἴη εἰς ad. 23. whole verse. 40, es "A. M. 13. 56, J. 1. 18. Jerusalem was not necessarily the only place of worship, nor the posses- sion of Juda essential to God’s people, nor the Temple indispensable (38, 44, 48). 14. ἐν ψ. €B3.] See M. 3. 11, note, for this use of ἐν. 19. τοῦ ποιεῖν] = nivy?, M. 2. 6, note, from V. A. Infra 13. 47. For ζωογονεῖν = “ to preserve alive,” see L. 17. 33. 20. aor. τῷ @.| Compare Jon. 8. 3, pdb ΠΟ VY, πόλις μεγάλη τῷ Θ. V, A. an evident Hebraism. 2 Cor. 10. 4, δυνατὰ τῷ Θ. 30. φ. π. β.] “a fire-flame of a bush”; “ἃ bush-fire flame”: “a bush-emitted fire-flame.” 84, δεῦρο] “V. A. potissimum pro J? and 125” Grimm. 1K. 16. 1, 20. 20, Jud. 4. 22, 2 K. 5. 19, ΚΣ 72, “oo in peace,” δεῦρο εἰς εἰρή- νην, 2 most startling instance of their slavish adherence to the use of one word, against the sense, much the same as supra, verse 3, where it means not “come,” but go”: as 1 Kings 1. 53. The form had become familiar among the Jews of our Lord’s day. M. 19. 21, Mc. 10. 21. 42. τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ odp.| ‘The literal translation by V. A. of 82¥ Dv, “agmen celeste,” pl. “Sabaoth”: “quod (1) nunc de angelorum, (2) nune de siderum agmine dicitur” Grimm, (1) 1 K. 22. 19, Neh. 9.6: in N. T., L. 2. 13 and possibly this verse: (2) 2 Chr. 33. 3, 5 and elsewhere. 53. εἰς διαταγὰς d.] Deut. 33. 2, M. 13. 56, εἰς for ON “apud, inter”: as Deut. 16. 6, DID DS. .MDBI-NS nam, θύσεις τὸ πάσχα... εἰς τὸν τόπον. 1 Kings 8. 30. Cuap. ὙΠΠ. 10. ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως pey.] 1 Sam. 80. 19, V. A. for bya Tw) WPT ἢ and also Ex. 22. 3, Deut. 29. 10, altogether Hebraic. 16. PeBarr. εἰς τὸ dv.] M. 18. 20, 28. 19, 1 Cor. 10. 2, Gal. 3. 27. 21. εὐθεῖα] V. A. for W, being its primary meaning. Judg. 17. 6, T 1 42 ACTS. Non-C. 1. κατὰ τὰς χώρας. 2. κοπετὸν. 8. κατὰ τοὺς ol. εἰσ. 10. ἡ καλουμ. 11. ix. χρόνῳ, dative of duration of time: and ἐξεστακέναι. 13. ἐξίστατο. 16. ἐπ᾽ οὐδενὶ: dat. for acc. 22. εἰ dpa = “if anyhow,” “if possibly.” 27. δυνάστης. 30. γιγνώσκ. 32. περιοχὴ. 34. δέομαί σου. Sept, 21, εὐθεῖα for ὀρθὴ. CHAPTER IX, HEBR. 2. τῆς ὁδοῦ. 15. σκεῦος ἐ. 31. πορευ. τῷ fp. 42. ἐπ. ἐπὶ τὸν Κ. Μ. 27. 49, Mc. 1. 15, notes. ἀνὴρ τὸ εὐθὲς ἐν ὀφθ. αὐτοῦ ἐποίει, 2 }3 WT, What is wanted for sense is ὀρθὴ, not straight, but upright : not planum but rectum. λόγῳ] literal for 127 in its constant meaning of “res, negotium”: E. V. “in this matter.” Vulg. verbatim, ‘in sermone isto.” 23. ὄντα eis] Supra 4. 11. “1 see thou art becoming a deadly poison and a bundle of wickedness.” yx. π.] “bile of bitterness”: ie. very, utter, mere, bile, or bitterness, which, in Hebrew, implies poison. Job 20. 25. Ges. sub voce ΠῚ and 0°87 9, of the adulterous wife, N. 5.18: Ps. 69. 22, °N132 WN UA: “they put poison into my food,” V. A. εἰς τὸ βρῶμά pov ἔδωκαν χολὴν, Deut. 29. 18, pila φύουσα ἄνω ἐν x. καὶ 7. In margin of Εἰ, V. “a poisonful herb.” Quoted at Hebr. 12. 15. 30. γιγνώσκω] in later Greek, seems to have meant “to under- stand”: whence γνῶσις. Infra 21. 37. 31. πῶς yap;| “ Why, how can 1?” 33. τ. γ. αὖ. τίς δ] “ Who will state his past history,” ie. “speak to his character”? V. A. give γενέαι for ΠῚ, Gen. 6. 9, 15. 53. 8, in this sense: in the first passage it clearly = “history.” 34, δέομαί σοῦ] A unique and peculiar use of the words, by way of adjuration and appeal, standing alone, without an infinitive or accusa- tive or dependent sentence expressing the object of the request. We ought, probably, to supply εἰπεῖν. Our English phrase “I pray thee” in E, V. is idiomatic, and conveys the idea naturally: which the Greek does not. Cuap.-TX. 2. τινας... ἄνδρας te καὶ y.| In good Greek this would be, εἴτε a. εἴτε y. For τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντας, compare infra 19. 9, 23, 22. 4, 24, 22. In each case, of course, we must supply τοῦ Θεοῦ or τοῦ K. to complete the-phrase as commonly found. In the Hebrew idiom, true religion is ‘‘the road to Heaven”; ‘“‘God’s way” as contrasted with “man’s way”: and this metaphor pervades and colours all the phraseo- logy both of Old and New Test. Ps. 25. 8, 12, 67. 2, 139. 24: M. 22. ACTS. 43 Non-C. 1. éumv. aw. gen. 7%. μηθένα, 9.26. wy. 10.11. ὀνόματι, a sort of dative of manner. 21. ἐξίσταντο and πορθήσας. 21. 24. Non- “sequence ¢ of Tenses. 22. συνέχυνε. 27. πῶς. 31. 49. καθ᾽ ὅλης... 36. τις ἦν wad. ungrammatical order of words. Sept, 10, ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ, Gen. 22. 1, 27. 1, for 9337. CHAPTER X. Hepr. 4. εἰς pv. Ex. 17. 14, κατάγραψον τοῦτο εἰς μνημ. 14. 28. οὐδ... .πᾶν κοινὸν. 17. καὶ ἰδοὺ, and ἐπὶ τὸν π΄. = PS apud. 16, Acts 18. 25, 26. The special peculiarity in the passage before us, and those akin to it cited first above, is that they show implicitly, if not explicitly, that the Church from the very first assumed and proclaimed the Christian Religion to be emphatically and alone “the way,” 1.6. “the road to Heaven,” ‘the way of life,” ‘“God’s way.” 15. ox. ἐκλ)] Jer, 50. 25, Out 3, ox. ὀργῆς, R. 9. 22, ox. ὀργῆς. βαστάσαι τὸ 6. μου ἐνώπιον] “to lift ef “to exalt” my name “in the presence of.” 29. §. Paul had no sympathy with the Hellenizers, as being, pos- sibly, many of them, Sadducees: he was Ἔβρ. ἐξ Ἕβρ. 6. 1, κατὰ νόμον Φαρισαῖος, Ph. 3. 5. Grimm narrows the meaning of “EAAqnor. : “dicitur in N. T. de Judis apud exteros natis et Greece loquentibus”: and Schl. takes the same inadequate view. 31, 42. καθ᾽ ὅλης...1 T find no clue to this use of gen. in V. A. nor can I connect it with any Hebrew form. πορευόμ. τῷ φόβῳ] Pos- sibly “dat. of manner,” very rare in N. T., L. 20. 47, note: but the construction is unnatural. Of course πορευόμ. is a well-known Hebrew idiom literally rendered into Greek, to which it is utterly alien, and conveys no such idea as that of the original: no more than it would in English, if we were not habituated to its use in Holy Scripture. For παρακλήσει τοῦ ay. mv. see J. 14, 16, note. If we retain here the rendering of E. V., “the comfort of the H. Gh.”, it must be in its primary, natural, sense of strength (from fortis), or rather ‘“ strengthen- ing”; “encouragement” ey: 35. πάντες οἱ k....olrwes ἐπ.}] This can hardly mean, with our E. V., “all those who dwelt...saw him and turned” either in construc- tion of sentence or in probability : rather “all the inhabitants, who had turned..., saw him.” Cuap. X. 14, 28. xowov] M. 15. 11, Me. 7. 2, 15, note. 45. ot ἐκ π. m.| This shows there was a party without the Church not πιστοί but ἐκ περιτ. ; as 11. 2 shows there were some of the same 44 ACTS. 28. xai=but, as | constantly. 94. ἐπ᾽ adnO. Me. 12. 14, note. 37, τὸ γ. p. Non-C. 2. δεόμ. τοῦ ΘΕ 8. 30. ὥραν ἐνν. point of time: 800. instead of dat. 10. ye(cacOar=eat. 11. apyais=corners. 19, θῦσον, J. 10.10. 17. διερωτ. τὴν ofk. 30. ἀπὸ τετ. nm. μέχρι. 37. τὸ γεν. p. order of words. καθ᾽ ὅλης τῆς ᾽1. supra 9. 31, note. 38. καταδυν. 48. per. SEPT. 6. 32. παρὰ θάλασσαν, Mc. 4.1, note. 15, ἐκ δευτέρου, V. A. for PW3IY, Josh. 5. 2, 2 Sam. 14, 29. CHAPTER XI. Hepr. 8. κοινὸν. 19. ἀπὸ τ. θλ. and ἐπὶ Στ. ém ἢ “super,” “about.” 3.14. 16. Non-C. 10. ἐπὶ τρὶς. 17. ἐγὼ Séand τίς ἤμην δ. κα 22. ἠκ.... εἰς τὰ ὦ. 23. προθ. 26. χρηματ. ὅ. 19. 19. 24. CHAPTER ΧΙ]. Hesr. 23. ὧτ ὧν, ἵ 1. 20, note. Non-C. 2. τὸν a6. "I. collocation of words: and 12. 7. ἐν τάχει. 10. wp. φ. καὶ δ. omission of article: as 11. ἐκ y. and 12. T. κ᾿ . 15. ὁ dyy. av. the article. 23. ἐξέψ. 24. ὁ λόγος Tod O. ηὔξανε, supra 6. 7 note, and 19. 20. Also 17. 19. party, ἐκ a., in the Church. The term implies that there was “a cir- cumcision party”; sticklers for the whole principles of the old Jewish belief: Ἑβραῖοι as opposed to λληνισταὶ, 6. 1. If so, such a party would consist, in all probability, of Pharisees: how then could 8. Paul, as an avowed Pharisee, be opposed to them? Is it not possible that, under one aspect, “EAAnrictys was equivalent to Sadducee ? Supra 9. 29. We know that the latter were in many ways Hellenizers, imitators of the Greeks, in social habits, as in philosophical speculations. Cuap. XII. 3. zp. o.] “He afterwards seized Peter,” M. 6. 33, note: V. A. Gen. 4. 2, ΠΡ APM, καὶ προσέθηκε τεκεῖν, Jud. 20. 28, mo hy AIDING, εἰ προσθῶ ἔτι... (where observe ei =" interrogative, M. 12. 10)2*Gen; 8212; mw ΠΕ» Nx, οὐ προσέθετο τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι (where note the τοῦ, M. 2. 6; which V. A. use so universally for ? with infini- tive, as to have inserted it here, though there is no b in the Hebrew). aco. 11. 12. συνιδὼν] Used, apparently, as if = évvedus, “conscious, aware of the fact.” 14. 6. ACTS. 45 Cuaprer XIII. Hepr. 10. τὰς ὁδοὺς K. τ. ev. 17. μετὰ β. v. supra 2, 28. 22. 34. ὅτι. 39. 42. εἰς τὸ μ. for 3, as frequently in V. A., M. 28. 19, note. 47. εἰς das...cwtnpiav. Non-C. 1. κατὰ τ. ov. é. supra 5. 17. 2. 0 mpocn, av. 11. μὴ..-καιροῦ. 16. ἄνδρες Ἴ. καὶ οἱ g. supra 12.12. 17. παροικίᾳ. 20. ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακ. dat. for acc. of continuance of time. 28, 34. μὴ for ov. 35. ἐν ἑτέρῳ. SepT. 34. ὅσια. CHAPTER XIV. Hesr. 3. μὲν ovv=for all this. 23. εἰς ὃν, Mc. 1. 15, note. Non-C, 1. κατὰ τὸ αὐτὸς 6. συνιδόντες. 8. tis ἀνὴρ for ἀνήρ τις. 9. σώζειν =“ to heal,” M. 9. 21, note. 16. παρῳχημέναις. Cuap. XIII. 9. Roman names often adopted: verse 1, and 1. 29, 10, 12. Strong instances of the irregular, arbitrary and apparently capricious way, in which, after Hebrew usage, the article is either omitted or inserted, in V. A. and N. Τ By Greek rule, τὰς ὁδοὺς would require τοῦ K. 11. ἄχρι κ.7 L. 4. 13, “up to a time that suits.” 15. παρακλ.] 4. 36, 15. 31: “teaching, instruction, exhortation” ; as in the explanation of the name of Barnabas, supra 4. 36, 8?) 72, vids παρακλήσεως, where, from the derivation, it must mean as above, ‘a son of exposition”: 1. 6. ‘fan expounder.” 18. érporop.] Some MSS. érpod. Numb. 11.12, Deut. 1. 31, V. A, 24. πρὸ προσ.) Mc, 1. 2 for “before.” 33. dvaor.] “by raising up,” R. 1. 4. 34, τὰ ὅσια] V. A. Is, 55. 3, 2 Ch. 6. 42, ἐλέη, for "ID0 = mercies, both of them. 50. τὰς σεβ. y. tas edox.| The women of rank and fashion, who were proselytes to Judaism. Infra 17. 4, 12. Cuap. XIV. 3. μὲν οὖν] Here the sense seems much rather to require “nevertheless”,than “therefore,” “for all this” rather than “« for this,” or “therefore.” I have shown before, J. 19. 11, that διὰ’ τοῦτο, to which μὲν οὖν is equivalent, is used indifferently, in each of the above meanings, for }2?, which bears them both, and so it may be with μὲν οὖν, as here. Compare 7. 30, 28. 5, 1 Cor. 6. 4: which seem to confirm this suggestion. 23. yepor.] Sensu ecclesiastico, “Jay hands on.” This, as the syntax shows (χειρ... παρέθεντο), was the act of the Apostles, not of the 40 ACTS. SEPT. 9. 7. τοῦ ow9. τοῦ with inf. for 5, infra 15. 20, ἐπιστεῖ- Aas αὐτοῖς τοῦ ἀπέχεσθαι, absolutely unintelligible to a Greek reader, R. 15. 22. CHAPTER XV. Hepr. 2. εἰς for bys or AN= apud, τ 13. ἀποκρίνομαι, V. A. for WX, εἴπειν, Gen. 29, 26, Ex. 21. ὅ, 1 Kings 8. 306. 17. ἐφ᾽ οὗς.. αὐτοὺς. 21. ἐκ y. a. from | in this sense. 33, μετ᾽ εἰρ. M. 24. 31. Non-C. 1. τῷ ἔθει. 5. tTwes...memiat. 6. ἰδεῖν. iG ἀρχαίων, as for so shorta time: 11. πιστ. σωθ. 24. λέγοντες, in sense of ὦ ordering,” Ὁ commanding.” 28. τῶν ἐπάν. τούτων. 29. ἔῤῥωσθε, Latinism = “valete.” 30. τὸ πλῆθος. 58. ποι. xp. and μετ᾽ εἰρήνης, Μ. 24. 31, and supra 2. 28. 38. Order of words. 41. τὴν Σ. καὶ Κ. one article for two distinct nouns. Sepr. 31. παράκλησις =“ directions, instructions”: supra 4. 36, 13. 15, notes. CHAPTER XVI. Hesr. 17. οδὸν o., Ps. 67.2. 31. πίατ. ἐπὶ, Me. 1.15. 36, ὅτι emphatic, and πορ. ἐν εἰρ. Non-C. 2. ἐμαρτυρ. 4. κεκρ. 5. ἐπερίσσ. Υ. ἐπείραζον, active. 16. προσευχή. 18. διαπ. καὶ ἐπιστρ. τῷ πν. 19. ἐξῆλθε, and ἐπίλαβ. with acc. 22. ἐκέλ. imp. 26. ἀνέθη. 29. φῶτα. people, as the advocates of popular election pretend; τοῦτο χειροτονία καλεῖται: ἡ χεῖρ ἐπικεῖται τοῦ ἀνδρὸς : Chrysostom. Alford claims this to be possible, from analogy of 0. 2—6, and says: “the Apostles ordained the Presbyters whom the churches elected.” But how about the grammar of our sentence here, which cannot possibly be strained to that meaning ? Cap. XV. 1. τῷ ἔθει] Possibly, “dat. of manner”: but hard to force into the sense of “ according to.” 2. πρὸς τοὺς ἀπ. εἰς Ἵ.] εἰς -- αὐ: for NS or Oy V. A anda passim, Mc. 1. 39. Infra 23. 11, J. 1. 1. 12, Compare per’ αὐτῶν, supra 4, and 14. 27, with δι᾿ αὐτῶν here. ΤΠ ἘΠ andy JOY NIP, κεκλήσθω τὸ ὄνομά σου ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς, V. A. ie. “let us be called thine.” Here, “whom I have taken for my own.” 24, ἀνασκ.] = turning up the foundations, upsetting. Thuc. 4. 116, Λήκυθον καθελὼν καὶ ἀνασκευάσας. Cuar. XVI. 13. “Where a meeting-for-prayer was wont to be held”: a proseucha, Juv. ACTS. 47 SEPT. 37. ἐκβάλλ. Μ. 9. 88, Me. 1. 43. CHAPTER XVII. Hepr. 6. 28. 31. Non-C. 6. μὴ. 9. τὸ ἱκανὸν. 12. evoy., supra 13. 50 and verse 4, πρώτων. 19. δυνάμ. γνῶναι. 20. ἕξενίζοντα. 21. eve. and κωινότ. comp.: in this sense. 31. πίστις = “ assurance,” “ grounds of belief.” SEPT. 12. μὲν οὖν, supra 14. 3, note. CHAPTerR XVIII. Hepr. 15. ὄψεσθε av. fut. for imper. M. 27. 4, 24, note. 21. εἰς ‘I. 25. τὴν ὁδὸν τ. Κι. infra 19. 9, 23. Non-C. 5. συνείχ. τῷ λ. 11. ἐκάθισε. 12. κατεπέστ. 18. εἶχε y. εὖὐχ. 21. ἑορτ. ποι. 23. ποιεῖν yp. CHAPTER XIX. Non-C. 9. σχολῇ. 11. δυνάμεις ἐπ. M. 7. 22, note. 12. σουδ. ἢ σιμικ. Latinisms. 13. ὁρκ. 0. τὸν Ἴ. 18. ἤρχοντο. 19. 26. 29. φῶτα] James 1.17. Plural very unusual. 34. ἡγαλλ.....πεπιστ.] * Rejoiced for his having...” Cuap. XVIT. 4. Ἑλλήν.] = Gentile, supra 6. 1, note. Col. 3. 11. 9. “Quod satisfecit sibi”: Mc. 15. 15. 23. We translate θυσιαστήριον the Jewish, and βωμὸς the Heathen, altar, by the same word. ἀγν. Θ.] “to any unknown God” perhaps: or it may be merely an instance of article omitted, more Hebraico. 26. ἐπὶ πᾶν τὸ πρόσ.)] A thoroughly Hebrew idiom, startling in its Greek reproduction. 34. κολλ. av. ἐπ. “ believed after close and intimate intercourse.” Cap. XVIII. 7. σεβ. τὸν ©.] The usual name in N. T. for Gentile proselytes. 25. ζ. τ. πν] “being in his spirit a fervent man”: dative of part, ungrammatical : M. 5, ὃ. Cuap. XIX. 3, 4, δ: eis ri...eis τὸ “I. B.] M. 18. 20, 28. 19, notes. Rom. 6. 3. 9. xaxodr.] “speaking evil of”: M. 15. 4, Me. 7. 10, notes. τὴν ὁδὸν] supra 9. 2, and infra 23. 14. “And those who did this were certain men, sons...” 48 ACTS. ixavol. 26. πάσης ths A. name of country, used for gen. of place . . > , where. 27. τὸ μέρος, for “profession, pursuit.” 34, ἐπύγνοντες... φωνὴ ἐγέν. : comp. 20. 3. CHAPTER XX. HeEBR. 9. ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπν. literal for 9 Ξε ὑπὸς 13. 14. 16. els 19. ἐν ταῖς ἐς 25. τὴν β. τοῦ Θ. M. 3. 3, note. 32. τῷ λ. τῆς χ. αὖ. Non-C. 2. λόγῳ π. sing. 8. Compare 17. 23 and 19. 24. 5. ἔμενον ἡμᾶς. 6. ἄχρις. 12. ἤγαγον. 14. 10. εἰς, M. 13. 56, note. 28. κατὰ πόλιν. 24. ὡς τελει. 29. βαρεῖς. Sept. 20. 27. τοῦ μὴ a. and 21. 12. CHAPTER ΧΧΙ. Hepr. 34. στοιχεῖς. 28. κεκοίν. τὸν ἅγιον, Mc. 7. 2, note. 97. εἰ ἔξ. Non-C. 8. ἦν... ἀποφ. present for fut. 5. ὅτε ἐγ. ἡμ. ἐξ. 8. 10. ἐμείναμεν and ἐπιμενέντων, tense. 11. εἰς x. ἐ. omission of article. 30. εἷλκον καὶ ἐκλείσθ. change of tense. 31. φάσις. 37. “EAN. yiv. supra 8. 30, note. SEPT. 6. εἰς τὰ ἴδια, J. 16. 82, note. CHAPTER XXII. Hepr. 4. τὴν ὅδὸν, supra 9. 2, 16.17. 20. καὶ αὐτὸς. 22. καθῆκε. 23, ῥίπτεω for ῥίπτω. 24. εὐπὼν =commanding. 25. Non-C. 17. Whole verse. Cuap. XX. 7. ἐν τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαβ.] σάββατα is used in G. T. appa- rently indifferently for (1) The Sabbath day ; (2) The week: as in Matt. 28. 1 (where see note) (1) ὀψὲ σαββάτων and (2) εἰς μίαν σαββάτων. But in this latter sense, as equivalent to ἑβδομὰς, YIIY, it is apparently never used again in V, A. Cuap. XXI. 21. reper. τοῖς ἔθ] Me. 7. 5, note. The strange use of dative is possibly reducible to the rule of “dative of manner,” of which, and its cognates “‘cause and instrument,” 8. Luke has more examples, in proportion, than any other of the Sacred Writers, L. 20. 47, note: infra 24. 4,2 K. 17. 8, V. A. ἐπορεύθησαν δικαιώμασιν ἐθνῶν. 28. ὁ λαος] = OY, “ God’s people,” as opposed to τὰ ἔθνη. 38. οὐκ apa σὺ εἶ] “Thou art not then”: not a question. Cap. XXIII. 1. πολιτεύεσθαι] Phil. 1. 27 = “to live in a state of society,” “act as citizen of a commonwealth,” “live in the world,” in the abstract : as Joseph. Life, §§ 2 and 49, ἠρξάμην πολιτεύεσθαι, τῇ τῶν ACTS. 49 CHAPTER XXIII. HeEsrR. 6. 7. ἐλπ. καὶ ἀναστ. = “the hope of the resurrection.” Mark omission of article. 11. εἰς for by. Also 18. 20. Non-C. 12. λέγοντες μή. φ. 8. 23. ἀπὸ tp. 6. 80. μηνυθ.... emiBoundis...wéedrew, and ἔῤῥωσο, Latinism for “ vale.” CHAPTER XXIV. Hepr. 21]. ὅτι emph. 22. τῆς ὁδοῦ. 24. τῆς εἰς Xp. πίστεως, Μο. 1. ὅ, note. Non-C, 1. ἐνεῴ. 8. κατ. γεν. ὅ. 6. εὑρόντες γὰρ...ὃν καὶ ἐκρατήσ. : syntax wrong. 7. μετὰ π. B. supra 2. 28, note. 12. ἐπισύστ., compare 2 Cor. 11. 28. 13. παραστῆσαι. 18. ἐν οἷς Vulg. “in quibus,” literally, but unintelligibly: E. V. “ where- upon”: | infra 26.12. 21. τί... ἢ for τί ἄλλο ἤ. 35. δικ. καὶ eye. καὶ Tov xpi, arbitrary use and omission of article, borrowed possibly from Hebrew irregularity. And τὸ viv ἔχον. 26. ἅμα καὶ ἐλπίζων, violation of syntax: unless we connect with ἔμφ. γεν., aS ee two reasons for sending him away: “being alarmed...” “withal hoping also.” 27. χάριτας plural. CHAPTER XXV. Non-C. 1. ἐπιβὰς. 16. οὐκ ἔστιν ἔθος...χαρ... «πρὶν ἤ.. «ἔχοι, non-sequence of tenses. 17. 24. μηδεμίαν, strong instances of μή for ov, so common in G. T. 20. éreyov εὐ B. 17. 21, 24, 25. 21. émiKanr. THPNO. αὑτὸν. 23. φαντασία, and τοῖς κατ᾽ ἔξοχ. οὖσι ris π. 26. ἐφ᾽ ὑμῶν : supra 9. Φαρισαίων αἱρέσει ἀκολουθῶν, and μετὰ πάσης ἀρετῆς πεπολίτευμαι (where use of μετὰ corresponds with V, A. and Ν, T. usage). But 2 Mace. 6. 1 and ὃ Mace. 3. 4, it is followed by a dative, as of the manner, τοῖς τοῦ Θ. von. rodire}. But here τῷ Θεῷ is a quasi-dat. of person; as ζῇν τῷ ®. “To live for God.” 6. yvovs...671] Vulg. “sciens guia”: infra 24, 26, ἐλπίζων ὅτι... *“sperans quod”: I cite these two instances of the debased Latin of the Vulgate, through which our E. V. has been so frequently misguided : and much more, the Psalter in our Prayer-Book. 15, 20. τοῦ ἀνελεῖν] For ? with inf. supra 7. 19, 13. 47. Cap. XXV.9, ἐπ᾽ ἐμοῦ] M. 28. 14, note. If ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ is read, it is = "282, coram me: 1 John 2. 28, as in V. A. Ecclesiasticus 41. 17, αἰσχύνεσθε ἀπὸ πατρὸς : and Ley. 19. 32, ἀπὸ προσώπου πολιοῦ ἐξα- ναστήσῃ, for ‘3’ in each case. GU, 4 50 ACTS. : YHAPTER XXVI. Hesr. 7. évé. 16. εἰς τ, ὥφθ. 20. εἰς 7. x. 22. pixp@ τ, K. wey. supra ὃ. 10. 31. Non-C. 3. γνώστην: V. A. four times. “Accus. pendens”: harsh and unusual construction, after ἐπὶ cod. 12. ἐν ois, L. 12. 1, supra 24, 18. 14. τῇ “E. ὃ. 22. ὧν ἐλάλ....μελλόντων γίν. 23. παθητὸς. 82. ἀπολελ. ἐδύνατο. CHAPTER ΧΧΥΙ͂Ι. Non-C. 10. ὕβρεως. 20. 21. 88. ἄχρι οὗ. 41. ἐλύετο, J. 2. 19. 44. ods μὲν... Sepr. 1. ἐκρ. τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν, M. 2. 6, note, CHAPTER XXVIII. Hesr. 5, μὲν οὖν, supra 14. 3. .14. ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς, Mc. 8. 4, note. 25. πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας and ὅτι. 16. τόπον] Eph 4. 27, μὴ δίδοτε τόπον τῷ διαβ, Latinism: “locum dare,” Vulg. “opportunity, way”: frequent in this sense. 20. €Aeyov...ei βούλοιτο]: Vulg. “dicebam si vellet”: against Latin idiom. KE. V. translates “asked”: but on what grounds? May it possibly be explained by the common use of εἰ interrogative, borrowed from Hebr.? “41 said: did he wish...” ? 22. ἐβουλόμην...] E. V. “I would also...” does not give the force of imperfect. ‘‘I was anxious myself also...” 27. πέμποντα... μὴ onp.| ‘for any one sending...not to signify”: of course ‘‘apud Grecos,” in correct construction, τὸ is required. Cuap. XXVI.7. ὑπὸ 1.1] Indignantis: “accused by Jews.” 8. εἰ] Infra 23, and Hebr. 7. 15: in sense of thut. 9. πρὸς τὸ ὁ.] “with respect to...” ἔδοξα ἐμαυτῷ... δεῖν. “I thought that it was a binding duty for me”: not ἔδ. ἐμ. but ἐμ. δεῖν. For δοκέω = cogito, see Μ΄ 3. 9, note. : 26. λανθ....οὐδένϊ] “1 do not at all believe that any of these things is unknown to him.” ὕπαρ. XXVIII. 7. ἐν τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον] τὰ zept...is, of course, an ordinary and grammatical form in Classical authors: but such an extension of it, as the above, ἐν τοῖς περὶ... seems very unusual. χωρία] . = “estates,” “farms,” though rare, is used by Thucyd. 1. 106. . Two inscriptions are said by Dr Roberts to have been found in Malta, one in Greek, the other in Latin, giving the official name of the Governor, as πρῶτος Μελιταίων. © ACTS. bd Non-C. 8. καθάπτω, act. for middle. 6. 7. ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ... χωρία. 9. mpoonpy. 15. ἔλαβε 8. 17. τοὺς ὄντας τῶν Ἴ. πρώ- Tous. 25. aed. 31. μετὰ π΄. π΄. supra 2. 28, 24. 7. 17. This conversation was in all probability held in Greek; for 8. Paul, we know, wrote to the Converts at Rome, both Jews and Gentiles, in that language. 23. ξενία] is not found, I believe, ‘‘apud Grecos,” in the sense of a “lodging,” as here and Philemon 22: nor in V. A. The order is, οἷς eer. τὴν B. τοῦ Θ. διαμαρτυρ. πείθων τε... “with strong appeals and obtestations, and endeavours to persuade...” 25. πρὸς] ‘with respect to,” Hebr. 1.7, note. ὅτι asseverandi : M. 7. 23, L. 6. 5, James 1. 13. 26. ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε] This combination seems to indicate two futures, “you shall hear and not understand”: which is more grammatical and not less forcible than to suppose ἀκούσετε and βλέψετε as instances of Hebraic future for imperative, M. 5, 48, note, conveying a sentence, or command, 27. μή ποτε]-- “in case that,” “lest that,” “at some future time”: and thus the prophecy predicts a temporary suspension of blessings, M. 13. 14, Me. 4. 12, note-—éray....ékapp. is parenthetical. ROMANS. CHAPTER I. Hesr. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.7. 17. omission of article. 8. κατὰ σάρκα. 9, ἐν τῷ mv. 10. 12. 25. 27. Cuap. I. 1, εἰς edayy. Θ.] The omission of the article here, and in the following verses, and all through the Epistle, is unquestionably Hebraic: and inexplicable on any other theory, except by very over- strained and forced and unnatural criticism. 4, ἐν dvv....] ‘marked clearly out as the Son of God with power answerable to (‘in accordance with,’ ‘corresponding to’) the Holy Spirit in Him, by His Resurrection.” é&]={ instrumenti, M. 7. 16, Heb. 5, 7, notes. 5. εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως] Is this “gen. objecti” or “subjecti”: “ obe- dience to the faith”; or “the obedience of faith,” “ rendered by faith,” ‘springing out of faith”? The latter agrees best with Classical usage, by analogy of ὑπακούω, generally found with dat. But ὑπακοὴ is not a Classical, and scarcely a Septuagint word: ‘neque apud profanos exstat neque apud LXX., preter 2 Sam. 22. 80." Grimm. ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος] Acts 9, 16, 15. 26, ‘‘for his Vame’s sake.” What do we understand in these passages by Vame? Alford suggests “for His glory.” It is probably Hebraic. 6. xAyroi’L. X. and 7. ἀγαπ. Θ.] M. 25. 34, note. V. A. Ps. 59. 5, οἱ ἀγαπητοί σου and Ps. 107. 6, 126. 2, for 77". This is clearly a Hebraism. In the case of substantives, of course, the genitive of posses- sion is intelligible; but ἀγαπητοὶ and κλητοὶ are adjectives. 12. ‘By the joint and mutual confidence in each other, both of you and of me.” 13. καὶ éx.] ‘‘ But I was prevented.” Hebraic. 16. δύναμις Θ.] ‘ God’s powerful agent for salvation.” ROMANS. 53 CuHaApTerR II. HEBR. 4. τοῦ wr. τῆς x. Non-C. 12. ἀνόμως. 29. ἐκ for ἀπὸ. 17. Δικαιοσύνη ©.] What do we understand by this, translated in KE. V. “the righteousness of God”? Clearly not its literal meaning, as an attribute or quality of God: “the righteousness essentially inherent in Him.” It is a genitive not of possession, but of “ origination, insti- tution, approval, appointment”: ‘‘the way of justification ordained by God”: “God’s plan and law of righteousness,” ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν “springing out of faith, and tending to its end in faith,” “ beginning in faith, and perfected by continuous development and confirmation of faith.” Gesenius gives force of “liberatio, felicitas, salus,” to PT¥ and ΠΡῚΝ, generally rendered “righteousness”: and makes them parallel to MIL, salvation, Is. 46. 13, 51. 6, 8, 56. 1, in each of which the two words are put together, side by side, as equivalent terms. 23. ἤλλαξαν ἐν] Ps. 106. 20, ΠΞΠ3.. 25, ἠλλάξαντο τὴν δόξαν αὐτῶν ἐν ὁμοιώματι : i.e. “changed it for,’ a common Hebr. use of 3. Our ἘΦ, V. interpretation is false. om. εἶκ. τε ‘an image-likeness”: “they exchanged the glory of God for an image-likeness of perishable man.” And so 25: “exchanged the truth of God for the lie”: “gave up the true God for the idol.” 3rd Commandment, Ex. 20. 7, xin Sy) Sip ") DYN may possibly mean, “Thou shalt not give the name of the Lord to a false God.” Otherwise, nw is taken adverbially, as Jer. 4, 30, V. A. εἰς μάταιον, and 6. 29, εἰς κενὸν. V. A. translation of 3rd Commandment, Ex. 20. 7, οὐ λήψη...ἐπὶ ματαίῳ, is very obscure. NYY = ψεῦδος. 25, 32. οἵτινες] “as persons who had...” κτίσις “the act of crea- tion” used here and elsewhere in N. T. for “the thing created.” 32. δικαίωμα] V. A. passim, for all the Hebrew words that mean “ decree,” “command,” “law.” Infra 2. 26. Cuarp. II. 7. ὑπομ. ἔργου dy.| Remark (1) the construction tr. ἔργ. and (2) sing. for plural ἔργον for ἔργα : infra 15. 8. τοῖς ἐξ ἐρι The same form as οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς, Acts 10. 45, and ot ἐκ πίστεως, infra 3, 26, 4. 11. 9. πᾶσ. ψ. ἀνθ] Comp. R. 13, 1. Hebraic: derived possibly from the description of man, Gen. 2. 7, ἐγένετο ἀνθ. eis ψ. ζῶσαν. Hence “every soul” in Jewish phraseology, is equivalent to “every body” in our common English idiom: which is exactly opposite to the Hebrew. 27. διὰ yp. καὶ 7] V. A. use διὰ for 2322 and Na in medio, Jos, 3. 2, 2 Chr. 23, 20, 32. 4. Here and infra 4. 11, 7. 5, 11,13, 14. 20, 54 ROMANS. CHAPTER III. Hepr. 5. ©. dcx. no article. 7. 26. & 18. ἀπ. τῶν of 8. 20. ov δικ. πᾶσα oc. 15. 4, Gal. 3.19, 2 Tim. 2. 2, such an interpretation suits very well: “out of the very midst of.” Dr Wordsworth, here and at 4. 11, suggests the notion of “a barrier to be broken through.” How to trans- late the διὰ in the above and corresponding passages, has always been a great perplexity. I venture to submit the above attempt at a solution. Cuap. III. 1, 2. In this, the first distich of question and answer, occupying verses 1—9, (in which 8. Paul suggests, and replies to, the probable arguments of an imaginary objector to the statements of Cap. 1 and 2,) there is no difficulty but yap; evaded by Vulg. and E. V., and by all the Commentators I have met with: “for, first of all,” (the Jews have this advantage) “ because that...” 3, 4. Before going further, I must refer to the Hebrew idiom, so often illustrated in these notes, M. 11. 19, L. 16. 39, 1 Cor. 138. 6, 2 Th. 2. 10, by which δίκαιος = ἀληθής = πιστὸς δικαιοσύνη -- ἀλήθεια -- πίστις ἀδικία = ψεῦδος or ψεῦσμα = ἀπιστία. Here, in 3, πίστις has, not its ordinary, but a special meaning, and = “trustworthiness, truthfulness, faithfulness,” the characteristic of one who is πιστὸς, 1 Th. 5. 24, Hebr. 10. 23, πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν and ἐπαγγειλά- μενος. Grimm, sub voce, translates “indoles ejus, cui confidi potest” ; and cites Gal. 5. 22, Titus 2. 10. Here also ἀπιστία and dmoréw describe severally the character and action of one, who is ἀπιστὸς: 1.8. “unfaithful to his vows, false, disloyal, disobedient.” 5, 6. ‘Well, but, if our (ἀδικία = ψεῦδος = ἀπιστία) commend and confirm the faithfulness (δικαιοσ. = ἀλήθ. = πίστις) of God,” (as “ keeping his promise for ever,” notwithstanding all our unfaithfulness) “is God, who is thus bringing his wrath to bear upon us, (by rejecting the Jews from their privileges as exclusively His people) unfaithful to his pledged word atter all?” “God forbid: for in that case how shall God judge the world?” (Gen. 18. 25). 7,8. “1 do not agree yet”: urges the objector, “for if...” Or, more briefly, “If then the truthfulness of God has been more abund- antly and triumphantly demonstrated, to His Glory, by my untruthful- ness and violated pledges”; (if ie. my ψεῦσμα -- ἀδικία has tended only to the greater glory of God) “why, after this, am I even subject to condemnation as a sinner?” ‘QO! stop there,” pleads 8, Paul in reply; ROMANS. ' 55 Non-C. 1. τὸ περισσὸν. 9. προεχόμεθα, middle. 26. 12. “ ε ἣν EWS EVOS. CHAPTER IV. Hesr. 3.9. ἐλογ. εἰς ue. 12. στοιχεῖν. 17. κατέναντι. Non-C. -6. λέγει. 12. τοῖς ἴἤχνεσι: quasi-dat. of manner. 21. wAnpodop. “and do not go on to say” (as the logical sequence of your last profane objection) “let us then, by all means” (ὅτι emphatic) ‘do evil...” 12. The very words of V. A. οὐκ ἐστὶν ἕως ἑνός THN DJ PS, “not as much as one.” 21. dx. Θ.] “God’s appointed method-of-justification.” 22. πίστεως “I. Xp.] not “faith in Jesus Christ”: but “ the faith approved of and required by Jesus Christ”: the corresponding term to dux. ©, in 21, Gal. 2. 16, 20, Phil. 1. 27, τῇ πίστει τοῦ evayy. 2 Th. 2. 13. 23. δόξης] = possibly, “good opinion,” “approval”: infra 5. 2, J. 5. 43, 12. 44. 26. τὸν ἐκ rior. 1.7] Compare A. 10. 45, 11. 2. 30. dix. περιτ. ἐκ π.7] Is it not possible that we may have here a blending of the two previous expressions, 1. 17, ὁ dux. ἐκ 7. Gyo. and 26, δικαι. τὸν ἐκ π. Ἵ. For the latter compare A. 10. 45, 11. 2, οἱ ἐκ περι- τομῆς πιστοὶ, and infra 4. 12, 14, 16. The Jews, who believed on Jesus, were ot ἐκ πίστεως Ἴ., and were justified in consequence of taking their stand on that side. Is there not then, probably, a constructio pregnans in the words before us; and may not περιτομὴν ἐκ π. -- τοὺς ἐκ πίστεως Ιουδαίους, and ἐκ πίστεως be taken both with the verb and the noun, combining the promise of the old prophecy, and the later familiar form of expression? The very choice of ἐκ may perhaps be due to its occur- rence in Habakkuk, V.. A., where it stands simply for 3. Cuap. IV. 11. onp. περιτ.7}] Not a Greek construction, though correct in Hebrew and English: 7 περιτομὴ was τὸ onp. τῆς διαθήκης. Such expressions as “the sign of Circumcision,” ‘‘the book of Genesis,” suit owr idiom: but are against Greek grammar. δι᾿ axp.] “out of the midst of,” “in spite of.” Supra 2. 26. 16. τῷ ἐκ τοῦ...πίστεως ᾿Α.1] τῷ here is the dative, not of τὸ σπέρμα (as E. T. seems to imply), but of the abstract term τὸ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου = οἱ ἐκ τ΄ v. “the law party.” “The promise...sure to all the seed, not only to the “law-party, but to the faith-party”: not only to those who-hold-on- to-the law of Moses, but to those who array themselves under the banner of faith. δ0 ROMANS. CHAPTER V. HEBR. “4. καταισχ. 5. mv. ay. τοῦ δ. position of article: as also 15. 9.11.21. ἐν, 14. ἐπὶ τῷ op. JHAPTER VI. HEBR. 6. ὁ παλαιὸς... ἀνθρ.: and τὸ σῶμα Ths ap. 19. ἀσθέν. τῆς σαρκὸς. 17. κατέν.] ‘our father in the eyes of God”: who seeth not as man: V. A. for b>, Supra 2. 18. 20. Dative of instrument, twice in this verse: infra 5. 15. Cuap. V. 4. ov καταισχ.] ‘‘never disappoints.” Ps, 21. 5, 25. 3, 91. 1, 18, 34. 5, IBM Ny DINE, τὰ πρόσωπα αὐτῶν ov μὴ καταισχυνθῇ : Zech. 9. 5, MOB WD, “ποὺ expectation shall be disappointed.” In Hebrew, “to blush,” “to have the face ashamed,” conveys this meaning. Jer. 14, 4, Is. 19. 9, OMVD "TAY AW, αἰσχύνη λήψεται τοὺς ἐργαζ. 7. ὑπὲρ γὰρ] 3 elliptically taken, often means “but,” and so is rendered in V. A. ἀλλὰ, Gen. 17. 15, 42. 12, et passim. Hence, from ἀλλὰ being thus frequently equivalent to γὰρ, may not yap, possibly, have been looked on as an equivalent to ἀλλὰ: or rather, may not the literal γὰρ have been used at times to express 3, instead of ἀλλὰ, which the sense requires ; and may not this usage have become familiar to the readers of V. A., and so crept into N. T., as here? 11. This use of a participle absolute, as it were, without any gram- matical connexion with what goes before or after, is not uncommon with Sabai» Litract2, ὁ..19. 11: 12. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ] = “because.” Confer L. 1. 20, 19. 44, for similar use of ἀνθ᾽ ὧν. 15. “For whereas, on the one hand, the penalty was in conse- quence of one offence resulting in condemnation ; on the other hand, the free gift is after many offences, issuing in acquittal.” 18. δικ. ζ.1 Seems the correlative of κατάκρ. θάν. implied though not expressed in 17. For δικαίωμα in this sense, see Rev. 19. 8. Cuap. VI. 2, ἀπεθ. τῇ ἀμ.] Dat. of person: infra 10. 11; sin is personified, treated as a person, in both places, “dead for all claims of sin,” “to all suggestions,” “to all influences” of sin: 2 Cor. 5. 13, 1 Pet. 2. 24, ταῖς au. ἀπογενόμενοι, and so infra ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ. 4, Not συνετάφ. eis τὸν θάνατον, but διὰ τοῦ B. εἰς τὸν θ., “the baptism-into-his-death” of 3. There are set before us here, verses 3, 4, 5, three things, which we share in common with Christ: (1) death, ROMANS. 57 Non-C. 5. ἀλλὰ καὶ. 10. ὃ ἀπέθανε. 11. ἑαυτοὺς. 23. ὀψώνια. (2) burial, (3) resurrection ; all typified and represented by baptism, as practised in primitive times; (1) the immersion into, (2) the momentary resting beneath, (3) the raising up owt of, the water. 5. An argument, not for a natural consequence, but for a moral obligation on the ground of an admitted fact. ‘For if” (as every believer must allow) “‘we have been paired and matched” (as it were) ‘with Him,” assimilated to Him, by baptism, which is ‘the representa- tion,” the perpetual shadowing forth and exhibition of His death, and is meant mystically to remind us thereof: and if, further, we have therein also sought to imitate his descent into the grave, claiming the spiritual and supernatural effects of both ; how much greater and stronger is the moral obligation, to reproduce in ourselves and imitate and exhibit in our lives the pattern supplied, the lesson taught, by His resurrection ? “seeing that we have been assimilated to Him in the likeness of His death, surely, much more shall we strive to be so in the imitation of His resurrection.” Since we have claimed to set forth a copy of His death and burial, how much more are we bound to exhibit and exem- plify His resurrection ? 6. τοῦτο γιγν.] Not so much knowing, as considering : “ with this thought ever before us.” τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας) “our sin-bound,” “ sin- possessed,” ‘‘sin-enslaved body.” Infra 12, 14. ‘‘Our body, where sin reigns, is sin’s.” Wordsworth. 10. ὃ yap ἀπέθανε...1] “ For, the death which He died, He-died unto sin once for all: but the life which He liveth, He liveth unto God”; i.e. “by the death which He died,” He showed “ once for all” incontrovertibly, that ‘“‘He was dead to sin,” not drawn to it, nor swayed by it, nor alive to it, in any sense; but dead to it, as a corpse is dead to any influence from without. 14, 5. Paul appeals here again to moral obligation, to right feeling, to conscience, to generous impulses and the instinctive sense of duty based on gratitude for mercies received: to what those, who are not under stern, rigid law, but under a covenant of grace, must admit to be binding on them. 16. δοῦλοι.. dp. εἰς 6.] ‘sin tending to, and ending in, death.” 19. “I use a figure of speech common among men, on account of your natural incapacity for other treatment of the subject.” 20. ἐλεύθεροι... τῇ Six.] “Ye were as free men to righteousness” : “‘yejecting the claims of,” ‘repudiating the control of,” “disdainful of all allegiance to” righteousness, treated here as a person. 58 ROMANS. CHAPTER VII. Hesr. 3. ἐὰν γένηται ἀνδρὶ. 5. ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ: and ta παθ. τῶν ἂμ. 22. τὸν ἔσω avOp. 24. τοῦ cop. τοῦ θ. Cuaapter VIII. Hesr. 2. 6 voy. τοῦ wv. 8. σαρκὸς ἀμ. 15. nom. for voc. 94. ἐν δεξιᾷ. 36. πρόβ. σφ. 22. εἰς ἁγιασμόν] “in continuous, progressive, advances toward sanctification” ; as supra 19. Cuap. VII. 3. ἐὰν yév. ἀνδρὶ] So V. A. literally for Lev. 22. 12, vid MAND 113 ΓΞ, Ez, 23. 4, ἐγένοντό μοι: nubebant mihi. Jud. 14. 20, ἐγένετο ἡ γυνὴ Σαμψὼν ἑνὶ τῶν φίλων αὐτοῦ : Numb, 30. 7, ἐὰν γενομένη γένηται ἀνδρὶ, which shews γενομένη ἀνδρὶ = “nupta viro.” τοῦ μὴ εἶναι...] A remarkable instance of τοῦ with inf. for 2, M. 2. 6, “so as not to be...” 4, διὰ τοῦ σωμ. τοῦ Xp.| “through the death of the body of Christ,” our participation in the benefits of which, communicated to us at our admission into the Christian covenant, is illustrated and represented by the types and forms of Baptism”: Col. 2. 12, συνταφέντες αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ βαπτίσματι ἐν ᾧ καὶ συνηγέρθητε, “dead and buried with Him in bap- tism” to sin and the law, “raised up with Him” to live for Him, as a wife for her husband, “to bring forth fruit for God.” 5. ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ] In our natural state, before baptism. τὰ παθ. τῶν ap.| Hebraism : “our sinful affections, cherished in despite of the law,” τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου, ““ breaking through the barriers of the law.” 6. κατηργήθ. ἀπὸ] The metaphor of verses 2 and 4 continued. The illustrations, borrowed from baptism and marriage, are inextricably mixed up together. 18. ἡ ap. διὰ τῆς evt.] “sin committed by people under the influ- ence of,” “in defiance of,” “the commandment,” “by breaking through the barriers of it,” “out of the midst of it”: supra 2. 27. This render- ing of διὰ, justified, I hope, by the passages cited there, seems to lessen the difficulties connected with its use here, and supra 8, 11, and elsewhere. . 24. τοῦ cup. τοῦ θ. τούτου] “ this death-enslaved body.” 6. 6. Cuap. VIIL. 2. ὁ νόμος-τοῦ-πν. τῆς ζωῆς-ἐν-Χρ.)] The spiritual law of life-in-and-by-Christ Jesus. 9. Κ΄’ Paul presupposes, assumes as an undoubted fact, that those to whom he was writing, were members of Christ, Christ’s people, Χριστοῦ : and so necessarily, πνεῦμα Xp. ἔχοντες : regenerate, having the Spirit dwelling in them: no longer ἐν σαρκὶ but ἐν πνεύματι. There is ROMANS. 59 Non-C. 11. διὰ with acc. 18. τὴν μέλλ. ὃ. ἀποκ. A. 28. 17. 19. κτίσις for κτίσμα. 21. Sept. 20. ματαιότης. CHAPTER IX. Hepr. 8. λογίζ. eis. 22. ox. py. 33. λίθον προσκ. Kai π. ox. and πᾶς...οὐ. Non-C. 6. οἷον ὅτι. 11. μήπω and τὶ ay. Sepr. 3. ἀνάθεμα = DV, res deo devota, sine spe redemtionis, Jos. 6.17, 18. 1; Deut. 7. 26, res exitio destinata. Grimm and Schl. no doubt implied by εἴπερ: it expresses an admitted fact: “ You are not in the flesh,” left to yourselves in your inherited weakness of the old man, in your human nature unaided from above, “but you are in the Spirit,” taken up into,—adopted by,—interpenetrated by all the influences of,—within the sphere and realm of,—the Spirit; “if the Spirit of God dwelleth in you” (which cannot be questioned). “For if any man have not the Spirit of Christ, he is none of His”; not a Christian at all. 10. νεκρὸν dv ἄμ....1 ‘dead for the work of sin,...alive for the work of righteousness”: “as (μὲν) the body is mortified..., so (dé) the soul is quickened...” 20. ματαιότης] V. A. for bam, Job 7. 16. κενὸς and paraios are used, in translating this word, indifferently, as though equivalent, Jer. 10. 3, Threni 4, 17: see also James 2. 20, ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενὲ, εἰς κενὸν = μάτην passim in V, A. and Ν, T. In this place par. = “corruption, dissolu- tion, temporary annihilation”: “the being emptied out.” διὰ τὸν izor. = “for the purposes of...” 23. υἱοθεσίαν] The ἀπολύτρ. τοῦ σώμ., the full and complete re- demption of the body,—by its deliverance from the δουλεία τῆς φθορᾶς, the enslavement and bonds of death and corruption, at the Resurrec- tion,—will be the completion of our υἱοθεσία, our Adoption as God’s children: our Lord calls it ‘‘our Regeneration.” M. 19. 28. Cuap. IX. 1, ἐν Xp.] Is this an Hebraic form of adjuration, the literal rendering of “2 yaw, Gal. 1. 201 ἐν πν. ay., “by the motion of the Holy Spirit.” 10. x. ἢ M32, in V. A. κοίτη, literally, as if its only sense were “bed”: whereas it means “effusio seminis.” Lev. 15. 16, ἄνθρωπος ᾧ av ἐξέλθῃ ἐξ αὐτοῦ κοίτη σπέρματος. 22. σκεύη opyjs] “vasa in que ira effundatur”: σκεύη ἐλέους “vasa apta in que conferatur benignitas,” Grimm :—very remarkable Hebraisms,. 60 ROMANS. CHAPTER X. Hesr. 65. 9. 11. Sepr. 1. εὐδοκία. 17. ἀκοὴ. 28. Exact from V. A. Compare with Hebrew, Is. 10. 22, 23: curious translation both of np? and }'?2. “God bringeth his dispensa- tions to an end, cutting them short in righteousness.” Gesen. renders “‘interitus decretus est: affert inundando justitiam.” Cuap. X. 8. τὸ ῥῆμα] “The essential thing,” ‘‘materies,” “the sum and substance”: = 727 in its constant usage. Or “the message”; “it comes home to thee,” “fits close to thee” in mouth and in heart ; i.e. “the message of the faith...” 11, 13. These two Quotations are 8. Paul’s proofs from Scripture of his positions in 9 and 10: that in (11) asserting the reward of πίστις ; that in (13) of στόματος ὁμολογία. Hach γὰρ is independent and distinct: the second not a confirmation of the first, but antithetical to it: as is so frequent in his use of γὰρ: which we find repeated three or four times in succession, introducing each a fresh and separate reason. Cap. 8. 19, 14, 1 : 18. 9, 12. 12, Ἶ. τε καὶ Ἵ.] Acts 6. 1, note. 16. axoy] Quotation from V. A. John 12. 38, note, Heb. 4. 2. The sense that seems to lie in our translation of 17, “and hearing by the word of God,” vanishes, if examined carefully. May we explain it thus? Isaiah says, in amazement, “ Who hath believed our message- heard-by-him?” (as though all ought to have believed.) ‘Clearly then” (S. Paul argues from this astonishment of Isaiah) apa “ faith ought to have followed heedful-hearing-of-the-message, and that ought to have been given because of the word of God conveyed by it”: was due to the message as being the word of God. 19. “Did not Israel know” that the Gentiles would hear the message and be admitted into God’s family? Yes: for Moses and Isaiah had told them so. ἐπ᾽ οὐκ ἔθνει, V. A. for DY NDZ, “by them- that-are-no-people” of God. Could they have understood this, as if meaning ‘‘against”? or were they accustomed to render 3 by ἐπὶ fre- quently, and did so here, blindly? Can ἐπὶ, by any possible contortion, mean ‘ by,” instrumentally 1 21. πρὸς τ 1] “with respect to,” Hebr. 1. 7. For bs in this sense see Gen. 20. 2. ‘Abraham said of Sarah” ἘΠ, V.; where V. A. have περὶ. 2 Kings 19. 32, zpos. This use of a wrong preposition is a strong instance of what has been said above, J. 1, 1, note. ROMANS. 61 CHAPTER XI. Hepr. 2. ἐν «Ηλίᾳ, by. 9. γεν. εἰς. 34. καὶ = in order that. CHAPTER XII. Non-C. 1. διὰ with gen. 5. ὁ δὲ καθ᾽ εἷς. 16. φρον. παρ᾽ ἑαυτ. 18. τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν. 20. ψωμιζε. SEPT. 3. εἰς τὸ σωφρ. CHAPTER ΧΙΠ, Her. 1. 8. 9. οὐ μ. Μ. 9.18, note. 18. περίπ. Mc. 7. 5. Non-C. 1. ἐξουσία. 8. φόβος τῶν a. ἔ. 8. τὸν ἕτερον. Cuap. ΧΙ. 2, κατὰ for by, “with respect to,” 1 Cor. 15. 15. oY often has this meaning: Gen. 18. 19, Joel 1. 3, Is. 37.9. And it is often rendered in V, A. by κατὰ : although not in the passages quoted. We may allowably infer that this meaning may have been attached to it, by the authors and readers of V. A. as an equivalent for 2, 8. Not exactly as either in Hebrew or V. A. 12, ἥττημα] “fall and forfeiture,” πλήρωμα, “final and full restora- tion.” 25. ἀπὸ μέρους] Occurs only 5 times in N. T., and about as often in V. A.: where it stands twice for N¥?, literally rendered: Dan. 1. 2, Neh. 7. 70. S. Paul alone uses it, R. 11. 25, 15. 15, 24, 2 Cor. 1. 14, 2.5. It would seem to be never found in Classical Authors. 30. ἀπειθείᾳ!] not “unbelief” but “disobedience”: Grimm :—see note, Eph. 5. 6. Cuar. XII. 1. Aoy. A] 1 Pet. 2, 1, “spiritual,” perhaps, as opposed to λατρεία dv’ ἀλογῶν, by sacrifices of animals without reason, 3. εἰς τὸ σι] “soberly,” Εἰ. V. and this is correct. But how do we get this from the Greek? It is apparently a phrase insensibly adopted from V. A., as a convenient adverbial formula, (see Mc. 5. 34) by those acquainted with that Version ; and so seems to have got into N. T. as in εἰς κενὸν, 2 Cor. 6. 1, Gal. 2. 2, and here: where τὸ cwdp. stands foranoun. Phil. 2. 13, 16. 19. δότε térov]=dare spatium: “make way for it,” “let it pass by.” Cuap. XIII. 1. πᾶσα ψυχὴ] =“ every one, every body.” Supra 2, 9, 10, πλήρωμα νόμου] “the whole-law-in-full.” cs bo ROMANS. CHAPTER XIV. Hepr. 11. ζῶ ἐγώ. 14. 21. ἐν. 14. κοινὸν. Non-C. 1. τῇ π᾿. dat. of part. 2. πιστεύει db. 5. κρίνει. 6. φρονῶν. CHAPTER XV. Hesr. 5. 13. 6 ©. τῆς ὑπομονῆς... 6.13.19. ἐν. 11. nom. for voc. Non-C. 1. ἀδύνατος in sense of weak. 8. τὰς émayy. τῶν T. 15. ἀπὸ μ. 21. συνήσ. 26. κοινωνίαν. Cuap, XIV. 4. τῷ ἰδ, κι] Like ζῇ τῷ Θ,, 6. 10 : and infra 6, 7, 8, All are instances of what used to be called “dative of the person.” 11. ζῶ ἐγὼ] Is. 45. 23. Hebr. “ΟΞ 3, V. A. κατ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ ὀμνύω: to which ζῶ ἐγώ is clearly equivalent in the mind of 8. Paul: 5.“ ὮΝ IN DB, Is. 49. 18, V. A. ζῶ ἐγώ... ὅτι. ἐξομόλ.] “shall give praise,” “adore.” M. 11. 25, note: and infra 15. 9, 14. εἰ μὴ]-- ἀλλὰ, as so often in N. T.: note M. 12. 4; 24. 36, Me. 13. 32: and this corresponds exactly to the well-known use of DS °D, which V. A. generally render by ἀλλὰ: Gen. 32. 29, 1 Sam. 8. 19, Ps. 1. 4, or by ὅτι ἀλλ᾽ ἢ, 2 K. 23, 23, but occasionally also by εἰ μὴ, Gen. 32. 27, Lev. 22. 6. 19. τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλ} ΑΝ. T. illustration and phrase altogether : not found in Hebrew. τῆς εἰς a. ox. means clearly “mutual edification”: but how it comes to mean it, I cannot see. 20. διὰ wp.] Note 2. 27: 4.11; “in spite of,” “in disregard of,” offence to his conscience: ‘ breaking it down.” Cuap. XV. 2. ay. mp. oix.] “with a view to that which is good- for-edification.” 4, παρακλ.] =‘ Instruction, teaching, enlightenment”: Note Acts 4, 36, 13, 15, 15. 31, “that we may hold our hope in-combination-with, under the pervading influence of, patience, and the teaching of the Holy Scriptures”; “maintain our own hope in combination with toleration and forbearance to others, and the direction and true interpretation of H. Scr.” :—which is the best security under the blessing of ὁ Θ, τῆς um.... (5) for the τὸ αὐτὸ dp. and ἐν ἑνὶ στ. δοξάζειν (6): and gives the true force to the injunction of (7) προσλαμβάν. “accept,” ‘ welcome,” others, notwithstanding minor differences and imperfections. I submit this interpretation as consistent with the whole context, confirming and summing up all the arguments of Cap. 14. ‘ Patience and comfort of the Scriptures” are out of tune with the whole previous passage: which ROMANS. 63 CHAPTER XVI. HeEpR. 9.10, 11.12. 22. ἐν K. 20. ὁ ©. τῆς εἰρ. Non-C. 18. εὐλογία and ἀκάκων. enjoins emphatically forbearance and submission to divine instruction, in our dealings with the tender consciences and scruples of weaker brethren. Possibly there may be no connexion between τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν (5) and ἐν évi στόματι δ. (6): and τὸ αὐτὸ may refer to ὁ Θεὸς and not to ἐν ἀλλήλοις. ‘May the God of forbearance and instruction grant to you to be like-minded with Himself in your conduct towards one another after the example of Jesus Christ”; ‘“ make you, in accordance with His revealed will and character, tolerant of the infirmities of others, as Jesus was, and ready and willing to teach them the truth in meekness; so that by His blessing, all may be won to agree in the faith, and so with one mind and one mouth glorify God.” 9. τὰ δὲ ἔθνη] For εἰς δὲ τὸ τὰ ἔθνη... τῷ ov. σ. W.] V. A. for Tw», The translators were aware of ? giving signification of dative of person sometimes: and so rendered it here, by dative alone; against Greek idiom altogether. Hebr. 13. 15. 12. Exact quotation from V. A. 7 pila UY (surculus not radix ; offshoot”): no article with either nominative in Hebrew: as required by the sense. 22, ἔνεκοπτ. τοῦ 2] For ? with inf M. 2. 6. 30. διὰ] with gen. in this sense peculiar. 12. 1, 1 Cor. 1. 10. παρ, XVI. 2. ἐν κυρίῳ] Possibly here ‘because of,’ ‘for the Lord’s sake,” ἐν for 2 “propter.” 2 Kings 14. 6, ΠΥ) INDN2 WS, V. A, ἕκαστος ἐν ταῖς ἀμ. av. ἀποθ. Gen, 18. 28, reducible to class (Ὁ) in note M. 3. 11. 23. Acts 20. 4, Taios was a Corinthian. 1 Cor. 1. 14. 25. Observe κατὰ first with and then without article: required by the sense in each case: omitted in the latter by common Hebraic usage, exhibited so frequently and so remarkably in this Epistle, notably in these last 3 verses, and not to be accounted for in any other way. τ Ὁ ΠΝ TH LANS: CHAPTER I. Hesr. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 9. ἐν: and art. omitted. 4. emi =by, infra. 8.11. 20. 30. Non-C. 8. ἕως τέλους. 16. λουπὸν. 25. ἰσχυρότερον. CHAPTER II. HEBR. 3. ἐγ. πρὸς, M. 13. 56. 4 5. 8. 7. 16. omission of art. 14. ψυχικὸς. Non-C. 2. τι. 12. εἰδῶμεν. 18. διδακτοῖς πνεύματος. 16. construction: τίς éyv@...és. CuHaApTer III. Hesr. 3. κατ᾽ ἄνθρ. περιπατ. Non-C. 2. γάλα ὕ. ἐπότ. 8. ὅπου. 8. ἕν. 17. οἵτινές ἐστε v. Cuap. I. 21. ‘When in the midst of the revelations of God’s wisdom, the world recognised not God in that wisdom” (looked not through it to God): “it pleased God, by this despised and seemingly ? foolish announcement...”; “by the promulgation of a doctrine which they esteemed foolishness...” 30. ἐξ αὐτοῦῇ This use of ἐξ is probably Hebraic, for } = ὑπὸ, R. 1. 4, 2 Cor. 2. 2, 7. 9, Rev. 2. 11. “Through Him you are im Christ.” So also ἀπὸ Θ. -- ὑπὸ ©, recalls another V. A. rendering of Ὁ. Jude 23, note. Cuap. 11. 1. καθ᾽ ὑπεροχὴν] “by way of any excellence.” μαρτύ- ριον] Hebr. idiom, applied to the Law, first, Ex. 25. 16: and afterwards to the Gospel. 5. πίστις ἐν] Note Me. 1. 15. Cuap. III. 8. ἕν εἰσιν] ‘‘He that planteth and...watereth are one and the same thing”: ‘whether a man planteth or watereth, it is all the same.” 1 CORINTHIANS. 65 Cuapter IV. HEBR. 3. εἰς ἐλάχ. 9. Irregularity of article. 15. ἐν Xp... ἐγέννησα. 21. Non-C, 2. ὃ δὲ χ, 6, Latter clause: construction. 9. θέατρον, 11, ἄρτι, CHAPTER VI, Non-C. 6. a. μετὰ a. κρίνεται. 11. ταῦτά τινες ἦτε. 9. ©, συνεργοί] “We are God’s labourers all”: ye are Goa’s field, God’s blessing. ἕξι x. «.] “wood, thatch, reeds.” 13. ἐν π. ἀποκ.] “ There-is-to-be-a manifestation by fire.” Cuapr. IV. 8. εἰς ἐλάχ.) An evident Hebraism: though I find no instance exactly like it in V. A. 4, οὐδὲν ἐμ. σύν. “1 am conscious of no offence”: “I know nothing against myself”: old use of “by” in E. V., see Cranmer’s letter to Henry VIII, Burnet’s Hist. of the Reformation, Book 38, near the beginning: “I am exceeding sorry that such things can be proved by the Queen” :—i.e. “against.” 15. ἐν Xpiord...eyévvyoa] ‘You are my children in Christ...” Or, possibly, ἐν Xp. = εἰς Xp., since 3 means both im and into; and in the latter sense is rendered by ἐν occasionally. M. 28.19. “Ihave begotten you into Christ,” “brought you, as a father, into the family of: Christ.” 21. ἐν ῥάβδῳ] M. 3.11, note, Apoc. 2. 27, L. 22. 49. It is one of the most startling instances of the literal translation of 2 by ἐν: not Greek, in any sense, or by any stretch of critical ingenuity, but Hebraic : which cannot be too strongly stated, or too often repeated, in this and similar instances of violation of grammar and idiom, It is borrowed, no. doubt, from similar uses of ἐν in V. A., e.g. 1 Chr. 12. 11, 14, ἐπαίδευσεν ὑμᾶς ἐν μάστιξι, Ps, 89. 33. Cuap. V. 5. εἰς dd. τῆς o.] A violation of the rules of grammar, common in 8. Paul: assignable in all probability to a Hebrew source. 2 Cor. 5. 5. Cuap. VI. 1. κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν...] Μ, 28. 14, Me. 8. 4, notes, and 2 Cor. 13. 1, Acts 25. 9. 5. ἀνὰ μέσον] for 3, V. A. passim. Ex. 22. 26, ava μέσον ἁγίου καὶ βεβήλου. Jud. 15. 4, ἀνὰ μ. τῶν δύο κέρκων. The peculiarity here lies in its use with only one, τοῦ d. Compare 1 Κα, ὅ. 12, ἦν εἰρήνη ἀνὰ μ. Χιρὰμ καὶ ava μ. Sarcopor, ; GU. 5 00 1 CORINTHIANS. CuHapTer VII. Non-C. 381. παράγει. 32. πῶς for ὅπως. 34. μεμέρισται. Sept. ὅ. ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸς 17. εἰ μὴ, R. 14. 14, note. 37. τοῦ τηρεῖν. CHaprTer VIII. Non-C. 4. ἕτερος εἰ μὴ. 6. εἰς αὐτόν. 8. περισσεύομεν. 12. τύπτοντες. CHAPTER IX. Non-C. 1. The construction, for interrogation, unusual, 12. στέγομεν. 15. μᾶλλον ἢ... «ἵνα. CHAPTER Χ. Hepr. 5. ἐν τοῖς πλ. 10. τὸ ποτ. τῆς EVA. 32. ἀπρόσκοποι. Non-C. 2. ἐβαπτίσαντο, middle. 7. ἐκάθισε... .φωγεῖν. In- finitive after intransitive verb: universal almost, in V. A. and N. T. 10. ὀλοθρευτοῦ. 33. μὴ for ov. Sept. 20. δαιμονίοις, M. 9. 33, note. 13. Strong instances of 5. Paul’s use of the dative (of the person, as it used to be called, inexactly but comprehensively), see Rom. 6. 2, 20, infra 9. 21. Cuap. VII. 15. ἐν εἰρήνῃ]! See Gal. 1. 6, 1 Th. 4. 7. In all three the sense of “into” suits best: which 2 constantly conveys. It is a Hebrew idiom literally rendered by a wrong preposition. Guar. VITL UI. ἐπὶ} = Ὁ “on account of,” “leaning upon,” “ rely- ing upon.” Cap. 9. 10. Cuap. X. 8. πνευματικὸν] “supernatural.” 15. 44, Gal. 4. 29. The manna was not in any sense spiritual food, nor the water out of the rock that followed them, spiritual drink: but both miraculous and supernatural. ἹΠνεῦμα constantly means “the supernatural” as con- trasted with σάρξ “ the natural.” 11. τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰ.) ‘ Upon whom the extremities of the two dis- pensations, the ante-Christian and Christian eras of the world, have come,” in whom have met together the end of the one and the beginning of the other. Heb. 9. 26. 18. The Jews were Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα: the Christians Ἶσρ. κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίαν. S. Paul appeals both to the Jewish and Christian in- 1 CORINTHIANS. 67 CHAPTER XI. Non-C. 4 κατὰ κεφ. ἔχ. 18. μέρος τι. 30. ἱκανοί. 34. ὡς ἂν ἔλθω. CHAPTER XII. Non-C. 2. ὡς av ἤγεσθες 18. ἐποτίσθημεν. 22. Order of words. 27. ἐκ μέρους. 29. μὴ interrogative. CuapTer XIII. Non-C, 2. εἰδῶ. 8. ψωμίσω, 8. εἴτε. 12, ἄρτι, 13. μείζων. stinctive belief of what was implied by participation in sacrifices offered to God. 32. See R. 3. 9, John 7. 35, Cuar. XI. 7. δόξα] V. A. for 73100 “likeness”; Ps. 17. 15, N. 12. 8. Never so found in good Greek. 20. οὐκ ἔστι... φαγεῖν] “There is no eating the Lord’s supper”: Kvp. contrasted with ἴδιον : they met together to eat not the feast of the Lord, in the way instituted by Him, but their own meal. 22. καταισχύνετε] This verb is used by V. A. as = “humilio,” “tanquam pudendum rejicio,” “‘contumeliosé afficio”: Ps. 13. 7, Ruth 2.15. So here “you treat the poor with disrespect,” “ humiliate them.” 27, In V. A. ἔνοχός ἔστι -- ἵδ DY, “he is guilty,” Lev. 20.9. No instances in V, A. of genitive of crime are given in Trommius ; only one in Apocrypha. 2 Mace, 13. 6, ἱεροσυλίας ἔνοχος. There seems to have been a generalisation from a particular, from murder to any other crime; “cedis rets” generalised gradually into “reus”: “there is blood on his hands,” b DI, coming at last to signify “there is guilt on him,” ἔνοχός ἐστι. DF soy mm, “and so there be blood upon thee,” came to mean “...guilt in the midst of thee”: V. A. καὶ ἔσται ἐν σοὶ αἵματι évoxos, “some one guilty by reason of bloodshed,” originally. M. 5. 22, note, James 2. 10. παρ. XII. 7. κἡ φανέρωσις] “the illuminating insight,” “ the power of elucidating divine mysteries and making them clear to others.” 10. γένη yA.] V. A. 2 Chr, 16. 14, γένη μύρων. Cuap. XIII. 6. ἀδικία] Contrasted with ἀληθεία : a very strong instance of ἀδικὸς = ψευδής, M. 11. 19, note, Luke 16. 9, infra 15. 34. 12. ἐν αἰνίγματι... Numb. 12. 8, στόμα κατὰ στόμα λαλήσω αὐτῷ ἐν εἴδει καὶ οὐ 8 αἰνιγμάτων. V. A. of which passage Grimm says « observabatur apostolo,” and Alford “there is a reference to it.” 5—2 08 1. CORINTHIANS. ἶ CHAPTER ΧΙΥ͂. Non-C. 2. λαλῶν γλώσσῃ. 5. ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ : and subjunctive after ef. 7. ὅμως. 10. εἰ τύχοι Past with ἐστι Present. CHAPTER XV. Hesr. 15. κατὰ = by, R. 11. 2, note. 45. ἐγένετο eis. 52. ἐν τῇ ἐσχ. cad. 54, KQTETT....€LS νῖκος. Non-C. 6. ἐπάνω. 28. ἵνα ἡ...πᾶσιν. 30. πᾶσαν ὥραν. 31. τὴν ὕμετ. KAY. My joy in you. 37. τῶν λοιπῶν. 47. xoiKds. 49. ἐφορέσαμεν. 51. πάντες μὲν ov. CHAPTER XVI. HEBR. 6. πρὸς v. παραμενῶ, 2 Th. 3.10. 11. ἐν εἰρήνῃ. Non-C. 1. λογία. 2. 6 τι ἂν evod. 4, ἄξιον τοῦ κἀμὲ T. 12. καὶ πάντως οὐκ ἣν 0, 18. ἀνέπαυσαν. Cuap. XIV. 7. φθόγγοις] = “ notes.” 16. εὐλογία] = εὐχαριστίᾳ. Note M. 26. 26. 37. πνευματικὸς] = inspired by H. Spirit. 12. 1. Cuap. XV. 8. “To me, the abortion, so to speak.” 14, κήρυγμα] not “our preaching”: but the subject of it: “the Gospel preached by us.” 15. κατὰ τ. Θ.] “with respect to,” see Romans 11, 2. 34. δικαίως] For M83, “truly,” “in earnest”: note M. 11. 19. This rendering of the adverb, justified by the usage of V. A. and N. T., seems in this passage to express the sense better, and is more gramma- tically correct than those generally suggested. 54. There seems to be a distinction here between φθαρτὸν and θνητὸν : the former comprehending all that were dead before the judg- ment day and turned already to corruption (vv. 50, 52), the latter those liable to death, but not yet dead. 58. ἐν Κυρίῳ] Confer Col. 8, 18, Ph. 1. 13, notes. Cuap. XVI. 2. μίαν σαββ.] M. 28.1, Me. 16. 2, L. 24. 1, μία for πρώτη: Hebraism: Gen. 1. 5, 2. 11, ἡμέρα μία, the first day: τῷ ἑνὶ, the first river: V. A. literal rendering for 708. 22, μαρὰν ada] Syriac: “the great Lord is coming.” ὁ Κύριος ἐγγύς, Phil. 4. 6. ae Oe ΟΝ ΉΗΊΑ ΝΡ. CHAPTER I. Hesr. 2. Θεοῦ... Κυρίου, omission of article, Tit. 1.3. 3. ὁ π. τῶν οἱ. 0. ἐν ὑ. 9. mem. ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτ. Μ. 27. 43, infra 2.3. 11. ἐκ π. πρ. 12. ἐν ἅπλ.... 18. πιστὸς ὁ O, Non-C. 4. ἧς. 8. ἐβαρήθ. ἐξαπορ. 9. ὦμεν with perf. part. 13. ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἃ. 14. ἀπὸ μ. 15. δευτέραν. 20. ὅσαι ἐπ. Cuap. I. 8. ὁπ. τῶν οἰ Hebr. use of genitive for adjective. For παρακλ. see J. 14. 16, note. 5. εἰς ἡμᾶς] Vulg. “in nobis.” ‘The frequent use of εἰς in V. A. for DN apud, or 3 ¢z and into, may allowably be suggested in explanation of its occurrence in N. T. in such passages as this, where the sense of apud or im, is required. J. 1. 18. 9. πεποιθ.... ἐφ᾽ Eavrois}] Me. 1. 15, note. Infra 2. 3, ἐπὶ has ace, εἰς Ov ἠλπίκ., next verse, is an example of almost parallel usage ; see 1 Tim. 5. 5, for our E. V. rendering “trust.” 15. ταύτῃ τῇ π.] dative of cause: ‘because of this persuasion.” Infra 24, 2. 12. 18. πιστὸς 6 Θ. dr] A form of adjuration, purely Hebraic, and corresponding to 3 77! G, 2 Sam. 2, 27, V. A. ζῇ Κύριος ὅτι, “as surely as God liveth”; ‘as God is true, verily our word...”. Is it not possible that here, and in other similar passages, ὅτε answering to ‘3, may have the force of asseveration which ‘> has, “surely, verily”? See note, M. 7. 23. 20. “How many soever be the promises of God,” He will assuredly fulfil them in and through Christ”: lit. “in Him is the vaé, and in Him the anv”: the recognition and the fulfilment. 21. ὁ βεβ. ἡμ....εἰς Xp.] It is hard to translate εἰς adequately here: ‘ for” seems perhaps best. 23. ‘It was from the wish to spare you, that I never came again.” 70 2 CORINTHIANS. CHAPTER II. Hepr. 2 καὶ τίς é. and ἐξ ἐμοῦ, 1 Cor. 1. 30. 8. πεπ. ἐπὶ π. ὑμᾶς. 4. diam. δ. 10. ἐν πρ. Xp. 12.14.17. ἐν K. and ἐν Xp. 14. τὴν ὀσμὴν. Non-C. 1. ἔκρινᾳ ἐμαυτῷς 5. ἀπὸμ. 7. καταποθῇ. 11.. πλεονεκτ. CuapTer III. HeBrR. 5. ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν. 7. ἡ διακονία τοῦ 0. Cuap. II. 2. ἐξ ἐμοῦ] ἐξ -- ὑπὸ, for }, which has both meanings, but is generally rendered by ἐκ or azo in V, A., rather than by ὑπὸ. Infra 3. 18, 7. 9, 13. 4, note: 1 Cor. 1. 30. 4, διὰ π. δ.] “out of the midst of”: R. 2. 27, note: 2 Tim. 2, 2. 10. ἐν προσώπῳ Χ.] (a), 4. 6 (b), 5. 12 (c), the only instances, apparently, in N. T. of ἐν zp. And TI can only find one (Pr. 8. 30) in Υ. A. (for 18>) amid the innumerable examples of πρὸ, ἀπὸ, κατὰ with πρόσωπον. And in each of the three instances, the meaning is distinctly different (Grimm sub voce): (a) im conspectu Christi: i.e. approbante Christo. (Ὁ) in facie, i.e. in persond Christi. (c) in externd specie: compare 1 Sam. 16. 7, ἄνθρωπος ὄψεται εἰς πρόσωπον, ὁ δὲ Θεὸς εἰς καρδίαν. 12. ἐν K.] May not the force οὗ ἐν here, and in verses 14 and 17, be simply “by,” “by the help of,” derived, of course, from the common use of 3? This meaning seems the most natural and the best, for ἐν Κυρίῳ, in many passages of G. T.: eg. 1 Cor. 7. 22, 15. 31, 58, Gal. 5. 10, Eph. 6. 10, Ph. 4. 2, τῷ μὴ εὑρεῖν. Supra 1. 15. 17. xarnd.] “adulterate, dilute, water down.” Cuap. III. In this chapter we have a very remarkable instance of a well-known peculiarity of S. Paul’s writings: that is to say, his tendency to be carried away abruptly from the subject he is discussing to another, very slightly, if at all connected with it, by a fresh train of ideas arising out of expressions employed by him in relation to the matter immediately before him. The mention of the ἐπιστολὴ ἐγγε- γραμμένη ov μέλανι ἀλλὰ πνεύματι Θ. ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶ λιθίναις GAN ἐν 7A, καρδίας, seems to have reminded him irresistibly of the parallel distinction between the characteristics of the Law and the Gospel ; and he avails himself at once of the opportunity of illustrating the latter contrast by the images suggested by his description of the former. And consequently, the force and meaning of the words and ideas borrowed and transferred, must be modified by the consideration that they are used by way of illustration, and not of dogmatic definition. 2 CORINTHIANS. 71 Non-C. 1. συνιστ. and συστατικῶν. 3. διακονηθ. 14. μὴ for ov. 18. ἀπὸ ὃ. εἰς ὃ. We must be cautious also not to be misled by our familiarity with the English Version, or by the distinction between the letter and the spirit of a command, or document, in owr ordinary phraseology. As 8. Paul sums up and concludes his argument by ὁ δὲ Κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστι (17), it is hard to imagine that the word πνεῦμα, in any part of that argu- ment, means anything but τὸ πνεῦμα Κυρίου (17). The παλαία διαθήκη ἐντετυπωμένη ἐν λίθοις, ἐν πλαξὶ λιθίναις, introductory, transitory, given only for a ἐϊπι6,---καταργουμένη, not pévovoa,—was essentially, in Hebraic phrase, γράμματος (6): and Moses the original διάκονος of it, its administrator and expounder, as he was the channel of its com- munication to Israel. The καινὴ διαθήκη, ἐντετυπωμένη ἐν πλαξὶ καρδίας gapkivois,—final, abiding, given once for all, μένουσα, --γᾶϑ, essentially, πνεύματος, the gift and work and dispensation of the Holy Spirit ; and Jesus Christ the original διάκονος of it (R. 15. 8), its promulgator and expounder to Jews and Gentiles alike: hence, in this passage, διακονία seems almost to be used as equivalent to διαθήκη. For clearly, in 7 and 8, the contrast lies, not between θανάτου and πνεύματος, but between ἐν γράμμασιν and τοῦ πνεύματος (as in 6): and so ἡ) διακ. τοῦ mv. is set against ἡ διακ, ἐν yp. ἐντετ. ἐν λίθοις, 1.6. y παλαιὰ διαθήκη. The condemnation and the death (9 and 7), as the justification (δικαιοσύνη) and the life through the Spirit, were the issues, not of the διακονία in its strict sense, but of the διαθήκη. The words τὸ dedogac- μένον (10) and τὸ καταργούμενον and τὸ μένον (11) seem to refer quite as naturally to the covenant, as to the promulgation and administration of it. And if we attach any weight to the tenses employed, ἐγενήθη (7) more accurately describes a single action,—the original enactment of the covenant,—than its continuous and frequently repeated promul- gation. Its first publication ἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ, the traces of which were left on the face of Moses so overpoweringly, dare μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι... It is important also to remember that, in V. A., ἐλπίζω is constantly used for M93, confido (1 Tim. 5. 5, note), and ἐλπίς for πεποίθησις, as here in (12) which is but a resumption and restatement of (4), It was not merely hope, but conviction, that the hearts of those to whom he was writing, were soft and open to the influences of God’s Holy Spirit, that encouraged 8. Paul “to use great plainness of speech,” and “to declare to them the whole counsel of God,” with no veil drawn between him and them, 13. πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι] Ought we to translate this,—with E. V. 72 2 CORINTHIANS. CHAPTER IV. HEBR. 3. ἐν τοῖς ad. 16. ὁ ἔξω avOp. Non-C. 2. μὴ. πρὸς π. συνείδ. avOp. 0. εἰπὼν..«λάμψαι. 8, ἐν παντὶ. 16. ἡμέρᾳ κ. ἡ. 17. καθ᾽ ὑπερβ. εἰς ὑ. and most commentators,—“ that they cowld not,” or ‘‘that they should not,” as if describing the result or the object of Moses putting on the veil? May we not rather take it as referring to the fact mentioned in 7, and supply from thence δύνασθαι, and render “ out of regard to the fact that they could not?” Surely Moses put on the veil because the people were afraid (Ex. 34. 30) to look stedfastly on him, and not in order that they might not. And so, doubtless, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπωρώθη ought to be connected with ἀτενίσαι ; and in strict grammar we should expect πωρωθῆναι, governed also by πρὸς, “out of regard to the fact that they could not look stedfastly,...but that the thoughts of their hearts were blinded”; “had a film over them,” πῶρος = callositas = the film or curtain that drops over the eye from disease, and blinds by hardening it,—is an apt and forcible emblem of the wilful hardness of heart which blinded the Jews to the true meaning of the prophecies: the κάλυμμα which they interposed between themselves and the truth, typified by the veil which hid the face of Moses: and which remained even to the time when the Apostle wrote, μὴ avax., “unless it were rolled back and taken away,” as in the case of every one who turned to the Lord (ἡνίκα ἂν ἐπιστρ.)}; for then it was done away with and abolished in and by Christ: ὅτι ἐν Xp. κατ. We should observe also in this wonderful passage the strongly marked and pointed antithesis of the contrasted categories. παλαιὰ διαθήκη καινὴ διαθήκη γράμματος πνεύματος κατάκρισις δικαιοσύνη θάνατος ζωή τὸ καταργούμενον τὸ μένον πώρωσις παρρησία κάλυμμα ἀνακεκαλυμμένον πρόσωπον δουλεία (Gal. ὅ. 1) ἐλευθερία Cuap. IV. 2. τὰ xp. τῆς αἰσχ.] “All secret-ways of unseemliness,” Hebraic for “all unbecoming disguises,” “all degrading equivocations -and false pretences.” 3. “ But if, after all, our Gospel be (καὶ) veiled”: still keeping a -the metaphor of the last chapter: verses 14, 15. 2 CORINTHIANS. 73 CHAPTER V. HEsR. 1. οἰκοδ. ἐκ ©. 7. περιπατοῦμεν, Gal. 5. 25, Me. 7. 5, notes. 12. ἐν προσώπῳ. Non-C. 7. εἴδους in sense of sight, and not of the thing seen. Sepr. 10. ἔμπροσθεν for “in front of.” CHAPTER VI. HeEsR. 16. ὅτι, M. 7. 23, note. 18. ἔσομαι eis, M. 2. 6, note. Non-C. 2. καιρῷ δ. without preposition. 3. μηδ. ἐν μ. for οὐδ. ἐν ovd.: and 10. 4. ἐν παντὶ: and 7. 16. SEPT. 1. εἰς κενὸν, R, 12. 3, note. Gal. 2.2; Isaiah 29. 8. 8. ἐν παντὶ] This form is only used by 8S. Paul, of all the Sacred Writers, and is not found in V. A. 1 doubt whether it has Classical Authority. 10. νέκρωσις] = ‘‘ mortification”: ἡ v. τοῦ “I, = “the mortification in- culeated by Christ, exemplified in Christ”: ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰ. = “the life imparted by Jesus.” Cuap. V. 1. 7 é ἡ. οἰκία τοῦ ox.] Hebraic. “Our tent-house upon earth,” metaphorically for “our body,” ‘“‘domus in qué animus habitat his in terris, velut in tentorio, quod mortis tempore detendetur.” Grimm. Sap. 9. 15, βρίθει τὸ γεῶδες σκῆνος νοῦν πολυφῥόντιδα. οἰκοδ. ex Θ. “‘cujus Deus auctor est,” 8. εὐδοκέω] constantly used by V, A. for DM = gaudeo, volo. 10. “The reward won by and through the body, corresponding to”; πρὸς. 13. Θεῷ... ὑμῖν] dative of person. R. 6. 2, 1 Pet. 2. 24. Cuap. VI. 3. pop.| “OD = labes, macula, corporis vitium (Lev. 21. 23, Deut. 15. 17), in V, A. passim, μῶμος = dedecus, vituperium ; unde μωμάομαι : vitupero, culpo.” Grimm. 11. πεπλάτυνται] “swells with emotion,” “expands and opens”: Paicll9. 32, 39 AN 3, ὅταν ἐπλάτυνας τὴν καρδίαν pov. Is, 60. 5 the same words 322? 4M), otherwise rendered in V. A. ‘Thou shalt see and be confused, and thy heart shall fear and swell with emotion.” E. V. “Thou shalt see and flow together and thy heart...be enlarged.” 13, σπλάγχνοις] = affections, feelings: Hebraic idiom; occurring constantly in O. T. Gen. 43. 30, Jer. 31. 20, Cant. 5. 4. In N. T. found less frequently: L. 1. 78, Acts 1. 18, 1 J. 3. 17, Ph. 1. 8, Col. 3. 12. The bowels were considered by the Jews to be the seat of the affections, as the heart by us. 74 2 CORINTHIANS. CHAPTER VII. Hesr. 6. 8. 14 ἐν, 9. ἐκ for ὑπὸ, as =f. Similarly: infra 13. ado. 15. μετὰ φόβου, M. 24. 31, note. Non-C. 2. yopyoate. ἐπλεονεκτ. 5. 11. 16. ἐν παντὶ: and the participle OA. 11. aAAd=immo, 11. ἁγνοὺς. 13. ava πέπαυται. 16. θαρρῶ ἐν v. CuapTer VIII. HeBrR. 24. εἰς πρόσωπον = ΣΤΥ Non-C. 2. κατὰ. βάθους. 12. ἐὰν. 10. διδόντι... ἐν, M. 28. 19, note. CHAPTER IX, Hesr. 5. 6. εὐλογία. Non-C. 11. ἁπλότητα = liberality: supra 8. 2. SEPT. 9. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. Notes Mc. 3. 29 and 1 Th. 4. 15. Cuap. VII. 4. παράκλησις] See note J. 14. 16 for this, and infra ww Ὁ; 1: Cuap. VIII. ὅ. διὰ θελήμ. ΘΙ] A strong instance of the omission of the article, inexplicable by any ordinary rules of Greek construction: and apparently to be referred to the frequent and palpable irregularity as to the use of the definite article in Hebrew. 7. τῇ ἐξ 6. ἐν ypiva.| For the anomalous expression 9 ἐν ἡμῖν ay. see 1 J. 4. 16. 19. συνέκδ. ἡμ. σὺν τῇ x.| A most curious construction: literally and grammatically implying that the χάρις was a companion of §. Pau’ and his colleague. Cuar, IX. 4. ὑπόστασι:] Heb. 3.14, 11. 1. V. A. for MOMiM, Ps, 39. 8, and pM, Ruth 1. 12 =“ confidence, hope, expectation.” Infra Th 17: 5. εὐλογία] V. A. for 1372, one common meaning of which is donum, a gift. Prov. 11. 25, "3 WD), α liberal soul. 1 Sam. 25. 27, τὴν εὐλογίαν ταύτην, “31. In verse 6 ἐπ᾽ edA, = “with liberal intent,” ‘in a liberal spirit,” “bountifully.” 10. γεννήματα] M. 26. 29, note. 12. “415 not only enough to satisfy to the full the needs of the brethren, but runs over in praise to God.” 13. ἡ ὑποταγὴ τῆς op.] “Your unanimous obedience,” Hebraic genitive. 2 CORINTHIANS. 75 CHAPTER X. HEBR. 2. κατὰ σάρκα π. 10. ἡ παρ. τοῦ σώμ. Non-C. 1. πὶ vu. διὰ tis... 2. τίνας τοὺς... 18. 15. τὰ ἄμετρα. CHAPTER ΧΙ, HesR. 14. ἄγγ. φωτός. Non-C, 1. 19. ἀνέχεσθαι, with gen. 6. ἰδιώτης and ἐν. π. 8. ὀψώνιον, and τὴν v. διακ. -- “service towards you,’ and not “from you.” 20. εἰς πρόσ. 23. ὑπὲρ. Cuap. X. 4. δυνατὰ τῷ ©.|] A literal rendering of an Hebrew idiom (see note, Acts 7. 20), Jonah 3, 3 is, so far as I know, the only instance of this use of ? after an adjective, which Grimm explains as = “Deo judice.” It is probably equivalent to "ED, 2 Kings 5. 1, Gen. 10. 9. The idiom y ὑπακοὴ τοῦ Xp. is found also R. 1. 5, 1 P. 1. 22. 7. τὰ κατὰ mp. BA.| “You look at the things before your eyes,” ‘judge only by what you see”: as in verse 1, “I, who when amongst you am outwardly,” “to the eye” (as my detractors say) “‘ insignificant, but full of boldness towards you in my absence”; infra verse 10. 8. For omission of article here and infra 17, 18, see ch. 8. 5, note. 13. The μεμιλτωμένον γράμμα, which marked bounds, was a κανών. Eis τὰ ἄμετρα here, and v. 15, may possibly be used in the Classical sense of the word, as Grimm takes it, to mean “ extravagantly, im- moderately”: or in a special, non-classical sense, as most Translators and our E. V. have rendered it, “beyond, outside” our measure; as seems to suit the context best. For the adverbial form, εἰς τὰ d., see R. 12. 3, note. Cuap. XI. 2. ἡρμοσάμην ὑμᾶς] “I have got-you-to-be-betrothed,” “have caused you to be...” 10. ἔστιν ad. Xp, ἐν ἐμοὶ] A very strange form of expression, irre- ducible to Greek idiom. ἡ kK. αὖ. ov. dp.| “ Huic gloriationi non precludetur via”: “nemo me impediet quominus hac re glorier”: Grimm, ‘This boasting shall not be barred against me.” 14. ἄγγελον φωτός] The identity of this Hebrew idiom, gen. of noun for adjective, with our own, ‘‘an angel of light” = “a bright, glorious, angel,” makes the phrase seem quite natural to us; and we forget that it is not a Greek form at all: only a literal rendering of a Hebrew form. 76 2 CORINTHIANS. Sept. 28. émiovor....“quotidiane perturbationes”: Numb. 26.9, compare. 91. εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. CHAPTER ΧΙ]. Heese. 12. ἐν π. ὕπ.... 18. περίιεπ. Non-C. 5. 9. καυχ. ἐν ταῖς... 17. Construction of whole verse. 18. ἐπλεονέκτ. Sept. 10. εὐδοκῶ ἐν. Note, M. 3. 17. 16. ἄφρων and ἀφροσύνη] in this passage, and infra 12. 6, 11, seem almost equivalent to “vai,” and “vanity”: “let no man think me vain” because of my boasting. 25. πεποίηκα] This use of ποιεῖν with nouns of time is seldom found in Classical Authors, and not often in V. A., or Apocrypha. Job 10. 7, Ecclesiastes 10. 7, it is the literal rendering of MWY in same sense. In Vulgate this verse stands “nocte et die...fui,” which, if ac- curately interpreted, has a widely different meaning, Cuap. XII. 2, ἐν Xp.] See notes Eph. 6. 21, Ph. 1. 13, Col. 3. 18. 7. τῇ σαρκὶ] Not in, but for: “a sharp corrective for my human pride.” ἄγγελος in V. A. is used always for NPP, as if it meant only “messenger”: whereas in Hag. 1. 13, and Mal. 3. 1, 2. 7, “prophet,” or “minister,” would express its true sense more closely: in accordance with its derivation from the same root, AN?, as naxdy, the leading idea of which is “ministerium,” ‘‘opus alicui delegatum.” We lose sight of this, if we always render ἄγγελος in N. T. (when it ‘clearly does not mean angel) by messenger: as generally in our E. V. Here, for instance, “minister,” or “agent,” is a more appropriate and ‘eorrect translation. For bodily sufferings, as connected with the agency of Satan, see Job 2. 7, L. 13. 16. 18. This absolute sense of περιπατέω, as = “to live,” is distinctly Hebraic: Mc. 7. 5, note, and supra 5. 7. Observe strange use of dative τῷ a. πν., and τοῖς a. ἰχν.: a sort of “dative of the manner,” so ‘seldom, in its most natural instances (of which this is certainly not one), found in N. T. 20. εὑρεθῶ ὑμῖν] we translate at once, by intuition as it were, or by recollection of the familiar Eng. Version, “by you.” Do we consider how rare such a construction is in any Greek Authors? How inex- plicable in S. Paul? who omits the preposition here, when absolutely necessary for the Greek idiom: as he inserts it elsewhere, when utterly 2 CORINTHIANS. 77 CHAPTER XIII. HEBR. 1. πᾶν ῥῆμα. 12. ἐν ay. ¢. Non-C, 2. εἰς τὸ πάλιν. 10. ὦποτ. χρήσ. against the same: with a persistent irregularity, as it were: using it when not wanted, leaving it out when wanted: from old associations, apparently, Hebraic or Alexandrine. Cuap, XIIT. 1. ἐπὶ στόματος] Notes M. 28. 14 and Mc. 8. 4. 4, The use of ἐξ in this sense, implying the cause, (three times in this verse) (“through” and “by,” Ἐπ V., ex in Vulg.,) is due most probably to the Septuagint renderings of }!?, when, as so often, it carries this meaning. Supra 2. 2, 1. 9, GALATIANS. CHAPTER I. Hepr. 6. ἐν χ. X. 16. ἐν ἐμοὶ. 18. πρὸς av. Non-C. 4. τοῦ ἐν. αἰ. π. 18. ἀν... ἷστ. 22. ἤμην ayy. τ. 1. Cuapter IT. Hepr. 16. ἐξ ἔ. ν., ἐκ π. and οὐ δικ. π. σ. Non-C. 2. κατ᾽ ἰδ....«ἔδραμον, 5. πρὸς ὥραν. CHAPTER III. Hepr. 6. ἐλογ. av. εἰς 6. 17. εἰς X. 19. δι ayy. R. 2. 27, and ἐν x. Non-C. 19. ἄχρις οὗ ἔς. 23. ὑπὸ with ace. SEPT. 10. τοῦ 7.= 7, M. 2, 6, note. 3? Cuap. 1, 6. καλέσαντος ἐν x.| See notes at 1 Cor. 7. 15, and 1 Th. 4, 7. 9. καὶ ἀρτι)] Most probably Hebraic; from similar use of }, 16. ἐν ἐμοὶ] by me: by my ministry. Cuap. 11, 16. ἐξ ἔργων and διὰ πίστεως are clearly not correspondent terms: there must be a special distinct meaning for each preposition. Is it not possibly the same use of διὰ as in 2 Cor, 2. 4, “out of the midst of,” “combined with”? πίστις Xp., can this be “ faith in Christ”? see R. ὃ, 22, How can we, by any principles of language, get this meaning out of the phrase? I cannot but think the inter- pretation, so much reprobated by Grimm, deserves careftl consideration : ‘fides, quee auctore, approbante, jubente Christo, habetur Deo”: the same force of the genitive as in δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ, “ Christ’s faith,” i.e. ‘the faith He preseribes and exacts.” Cuap. III. 6. édoy. εἰς 6.] There is no ° in Gen. 15. 3, quoted here: but the form with εἰς in similar cases was so habitual to the Authors of V. A. that they introduced it here. GALATIANS. 79 CHAPTER IV. HesR. 6. ἀββᾶ ἃ mw. 18. πρὸς v. 20. ἐν v. 27. ἡ od τ. nom. for voc. Non-C. 11. μήπως x. 16. ὥστε. 20. ἄρτι. 24. ἅτινα. 9. ot ex. 7] M. 5. 37, note. “The faith people”: “all true. believers”: T2198 23, 19. διατ. δι᾿ ayy.| “out of the midst of,” ‘in the presence of.” 23. τὴν μ. π. ἀποκ.] Irregular syntax, very common in Hebrew: see 2 Sam. 13. 16, and the V. A. rendering: a specimen of strange mistakes, Eph. 2. 3, M. 25. 34, note. Cuar. IV, 13. δύ ἀσθένειαν] The accusative here inexplicable, on any principles of grammar. Ellicott translates literally, “ because of,” “on account of”: but this is utterly unsatisfactory. Let us rather admit, at once, that it is an instance of bad grammar: ace. for gen., and make it equivalent to TMD, R. 2.27. “Under the influence of,” “out of.” 3.19. What particular ἀσθένεια Σ Does not the allusion to ὀφθαλμοὺς (15) suggest weakness or disease of the eyes? The result probably of his stroke of blindness at his conversion: which would account for his seldom writing by his own hand: and agrees with many things said about his bodily infirmity. τὸν πειρασμόν pov, “my trial,” as he calls it (14). 20. ἄρτι) Apparently never used in V. A. 24. ἀλληγορούμενα] not “an allegory”: but “capable of being allegorised”: as the Niphal in Hebrew. Make a συστοιχία: and take Agar and Sara, the slave and the free-woman, as allegorical representa- tives of the bondage of the Mosaic, and the liberty of the Christian, dispensation : under two categories : Ist. κατὰ oapxa. Agar. Ishmael. Lex in Sina. Jerusalem ter- restris. Judi. Servitus. 2nd. κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίαν. Sara. Isaac. Evangelium. Jerusalem ce- lestis, Christiani. Libertas. 27. ἡ οὗ τ....οὐκ ὦ. Literally quoted from V. A., showing the ungrammatical use of οὐ for μὴ in such expressions, common to V. A. as to N. T. 29. ὁ κατὰ odpka...rov x. πνεῦμα] ‘He whose birth was natural ...him whose birth was supernatural.” 1 Cor. 10, 3, 15. 44, 31. dpa] Not “so then,” as a deduction from the preceding ar- gument ; but as expressing antecedent conclusions. “Surely you cannot 80 GALATIANS. CHAPTER V, HEBR. 16. qv. reper. Non-C. 6. ri. 9. μέρα & 12. dd. κ' drow. 21. B. @, no article. CHAPTER VI. Hesr. 1. ἔν τ. π. 12. ὅσοι 0. εὐπροσ. wish to stand in the first category: to go back to Judaising bondage. Surely we, Christians, Ἰσαὰκ τέκνα κατ᾽ ἐπαγγελίας, are not children of the bondwoman, but of the free: surely we shall not consent to dis- inherit ourselves.” Cuap. V. 1. τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ] Infra 13. James 1. 25, νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλ. “the Gospel, the law” (i.e. dispensation, covenant, enact- ment) “of freedom: Judaism...... of bondage.” 17. Our translation in E. V. is undoubtedly wrong, as contra- dicting 8, Paul’s previous line of argument, full of encouragement and promise : whereas E. V. suggests helplessness and despair, “so that ye cannot do the things that ye would.” 8. Paul teaches that by the help of God men may master the evil tendencies of their nature (16). And then goes on (17) “For the flesh,” ie, human nature, “is ever struggling against the Spirit: bué (on the other hand) so is the Spirit against the flesh: and these are set one against the other” (i.e. God has given us the help of His Holy Spirit as a counterpoise against the carnal tendency) ‘‘to enable you to avoid doing whatever your lusts desire,” “for the very purpese that you need not do whatever you have a mind to.” ἵνα μή, “in order that you may not,” “to the end you should not”; much closer to the true meaning than, “so that you can not.” The Vulgate gives correctly, “Caro enim concupiscit adversus Spiritum: Spiritus autem adversus carnem: hee enim sibi invicem adversantur: ut non quecunque vultis ea faciatis.” 25. We have ear in this Chapter, with περιπατέω (16), £6, ἄγομαι (18), and στοιχέω: according to the common Hebrew idiom of “walk” for “life.” ‘If we-are-for living a spiritual life,” (as doubtless we are: there is no uncertainty implied by 2 a pe 4 πίστιν ἐν... 20. ἐν δεξιᾷ a. 22. αὐτὸν ἔδωκε. CHAPTER II. Heer. 2. περίεπ. x. τ. αἰῶνα and υἱοῖς τ. a. 8. τῆς σαρκὸς ΄ >? 2 ” 5 / > “ and τέκνα ὀργ.. 6. ἐν X. 11. ἔθνη ἐν σ. 15. κτίσῃ εἰς ἕνα. 21. 22. Whole verse. Non-C, 4. πλούσ. ἐν é. CHaptTer III. Hepr. 11. πρόθ. τῶν ai. 13. ἐν ταῖς Or. μου. 10. τὸν md. τῆς 6. a. and εἰς τὸν ἔ. a. Cuap. 1. 15. τῷ Iv. τῆς ἐπ.] Acts 1. 4. 14. ἀπολ. τῆς περιποιήσεως)] ‘The redemption of the purchasing”: i.e. “the redemption which Christ has secured for us at the cost of his own blood”; E. V. translation would require περιποιήματος. But see 1 Pet. 2. 9. ἀπολύτρωσις = “payment in full.” “The Holy Spirit, which is the earnest of our inheritance, for (eis) the payment in full of every promise” at the great day (nu. ἀπολ. 4. 30) when the Sons of God shall enter into their full inheritance. I doubt if eis can mean “until.” But see 1 Th. 4. 15, 2 Tim, 1. 12. Cuap. 11. 8. τέκνα φ. ὁ.7] Gal. 3. 29. 15. κτίσῃ εἰς ἕ. x. ἀ.] εἰς literal rendering of εἶ as Gen, 2. 22, ὠκοδόμησεν THY πλεύραν εἰς γυναῖκα. 20. ἀκρογωνιαίου)ῇ] See M. 21. 42, note. “The head stone of the corner,” i.e. “key stone or crown of the pointed arch”; γώνη = angle. Infra 4. 16, note. EPHESIANS. 83 CHAPTER LV. Hesr. 3. 14, 30. ἐν- 18. εἰς pa. nA. τοῦ mA. 17. ἐν K. 22. τὰς ἐ. τῆς ἀπ. 24: ὁσιότ. τῆς Gr. 29. πᾶς λ....μὴ. 952. ἐν Χρ. ; Non-C. 18. διὰ with ace. ἐσκ. τῇ 6. dat. of part, and infra 29. CHAPTER V. Heer. ὅ. πᾶς π....οὐκ. 1 3.2.21. 8. τέκνα φ. 14. ὁ καθ. nom. for voc. and 22. 95. 18. ἐν av. 26.31. ἔσονται εἰς. Cuar. IV. 8. Neither an exact quotation from V. A., nor a literal rendering of the Hebrew: in which it is not “gave,” but “received” gifts, DJ83, “in the form or nature of man,” “as man,” Our incarnate Lord, ascending in His human body, received gifts for His people. 9. τὰ κατώτερα p. τῆς γῆς] “the lower region,” namely, “that of Earth.” 12. πρὸς τ. x. τῶν a. eis] Mark ‘force and relation of the pre- positions. The εἰς depends on καταρτισμόν. ‘With a view to the perfecting” (the full equipment .and supply) “of the Saints for...,” “ut Christiani indies perfectiones et aptiores .reddantur ad opera ministerii, ad xdificationem Ecclesie.” “Till we all arrive at unity in the faith and knowledge of the Son of God,—at the maturity of our powers,—at the standard of full-age in Christ”: “full Christian growth.” τοῦ πληρ. Hebr. gen. of qualification. ἵνα μηκ. ὦμεν νήπιοι, ἀλλ᾽ ἄνδρες τέλειοι. 14. ἐν π. πρὸς τὴν μεθ. τῆς πλ.] “by their subtle-practices for waylaying and misleading”: μεθοδέία “nomen neque in V. A., neque apud profanos obvium,” Grimm. 16. συναρμ. καὶ συμβιβαζ] These verbs.express the exact effect of the key stone of an arch (2. 20). “Βγ Whom the whole body, the Church, symmetrically arranged and firmly eompacted and knit to- gether by every joint and articulation of his bountiful supply, maketh continual progress towards its peaceful and -harmonious amplification and stability.” 17. μαρτύρ. ἐν K.] = 3 yavn: the usual Hebr. form. 29. πρὸς οἶκ. τῆς xp.] “for necessary and profitable edification” ; or “for promotion of the general advantage.” Cuap. V. 6. υἱοὺς τῆς ἀπ.] Supra 2. 2. - Ὕ 3, “contumaces, qui sibi persuaderi nolint.” ἀπειθέω in V. A. does not imply wnbelier, but 6—2 84 EPHESIANS. Non-C. 15. βλέπετε πῶς. 24. ἐν παντί. 81. ἀντὶ τ. CHAPTER VI. Hepr. 1.10. 21. ἐν K. 2. ἐν érayy. 12. ta wv. Tis πὶ 14. 16. 18. 19. 24, ‘resistance to the truth,” “ refractoriness,” ‘‘ rebellion,” ‘‘ disobedience,” and so apparently in N. T. Hebr. 4. 6. Hence as signifying ‘‘ unper- suadeableness ” also it is frequently applied to the Gentiles. 18, οἴνῳ...ἐν πνεύματι͵ Mark dat. with and without prep., each expressing the instrument. M. 3. 11, 1 Th. ὃ. 3. 26. ἐν ῥήματι] Comp. James 1. 18, ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς λόγῳ ἀληθείας ; “Ἢ hath given us a new birth by a word of truth,” “by holy words whose virtue never fails,” M. 11. 19, i.e. ‘the prescribed efficacious form of words ordained by our Lord for Baptism”: “having cleansed it in the Water-bath by His own solemn word.” 27. A metaphor from the Eastern practice of purification before marriage. Esther 2. 12. 32. εἰς Χρ.] “with reference to”: Acts 2, 25, Hebr. 1. 7. Cuap. VI. 5. -τοῖς x. κατὰ σάρκα] “‘your masters in the world,” “natural”; as opposed to κατὰ πνεῦμα, “in spiritual affairs.” 12. τὰ mv. τῆς πον. ἐν τοῖς ἐπ.}] “wicked spirits all above and around us’: the Jewish notion of ‘‘demons in the air.” 15. ἐν ἑτοιμασίᾳθ, The usual explanations of this word seem to be without special force or meaning. E. V. “the preparation of the Gospel of peace” is unintelligible, as referring to a piece of defensive armour for the feet. ‘Alacri et prompto animo quem efficit Evange- lium pacis,” Grimm’s suggestion, is strangely inconsistent with the metaphor, and inappropriate. But there is one meaning, derived from VY. A., hitherto apparently overlooked or undiscovered, which has a singularly exact coincidence. 2, Dan. 11. 7, 20, 21, 1122, Ezra 2. 68, 3. 3, Zach. 5. 10, are all ἑτοιμασία in V. A., and all = “ basis,” “ founda- tion,” “something to stand on.” Ps. 112. 7, 13? 1133, ἑτοίμη καρδία αὐτοῦ. Ps. 88. 14, δικαιοσύνη... ἑτοιμασία τοῦ θρόνου σου, 132, “the firm basis, on which Thy throne stands.” Hence metaphorically used here for the strong sole of the caliga with which each Roman soldier was shod: the firm support under his feet, on which he stood and stepped, and advanced fearlessly and calmly and securely over dangerous ground. Keble, in his description of the Christian armour, has, for this item of it, “Then heavenly calmness, lest thou fall where dangers line the way”: and this, “the Gosnel of peace” can alone supply. So I suggest, EPHESIANS. 85 Non-C. 8. γένηται καὶ ἔσῃ. 8. ὃ ἐάν τι. “having undergirt your feet,” “having your feet shod,” “with the sure support and defence and basis,” “the solid, firm substratum” “of the Gospel of peace,” to carry you safe over the rough ways of the world. «« Apparatus” would more nearly express the meaning than “ prepara- tion”: which is clearly derived, through the Vulgate, “calceati pedes in preparatione ey. pacis,” from the primary meaning of ἑτοιμάζω, literally rendered. But this verb is used in V. A. over a hundred times, for }}2 in its different moods, with all its various shades of meaning, (among which “constituo, stabilio, confirmo,” are prominent,) as if equivalent to them all (which of course it is not, “apud Grecos,” in the Classical Authors); e.g. 1 Chr. 17. 11 ἑτοιμάσω τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ, 2 Chr, 12. 1, 2 Kings 2.12. In each of these the Vulgate has the true meaning: severally, “stabiliam,” “cum roboratum fuisset,” “firmatum est.” In other places it appears to have followed V. A. without discrimination, e.g. Ps. 21. 13, 88. 3, Hab. 2. 12, with the literal preparare. Hence we can understand its adopting preparatio for ἑτοιμασία here. 17. τοῦ σωτηρίουΠἢἠ A common translation of maw) in V. A. 15. 59: 17, “or YI}3, περικεφαλαία σ., 1 Th. 5. 8. 21. πιστὸς ὃ. ἐν K.] This phrase ἐν K. appears to me very difficult to explain: and I can not feel satisfied with Grimm’s elaborate attempts, I believe it to mean “coram Christo.” Note at Col. 3. 18 and Phil. AES. 2 et AA PP ASIN ς: CHAPTER I. Hesr. 8. ἐν στὰ 1. X. 26. Non-C. 13. τοῖς X. 7. 14. λόγον λαλεῖν. 28. ἐν μηδενὶ. CHAPTER II. Hesr. 10. ἐν τῷ 0. 13. ὑπὲρ τῆς ev. 16. εἰς κενὸν. ἃ é Non-C. 2. τὸ vy gp. 16. Whole verse. 23. ὡς ἂν ἀπ. 29. μετὰ π. x. Cuap. I. 8, ἐν σπλαάγχ.] “ with an affection like that of Jesus,” “inspired by Jesus.” 138. ἐν Χριστῷ] Can -this mean “by the help of Christ,” “through Christ”? “my imprisonment has, through Christ, become known.” Grimm renders: δεσμοὶ ἐν X. “vincula quorum causa posita est in consortio Christi,” unsatisfactorily. Cua. IT. 8. μέχρι θ.] “even as far as death.” 9. τὸ ὄνομα] = DY =the name, Jehovah; the same as Κύριος m(11). 10. “That every knee should be bent‘in the name of Jesus”; 1. 6, “that all our prayers should be offered in His Name.” John 14. 6, 15. 16, 16. 23. 13. ὑπὲρ τῆς εὐδοκίας] = ἡ Νὴ by exactly translated: which V. A. render by δεκτὰ “acceptably,” Is. 60.7. In 59. 18 oY, for which ὑπὲρ is the strict and literal equivalent, means “ propter,” or “secundum”: and so ὑπὲρ here may possibly have that meaning, as though expressing Y. Grimm explains quite differently, without any reference to Hebrew. Gesenius says: “ 2) substantivis abstractis premissum ad- verbiis circumscribendis inservit.” "}Y by falso. Lev. 5. 22, V. A. ἀδικῶς: (compare L. 16. 9. Wt oY large, V. A. περισσῶς, Ps. 31. 24; nbpy by leviter, Jerem. 6. 14: and so ἢν by, Is. 60. 7 (see above), “in a pleasing manner,” which seems to be the meaning of PHILIPPIANS. 87 CHAPTER III. HeEBR. 3. ἐν σαρκὶ π. 1. 6. 14. Non-C. 2. βλέπετε. 8. ἀλλὰ μ. οὖν xk. 12. εἰ καταλάβῳ. 10, στοιχεῖν κανόνι. CHAPTER IV. Heer. 1.7. 15: 151 εἰς Δ. 19.) ev ὃ. ep X. Non-C. 10. 767...... toend. 6. 12. the text; “in a way to please Him,” “agreeably to His will.” (In V. A. εὐδοκία is almost always put for }1¥7.) Gesenius compares the phrase to Hy, Jerem. 6. 20 (δ΄. A. δεκτὰ) making that adver- bial, as N12, Jerem. 6. 29, 30, in V. A., εἰς κενὸν, εἰς ματαῖον. See Note Rom. 12. 3: and infra verse 16. V. A. use ὑπὲρ very seldom, 2 Kings 18. 5, Ps. 55. 7, Thr. 4. 7. I have found no other instances. It would appear to have been almost unknown to the Translators, which may account for their rendering oY by a periphrasis as above. 80. τῇ ψυχῇ] = WD}, himself: “running great risks for himself.” Cuap. IIT. 2. 8. Paul disputes the right of the old Judaising party to call themselves 7 περιτομή, or ot ἐκ περιτομῆς (Acts 10. 45, 11. 2), and asserts his claim to it, and that of all true believers: and coins a new word for the “destructives,” κατατομή: the false teachers, who like dogs, bark down true doctrine. 8. ἐν σ. πεποιθότες) 3. }ONT, the usual Hebrew form, is trans- lated in V. A. indifferently with or without ἐν: e.g. Ps. 78. 22, 32. Hence a similar use in N. T. See Notes Mark 1. 15, 2 Thess. 3. 4. 5. Ἕβρ. é&‘EBp.] “of Hebrew blood a Hebrew,” “a Pharisee to the very letter of the law”: κατὰ v. Φ. 2 Cor. 11. 22, Gal. 1. 14, Acts 6. 1, notes. 16. “But that to which we have attained, is, to walk...” may possibly be the correct translation. Cuap. IV. 5. ὁ Κ. ἐγγύς] -- μαρὰν aba. 2 Cor. 16. 22. 6. τῇ mp. καὶ τῇ δ. μετὰ εὐχαριστίας] Can this have any reference to special prayers at the Eucharist? The use of the article seems to mark a definite and special occasion. 15. εἰς λόγον δόσεως] Hebrew idiom = 124 by. M. 5. 32, note, COLOSSIANS. CHAPTER 1. Hepr. 4. 9. 11. 21. 23. 28, 29, all illustrate varying mean- ings of ἐν, very frequent in this epistle, CHAPTER II, Hepr. 1. ἐν σ. 2. εἰς 7. πλ. τῆς TA. 14. ἐκ τοῦ μ. Non-C. 8. Br. μή ἔσται. 14. τὸ χ. τοῖς δ. -CHapter III. Hesr. 6. vi. τῆς ἀπ. 18. nom. for voc. and ἐν K. Non-C. 11. ὅπου Ξε ἴῃ whom, in which. Cuap. 11. 11. τῇ περιτομῇ τοῦ Χρ.} 1.6. Baptism ; which is the Christian initiation, as Circumcision was to the Jews. 15. ἐν παῤῥησίᾳ] “openly,” “boldly,” “confidently” : Mc. 8, 32 note. Cuap. III. 1. εἰ οὖν συνηγέρθητε] = “ Seeing then that ye have been raised up,” implying a recognised fact. In ordinary Greek, of course, it would mean “if ye had been.” 4. gavep. ἐν δόξῃ] M. 13. 43, James 1. 17: “appear” is far too weak in either case: “manifestation,” “showing forth openly,” is the idea, 5. τὰ pédy...] Can this mean “ mortify your members as to forni- cation”... : or are we to look upon these and similar offences as members making up collectively the whole body of Sin: looking on sin as a body ? Observe the curious introduction of the definite article before only one noun, τὴν 7A. : a strong instance of Hebraic irregularity in its use. 6. ἀπειθείας.) Note Eph. 5. 6, Hebr. 4. 6, R. 11. 30. 7. ἐν αὐτοῖς : 1.6. τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπ. 10. κατ᾽ εἰκ. τοῦ xr.| See below 14, συνδ, τῆς ad., and 4. 12 ἐν π. θελ. τοῦ Θ, : all specimens of same class of deviation from strict COLOSSIANS. 89 CHAPTER IV. Non-C. 3. @.... λαλῆσαι. 17. βλέπε. grammar (which requires two definite articles in such cases,) traceable to Hebraic influence : as also 1 Ῥ, 3. 12, of ὀφθ. K. and ὦτα αὖτ., and Jude 6, ayy. τοὺς μητ. 1 Th. 2. 13, 4. 3. 12. ἐνδύσασθε... σπλάγχνα] a curiously distorted metaphor. σπλ. οἶκτ. = “ pitiful feelings,” Hebraic. 2 Cor. 6. 13. 10. ἐν χάριτι] Can this mean “thankfulness, gratitude,” as con- stantly in ordinary Greek? I cannot find any instance of this use in V. A. except the one given by Grimm, 2 Macc. 3. 33: but it is not uncommon in N. T. 1 Tim. 1. 12; Philemon 7, Rom. 6. 17, 7. 25, 2 Cor. 9. 15, Luke 6. 32. Here, “with gratitude in your hearts,” or “singing, with your hearts, in gratitude”: “with grateful heart worship.” 18. ἀνῆκε] Eph. 5. 4, Philem. 8, apparently cognate with and used in same sense as προσῆκε. Found in only three passages of N. T. and four times in V. A.: in Apocrypha, 1 Macc. 10. 40, 42,11. 35, 2 Mace. 14. 8. In Classical Authors, apparently never occurring in this signification. ἐν Kupiw| This phrase, so frequently employed by δ. Paul, but only once, in same sense, by any N. T. writer (Apoc. 14. 13), is most difficult to explain, or account for, or adequately interpret. May I venture some attempt at its elucidation? Can it mean ‘‘apud, coram,” “in the presence of,” “in the sight of,” as equivalent to 2 in V. T. fre- quently? Gen. 23. 18, ᾿Ξ 223, V. A. ἐναντίον τῶν εἰσπορευομένων, Ex. 14. 4, Gesenius considers this as an abbreviation of “ΜΞ or 353 ; can we imagine 8. Paul using ἐν with a similar meaning? I think it will be found that this sense, or one derived from or connected with it, fits and suits most of the passages in his Epistles. Rom. 9. 1, 16. 13, Phil. Et, 3: 1,,6.,1, Eph. 6. 21,1 Th, b.. 1,2 Th. 1. 10, and infra. Col. 3.20, 4. 7, σύνδουλος ἐν Xp. We should understand at once, συνδ. ἐν ἀνθρώ- ποις, “in medio hominum,” “ apud, coram homines.” Can the idea and the phrase possibly have been transferred, from the frequency of its familiar use, in the Hebraistic dialect of the day, when several persons were spoken of, to cases where there was only one ? 22. τοῖς κατὰ σάρκα x.| as opposed to τοῖς κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, or κ. Χριστὸν. Cuap. [V. 6. εἰδέναι] The infinitive is often used as if it were a noun, in apposition to another noun going before it, im any case: here εἰδέναι seems to be in this relation to ἅλατι ; “seasoned with salt,” 1.6, (namely) “the knowing how...” 1 THESSALONIANS. CHAPTER I. Non-C. 6. μετὰ y. wv. ἃ. 9. ἐπεστρ.... Sour. CHAPTER II. Hepr. 2 and 17. 18. καὶ = but. Non-C. 7. ὡς dv... θάλπη. 10. γίγνομαι, with adverbs. Cuap. I. 3. Hebraic: “ your faith-sprung works, your love-inspired zeal, your hopeful expectation of Christ,” “ever making mention” of these ‘‘ before God.” 5. πληροφορίᾳ] metaphor: “either from a ship in full sail and so = βεβαιότης ; or from a tree in full bearing, with notion of completeness, satisfaction, full persuasion.” Schl. Cuap II. 6. ἐν Bape] Schl. sub voce, says, “ Paulus respexit sine dubio usum Vocab. Hebr, 113.” The original meaning was “ gravitas, pondus ”: and hence “dignity, honour.” V. A. renders it by τὸ ἔνδοξον. Is, 22. 24, 59. 19. But in Judges 18. 21,—where it means “res pretiosa,” ‘res gloriosa,”—they have βάρος : which, we may hence infer, with them =“‘dignity, honor, high repute”; as ‘“ gravitas = auctoritas ”. “When we might justly have claimed high place among you.” 13, λόγον Θεοῦ] “The word of God as you heard it from us” = τὸν aKons—ap —nu. τοῦ Θ. A. : see notes supra 1. 3, and Col. 4. 12. 17. πρὸς καιρὸν wpas| L. 8. 13, John 5, 35, Galatians 2. 5, 1 Cor. 7. 5, 2 Cor. 7. 8, Philem. 15, Hebr. 12. 10, 11, Jac. 4.14. These are apparently the only instances of this very remarkable use of zpos, seldom, if ever, met with in Classical Authors: which seems to be used as if equivalent to eis in similar expressions, e.g. εἰς ἐνίαυτον, which is Homeric ; and common also in V. A. and N. T. But I have not found zpos in this sense anywhere in V. A. Of course, we translate it easily and readily and instinctively, by our own corresponding idiom : but how did it get into N. T.? I cannot connect it with any Hebrew 1 THESSALONIANS. 91 CHAPTER III. HER. 4. πρὸς ὑ. 9. ἔμπρ. τ. Θ. Non-C, 1. μηκ. στέγ. 10. δεόμ. εἰς τὸ ἐδ. CHAPTER IV. HeEpR. 8. εἰς v. 15. ἐν X. Κι. omission of article. 16. ἐν x... φ... σ. all remarkable. 17. εἰς ἀέρα. Non-C. 1. épwr.=request. 10. αὐτὸς 18. ὥστε π. CHAPTER V. Hesr. 2. ἡ nw. K. 23. καὶ... τηρηθ. so that... supra 3. 5. Non-C. 1. yp. ἔχ. γραφ. 13. ἡγεῖσθαι... ἐν ay. 18. ἐν παντὶ. 27. ὁρκίζω... ἐπιστ. form, Vulgate renders it by ad in all the above, except the three last, where it has in. Grimm’s citations from Classical Authors do not touch the difficulty, exhibiting an entirely different meaning of zpos. Cuap. III. 3. τῷ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι] “ΒΥ the fact that no one is depressed and cowed by these afflictions”: i.e. to comfort you about your faith (verse 2), by the example and experience of God’s Saints. 5. μήπως] “whether or no,” as Gal. 2. 2. How are we to explain the change of mood in μήπως ἐπείρασεν καὶ γένηται ἢ Is it not possibly Hebraic, corresponding to a well-known and frequent use of } for “so that”: “whether or no the Tempter has tempted you, im order that our labour might be in vain,” infra 5. 22. It is clear that ἐπείρασεν and γένηται cannot be coupled together by a mere and. For eis κενὸν see Β. 12. ὃ. Cuap. IV. 1. παράκ. ἐν K.] ἐν -- 3 adjurandi, so common in Hebrew and so generally rendered in V. A. by ἐν: 1 Sam, 24, 22, ὄμοσόν μοι ἐν Κ. 2Sam.197. See M. 5. 34 and 2 Th. ὃ. 6. , 3. “The will of God is your sanctification”: three constituent links in which are expressed by the three infinitives, ἀπέχεσθαι, εἰδέναι, μὴ ὑπερβαίνειν. 6. ἐκάλεσεν. ..ἐν ay.| Most probably ἐν, as equivalent to Hebrew 3, stands here for εἰς, which is one of the meanings of that preposition, “has called you unto sanctification.” See notes 1 Cor. 7. 15, Gal. 1. 6, M. 28. 19. 15. It is most unusual to have eis=until. 2Tim 1.12. Perhaps in each case it does not refer to the time but the object. M. 10, 22, 24, 13, Me. 13. 13. It would seem to be due to the literal rendering of ? in similar expressions ; as constantly found in V. A. 2 THESSALONIANS. . CHAPTER II. Non-C. 10. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν. 13. πίστις an. Cuap. 1. 10. ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις] possibly “ coram sanctis Ejus.” Col. 3. 18, note: Ex. 14. 4, TMPIBR TADS V. A. ἐνδοξασθήσομαι ἐν Φαραῷ: where the literal ἐν obscures the force of 3 ; which is the same here as in Gen, 23, 18, where V. A. has caught and given the true meaning, ἐναντίον. Or we may translate ἐν here, “ by,” as so very common a sense of 3. Matt. 3. 11. 11. πληρώσῃ...ἐν δυνάμει] “complete in you a full delight in all goodness and works that spring of faith, effectually and powerfully.” Cuap. II. 1. ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας] “with respect to”: ὑπὲρ is the exact literal equivalent of ὃν, one of the well-known meanings of which is, “concerning, with respect to,” 1 Kings 22. 8, Is. 1. 1, Gen. 26. 21: but in these V. A. have περί. I find ὑπὲρ only three times in V. A.: in two of which it stands for 5Y in the above sense: 2 Kings 18, 5, Ps. 55. 7. It isa legitimate inference that such a meaning may have gradually attached to the word, as suiting literally the old familiar mode of ex- pression, when transferred into Greek. Phil. 2. 13. The Thessalonians would seem to have misunderstood his first epistle: cap. 4, 15, 2. δι ἡμῶν] In V. A. διὰ is frequently used for 725, “by the hand of,” 2 Chr. 29. 25, Jos. 20. 2. So that here it may mean simply “ by my hand,” “from me.” 3. 0 vids τῆς ἀπ.] J. 17. 12, note. 10. Here ἀληθεία and ἀδικία are opposed, as constantly by V. A. See notes at M. 11.19, L. 16. 9, 1 Tim. 3. 16. Here render “ with every lying deceit.” Below, verse 12, the opposition is still more pointed and emphatic: ἀδικία clearly means ‘lying, falsehood,” cor- responding to τὸ ψεῦδος in verse 11. It is astonishing how all the 2 THESSALONIANS. 93 CHAPTER III. Hesr. 1.10. πρὸς ὕ. 4. πεπ.ἐν K. 6.15. καὶ = yet. Versions, following in the wake of the Vulgate, have copied and repro- duced this glaring mistake of the V. A., and so have confused and dis- torted the plain meaning of innumerable passages in O. T.: and our English Version notably so, But what wonder, when the irregular and careless interchange of δίκαιος and ἀληθὴς, ἄδικος and Wevdys, and the substantives connected with them, in V. A., has affected and coloured so frequently whole sentences in N. T. Cuap. IIT. 10. ἦμεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς] M. 13. 56. Mc. 9.19. πρὸς is here not Greek, but Hebraic: in Greek it could not be so used, with an accu- sative, as expressing an action im or near, with no sense of motion to. It is simply the literal rendering of Os which has both meanings. But the translators in V. A., in consequence of their imperfect acquaintance with Greek, unable to discriminate delicate shades of meaning, treated mpos as uniformly equivalent to DN : and so the occurrence of such utterly ungrammatical phrases as that in the text (which would have defied the comprehension of those who knew only real Classical Greek) becomes intelligible; and can in fact only in this way be accounted for, John 1. 1. 1 TIMOTHY. Cuap. I. 16. πρὸς ὑποτύπωσιν] not ‘an example for them to copy,” “‘a pattern for them to imitate”; (as he is speaking of God’s wonderful mercy,) but “‘as a shadowing forth, a sketch, an outline of what should be the experience of all Christians”: “for a picture of the case of all, who, like 8. Paul, should hereafter believe.” ἐν ἐμοὶ πρώτῳ “in” or “by me first”; or rather “by me above and before every one else,” “ by me chiefest of all,” verse 15: which sense of πρῶτος is common in N. T., as in V. A. 1 Ch. 27. 43, Ez. 27. 22, πρῶτα ἡδόσματα, 2 Ch. 26. 20; and is found also in Classical Authors. 18, τὴν x. στρατείαν] = NI311, “ militia,” the service, which every Jewish Priest had to fulfil, 82¥.N2¥>, Numb. 4. 23, “to serve the ser- vice”: V. A. λειτουργεῖν. In this place it has nothing whatever to do with “warfare,” as Εἰ, V. translates it: but with the functions and service of the priesthood, στρατεύειν στρατείαν being the exact equivalent of the Hebrew idiom given above, which describes the sacred service of the Priests, Levites, &c. κατὰ Tas προ. ἐπὶ σὲ προφητείας] “according to supernatural com- munications from above guiding me to thee” :—‘‘in accordance with the intimations of the divine Will previously pointing to thee.” Cuap, III. 13. βαθμὸν, ‘a step up,” advancement, promotion : éravaBaivew. But may it not mean “ foundation,” “ standing ground,” ‘a good footing,” as θεμέλιον infra, 6. 191 16. εὐσεβεία] V. A. for NS}, Prov. 1. 7. In Is. 11. 2 it stands alone for "7) MSY, Is it not possible that this well-known passage may have given the word a fixed and special meaning for the Jews, in which it is used in N, T.? ‘our Holy Religion.” ἐδικαίωθη] M. 11. 19, L. 16. 2, 2 Thess. 2. 10: here, most probably, in accordance with the views stated in my former notes, ‘‘ was declared to be true Christ,” “ authenticated” by the Holy Spirit,” at His bap- tism: “declaratus est talis qualis revera est,” Schl. :—justified, ap- ΠΠΕΜΟΨΗΥ. 95 CHAPTER V. HeEsr. 4. ἐνωπ. τοῦ Θ. 10. ἐν ἔργ. κ. μ. Non-C. 12. πίστις. 24. τινῶν before its noun. proved, demonstrated to be the Messiah, by the gifts and credentials of the Holy Spirit, and by His workings in Himself and His Apostles. ἐν πνεύματι “by the Spirit,” M. 3.11. ἀνελήφθη is the word used in V. A. of Elijah’s Translation, 2 Kings 2. 11 ; and of our Lord’s Ascen- sion in N. T. Acts 1.11. ἐν δόξῃ, not “ into,” but “with” glory. Cuap. IV. 1. ῥητῶς] 1.6. “spoke to S. Paul by inspiration”: fore- showing Gnostic and other heresies. δαιμόνια -- Ὁ V.A. M. 9. 33, note. Ps. 105. 37, and soin Apocrypha: Baruch 4, 5. Hence its use for evil spirits (a notion entirely Jewish) in N. Τὶ 2. ἐν vroxp. wevd.| “THRouGH the hypocrisy of lying teachers”; ev of the cause. 5. ἁγιάζεται] See Lev, 11, 44: both for the word (ay.: V. A. for wp) and the idea. “ΒΥ the word of God.” What word ? the command and explanation given to 8. Peter, Acts 10, 15. 1 Cor. 10. 25, Eph. 5. 26. 7. ‘Harden and train and discipline thyself, with a view to reli- gious improvement,” “to the devout life” ; with the devout life, the life of God in the soul, as itsend andaim. With this object in view, bodily discipline has its use and advantage: small, comparatively, but still realand important. ‘“ Cibis, lautionibus, venere, similibus, ante certamina publica abstinere, γυμνασία appellabatur,” Schl. Hence it may mean “religious discipline of the body,” as distinct from mental and spiritual discipline. 9. πιστὸς ὁ λ.] “The statement is true and to be relied upon.” 14. In 2 Tim, 1. 6 8S. Paul’s agency alone is spoken of: here he speaks of a conjunction of the Body of Presbyters: there it is διὰ ἐπι- θέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου ; here μετὰ, x.7.A. Titus, 1. 5, has it all left to him: in Acts 8, 17, 19. 6, the imposition of hands is used by apostles alone. διὰ προφητείας] “by directions from Heaven,” “by divine intimation and appointment,” ‘‘ by the declaration of God’s will”: as supra 1. 18. Cuapr. V. 5. Here ἐπὶ with acc. after ἐλπίζω: supra 4. 10 it has dative. V. A. constantly use this verb followed by ἐπὶ for 123, confido, as was no doubt known to the Authors of our ἘΝ V., when they translated here “trusteth”; as in 4. 10, 6.17, 1 Pet. 3.5. In Judg. Pay ἢ noad = “securely,” is rendered by ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι. 96 1 TIMOTHY. Cap. VI. 2. ‘Because those who lay claim to the benefit of their services are faithful : i.e, Christian believers.” 5. “looking on our Holy Religion as a means of making money ἢ: thinking that religion is a source of profit. 12. mot “fight the good fight,” but “ run the glorious race,” “ main- tain the noble struggle.” 2 Tim. 4. 7; τρέχωμεν τὸν ἀγῶνα, Hebr. 12. 1. 1 Cor. 9. 25. For wpod... see Heb. 4. 14. 19. As βαθμὸς (supra 3. 13) seems possibly = θεμέλιον, may not the latter here stand for the former? or may the meaning be, “laying up,” —as men pile up treasures,—“ their successive tiers of good works, as a firm basis or foundation, ever rising higher, from which they may stretch upwards to the prize, and spring to lay hold on it at last,” ἀφορμή. As though eternal life were hanging up before us, as the prize of our contest, like a ring, to be grasped and held by the winner. θεμέλιον = ‘a standing ground, a solid basis: something firm beneath the foot.” Each advance in holiness is an upward step, on which to rise yet higher : whereas men, whose religion is mainly talk and feeling, are like people walking up sand-hills; they cannot advance towards the prize: they have nothing to spring from: they slide downwards, and go back. a) Pe OBEY. Cuap. I. 1. Can κατὰ here = “propter,” “with a view to,” “for the purpose of,” as has been suggested by Winer and others: Tit. 1. 1, xara πίστιν Ὁ as -Y often means? If I could cite any instances where V. A. give κατὰ for ὃν, I should feel more inclined to support this suggestion. 2. χάρις, ἔλ. cip.] “The triple crown of glory.” Keble. 5. ὑπόμν. λαμβ. and 9 πρὸ xp. ai. are Non-C, Cuap. II. 2. διὰ w. papr.| “in the midst of,” “coram”: notes R. 2. 27, 4. 11, 14. 20, and Gal. 3. 19. Lllicott and others see that this must be the meaning, and try to account for it: I have shown how it is so, probably. 15. ὀρθοτομεῖν]! Found only here in N. T.; and twice in V. A. Prov. 3. 6, 11. 5, and there with odovs: supposed to be a metaphor from cutting a furrow straight, ὀρθὸς = εὐθύς. Not met with in Classical Authors. May we not here (in the absence of odds, or anything like it) keep to the ewact meaning of the word ὀρθὸς, “ vertical,” “ upright,” and so “true”: “dressing it” (as masons say) “by the plumb-line”: “setting it up and presenting it to the world, all true, square, uniform: with no deflections or distortions.” There does not seem to me to be any idea of division: of breaking the truth up into its several portions: but of shaping and arranging the whole truth for exhibition. Grimm, following Schleusner, drops the idea of “cutting”: and suggests “recté tracto,” which the Vulgate has: illustrating this by the secondary sense of καινοτομεῖν = “nova facio, muto.”—Schl. cites Euseb. H. E. 4. 3, to show that ὀρθοτομία = ὀρθοδοξία, ὀρθοδιδασκαλία: but this, clearly, may be merely derived by them from the use of the word here: and may go to prove that they too understood it as suggested above, and did not hold it to imply division, as our E. V. 19. “Yet this solid and fundamental doctrine of God’s Gospel” (i.e. the Resurrection) “stands firm and sure” (ἔστηκε), “having this seal” and authentication: viz. the same that God gave to the authority GU. 7 98 2 TIMOTEY, of Moses and Aaron against Korah: Numb. 16. 5, V. A.: ἐπέσκεπται καὶ ἔγνω ὁ Κύριος τοὺς ὄντας αὐτοῦ, the correct translation of the original with its two verbs, τ ἽΝ MS “FA YT ὝΘΒ, from which our E, V. has been diverted by the “tomorrow” in verse 16, and the Vulgate ren- dering, ‘‘mane notum faciet Dominus.” ‘ God will discriminate and acknowledge those that are His”; therefore “let every one....” As Moses warned the congregation against Korah (Numb. 16. 26), so the Apostle warns the Church against these false teachers and their UNTRUTH (ἀδικία, 1 Cor. 13. 6, M. 11. 19, 2 Th. 2. 10). The Seal is Κύριος ἔγνω. καὶ = “therefore,” Hebraicé, for }, so common in that sense: ‘therefore let every one... keep clear of all false doctrine.” 25. μήποτε] M. 13. 15, Mc. 4. 12. “In case God, at some future time, may grant them.” E. V. “if God peradventure will give them”: grasping and exhibiting here the true meaning, which it has obscured in the two other passages, by “Jest”: Vulgate, in them all, has ‘‘nequando,” 26. εἰς τὸ ἐκ. θέλ.) Hebraic: εἰς Ξ 5. LiL WS. Cuap. I. 1, ἀπύστ....κατὰ πίστιν] 2 Tim. 1. 1. εὐσέβεια, 1 Tim. 3. 15 =‘ The Christian system.” 3. ἐν κηρύγματι] “by the promulgation of the Gospel message.” The omission of the article is simply Hebraic, and need not surprise any one acquainted with the arbitrary and irregular use of it in Hebrew. I may here again express my opinion of the unsoundness and impracticability of the attempt to account for the anomalies and bewildering perplexities connected with the omission of the definite article in G. T., on any principles of Classical Criticism. 10. οἱ ἐκ 7.] “The strict Jewish party among the Christian converts”: not merely, “the Jew-converts”: Acts 10. 44, 45, 11. 2, 3. Cuap. 11. 13. émd. τῆς δόξης) “The glorious appearing”; as Eph. 4. 13, ἡλικία τοῦ πληρώματος, “the full, complete manhood.” “ Waiting for our blessed hope, even the glorious Epiphany...” 14, περιούσιον͵] Found only here in N. T., and four times in V. A., Ex. 19. 5, Deut. 7. 6, 14. 2, 26. 8, always with λαὸς, for 24D OY, “ populus peculiaris”: with its derivative περιουσιασμὸς, twice (Ps. 134. 4, Eccl. 2. 8); the word seems to have been coined by the Authors of V. A., to express the same idea, which they have rendered once, Mal. 3. 17, by εἰς περιποίησιν. Quoted 1 Pet. 2. 9. It has no classical authority. They would seem to have concluded that, ὃ περιπεποίηται, περίεστι: and therefore περιπεποιημένον = περιούσιον = peculium, Cuap. III. 4, 5. Connect last half of 5 with 4, putting οὐκ ἐξ ἔ.... ἔλεον in a parenthesis: “he has saved us,” i.e. “has provided a way of salvation for us,” “by Baptism, and Renewal of the Holy Spirit” (Collect for Christmas Day); “not in consequence of any works of righteousness in us, but according to his mercy.” 7. κληρον. yev.| “that we may, according to our hope, as we hope, come-in-for-the-inheritance-of,” “attain to”: in which sense κληρονομεῖν 7—2 100 TITUS: is used constantly by V. A. for 5) without any notion of inheritance. For instances see Grimm. And thus both verb and noun are found in N. T., in this wider sense, borrowed doubtless from V. A.; Hebr. 1. 2,4, 11.7, 12.17. This is purely Hebraic, and non-Classical. Poly- bius has it once. It arose probably from the peculiar light in which the Jews looked on the land of Canaan. 9. περιΐστασο] Only found here and 2 Tim. 2. 16: not in V. A.: nor in any Classical Authors in this sense. Josephus, A. J. 4. 6. 12 and Lucian and other later writers use it so. Grimm. ΡΗΓΙΠΈΕΜΟΝ, 6, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει... εἰς Xp.] “by the recognition and reference to Christ of all the good that is in us.” 7. τὰ σπλ... ἀναπέπ.] ‘The hearts of the Saints have been re- freshed, re-invigorated, encouraged.” HEBREWS. CHAPTER I. HER. 1. ἐν τοῖς π....ἐν vid. 3. 5. ἔσομαι εἰς π. 8. Nom. for Voce. Non-C. 3. φέρων. 9. Expice...édacov. The title of this Epistle (as Dr Roberts suggests in his Dissertations on the Gospels) indicates, possibly, πού the Jews universally, nor even the Jewish converts generally, but the strict Jewish party within or without the Church, of ἐκ περιτομῆς: Acts 6. 1: as opposed to the ‘EXAnviotal, the Hellenizers; and the line of argument and the whole tone of the Epistle support this view. That either the difference of style or absence of any personal allusions, or the expression in Chap. 2. 3 ὑπὸ τῶν ἀκ. eis ἡμᾶς..., prove 8. Paul not to be the Author, is untenable. Whoever wrote it, was plainly writing anonymously: and apparently did not wish to be known. Cuar. I. 1. πολυμερῶς]͵ ‘The leading thought seems to be that there were many parts or divisions in the Prophetical Harmony; that no one utterance embraced the entire mystery: and that each portion had its own style and manner: as S. Paul seems to intimate, 1 Cor. 13. 9 ἐκ μέρους." Maurice. 2. κληρονόμον] = wi -- κύριον. Titus 3. 7 and infra 4: κεκληρ. = “ adeptus est, proprium accepit,” ‘‘has by right, as his own.” 7, 8. πρὸς τοὺς ayy., πρὸς τὸν υἱὸν] πρὸς = *&, “with respect to”: Rom. 10, 21, Eph. 5. 32. Hebraic use, though occasionally found in Classical Authors: similarly εἰς, Acts 2. 25. Mark force of pev—ée, ‘and whereas he saith of the Angels...of the Son, on the contrary, he saith.” 102 HEBREWS. 10, 11, 12. The God addressed in Ps. 102 is, all along, God manifest in the flesh to Sion, the Incarnate Messiah, come down to earth : hence the applicability of this quotation. 14, “Sent out on errands of help and service for the benefit of those who...” Cuap. 11. 2. δι’ ayy.| This may mean “in the presence of,” “out of the midst of,” as 2 Tim. 2. 2, and may refer to Deut. 33. 2, and to the Jaw as given from Sinai alone. Or we may understand it of the word and revelation of God conveyed at various times to the Jews by the Prophets, through the intervention of Angels. Chap. 1. 1. mapaKon = ‘ misapprehension.” 5. Supply ἀλλ᾽ ἀνθρώπῳ. Schleusner takes τὴν οἰκ. τὴν μ. 88 = N27 Dio “nova mundi institutio,” ‘“ceconomia Christiana”: the Rab- binic phrase for the post-Messianic era, ὁ μέλλων αἰὼν, as ΠῚΠ “ὙΠ, for the state of things before Messiah: ὁ viv or οὗτος αἰών: a distinction most vividly presented to us in N. T., 1 Tim. 6. 17, L. 18. 30, 20. 35, 1 Cor. 1. 20, Heb. 6.5. But I can find no instance of οἰκουμένη in this sense, though it suits the passage exactly, as expressing “the world of the future”: “as it was to be under the coming dispensation.” For the government and channels of grace in the Church were to be, not by Angels, but by men: and the Church was to. absorb the world and renovate it, and change its character altogether. 10. ἔπρεπε! Can this mean ‘it ΒΕΒΜΕΡ right’? i ab”, or PVE WO, V. A. -- καλόν ἐστιν ἐναντίον αὐτοῦ, “becoming, proper, right, before him,” “in his eyes”; which is the exact meaning of πρέπει, as describing something “ good to the eyes.” We dare not presume to say, —not even an inspired Apostle,—that any particular course of action “became God,” “decebat Deum” (Vulgate). We may conclude, from the results, that such a course “ seemed right to Him.” , 15. ἔνοχοι] See M. 5. 22, 1 Cor. 11. 27. Here it seems to mean “‘subject-to-the-penalty-of”: Vulg. “obnoxii servituti.” But the con- struction with gen. in this sense, is quite anomalous. It had perhaps come to be used as a substantive. 16. “For assuredly it is not angels he comes to help, but the seed of Abraham.” ἐπιλαμβ. = “ to take by the hand.” Cuap. III. 1. τῆς ὁμολογίας ἡμῶν] = “our covenant,” “ feederis nostri”: as Moses was the ἀπόστολος and»Aaron the ἀρχιερεύς of the Jewish. 11. ὡς ὦμοσα] WS, “how I sware,” or “of whom...” 14. ὑπόστασις] parallel to ἐλπὶς in 6: infra 11. 1. HEBREWS. 103 CHAPTER IV. Non-C. 6. ἀπείθ. Eph. 5. 6. 10. κατέπαυσεν. 13. κτίσις. CHAPTER V. Non-C. 2. περίκ. ἀσθ. 12. διὰ τὸν x. CuaprTer VI. Non-C. 6. Ace. after γευσαμένους. 17. ἐμεσίτευσε. Cuap. IV. 2. ὁ X. τῆς ἀκοῆς] See Rom. 10. 16, M. 4.24. “The word of the message,” i.e. “of the Gospel.” Here ἀκοῃ = εὐαγγέλιον, 12. μερισμοῦ] Schleusner “ad intimos animi recessus”; as if parting asunder implies the very middle or innermost part: and Grimm, apparently following him, though without acknowledgment, gives “usque ad absconditissimum illum locum, quo animus et anima inter se discernuntur.” This appears to be the probable meaning. To take the word in an active sense, as Vulg. ‘“‘divisio,” and our E, V. “dividing asunder,” is unjustifiable. Supra 2. 4 it is clearly passive, “ sifts.” But there is the same ambiguity in many of the Latin and English words signifying “division, distribution, assignment”; active forms used passively. 14, k. τ. ὁμολογίας] “Let us hold fast to our vow,” “our covenant with God.” V. A. use the word for Ὑ73, votum, Lev. 22. 18, Deut. 12. 6. Comp. 1 Tim. 6. 12 with this passage, and Jerem. 44. 25, τὰς ὁμολογίας ποιήσομεν ὡς ὡμολογήκαμεν. V. A. for 13772 WS 93°73). Schl. Cuap. V.7. ἀπὸ τῆς εὐλ.] “by reason of,” “as the result of...” =}, Prov. 13.11. The Hebrew preposition is constantly used in this sense among many others (Jude 23, note); whereas ἀπὸ, its primary literal equivalent, is put for it in V. A., without any discrimination of diversity of meaning, almost universally, as though it were its one sole and sufficient exponent.- Gen. 9. 11, οὐκ ἀποθανεῖται πᾶσα σάρξ ἔτι ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕδατος τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ. Ps. 76. 7, τίς ἀντιστήσεταί σοι ἀπὸ τῆς ὀργῆς σου; Hence, probably, it passed into an idiom, and became a vernacular usage. ‘‘ Having his prayer heard by reason of his piety,” ‘‘he learnt, from what he suffered himself, Son though he was, the difficulty of obedience.” Cuap. VI. 1. τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς...λ.] “The initiatory doctrine,” “the elementary teaching,” of Christ: “the first principles of Christianity.” 5. μέλλοντος ai.] = οἰκουμένη ἡ μελλ. cf. 2. 5. 7. ᾿ εὐλογία] “ blessing,” 2 Cor. 9.5. V. A. for 1372, Lev. 25, 21, Ez. 34. 26, ὑετὸν εὐλογίας. 104 HEBREWS. Cuap. VII. 1. Who was Melchisedek? Clearly he must have been, in Abraham’s belief, the Patriarch of the Holy Chosen Seed, the family of Shem: Head and Priest of the race: to whom Abrabam paid tithe: one of his ancestors; the Representative, by the law of primogeniture, of the rights and dignities of the Sacred Line: whom Abraham, heir of all the promises, acknowledged as his superior, in things human and divine. Which of the descendants of Shem fulfilled these conditions, as first-born in his generation, being alive at the time and within reach of Abraham, on the same side of the Euphrates; on the other side of which they were all born, and so far as we know, chiefly lived? One there was, who, if we may in any degree trust the Jewish Genealogies, lived to a great age and was alive then: whose very name implies that he crossed; who was evidently well known ἴῃ the country as a Progenitor of Abraham; who has left his name to Abraham and all his seed, as their universal designation: who is especially pointed out in the Bible, as the prominent and most remark- able of the progeny of Shem, signalled out for special distinction above Elam and Asshur and Lud and Aram. For Shem is called emphatically (Gen. 10. 21) “the father of all the children of Hber” = 73Y, “qui transivit”; (indicating probably his crossing the great River at the time of the dispersion, intimated by the name of his son Peleg = “ division”), and Abraham is called, by a patronymic, “the Hebrew,” ie. “the Eberite,” or ‘descendant of Eber”: and after him and not after Abraham, all the children of Abraham are called. Eber, Priest by birth-right, ‘“‘a Prince in Religion,” PT¥ ‘DoD = Melchisedek (as he was temporal king of Salem), the type and emblem and embodiment of the Priesthood of the First-born,—seems to have been selected by divine appointment, as the impersonation and representative of the Order, of which Christ was a Priest, by his descent from Judah, in whose favour Reuben, Simeon, and Levi were set aside. (Hebr. 7, passim.) If, as seems most probable, Melchisedek is not ὦ name but a title; no one, in the long list of our Lord’s Progenitors, appears so nearly to fulfil the conditions of the tradition, as Eber; a man so wonderfully honoured by what is implied, rather than said, in Holy Writ, —so pre-eminently immortalised as the stem and root of the Hebrew race, by the transmission of his name, through so many ages of the world’s history. If he was not Melchisedek, who was? The words ἀπάτωρ, ἀμ., ayevead....in verse 3,—as they cannot, of course, be taken literally,—may imply no more than the unquestionable fact, that when Melchisedek is introduced into the Sacred Story, no statement is made as to his parentage or descent, or the time of his birth or death. He appears on the scene and disappears mysteriously ; but that in-no way HEBREWS. 105 CHAPTER IX. Hesr. 3. σκηνὴ... ἁγίων. 5. Χ. δόξης. 8. τὴν τ. a. ὁ. militates against his being a real personage, subject to all the necessary conditions and laws of human existence. 5, 6. ‘And whereas those who...” οἱ μὲν, “in contrast to all this, he...,” 0 δέ. 11. ‘‘God’s people had-been-legislated-for, on it as a basis,” “had received the Law on the understanding of the Levitical Priesthood.” Compare 8. 6. Grimm. 15. εἰ] Acts 26. 8, 23: “if, as is the fact,” “seeing that.” What is περισσ. ἔτι κι! Clearly, the statement above in 12: “the necessity of a change in the law,” i.e. the Divine economy and dispensation: “This necessity is more abundantly patent and demonstrable, from the fact that...” As a consequence of the excellency of the new Priesthood, the Religion connected therewith must take a new and higher excel- lence, i.e, a spiritual. 26. ἔπρεπε] ‘was proper for us,” “ befitting, beseeming.” Cuap. VIII. 8. ἡμέραι ἔρχ....καὶ ovvt.] Hebraic construction, both in use of ἡμέραι (M. 2. 1, note), and καὶ -- |= when: “a time is coming when...” 1]. dad μικροῦ αὐτῶν...] Odi} Tw) DIMPP?, Jerem. 31. 34, literal rendering, except the omission of } and ? which have great force in the original. εἰδήσουσι, N. C. Cuar. IX. 1. δικαιώματα] V. A. passim for PN, OB, ordina- tiones, generally rendered “statutes” in E. V., Deut. 4. 1, Ps. 119. 5, 8,12. τό τε ἅγιον κοσμικόν. Pearson on Creed (Art. 6) quotes the Syriac rendering of this passage, S212) NYP MA, “domus sancta mundana”: the part of the Sauctuary which represented this lower world (i.e. the Outer Court and Holy Place), as the Holy of Holies, or Most Holy, represented Heaven: (which Josephus expressly states to have been the belief of the Jews). So, perhaps, the Vulgate “sanctum seculare.” Etye μὲν οὖν, a new argument. “Aye, and to take other ground: the first dispensation had its appointed rites of service,” “common united worship,” (λατρεία =cultus Dei publicus,) “and its Outer Tabernacle,” for general use, of public access, entered day by day, in which men moved constantly to and fro, as in this lower world. 5. κατὰ μέρος] “part by part,” “in detail”; particularly, E. V. 7. ἀγνόημα] like ἁμαρτία, loses its first sense in its adopted one: and includes a// sin that is not wilful and presumptuous. 106 HEBREWS. Non-C. 17. ἐπεὶ...ὅτε. 24. ἐμφ. τῷ π. CHAPTER X. HeBr. 19. παρρ. εἰς τ. ε. τῶν a. 38. ἐκ π. and καὶ ἐὰν. Non-C. 84. ὕπαρξιν. 10. Can ἐπὶ Bp. «.7.A. depend upon δικαιώματα σ. 1} “ Authorised and prescribed demands upon the body with respect to meats...” ἐπὶ -- 2). Otherwise the rendering in Εἰ, V. seems allowable; ‘carnal ordinances,” i. e. “for the body.” 14. διὰ Iv. αἰων.] Compare R. 1. 4, 1 Tim. 3. 16, 1 P. 3. 18. 26. ovvredcia] The point in which the τέλη of two things, succeeding one the other, meet. 1 Cor. 10. 11. The confluence, or meeting of the two eras, Ante-Christian and Christian. The Jews had, in their theosophy, three systems, (1) Amte-Mosaic, (2) Mosaic, (3) Messianic. The Sacred Writer is here speaking of the two latter. V. A. have συντέλεια for 7? finis, Dan. 12. 4, 13. Cuap. X. 5. σῶμα κατηρτίσω μοι] Exact quotation from V. A. HTow they ever came so to render the original, “Ὁ D3 BNI, “ mine ears hast thou bored,” is inexplicable. We know, Ex. 21. 6, that this means ‘‘thou hast claimed me as a servant.” Here it would seem as if, in the mind of the Translators of V. A., the providing a human body for Christ, was equivalent to making Him a Servant: as Phil. 2. 8, . μορφὴν δούλου λαβὼν, ἐν ὁμοιώματι avOp. γενόμενος. 6. V. A. have yryoas here: but Ps. 50. 16, ὅλοκαυτ. οὐκ εὐδο- κήσεις, without preposition: as also Ps. 84. 1, Gen. 33. 10. Note, M. 3. 17. 19. ἔχοντες] has three accusatives after it, παρρησίαν, ὁδὸν, ἱερέα. 37. ὁ épx.| One of the common names of Messiah, from Gen. 49. 18, Is. 25. 9. Its use here shows that as yet only part of the purpose of His coming was fulfilled. 38. There is a considerable variation in V. A., as quoted here, from the original Hebrew, to which our E. V. is much closer. For INWMONA, “by his faith,” V. A. gives ἐκ πίστεώς pov, “by faith in me”; and for W53, “his soul,” ἡ ψυχή pov. And their substitution of é for a is curious, 39. V. A. 2 Chr. 14. 18, render by περιποίησις MND, “revivifica- tion,” “restoration,” “recovery”; which is its exact meaning here, HEBREWS. 107 CHAPTER XI. Non-C. 8. μὴ...ποῦ. 12. τῷ Tr. 37. φόνῳ μ. SEPT. 5. τοῦ μὴ ἰδ. for 7. CHAPTER XII. Non-C. 2. ἀντὶ. 10. 11. πρὸς or. nu. and τὸ παρὸν. 15. ὑστερῶν ἀπὸ. CHAPTER XIII. Non-C, 5. apx. τοῖς π. 7. ἔκβασιν. Cwap. XI. 1. ὑπόστασις) Cap. 3. 14, 2 Cor. 9. 4, 11. 17. In all these it means “confidence,” “well grounded assurance.” Here it seems rather to mean, in its stricter and closer sense (both of derivation and construction), “substantiation,” “realisation”; the instrument or process, by which we give substance and reality to things: and ἔλεγχος not so much “the test,” as “the mode of testing”:—“illud, quo sub- sistunt que sperantur; quod demonstrat que non cernuntur.” Beza. Without faith in a principle or doctrine, acting as if we believed it, we cannot test it, or prove it to be true. ‘‘ Faith is the process and instrument by which we give substance and reality to things hoped for, and test and ascertain the truth of things unseen.” 21. ἐπὶ τὸ a. τῆς paBdov] From V. A. who apparently read 31, “a staff,” for NOD, “a bed.” Vulg. has “‘lectuli caput.” It seems clear there were no vowel points in the Hebrew MSS. used by V. A. 28. πεποίηκε τὸ π.] Special use of ποιέω for θύω. Note, M. 26. 18. Cuap. XII. 15. μή τις ῥίζα π. a. φ.] This is almost an exact quotation from Deut. 29. 18. E. V. “a root that beareth gall and wormwood,” and in Margin “‘a poisonful herb”: (πικρία -- poison. See Note, Acts 8, 23) 1.6. “one who poisons God’s people with false teaching or bad example”; as the context shows. And such is the meaning here. Cuap. XIII. 7. ἔκβασις] in Apocrypha = “ exitus,” “eventus.” Sap. 2. 17, 8. 9, 11. 15, “significatione a profanis aliena,” Grimm : —‘the issue and outcome of their walk on earth.” 15. dporoy. τῷ ὀνόματι] Parallel to R. 15. 9, τῷ ov. σου ψαλῶ, which is a direct quotation from V. A. (see note). Here it is a sort of confusion with ἐξομολογεῖσθαι. 5S. JAMES. CHAPTER I. Hepr. 6. ἐν 7. 11. προσώπου and πορείαις. 18. ὅτι. 170. 4. 20. 23. τὸ πρόσ. τῆς y. 25. axp. ἐπιλ. CHAPTER ΤΙ Hepr. 1. ἐν προσ. 2. 4. Whole verse. ὅ. 10. 10, ὅστις τηρήσει: fut. 23. ἐλογ. εἰς. Cuap. I. 8. δοκίμιον] V. A. for $2 =the instrument or medium of testing. Prov. 27. 21. 17. πᾶσα δόσις ay....| Hebraic construction. ‘Every gift, good, every bounty, perfect, cometh down from above”: ‘‘ Every gift of God is by its very origin altogether and entirely good and perfect”; with no admixture of evil or blemish in it: a reply to the heresy of verse 13, ἀπὸ Θ. πειράζομαι. God permits, but does not send, evil. Tov πατρὸς τῶν φώτων] i.e. “the Creator of the Orbs οὔ Heaven.” Jerem. 4. 23, Ps. 135. 7 (apud Aquilam, ἄστρα). The name and attribute which most forcibly suggests unchangeableness. Acts 16. 29. 18. ἀπεκύησεν ἡ. λ. ἀλ)] “He gave us a new birth by virtue of a word of truth”; “a word that cannot deceive or fail”: 1.6. by the holy formula, ordained by our Lord himself, for Baptism. Eph. 5. 26, note. 25. παρακύπτειν] .V. A. for Pw, “to bend down to scrutinise.” Gen. 26. 8, Prov. 7. 6. νόμον ἐλευθερίας : note, Gal. 5. 1. 27. θρησκεία = “outward devotion,” “worship.” Deeds of mercy and careful avoidance of the polluting influences of the world, are pure worship: i.e. “elements of it,” “essential parts of it”: not, of course, the whole of it. Cuap. IT. 4. καὶ for dpa, a common meaning of}. ‘Have you not, in fact, made partial selections, and acted as judges influenced by wrong considerations!”: gen. for adj. ‘ wrong-thinking judges.” S. JAMES. 109 Non-C. 14. λέγῃ ἔχ. CHAPTER IV. Non-C. 1. ἡδονῶν. 4. ἔχθρα τοῦ ©. 18. ἄγε, with plural. 14. πρὸς ὀλίγον. CHAPTER V. Non-C. 4. χώρας. 10. ἐλάλησαν τῷ ὀνόμ. 12. ἤτω. Sept. 17. προσηύξ. τοῦ μὴ β. Μ. 2. 6. 5. πλ. ἐν π.] “rich in faith”: a correct idiom in English, as in Hebrew: but utterly incorrect, and bad in Greek. 8. v. βασιλικὸς] ‘The law of our King Jesus.” 10. ἔνοχος] See note, 1 Cor. 11. 27. 20. κενὸς] -- μάταιος in V. A.: they are constantly interchanged as renderings of same words, 221} and XW, Cuap. III. 6. Mr W, Randolph suggests a parallelism, in verses 5 aud 6; (5) a. ὀλίγον πῦρ, ὃ. ἡλίκην ὕ. av., (6) a. ἡ yA. πῦρ, ὃ. ὁ Koop. τῆς ἀδικ. (ἀνάπτεται ὑπ᾽ αὐτῆς), which he thinks is confirmed by φλογίζ. τ. tp. τῆς γι And he quotes in illustration Micah 1. 4: a. Molten were the mountains, ὦ. and the valleys were cleft, a, as wax before the fire, ὦ. as waters poured down a pre- cipice (cleave the face of it). 15,17. σοφία] = 1934, and is used in its Hebrew sense, so common in Proverbs, and throughout Ο, T., of “zeligion,” “ piety.” Cuap. IV. 5. The quotation is in verse 6, from Prov. 3. 34. “Do you think that Holy Scripture ever speaks in vain? The spirit within us feels strong desires, that tend to envy: but God giveth grace yet stronger. And therefore the Holy Writer saith....” There is no quotation from H, 8. in 5: only an introduction to that in 6. ΓΒ ΡΠ}: CHAPTER I. HEBR. 4. εἰς ὑμᾶς. 14. τέκνα v. CHAPTER III. Hepr. 4. ὁ κρ....«ἄνθ. 20. εἰς ἣν for 3. Non-C. 13. μιμηταὶ. 15. μετὰ π. DEPT. ἢ, Ela. ἐπὶ 1 Tim, 5.5: Cuap. 1. 1. παρεπιδ. διασπ.] ““ dispersion-sojourners.” 11. τὰ εἰς Xp. wa.] Some render ‘the sufferings destined for Christ”: but can this meaning be got out of the Greek? May we not possibly regard the words as the literal rendering of ? used, as often, for genitive? 1 Κ, 15. 31,18. 22. 30. 17. εἰ] with indicative, stating an admitted fact: “seeing that...” 18. μάταιος] = “‘heathenish,” as opposed to σοφὸς, which is the Hebrew definition of the true believer. James 3. 17. 22. ὑπακοὴ τῆς ἀλ.} R. 1. 5, 2 Cor. 10. 5. Very remarkable construction, Cuap. II. 1. λογικὸν] R. 12.1. “Spiritual”: nutriment for the λόγος, the reason or immaterial part of man. 8. λίθος προσκ.] -- WIQ WY, Is. 8. 14. 9. λαὸς cis περιπ.] Tit. 2. 14, note. Compare 1 Chr. 29, 3. Guar, ΠῚ Ὁ es τοῦτο. τον κληρονομ.}] ‘Ye have been called to inherit blessing,” i.e. “have been admitted into all the hopes and privileges of the Christian covenant,” εἰς τοῦτο, “for this very purpose,” “‘with this object in view,” “on this condition,” namely, the fulfilment of the rule laid down in ὃ, 9, St Peter enforces this argument, based 1S. PETER. 111 CuHapTer IV. Non-C. 2. ἐπιθυμίαις....... βιῶσαι. 3. πεπορευμ. 4. ξενίζ. 8. Participle nom, absolute. 12. ξένου. 14. κατὰ. CHAPTER V. HeEsR. 3. κλήρων. 10. ὁ Θ. 7. x. and ἐν X. 12. εἰς ἣν. on their intuitive perception of their new religious obligation, by an apt quotation from the writings of a Saint of old. This connexion of the words (ἐκλήθ. ἵνα) agrees with the context and the logical sequence of the passage, which the other combination (εἰς τοῦτο ἵνα) does not. 21. συν. ay. ἐπερώτημα eis @.] “the earnest prayer for,’—‘‘the searching after,”—a good conscience towards God. Cuap. V. 3. τῶν κλήρων] “the divisions” of God’s people: ‘the portions allotted” to the charge of each Presbyter, 1. 6. “ Ruler,” in the Church, ‘ Neither as lording it over their allotted fields of labour and administration,” 25. PETER. CHAPTER I. Hesr. 5. ἐν. 20. waca...ov. 21. ©. avd. CHAPTER II. Hesr. 1. aip. ἀπ. 2. ἡ ὁ. τῆς a. 10. ὀπίσω... «πορευ. 14. κατ. τέκνα. Non-C. 7. καταπ. ὗ. 10. κυριότητος. Jude 8. 14. ἀκαταπ. ἄμ. 20. εἰ, with subj. CuapTer III. HEpR. 3. ἐπ᾽ écy....€um. 18. εἰς ἡμ. ai. Non-C. 9. Gen. after βραδ. 11. Plural, dvacr. Cuap. I. 3. διὰ δόξης καὶ a.] I cannot translate this, nor can I understand the force of the preposition, by the light of Classical usage or Hebraistic misuse. 17. εἰς ὃν εὐδόκησα] V. A. generally has ἐπὶ or ἐν with this verb: not always. Gen. 33. 10, Ps. 51. 16, 19, 85. 1, there is no preposition either in Hebr. or Gr. Cuap, IIT. 12. dv ἣν] “for the manifestation and accomplishment of which day.” 1 5. 2 OH N. CHAPTER 1. Hepr. 2. ἦν πρὸς τὸν π. J. 1. 1, note. CHAPTER II. Hesr. 1. παράκ...«πρὸς. 21. wday...ovx: infra 3. 15. Rev. 21.27. 28, ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ = JEM, coram illo, Acts 25. 9, note. Non-C. 6. λέγων μένειν. 18. ἐσχ. ὥ. CHAPTER III. Hepr. 15, 17. «rd. τὰ σπλάγχνα. Non-C. 5. ἄρῃ =take away. 16. ψυχὴν ἔθηκε = laid down. Note, J. 10. 17. CHAPTER V. Non-C. 15. ἐὰν οἵδ, 16. épwr. Me. 4. 10. Cuar. III. 18. μὴ ay. λόγῳ ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ἔργῳ] Strange diversity of construction after same verb, to express the same meaning, without and with a preposition: the first strictly grammatical, the second, Hebraic. M. 3. 11, note. Cuap. IV. 2. “That Jesus has come, the Incarnate Messiah”: or “that Messiah has come in human nature, the man Jesus.” 16. ev ἡμῖν]! 2 Cor. 8.7. A most curious use of ἐν: I can give no explanation of it, or of the μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν in 17: and I cannot agree with Grimm’s explanation, that 7 ἀγάπη μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν means “amor mutuus inter nos et Deum”: as being against the sense of the passage, and the requirements of fitting reverence: as if ἡμεῖς could comprehend us AND God, GU. 8 2 ὃ. JOHN. Hesr. 1. ἐν da. 12. γ. πρὸς ὕ. 4, ἐν ἀληθείᾳ] = ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ; just as NPS = PTY, Ps. 111. 7, 119. 151, 86. 11, as so frequently found in V. A. and N. T. Notes, M. 11. 19, L. 16. 9, 2 Th. 2.10. Compare 2 P. 1. 2, 3 John 3, 4, 12. 9. 5. JOHN, 2. εὔχομαι] followed by inf. pres. ungrammatical. 5. πιστὸν] = “an act of Christian principle, of faith.” 12. ὑπ᾽ αὖ. τῆς ἀλ.} Can this mean ‘by his holy life itself?” 2J.4. It seems impossible to get any meaning out of our English Version ‘by the truth itself.” 5S. JUDE. HEBR. 6. εἰς x. μ. ἧ., no article. 7. ὀπίσω σ. ἑἕ. 14. ἐν da. μ. 10, θαυμ. πρ. 20. ἐν Πν. Α. 23. doar. ἀπὸ. Non-C. 4. τινες ἄνθ. 4. προγεγρ. 5. τὸ δεύτερον. 8. κυριό- tyta, 8. δύξας. 11, ἐξεχύθ. 19. μὴ. 22. ods pev...dé. 3. av. ἔσχον] Can this be an instance of the Epistolary Im- perfect, as in Latin? Compare. Gal. 4. 20. Here we clearly, in English, want a present tense. 11, τῇ ὁδῷ] Construction without a preposition unusual. 14, τούτοις] The ‘de his” of Vulgate, and “of these” of English Version, have no grammatical justification, The word cannot be so rendered: the only possible meaning is “ prophesied ¢o them,” ‘ fore- warned them,” ‘‘spoke in the name of God to them.” For ἐν ay. pvp. see note, M. 3.11. Also L. 14. 31, 22. 49, 1 Cor. 4. 21, Apoc. 13, 10, 19. 15. 23. One of the meanings of the preposition ἢ is “dy,” Gen. 9. 11, Job 4. 9, 7. 14, Is. 28. 7: but its literal rendering in V. A. for its almost universal sense “from,” is azo: they scarcely ever put’any other word for it. Hence ἀπὸ being used for ὑπὸ in many instances, as in those passages cited above, came to be regarded as equivalent to it by readers of V. A.; and the usage has crept into N. Τὶ, See Apoc. 2. 11 for similar use of ἐκ. I cite a few instances of ἀπὸ put for |) in V. A., as if at random, without any connexion with the sense. Numb, 32. 22, Deut. 14, 24, Ps. 68. 30, Jer. 26. 9, 32. 43, 84. 22, Is, 52. 14. REVELATION. The deviations from grammatical correctness in the Apocalypse are so violent and so astonishing, as to defy explanation. Some few of them may be traceable to Hebraic influences: as I have endeavoured to point out. The others I have simply left untouched. The style of S. John in the Gospel and Epistles is so remarkably pure,—so com- paratively free from Hebraisms or non-Classical words and forms,— so much more like the language of the best Greek Authors; that these peculiarities are all the more perplexing. They have given rise to innumerable speculations ancient and modern: but no satisfactory explanation of them has hitherto been found. Cuap. I. 4. ἀπὸ ὁ ὧν...7] Anomalous construction, clearly trace- able to the absence of inflexion in Hebrew nouns, which made such a violation of grammar less startling to a Jew writing in Greek. ὁ épx.| We say in English, “past, present, and to come”: and the same idea for ‘that which is to be, which will exist hereafter,” (i.e. the future) is common in Hebrew, expressed by 82 and TON: V. A. ἔρχομαι. Is, 27. 6, O'S3I, of épy. “future generations.” Jerem. 47. 4, Is. 41. 23, 44.7, 45.11. 41. 22 nina, 45. 11 NMS, τὰ ἐπερχ., “the things that are to come,” in Vulgate “ ventura.” And hence the form is used, with ὁ ἦν, and ὁ ὧν here, as one of the categories of sempiternal exist- ence. It is curious that whereas Hebrew, Latin and English alike use words that imply “coming”: the Greek equivalent implies “ delay, keeping back,” viz. μέλλειν. And it is remarkable that this verb is used once only in V. A. to express futurity, Is. 48. 6, ἃ μέλλει γενέσθαι for ΤῊΝ), recondita, and not more than six or seven times in Apocrypha. Cuap. 11. 16. σπολεμ. per αὐ.] Literal for OY Dns, “pugnare contra.” 2K. 14. 5,in V. A. ἐπ. μετὰ. Infra 11. 7 ποιήσει per αὐτῶν πόλ. So Vulg. “ pugnabo cum illis in gladio oris mei.” The English idiom coincides REVELATION. 117 with the Hebrew: but pera in this sense is against all good Greek usage. See Grimm. For ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ see note, L. 22. 49, which Vulgate renders, “ Domine, sz percutimus iz gladio”: utterly sacrificing the sense in slavish adherence to a foreign idiom,—which the Translator, apparently, did not understand,—éwice in one short sentence: as in the verse now before us. Cuap. III. 4. ὀνόματα] “persons,” as Acts 1.15. Infra 11. 13. Cuap. IV. 6. κύκλῳ τοῦ θρ.1 7. 11. A form borrowed from V. A. Wamb, 11. 24, pk ninap, κύκλῳ. τῆς σκηνῆς. Ps. 79.3, κύκλῳ ἸἸερουσαλήμ. Ez. 6. 2, Numb. 1. 53 for ᾿ 2320. Gen. 35. 5 τὰς κύκλῳ αὐτῶν κώμας. Grimm cites Xen. Cyr. 4. 5. 5 as an instance of the phrase in a Classical Author. 10. Future for present: Hebraic irregularity and want of pre- cision as to difference between tenses: with which every student of Hebrew is familiar. Cuap. VI. 10. ἐκδ. τὸ αἷμα ἡμῶν ἀπὸ] = ὩΣ DF WIT, “ sanguinem repetiit ab aliquo,” ‘‘caedem ultus est.” Here we have a blending of the two ideas, in the one verb. Cuap. XIII. 8, ἐθαύμ. ὁπ.] = “ went in wonder after.” 12. 4 πλ. τοῦ θ. αὐτοῦ “ His deadly wound,” Cuap. XIV. 14. The harvest in N. T. parables always represents “the ingathering of the good,” M. 13. 30: the vintage, “the judgment of the wicked.” See Joel 3. 13. CHar. XVI. 3. ψυχὴ ζωῆς] = “living soul.” Comp. ξύλον ©, supra 2. 7. Cuap. XIX. 8. τὰ δικαιώματα] R. 5. 18, Heb. 9. 1, INDEX OF GREEK WORDS. ἀγαπητοὶ Θεοῦ, M. 25. 34, R. 1. 7. ἄγγελος, “minister,” “agent,” 2 C. 12.7. ἄδικος = ψευδὴς, 1 Cor. 13. 6, L. 16. 9. αἰσχύνη, “disappointment,” R. 5. 4. αἰτέω--ἐρωτάω, Μ. 15. 23. ἀκοὴ; J. 12. 38. ἀλλάττειν ἐν, R. 1. 23. ἀνὰ μέσον, 1 Cor. 6. 5. ὁ ἄνθρωπος, “mankind,” J. 2. 25. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, “because,” L. 1. 20, R. 5. 12. ἀπείθεια, Eph. 5. 6. ἀπὸ for ὑπὸ, 1 Cor. 1. 30, Jude 23. ἀπὸ for “e numero,” L. 24. 42. ἀπὸ, Acts 25. 9, Heb. 5. 7. ἀφίημι, “leave,” M. 18. 12, L. 18. 16. BadrAcw=“ put,” M. 7. 28, 9. 38. ev βάρει, 1 Th. 2. 6. βαστάζειν τὸν σταυρὸν, L. 14. 27. βδέλυγμα... ἐρημώσεως, M. 24. 15. βλέπειν ἀπὸ, Mk. 8. 15. yap=*>=aAAa, R. 5. 7. γέεννα, M. 5. 22, 29. γενεὰ, “history,” A. 8, 33. γράμμα, 2 Ὁ. 3. 6. δαιμόνια, “evil spirits,” M. 9. 33. δέομαί σου, A. 8. 34. δεῦρο, A. 7. 34. , διὰ τοῦτο, “for all this,” J. 19. 11. διὰ, “ out of the midst of,” R. 2. 27. δίκαιος Ξεἀληθὴς, M. 11. 19, L. 16. 9. δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ, R. 1. 17. δικαίωμα, H. 9. 1, δόξα, “approval,” J. 5. 44. » “likeness,” 1 C. 11. 7. δυνάμεις, M. 7. 22, L. 21. 26. “EBpaios, ‘EAAnuiorns, A. 6. 1. εἰ interrogative, M. 12. 10. εἰ negandi, Mk. 8. 12. εἰ μὴ -εἀλλὰ, R. 14. 14. εἶναι εἰς -εγίγνεσθαι, M. 2. 6. σὺ εἶπας, Μ. 26. 25. εἰρήνη ὑμῖν, J. 20. 19. eis, “apud,” M. 13. 56, 27. 9. εἰς εἰρήνην, κενὸν... Mk. 5. 34. eis, “with respect to,” A. 2. 25. eis, “until,” Mk. 3. 29, 1 Th. 4 15. ἐκ tiotews,...mepitouns, M. 5. 37, ex for ὑπὸ, R. 1. 4, 1 Cor. 1. 30. Ἕλλην, “heathen,” Mk. 7. 26. ἐλπίζειν ἐπὶ, “trust,” 1 T. 5. 5. ἔμπροσθεν for ἐνώπιον, M. 5. 16. ἐν, literal for 3, M. 3. 11, 1 C. 7. 15, As 115: ἐν adjurandi, M. 5. 34, R. 9. 1. ev, “coram,” ἐν Κυρίῳ, Col. 3. 18. ἐν for eis, 1 C. 7. 15. ἐν δακτύλῳ Θ. L. 11. 20, A. 1. 15, 27, 28, Vulgate literalisms. ἔνοχος, M. 5. 22, 1 C. 11. 27. ἔξελθε τὸ πν., Nom. for Voc. Mk. 5. 8. ἐξομολογεῖσθαι = “ praise,” M. 11. 25. émi=“juxta,” Mk. 8. 4, 1 Cor. 6. 1. éni, 1 C, 8. 11, R. 5, 12, ἐπ᾽ ἄρτῳ ζῆν, M. 4. 4, 18. 5. ἐρχόμενος, Ap. 1. 4. ἔσεσθε, Fut. for Imp. M. 5. 48. INDEX OF GREEK WORDS. ἑτοιμασία: “basis,” E. 6. 15. εὐαγγέλιον ©. omission of def. article, et EM. 11... Lyd 18. 10. εὐδοκέω, M. 3. 17. εὐδοκία, M. 11. 26, 18. 14. εὐλογέω, M. 26. 26. εὐλογία, “donum,” 2 C. 9. 5. εὐσέβεια, “our holy religion,” 1 T. 3.16. (6 ἐγὼ; R. 14. 11, 2 C. 1. 18. ἡλικίᾳ μικρὸς, dat. of “part,” L. 19. 3. ἡμέραι, M. 2. 1, Hebr. 8. 8. Θεῷ ἀστεῖος, A. 7. 20. θνήσκειν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, dative of “person,” R. 6. 2, 20, 1 C. 6. 13, 2 Ὁ 12. 7. Oynrov...pOaprov, 1 C. 15, 54. ἴδια, J. 16. 32,°A. 4. 23. ἵλεώς σοι, “God forbid,” M. 16. 22. ἵνα μὴ, G. 5. 17. ἰσχυρὸς, M. 3. 11. καὶ for ἵνα, 1 Th. 8. ὅ. yy our, Lux ΤῸ 5. 3». ἄρα, Jac, 2. 4. kat...kat, A. 1. 10. κακολογεῖν = ἀτιμάζειν, M. 15. 4. κατὰ, “with respect to,” R. 11. 2. κεφαλὴ γωνίας, M. 21. 42. κληρονομεῖν, Tit. 3. 7. κοινὸς, “unclean,” M. 15. 11. κύκλῳ τοῦ...., Ap. 4. 6. λαμβάνειν πρόσωπον, L. 20, 21. λόγος πορνείας, M. 5. 32. μαλακία, M. 4. 23. papay ada, 1 C. 16. 22. μαρτύριον, 1 C. 2. 1. μάταιος -εκενὸς, R. 8. 20. Μελχισεδὲκ, Heb. 7. 1. μετὰ, Hebraic, M. 34. 31, L. 24. 52. μήποτε, “in case that,” M. 13. 14. 119 δδὸς K., A. 9. 2. οἰκεῖοι τῆς πίστεως, G. 6. 10. οἰκουμένη μέλλουσα, H. 2. 5. ὁμολογεῖν ἐν, ΜΙ. 10. 32. ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ, R. 15. 9. ὀρθοτομεῖν, 2 T. 2. 15. os for ris, M. 26. 50. ὅτι “asseverandi,” M. 7. 23, L. 4. 12. ov εἵνεκεν -- ἀνθ᾽ dy, L. 4. 18. ov φονεύσεις, M. 19. 18. Fut. for Imp. ὀφείλημα -- ἁμαρτία, M. 6. 11. παθήματα eis Xp., 1 P. 1. 11. mapa, With acc. “near,” Mk. 4. 1. mapakAnors, “teaching,” A. 4. 36, R. 15. 4. Παράκλητος, J. 14. 16. παρρησίᾳ, Mk. 8. 32, J. 16. 25. πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ, Μ. 27. 48. περιούσιος, Tit. 2. 14. περιπατεῖν, Mk. 7. 5, G. 5. 25. περιποίησις, E, 1. 14, Heb. 10. 39. περιτομὴ Xp., “Baptism,” Col. 2. 11. περιτομῆς, οἱ ex, A. 6. 1. πικρία, “poison,” A. 8, 21. πίστις 1. Xp., R. 1. 22. πνευματικὸς, “inspired,” 1 C. 14. 37, Mk. 12. 36. » “supernatural,” 1 C. 10. 3, 14. 1. ποιεῖν τὸ πάσχα, M. 26. 18. πολεμεῖν μετὰ, Ap. 2. 16. πολιτεύεσθαι, A. 23. 1. πονηρὸς ὀφθαλμὸς, Μ. 20.°15. ποταμοὶ ὕδατος ζῶντος, J. 7. 38. ποτήριον, παροψὶς, M. 23. 26. πρέπει, “seems right,” Heb. 2. 10. προθέσεως ἄρτοι, Mk. 2. 26. mpos, “with respect to,” Acts 28, 25. : apud,” M. 15: 56, J. 1. 1s » ἑαυτοὺς, J. 20. 10. yy) οὐδὲ ev ῥῆμα, M. 27. 14. y) kapov ὥραν.» 1 Th. 2. 17. προστεθήσεται, M. 6. 33. ev προσώπῳ, 2 C. 2. 10. πρὸ προσώπου, Mk. 1. 2. προφάσει προσεύχονται, dative of “man- ner, cause, time,” L. 18, 33, 20. 47, A. 9. 31, αὶ 6. 12 120 πτωχὸς for ταπεινὸς, M. 5. 3. πῶρος, “callositas,” 2 C. 3. 14. 6 ῥηθεὶς, M. 3. 3. pyya= “thing,” M. 4. 4, L. 2. 15. pi¢ta= “surculus,” not “radix,” R. 15.12. σημεῖον περιτομῆς, R. 4. 1. σκάνδαλον, M. 18. 7. σκῆνος, “corpus,” 2 C. 5. 1. σκιὰ θανάτου, M. 4. 15. σοφία, “religion,” Jac. 3. 15,1 P.1. 18. σπλάγχνα, 2 Cor. 6. 13, Ph. 1. 8. στρατεύειν στρατείαν, 1 Tim. 1. 18. στρατία οὐρανοῦ, A. 7. 42. συγχέω, A. 2. 6. συντέλεια τῶν ai., M. 13. 39. σώζειν, “sanare,” M. 9. 21, A. 14. 9. τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί; J. 2. 4. τοῦ, With infinitive, M. 2. 6, R. 15. 22. INDEX OF GREEK WORDS. vids γεέννης, et similia, M. 8, 12, J. 17. 19. ὑπακοὴ πίστεως, R. 1. 5. ὑπὲρ, “with respect to,” 2 Th. 2. 1. ὑπὲρ τῆς εὐδοκίας, Ph. 2. 13. ὑπόστασις, 2 C. 9. 4. ὑποτύπωσις, 1 Tim. 1. 16. φοβεῖσθαι ἀπὸ, M. 10. 28. φῶς for πῦρ, Mk. 14. 54. φῶτα-- ἄστρα, Jac. 1. 17. χάρις, “thankfulness,” Col. 3. 16. χώρα “rus,” J. 11. 55. " SS agen, ea ΟἿΣ ψυχὴ, Ph. 2. 30, πᾶσα, R. 2. 9. ὠδῖνες θανάτου, A. 2. 24. ὡσαννὰ ev ὑψίστοις, Μ. 21. 9. CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A... AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. March, 1879. A CLASSIFIED LIST OF EDUCATIONAL WORKS PUBLISHED BY GEORGE BELL & SONS. Full Catalogues will be sent post free on application. BIBLIOTHECA CLASSICA. A Series of Greek and Latin Authors, with English Notes, edited by eminent Scholars. 8vo. ischylus. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 18s. Cicero’s Orations. ByG, Long, M.A. 4 vols. 16s., 14s., 16s,, 18s. Demosthenes. By R. Whiston, M.A. 2 vols. 16s. each. Euripides. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 3 vols. 16s. each. Homer. By F. A. Paley, M.A. Vol. I. 12s.; Vol. 11. 14s. Herodotus. By Rev. J. W. Blakesley, B.D, 2 vols. 825. Hesiod. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 10s. 6d. Horace. By Rey. A. J. Macleane, M.A. 18s. Juvenal and Persius. By Rev. A. J. Macleane, M.A. 12s. Plato. By W.H. Thompson, D.D. 2 vols. 7s. 6d. each. Sophocles. By Rey. F. H. Blaydes, M.A. Vol. I. 18s. Philoctetes. By F. A. Paley, M.A. [In the Press. Tacitus: The Annals. By the Rev. P. Frost. 15s, Terence. By E. St. J. Parry, M.A, 18s, Virgil. By J. Conington, M.A, 3vols, 12s., 14s., 14s. An Atlas of Classical Geography; Twenty-four Maps. By W. Hughes and George Long, M.A. New edition, with coloured outlines. Imperial 8yo. 12s. θα, Uniform with above. A Complete Latin Grammar. By J. W. Donaldson, D.D. 3rd Edition. 14s. A Complete Greek Grammar. By J. W. Donaldson, D.D. 3rd Edition. 165, GRAMMAR-SCHOOL CLASSICS. A Series of Greek and Latin Authors, with English Notes. Fcap. 8vo. Cesar: De Bello Gallico. By George Long, M.A. 5s. 6d. Books I.-III. For Junior Classes. By G. Long, M.A. 2s. θά. Catullus, Tibullus, and Propertius. Selected Poems. With Life: By Rey. A. H. Wratislaw. 2s. 6d 2 George Bell and Sons’ Cicero: De Senectute, De Amicitia, and Select Epistles. By George Long, M.A. 4s. θα. Cornelius Nepos. By Rev. J. F. Macmichael. 2s. 6d. Homer: Iliad. Books I.XII. By F.A.Paley, M.A. 6s. 6d. Horace. With Life. By A. J. Macleane, M.A. 6s.6d. [In 2parts. 3s. 6d. each.] Juvenal: Sixteen Satires. By H. Prior, M.A. 4s. 6d. Martial: Select Epigrams. With Life. By Εἰ. A. Paley, M.A. 6s. 6d. Ovid: the Fasti. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 5s. Sallust: Catilina and Jugurtha. With Life. By G. Long, M.A. 5s. Tacitus: Germania and Agricola. By Rev. P. Frost. 3s. 6d. Virgil: Bucolics, Georgics, and Aineid, Books 1.- ΤΥ, Abridged from Professor Conington’s Edition. 5s. 6d. (The Bucolics and Georgics in one volume. 3s.) Mneid, Books V._XII. Abridged from Professor Conington’s Edition. ὅς. 6d, Xenophon: The Anabasis. With Life. By Rey. J. F.Macmichael. 5s. The Cyropedia. By G. M. Gorham, M.A. 6s. Memorabilia. By Percival Frost, M.A. 4s. 6d. A Grammar-School Atlas of Classical Geography, containing Ten selected Maps. Imperial 8yo. 5s, Uniform with the Series. The New Testament, in Greek. With English Notes, &. By Rey. J. F. Macmichael. 7s. 6d. CAMBRIDGE GREEK AND LATIN TEXTS. Aischylus. By F.A. Paley, M.A. 3s. Czesar: De Bello Gallico. By G. Long, M.A. 2s. Cicero: De Senectute et de Amicitia, et Epistole Selecte. By G. Long, M.A. 1s. θα. Ciceronis Orationes. Vol. I. (in Verrem.) ByG. Long, M.A. 3s. 6d. Euripides. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 3 vols. 3s. 6d. each. Herodotus. By J.G. Blakesley, B.D. 2 vols. 7s. Homeri 1185. IXII. By F.A. Paley, M.A. 2s. θᾶ. Horatius. By A. J. Macleane, M.A. 2s. θά. Juvenal et Persius. By A. J. Macleane, M.A. 1s. 6d. Lucretius. By H. A. J. Munro, M.A. 2s. 6d. Sallusti Crispi Catilina et Jugurtha. By G. Long, M.A. 1s. 6d. Terenti Comedies. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 3s. Thucydides. By J.G. Donaldson, D.D. 2 vols. 7s. Virgilius. By J. Conington, M.A. 3s. 6d. Xenophontis Expeditio Cyri. By J. F. Macmichael, B.A. 2s. θά. Novum Testamentum Grecum. By F. H. Scrivener, M.A. 45, 6d An edition with wide margin for notes, half bound, 12s, “Ὁ Educational Works. 3 CAMBRIDGE TEXTS WITH NOTES. A Selection of the most usually read of the Greek and Latin Authors, Annotated for Schools. Feap. 8vo. 1s. 6d. each. Euripides. Alcestis. By Ε΄, A. Paley, M.A. Medea. By F. A. Paley, M.A. Hippolytus. By F. A. Paley, M.A. Hecuba. By F. A. Paley, M.A. Bacche. By F. A. Paley, M.A. Ion. By F. A. Paley, M.A. [Price 2s.] Aischylus. Prometheus Vinctus. By F. A. Paley, M.A. Septem contra Thebas. By Εἰ, A. Paley, M.A. Ovid. Selections. By A. J. Macleane, M.A. PUBLIC SCHOOL SERIES. A Series of Classical Texts, annotated by well-known Scholars. Crown 8vo. Aristophanes. The Peace. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 4s. θά. The Acharnians. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 4s. 6d. The Frogs. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 4s. 6d. Cicero. The Letters to Atticus. Bk. I. By A. Pretor. M.A. 4s. θά. Demosthenes de Falsa Legatione. By R. Shilleto, M.A. 6s. The Law of Leptines. By B. W. Beatson, M.A. Plato. The Apology of Socrates and Crito. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 4th Edition. 4s, 6d. The Phedo. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 5s. 6d. The Protagoras. By W. Wayte, M.A. 4s. 6d. Plautus. The Aulularia. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 2nd edition. 45, θα. Trinummus. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 2nd edition. 45. 6d. The Menaechmei. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 4s. 6d. Sophoclis Trachiniz. By A. Pretor, M.A. 4s. 6d. Terence. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 10s. 6d. Theocritus. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 4s. 6d. Others in preparation. CRITICAL AND ANNOTATED EDITIONS. #Stna. By H. A. J. Munro, M.A. 3s. 6d. Aristophanis Comedi#. By H. A. Holden, LL.D. 8vo. 2 vols. 23s. 6d. Plays sold separately. Pax. By F. A. Paley, M.A. Feap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. Catullus. By H. A. J. Munro, M.A. 7s. 6d. Horace. Quinti Horatii Flacci Opera. By H. A. J. Munro, M.A. Large 8vo. 1]. 18. Livy. The first five Books. By J. Prendeyville. 12mo. roan, 5s. Or Books I.-III. 3s. θα. IV. and V, 3s. 6d. + George Bell and Sons’ Lucretius. Titi Lucretii Cari de Rerum Natura Libri Sex. With a Translation and Notes. By H. A. J. Munro, M.A. 2yols. 8vo. Vol, I. Text, 16s. Vol. II. Translation, 6s. (Sold separately.) Ovid. P. Ovidii Nasonis Heroides XIV. By A. Palmer, M.A. 8vo. 6s. Propertius. Sex Aurelii Propertii Carmina. By F. A. Paley, M.A. 8vo. Cloth, 9s. Sophocles. The Ajax. By C. E. Palmer, M.A. 45. θά. Thucydides. The History of the Peloponnesian War. By Richard Shilleto, M.A. BookI. ὅνο. 6s. 6d. (Book 11. in the press.) Greek Testament. By Henry Alford, D.D. 4 vols. 8vo. (Sold separately.) Vol. I. 11.8s. Vol. 11. 11]. 45. Vol. III. 18s. Vol. IV. Part 1. 18s.; Part II. l4s.; or in one Vol. 32s, LATIN AND GREEK CLASS-BOOKS. Auxilia Latina. A Series of Progressive Latin Exercises. By Rey. J. B. Baddeley, M.A. Feap. 8vo. 2s. Aw Inrropuctory Part to the aboye on Accidence. — [In the Press.. Latin Prose Lessons. By A.J. Church, M.A, 2nd Edit. Feap. 8vo. 2s, 6d. Latin Exercises and Grammar Papers. By T. Collins, M.A. 2nd Edition. Feap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. Analytical Latin Exercises. By C. P. Mason, B.A. 2nd Edit. 3s. 6d. Scala Greeca: a Series of Elementary Greek Exercises. By Rev. J. W. Davis, M.A., and‘R. W. Baddeley, M.A. 3rd Edition. Feap. 8yo. 2s, 6d. Greek Verse Composition. By G. Preston, M.A. Crown 8vo. 4s, 6d. By tHe Rey. P. Frost, M.A., St. Jonn’s ConneGE, CAMBRIDGE. Eclogee Latine; or, First Latin Reading-Book, with English Notes. and a Dictionary. New Edition. Feap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. Materials for Latin Prose Composition. New Edition. Feap. 8yo. 2s. 6d. Key, 4s. A Latin Verse-Book. An Introductory Work on Hexameters and Pentameters. New Edition. Feap.8vo. 3s. Key, 5s. Analecta Greeca Minora, with Introductory Sentences, English Notes,and a Dictionary. New Edition. Feap. 8vo. 3s. 6d, Materials for Greek Prose Composition. New Edit. Feap. 8yvo. 3s. 6d. Key, 5s. Florilegium Poeticum. Elegiac Extracts from Ovid and Tibullus,. New Edition. With Notes. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. By tue Rey. F. E. Gretton, A First Cheque-book for Latin Verse-makers. 15. θά. A Latin Version for Masters. 2s. 6d. Reddenda; or Passages with Parallel Hints for Translation into Latin Prose and Verse. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d. Reddenda Reddita (see next page). By H. A. Honprn, LL.D. Foliorum Silvula. Part I. Passages for Translation into Latin Elegiac and Heroic Verse. 8th Edition. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d. Part II. Select Passages for Translation into Latin Lyri¢c and Comic Iambic Verse. 3rd Edition. Post 8vo. 5s. Part III. Select Passages for Translation into Greek Verse. 8rd Edition. Post ϑνο. 88. Educational Works. δ Folia Silvule, sive Ecloge Poetarum Anglicorum in Latinum et Grecum-converse. Svo. Vol. I. 10s. 6d. Vol. II. 12s. Foliorum Centurize. Select Passages for Translation into Latin and Greek Prose. 6th Edition. Post 8vo. 8s. TRANSLATIONS, SELECTIONS, &c. * .* Many of the following books are well adapted for School Prizes. @schylus. Translated into English Prose by F. A. Paley, M.A. 2nd Edition. 8vo. 7s. 6d. Translated into English Verse by Anna Swanwick. Crown 8vo. 2vols. 12s. Folio Edition, with 33 Illustrations after Flaxman. 21. 2s. Anthologia Greca. A Selection of Choice Greek Poetry, with Notes. By F. St. John Thackeray. 4th and Cheaper Edition. 16mo. 4s. 6d. Anthologia Latina.